The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About2018-149BCONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS BID NO. 2018059 PROJECT NO. IRC -1744 PREPARED FOR THE BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA PETER D. O'BRYAN, CHAIRMAN BOB SOLARI, VICE CHAIRMAN COMMISSIONER JOSEPH E. FLESCHER COMMISSIONER SUSAN ADAMS COMMISSIONER TIM ZORC JASON E. BROWN, COUNTY ADMINISTRATOR JEFFREY R. SMITH, CLERK OF COURT AND COMPTROLLER DYLAN REINGOLD., COUNTY ATTORNEY RICHARD B. SZPYRKA, P.E., PUBLIC WORKS DIRECTOR JAMES W. ENNIS, P.E., PMP, COUNTY ENGINEER 00001 - Project Title Page - REV 04-07 00001 -1 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00001 - Project Title Page - REV 04-07.doc TABLE OF CONTENTS Section No. Title DIVISION 0 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00001 Cover Sheet 00010 Table of Contents BIDDING DOCUMENTS 00100 Advertisement for Bids 00200 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Package Contents 00310 Bid Form & Itemized Bid Schedule 00430 Bid Bond 00452 Sworn Statement under Section 105.08, Indian River County Code, on Disclosure of Relationships 00454 Sworn Statement under the Florida Trench Safety Act 00456 Qualifications Questionnaire 00458 List of Subcontractors CONTRACTFORMS 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00550 Notice to Proceed 00610 Public Construction Bond 00620 Sample Certificate of Liability Insurance 00622 Contractor's Application for Payment 00630 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00632 Contractor's Final Certification of the Work 00634 Professional Surveyor and Mapper's Certification as to the Elevations and Locations of the Work CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 EJCDC Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract 00800 Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions 00942 Change Order Form 00946 Field Order Form 00948 Work Change Directive DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROJECT MANUAL (BY MBV ENGINEERS, INC.) + + END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS + + 00010-1 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00010 - Table of Contents - REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00100 - Advertisement for Bids BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS 1801 27th Street Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Telephone: (772) 567-8000 FAX: (772) 770-5140 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS INDIAN RIVER COUNTY Sealed bids will be received by Indian River County until 2:00 P.M. on Wednesday, Julv 11, 2018. Each bid shall be submitted in a sealed envelope and shall bear the name and address of the bidder on the outside and the words "NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS and Bid No. 2018059". Bids should be addressed to Purchasing Division, 1800 27th Street, Vero Beach, Florida 32960. All bids will be opened publicly and read aloud at 2:00 P.M. All bids received after 2:00 P.M., on the day specified above, will not be accepted or considered. INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PROJECT NO. IRC -1744 INDIAN RIVER COUNTY BID NO. 2018059 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: This project consists of the construction of ±8,400 S.F. of new office space and related facilities for the relocation of Indian River County professional offices. The project includes new restrooms, storefront window replacement, electrical and plumbing work, raised floors and the replacement of rooftop air conditioning units. In addition, site related improvements will include new parking lot striping, curb repair, new external lighting and exterior building cleaning and repainting. All material and equipment furnished and all work performed shall be in strict accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents pertaining thereto. Copies of the documents are available at: www.demandstar.com or by contacting the Purchasing Division at (772) 226-1416 or purchasinqCa)-ircgov.com. All other communications concerning this bid shall be directed to IRC Purchasing Division at purchasing(a-)-ircgov.com. All bidders shall submit one (1) original and one (1) copy of the Bid Proposal forms provided within the specifications. Please note that the questionnaire must be filled out completely including the financial statement. BID SECURITY must accompany each Bid and must be in the form of an AIA Document A310 Bid Bond, properly executed by the Bidder and by a qualified surety, or a certified check or a cashier's check, drawn on any bank authorized to do business in the State of Florida. Bid Security must be in the sum of not less than Five Percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid, made payable to Indian River County Board of County 00100 - Advertisement for Bids REV 04-07 00100-1 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00100 -Advertisement for Bids REV 04-07.doc Commissioners. In the event the Contract is awarded to the Bidder, Bidder will enter in a Contract with the County and furnish the required 100% Public Construction Bond within the timeframe set by the County. If Bidder fails to do so, the Bid Security shall be retained by the County as liquidated damages and not as penalty. The County reserves the right to delay awarding of the Contract for a period of ninety (90) days after the bid opening, to waive informalities in any bid, or reject any or all bids in whole or in part with or without cause/or to accept the bid that, in its judgement, will serve the best interest of Indian River County, Florida. The County will not reimburse any Bidder for bid preparation costs. A MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference will be held on Wednesday, June 20, 2018 at 10:00 A.M., in the Public Works conference room Al -303 of the Indian River County Administration Building located at 1801 27th Street, Vero Beach, Florida, 32960. ATTENDANCE AT THIS CONFERENCE /S REQUIRED. No bidder arriving after the_ meeting has begun will be allowed to sign in. The facility can be visited immediately following the meeting. INDIAN RIVER COUNTY By: Jennifer Hyde Purchasing Manager For Publication in the Indian River Press Journal Date: June 10, 2018 For: Indian River Press Journal Please furnish tear sheet and Affidavit of Publication to: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING DIVISION 1800 27th Street Building "B" Vero Beach, FL 32960 * * END OF SECTION * * 00100 - Advertisement for Bids REV 04-07 00100-2 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00100 -Advertisement for Bids REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00200 - Instructions to Bidders TABLE OF CONTENTS Article No. - Title Paae ARTICLE 1 - DEFINED TERMS..............................................................................................1 ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS................................................................1 ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS......................................................................1 ANU 51 I t..................................................I...... ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE ...................... ARTICLE 6 - SITE AND OTHER AREAS .................... ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA... ARTICLE 8 - BID SECURITY ...................................... ARTICLE 9. - CONTRACT TIMES ................................ ARTICLE 10 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ..................... ARTICLE 11 - SUBSTITUTE AND "OR -EQUAL" ITEM ARTICLE 12 - SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, Al ARTICLE 13 - PREPARATION OF BID ....................... ARTICLE 14 - BASIS OF BID; EVALUATION OF BID; ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITTAL OF BID ............................. ARTICLE 16 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL t ARTICLE 17 - OPENING OF BIDS .............................. ARTICLE 18 - BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCE ARTICLE 19 - AWARD OF CONTRACT ...................... ARTICLE 20 - CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURAI ARTICLE 21 - SIGNING OF AGREEMENT ................. ...................................................... 2 ......................................................4 ......................................................4 ...................................................... 4 ...................................................... 5 ...................................................... 5 ...................................................... 6 ...................................................... 6 OTHERS...................:................... 6 ...................................................... 6 ...................................................... 7 ...................................................... 8 31 D ................................................ 8 ...................................................... 9 ANCE...........................................9 ...................................................... 9 =....................................................10 ......................................................10 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07 00200 - i F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00200 - Instructions to Bidders TABLE OF ARTICLES (Alphabetical by Subject) Subject Article Awardof Contract.....................................................................................................................19 Basis of Bid; Evaluation of Bids................................................................................................14 BidSecurity.................................................................................................................................8 Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance.....................................................................................18 Contract Security and Insurance...............................................................................................20 ContractTimes...........................................................................................................................9 Copiesof Bidding Documents.....................................................................................................2 DefinedTerms............................................................................................................................1 Examination of Bidding Documents, Other Related Data, and Site.............................................4 Interpretations and Addenda.......................................................................................................7 LiquidatedDamages.................................................................................................................10 Modification and Withdrawal of Bid...........................................................................................16 Openingof Bids........................................................................................................................17 Pre -Bid Conference....................................................................................................................5 Preparationof Bid.....................................................................................................................13 Qualificationsof Bidders.............................................................................................................3 Signingof Agreement...............................................................................................................21 Siteand Other Areas.................................................................................................:................6 Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others......................................................................................12 Submittalof Bid.........................................................................................................................15 Substitute and "Or -Equal' Items................................................................................................11 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 0407 00200 - ii FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00200 - Instructions to Bidders ARTICLE 1 - DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: A. Bidder --The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to OWNER. B. Issuing Office --The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued and where the bidding procedures are to be administered. C. Successful Bidder --The lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. ARTICLE 2 - COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the Issuing Office. 2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor ENGINEER assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.03 OWNER and ENGINEER in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. ARTICLE 3 - QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01 To demonstrate Bidder's qualifications to perform the Work, within five days of OWNER's request Bidder shall submit written evidence such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and such other data as may be called for below. A. Bidder must have at least five years' experience in the construction of similar projects of this size and larger. B. Bidder must have successfully constructed, as prime CONTRACTOR, at least three projects similar in scope to this project. C. Bidder must have good recommendations from at least three clients similar to the OWNER. D. The Bidder's superintendent and assistants must be qualified and experienced in similar projects in all categories. E. Bidder must be able to provide evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction in which the project is located. 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 0407 00200-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 3.02 Each bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the contract. 3.03 The OWNER reserves the right to reject bids from Bidders that are unable to meet the listed required qualifications. ARTICLE 4 - EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS, OTHER RELATED DATA, AND SITE 4.01 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Bidding Documents. 2. Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents. B. Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.01.A will be made available by OWNER to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions has been identified and established in paragraph 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any "technical data" or any other data, interpretations, opinions or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings. 4.02 Underground Facilities A. Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based upon information and data furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by OWNERs of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, or others. 4.03 Hazardous Environmental Condition A. The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Bidding Documents. B. Copies of reports and drawings referenced in paragraph 4.03.A will be made available by OWNER to any Bidder on request. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions Bidder is responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any "technical data" or any other data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings. 4.04 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or unanticipated conditions appear in paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 0407 00200-2 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work appear in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. 4.05 Upon a request directed to the Purchasing Division (purchasing-ircgov.com or (772) 226-1416), OWNER will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies. 4.06 "[This paragraph has been deleted intentionally]" 4.07 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to: A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, including any Addenda and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents; B. VISIT THE SITE AFTER CONTACTING THE PURCHASING DIVISION (purchasing(aiircgov.com or (772) 226-1416) TO MAKE ARRANGEMENTS IN ADVANCE, AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH AND SATISFY BIDDER AS TO THE GENERAL, LOCAL, AND SITE CONDITIONS THAT MAY AFFECT COST, PROGRESS, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK; C. become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work; D. carefully study all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and carefully study all reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions; E. obtain and carefully study (or assume responsibility for doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (overhead, surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; F. agree at the time of submitting its Bid that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents; G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents; 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07 00200-3 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 H. correlate the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents; I. promptly give ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder; and J. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work. 4.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents and the written resolutions thereof by ENGINEER are acceptable to Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work. ARTICLE 5 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE 5.01 The date, time, and location for a MANDATORY Pre -Bid conference, is specified in the Advertisement for Bids. Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are REQUIRED to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. ARTICLE 6 - SITE AND OTHER AREAS 6.01 The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or storage of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.01 CONE OF SILENCE. Potential bidders and their agents shall not communicate in any way with the Board of County Commissioners, County Administrator or any County staff other than Purchasing personnel in reference or relation to this solicitation. This restriction shall be effective from the time of bid advertisement until the Board of County Commissioners meets to authorize award. Such communication may result in disqualification. 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07 0020074 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 7.02 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to PURCHASING (purchasing(a)-ircgov.com) in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties through the Issuing Office as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 7.03 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or ENGINEER. ARTICLE 8 - BID SECURITY 8.01 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in the amount of five percent of the Bidder's maximum base bid price and in the form of a certified check; cashier's check; or an AIA Document A310 Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions. The Bid Bond shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. The Surety must be authorized to issue surety bonds in Florida. The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes any Bond, to affix to each a current certified copy of their Power of Attorney, reflecting such person's authority as Power of Attorney in the State of Florida. Further, at the time of execution of the Contract, the Successful Bidder shall for all Bonds, provide a copy of the Surety's current valid Certificate of Authority issued by the United States Department of the Treasury under 31 United States Code sections 9304- 9308. The Surety shall also meet the requirements of paragraphs 5.01 and 5.02 of the General Conditions. 8.02 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required contract security and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid security of that Bidder will be retained by the owner. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of seven days after the Effective Date of the Agreement or 91 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. 8.03 Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving the award will be returned within seven days after the Bid opening. ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT TIMES 9.01 The number of calendar days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) Substantially Completed and (b) also completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement. 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07 00200-5 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05101 ARTICLE 10 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 11 - SUBSTITUTE AND "OR -EQUAL" ITEMS 11.01 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or "or -equal' items. Whenever it is specified or described in the Bidding Documents that a substitute or "or - equal' item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to ENGINEER, application for such acceptance will not be considered by ENGINEER until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by ENGINEER is set forth in the General Conditions and may be supplemented in the General Requirements. ARTICLE 12 - SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 12.01 If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities to be submitted. to OWNER in advance of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five days after Bid opening, submit to OWNER a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity if requested by OWNER. If OWNER or ENGINEER, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity, OWNER may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit a substitute, without an increase in the Bid. 12.02 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, OWNER may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity so listed and against which OWNER or ENGINEER makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions. 12.03 CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. ARTICLE 13 - PREPARATION OF BID 13.01 The Bid form is included with the Bidding Documents. 13.02 All blanks on the Bid form shall be completed by printing in ink or by typewriter and the Bid signed. A Bid price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternative, adjustment unit 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 0407 00200-6 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc.Rev. 05/01 price item, and unit price item listed therein, or the words "No Bid," "No Change," or "Not Applicable" entered. 13.03 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. 13.04 A Bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 13.05 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown below the signature. 13.06 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder's name and official address. 13.07 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venturor in the manner indicated on the Bid form. The official address of the joint venture must be shown below the signature. 13.08 All names shall be typed or printed in ink below the signatures. 13.09 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid form. 13.10 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 13.11 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder's authority and qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the Contract. Bidder's state contractor license number or county registration number for the state or county of the Project, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid form. 13.12 All supporting information requested in the Bid Form must be furnished. Do not leave any questions or requests unanswered. 13.13 In accordance with Florida Statutes Section 218.80, the "Public Bid Disclosure Act", Indian River County as OWNER is obligated to disclose all license, permit, impact, or inspection fees that are payable to Indian River County in connection with the construction of the Work by the accepted bidder. All permit, impact; or inspection fees payable to Indian River County in connection with the work on this County project will be paid by Indian River County, with the exception of re -inspection fees. The Bidder shall not include ANY PERMIT, IMPACT, NOR INSPECTION FEES payable to Indian River County in the bid. ARTICLE 14 - BASIS OF BID; EVALUATION OF BIDS 14.01 Unit Price A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the Bid schedule. 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07 00200-7 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 B. The total of all estimated prices will be determined as the sum of the products of the estimated quantity of each item and the unit price Bid for the item. The final quantities and Contract Price will be determined in accordance with paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions. C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words. 14.02 The Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for overhead and profit on account of cash allowances, if any, named in the Contract Documents as provided in paragraph 11.02 of the General Conditions. 14.03 The Bidder's attention is called to the fact that any estimate of quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under the Specifications as shown on the Bid Schedule, or elsewhere, is approximate only and not guaranteed. The OWNER does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities shall remain in strict accordance with the estimated quantities, nor shall the Bidder plead misunderstanding or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character, location of the work, or other conditions pertaining thereto. ARTICLE 15 - SUBMITTAL OF BID 15.01 The Bid form is to be completed and submitted with the Bid security and the following data: A. Sworn Statement under Section 105.08, Indian River County Code, on Disclosure of Relationships. B. Sworn Statement under the Florida Trench Safety Act. C. Qualifications Questionnaire. D. List of Subcontractors. 15.02 A Bid shall be submitted no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope plainly marked with the Project Title and Bid Number (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted), Bid Number, the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If mail or other delivery system sends a Bid, the sealed envelope containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate envelope plainly marked on the outside with the notation "BID ENCLOSED." A mailed Bid shall be addressed to Indian River County, Purchasing Division, 1800 271 Street, Vero Beach, Florida, 32960. ARTICLE 16 - MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID 16.01 A Bid may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07 00200-8 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 16.02 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid, and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work. ARTICLE 17 - OPENING OF BIDS 17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to Bid and, unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. ARTICLE 18 - BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE 18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of this period. ARTICLE 19 - AWARD OF CONTRACT 19.01 OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. OWNER further reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder whom it finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to be non -responsible. OWNER may also reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder. OWNER also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. The County will not reimburse any Bidder for bid preparation costs. Owner reserves the right to cancel the award of any Contract at any time before the execution of such Contract by all parties without any liability to the Owner. For and in consideration of the Owner considering Bids submitted, the Bidder, by submitting its Bid, expressly waives any claim to damages, of any kind whatsoever, in the event the Owner exercises its right to cancel the award in accordance herewith. 19.02 More than one Bid for the same Work from an individual or entity under the same or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any Bidder has an interest in more than one Bid for the Work may be cause for disqualification of that Bidder and the rejection of all Bids in which that Bidder has an interest. 19.03 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. It is the OWNER's intent to accept alternates (if any are accepted) in the order in which they are listed on the Bid form, but OWNER may accept them in any order or combination. 19.04 In evaluating Bidders, OWNER will consider the qualifications of Bidders and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors, 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 0407 00200-9 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 Suppliers, and other individuals or entities must be submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 19.05 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19.06 If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will award the Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is in the best interests of the Project. 19.07 OWNER has no local ordinance or preferences, as defined in FS 255.0991 (2) in place, therefore no preference prohibited by that section will be considered in the acceptance, review or award of this bid. 19.08 Any actual or prospective bidder or proposer who is aggrieved in connection with the bidding and/or selection process may protest to the OWNER's Purchasing Manager. The protest shall be submitted in writing to the Purchasing Manager within seven (7) calendar days after the bidder or proposer knows or should have known of the facts giving rise to the protest. ARTICLE 20 - CONTRACT SECURITY AND INSURANCE 20.01 Article 5 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets forth OWNER's requirements as to Public Construction Bond and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, it must be accompanied by such Bond, unless the Bond has been waived due to the total contract being less than $100,000. ARTICLE 21 - SIGNING OF AGREEMENT 21.01 When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with the other Contract Documents which are identified in the Agreement as attached thereto. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER. 21.02 OWNER shall return one fully signed counterpart to Successful Bidder. 21.03 Should Bidder to whom the Contract has been awarded refuse or fail to complete the requirements of Article 21.01 above, the additional time in calendar days, required to correctly complete the documents will be deducted, in equal amount, from the Contract time. Or, the OWNER may elect to revoke the Award and the OWNER shall hold the Bid Bond for consequential damages incurred, and the Contract may be awarded as the OWNER desires. * * END OF SECTION * * 00200 - Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07 00200-10 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00200 -Instructions to Bidders REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 SECTION 00300 - Bid Package Contents THIS PACKAGE CONTAINS: SECTION TITLE Bid Form Bid Bond SECTION NUMBER 00310 00430 Sworn Statement on Disclosure of Relationships 00452 Sworn Statement Under the Florida Trench Safety Act 00454 Qualifications Questionnaire List of Subcontractors 00456 00458 SUBMIT ONE (1) ORIGINAL AND ONE (1) COPY OF THIS COMPLETE PACKAGE WITH YOUR BID * * END OF SECTION * * 00300 - Bid Package Contents - REV 04-07 003001 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00300 - Bid Package Contents - REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00310 - Bid Form PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS County Project Number: IRC -1744 Bid Number: 2018059 Project Address: 1919 US 1 SEBASTIAN, FLORIDA 32958 Project Description: THIS PROJECT CONSISTS OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF ±8,400 S.F. OF NEW OFFICE SPACE AND RELATED FACILITIES FOR THE RELOCATION OF INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PROFESSIONAL OFFICES. THE PROJECT INCLUDES NEW RESTROOMS, STOREFRONT WINDOW REPLACEMENT, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK, RAISED FLOORS AND THE REPLACEMENT OF ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS. IN ADDITION, SITE RELATED IMPROVEMENTS WILL INCLUDE NEW PARKING LOT STRIPING, CURB REPAIR, NEW EXTERNAL LIGHTING AND EXTERIOR BUILDING CLEANING AND REPAINTING. THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY 180027 th Street VERO BEACH, FLORIDA 32960 1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of OWNER. 3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as set forth in the Agreement, that: A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged. Addendum Date Addendum Number 06/22/2018 1 07/05/2018 2 07/09/2018 3 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-1 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Conners\1-Admin0d OocumentsWasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00310 - Bid Forth REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/16/01 B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress and performance of the Work. D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. . F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents. I. Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder. J. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted. 4.01 Bidder further represents that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over OWNER. [The remainder of page intentionally left blank] 00310 - Bid Forth REV 04-07 00310-2 F1Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-AdminlBid Documents\MasterContracl\MaslerContract Documents\00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/16/01 ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE PROJECT NAME:NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS IRC PROJECT NO. 1744 BID NO. 2018059 BIDDER'S NAME: W&J Construction Corp. ,Item Not ,. , ;Divrsron -`? De5cnP6on;^ ;: t,, - K , ... �:' -7 ::. t. .u- i , Unit.z OuanO .:..:Unit Pnce :!Amount 001 SITE DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION - PROVIDED PER PLAN SET LS 1 1 1-4 no;7 002 SIGNING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS - PROVIDED PER PLANS SET LS 1 13,984 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 064219 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANEUNG 066116 SOUD SURFAC FABRICATION 003 DIVISION 02 - INTERIOR DEMOLITION AND TEMPORARY PROTECTION LS 1 40.426 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 004 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE LS 1 19,140 033000 CONCRETE - CAST IN PLACE 005 DIVISION 05 - METALS LS 1 39,888 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING. 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAIUNGS 055813 COLUMN COVERS 057000 DECORATIVE METAL 006 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES LS I 1 384,540 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061600 SHEATHING 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064216 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 064219 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANEUNG 066116 SOUD SURFAC FABRICATION 007 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION LS 1 1 13,601 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS - 074646 FIBER -CEMENT SIDING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 008 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS I LS 1 1 1 I 3 , o (D Q 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING 00310-3 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTSN1744 Sebastian Cornersll-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\Itemized Bid Schedule IRC 1744 ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE PROJECT NAME:NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS IRC PROJECT NO. 1744 BID NO. 2018059 BIDDER'S I 09 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES I LS 1 1 1 1 296,284 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093013 CERAMIC TILING 095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096900 ACCESS FLOORING 099000 PAINT AND FINISH SYSTEMS SCHEDULE 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 INTERIOR PAINTING 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 099600 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 010 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT LS 1 17,618 113013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 011 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS LS 1 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 012 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING LS 1 58 885 220000 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 220001 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS 221113 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 221116 PLUMBING PIPING 221119 PIPE, VALVES & FITTINGS:POTABLE WATER 221316 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 221319 PIPE, VALVES & FITTINGS:STORM, SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN 223300 WATER HEATER: ELECTRIC 224000 PLUMBING 224001 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND SPECIALTIES 013 DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL LS 1 139,615 230000 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230001 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230553 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230593 TEST AND BALANCE - PRELIMINARY 230594 TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL 230713 INSULATION, THERMAL 230900 THERMOSTAT 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPES, VALVES, AND SPECIALTIES 233113 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233120 ROOF CURBS 233421 FANS, POWER ROOF VENTILATOR 233713 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 237413 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:DIRECT EXPANSION 003104 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\Itemized Bid Schedule IRC 1744 ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE PROJECT NAME:NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS IRC PROJECT NO. 1744 . BID NO. 2018059 BIDDER'S NAME: W&J Construction Corp. 014 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL I LS I 1 1I 'J `i `� i "f `J51 260100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260519 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT 260526 GROUNDING 260533 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND BOXES 290923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262416 PANELBOARDS 262513 LOW VOLTAGE BUSWAYS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262817 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 265100 LIGHTING FIXTURES FORCE ACCOUNT 1 100,000.00 TOTAL BID AMOUNT (INCLUDING FORCE ACCOUNT) TOTAL I I , I ) 5 ;tj III , o� PROJECT BID AMOUNT IN WORDS \ k kA G1 V S LovtSa(I dj (1`\AQ htAlnd'ved eAplu L i� ctol Iavc NOTE: IF THERE IS A DISCREPENCY BETWEEN THE PLANS (SUMMARY OF PAY ITEMS) AND THE ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE, THE BID DOCUMENTS WILL GOVERN. LS = LUMP SUM 00310-5 F:\Public WorksIENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Masler Contract Documents\Itemized Bid Schedule IRC 1744 5.01 Bidder shall complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the price(s) contained in the Bid Schedule: A. The Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words. B. The Owner reserves the right to omit or add to the construction of any portion or portions of the work heretofore enumerated or shown on the plans. Furthermore, the Owner reserves the right to omit in its entirety any one or more items of the Contract without forfeiture of Contract or claims for loss of anticipated profits or any claims by the Contractor on account of such omissions. C. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on actual quantities provided. The quantities actually required to complete the contract and work may be less or more than so estimated, and, if so, no action for damages or for loss of profits shall accrue to the Contractor by reason thereof. D. Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with paragraph 11.03.6 of the General Conditions. 6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07.6 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement. 6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified, which shall be stated in the Agreement. 7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: A. Itemized Bid Schedule B. , Required Bid security in the form of Bid Bond C. Sworn Statement under Section 105.08, Indian River Code, on Disclosure of Relationships; D. Sworn Statement Under the Florida Trench Safety Act; E. Qualifications Questionnaire; F. List of Subcontractors 8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. SUBMITTED on July 13 20 18. State Contractor License No. CGC34068 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-6 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Adndn\Bid DocumentsWasterContractWaster Contract Documents\00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07.doc If Bidder is: An Individual Name (typed or printed): By: (Individual's signature) Doing business as: Business address: Phone No.: Email: A Partnership Partnership Name: FAX No.: By: (Signature of general partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Business address: Phone No.: Email: FAX No.: (SEAL) (SEAL) A Corporation Corporation Name: W&1 Construction Corp. (SEAL) State of Incorporation: Florida Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability): General Business By: --- (Signature -- Name (typed or printed): Title: <,- Vice PrWdent or aurnonry to signs Erik Costin (CORPORATE SEAL) Attest I Derosia (Signa ure of C rporate Secretary) Business a 1038 Harvin Way, Suite 120 Rockledge, FL 32955 Phone No.: g21 6:t? 766r) FAX No.: 121.6:19 S927 Email: arikr@wirnnctrurtion_rom Date of Qualification to do business is March 17, 1965 A Joint Venture 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-7 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin0d Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07.doc Joint Venture Name: 0 (Signature of joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: Business address: Phone No.: Email: Joint Venture Name: _ By: (Signature — attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: Business address: Phone No.: Email: FAX No.: Phone and FAX Number, and Address for receipt of official communications: (SEAL) (SEAL) (Each joint venturor must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.) * * END OF SECTION * * 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-8 F:%Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\Masterr-oMract\Master Contract Documents\00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07.doc MINUTES OF A SPECIAL MEETING OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF W & J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION Minutes of a Special Meeting of the Board of Directors of W & J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION held at the offices of the corporation in Rockledge, Florida on July 1, 2013. The following director, being the sole director of the corporation, was present: NICK WITEK By his signature to these minutes at the end hereof, the sole director waived notice of this meeting and approved and consented to the business transactions set forth in these minutes. items: NICK WITEK was chairman and secretary of the meeting. The chairman stated that the meeting had been called especially to adopt the following 1. Appoint ERIK COSTIN as Vice President and Chief Operating Officer of the corporation. 2.. Authorize ERIK COSTIN to have signature authority for the corporation and its bank accounts. The chairman then opened the meeting for consideration of the stated items of business. After discussion and upon motion duly made and carried, the above items were unanimously adopted. There being no further business to come before the meeting, the same was, on motion duly made and carried, adjourned. J�a, �&' NICK WITEK, Chairman, Acting Secretary, and Sole Director Document A310TM — 2010 Conforms with The American Institute of Architects AIA Document 310 Bid Bond CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) W & J Construction Corporation 1038 Harvin Way, Suite 120 Rockledge, FL 32955 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Indian River County Board of County Commissioner 1801 27th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 BOND AMOUNT: $ 5% SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place ojbustness) Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland 1299 Zurich Way, 5th Floor Schaumburg, IL 60196-1056 Mailing Address for Notices Same as above. Five Percent of Amount Bid PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, ifany) This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. Indian River County Professional Offices Relocation, Indian River County Project No. IRC -1744, Indian River County Bid No. 2018059 The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Conttactor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terns of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be _Subcontractor.and.the.term.Owaer.shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted henefrom and provisions conforming to-sdch statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall -be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. ` Signed and sealed this 2nd day of July, 2018 W & J Construction Corporation (Principal) (Seal) rtness) By. (lute) cgZkv-- C -0T-1 CQ' Jl ce TQA!06tDWr Fidelity and Deposit Company of Ma d (Wlbtess Nela Bamola By- Mde)Anett Cardinale Attorney -in -Fact Florida Licensed Resident Agent S-00541AS 8110 Inquiries (813) 281-2095 Bond Number Bid Bond Indian River County Board of County Obligee: Comm'�ssioner ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY ORMARYLAND POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE. COMPANY, a corporation of the State of New York, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Maryland, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND a corporation of the State of Maryland (herein collectively called the "Companies"), by Michael P. Bond, Vice President, in pursuance of authority granted by Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute, and appoint Ant3tt Cardinale its true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, and the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at its office in New York, New York., the regularly elected officers of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., and the regularly elected officers of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., in their own proper persons. The said Vice President does hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President has hereunto subscribed his/her names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 24th day of April, A.D. 2017. ATTEST: By. Michael P. Bond Tree President By: Dawn E. Brown Secretary State of Maryland County of Baltimore ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND m "Wh UAL On this 24th day of April, A.D. 2017, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, Michael P. Bond, Vice President and Dawn E. Brmvn, Secretary of the Companies, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and acknowledged the execution of same, and being by me duly swom, deposeth and saith, that he/she is the said officer of the Company aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and the signature as such officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year fust above written. Constance A. Dunn, Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 9, 2019 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF THE COMPANIES "Article V, Section 8, Attomeys-in-Fact The Chief Executive Officer, the President, or any Executive Vice President or Vice President may, by written instrument under the attested corporate seal, appoint attorneys -in -fact with authority to execute bonds, policies, recognisances, stipulations, undertakings, or other like instruments on behalf of the Company, and may authorize any officer or any such attomey-in-fact to affix the corporate seal thereto; and may with or without cause modify of revoke any such appointment or authority at any tune." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Vice President of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of the Companies is still in force. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 15th day of December 1998. RESOLVED: "That the signature of the President or a Vice President and. the attesting signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any Power of Attorney ... Any such Power or any certificate thereof bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company." This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994, and the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this. 2nd day of July , 2018 UWAb 006 • RAL few Michael C. Fay, Vice President TO REPORT A CLAIM WITH REGARD TO A SURETY BOND, PLEASE SUBMIT A COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF THE CLAIM INCLUDING THE PRINCIPAL ON THE BOND, THE BOND NUMBER, AND YOUR CONTACT INFORMATION TO: Zurich Surety Claims 1299 Zurich Way Schaumburg, IL 60196-1056 www.zurichna.com/en/claims SECTION 00452 SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 105.08, INDIAN RIVER COUNTY CODE, ON DISCLOSURE OF RELATIONSHIPS THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. This sworn statement MUST be submitted with Bid, Proposal or Contract No. 2018059 for NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS. 2. This sworn statement is submitted by: W&1 Construction Corp. (Name of entity submitting Statement) whose business address is: 1038 Harvin Way, Suite 120 Rockledge, FL 32955 3. My name is Erik Costin (Please print name of individual signing) and my relationship to the entity named above is Vice President 4. I understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Section 105.08, Indian River County Code, means: The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of the entity. 5. I understand that the relationship with a County Commissioner or County employee that must be disclosed as follows: Father, mother, son, daughter, brother, sister, uncle, aunt, first cousin, nephew, niece, husband, wife, father-in-law, mother-in-law, daughter-in-law, son-in-law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, stepfather, stepmother, stepson, stepdaughter, stepbrother, stepsister, half brother, half sister, grandparent, or grandchild. 6. Based on information and belief, the statement, which I have marked below, is true in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. [Please indicate which statement applies.] XX Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in management of the entity, have any relationships as defined in section 105.08, Indian River County Code, with any County Commissioner or County employee. 00452-1 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00452 Disclosure of Relationships.doc The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents, who are active in management of the entity have the following relationships with a County Commissioner or County employee: Name of Affiliate or entity STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Brevard Name of County Commissioner or employee Relationship S -L Erik Costin (Signature) 7/13/18 (Date) The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this 13 day of July , 2018 by Erik Costin , who is personally known to me or who has produced as identification. NOTA LIC SIGN: PRINT: Shelley ut erland Notary Public, State at large My Commission Expires: (Seal) .w+..>y SHELLEY D. SUTHERLAND ?q. MY COMMISSION # FF 224376 EXPIRES: June 8 2019 %FliF wd ` Bonded Thru Notary Public Undenrrtitera 00452-2 FAPublic Works\ENGI N EER I NG DIVISION PROJ ECTS\1 744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00452 Disclosure of Relationships.doc 2. 3 4 5 A SECTION 00454 - Sworn Statement Under the Florida Trench Safety Act THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED BY THE BIDDER WHO WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE EXCAVATION WORK ("BIDDER"), OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE, IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. This Sworn Statement is submitted with Project No. IRC -1744 for NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS. This Sworn Statement is submitted by W&J Construction Corp. (Legal Name of Entity Submitting Sworn Statement) hereinafter "BIDDER". The BIDDER's address is _ 1038 Harvin Way, Suite 120 Rockledge. FL 32955 BIDDER's Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) is 59-1091576 My name is Erik Costin and my relationship to the BIDDER (Print Name of Individual Signing) is Vice President (Position or Title) I certify, through my signature at the end of this Sworn Statement, that I am an authorized representative of the BIDDER. The Trench Safety Standards that will be in effect during the construction of this Project are contained within the Trench Safety Act, Section 553.60 et.seg. Florida Statutes and refer to the applicable Florida Statue(s) and/or OSHA Regulation(s) and include the "effective date" in the citation(s). Reference to and compliance with the applicable Florida Statute(s) and OSHA Regulation(s) is the complete and sole responsibility of the BIDDER. Such reference will not be checked by OWNER or ENGINEER and they shall have no responsibility to review or check the BIDDER's compliance with the Trench Safety Standards. The BIDDER assures the OWNER that it will comply with the applicable Trench Safety Standards. The BIDDER has allocated and included in its bid the total amount of $ Not Applicable based on the linear feet of trench to be excavated over five (5) feet deep, for compliance with the applicable Trench Safety Standards, and intends to comply with said standards by instituting the following specific method(s) of compliance on this Project: The determination of the appropriate method(s) of compliance is the complete and sole responsibility of the BIDDER. Such methods will not be checked by the OWNER or ENGINEER for accuracy, completeness, or any other purpose. The OWNER and ENGINEER shall have no responsibility to review or check the BIDDER's compliance with the Trench Safety Standards. 7. The BIDDER has allocated and included in its bid the total amount of $ Not Applicable based on the square feet of shoring to be used for compliance with shoring safety requirements and intends to comply with said shoring requirements by instituting the following specific method(s) of compliance on this Project: 00454 - Florida Trench Safety Act - REV 0407 00454-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin0d DocumentsWasterContract\Master Contract Doaments\00454 - Florida Trench Safety Act - REV 04-07.doc The determination of the appropriate method(s) of.compliance is the complete and sole responsibility of the BIDDER. Such methods will not be checked by the OWNER or ENGINEER for accuracy, completeness or any other purpose. The. OWNER and ENGINEER shall have no responsibility to review or check the BIDDER's compliance with the Trench Safety Standards. 8. The BIDDER, in submitting this bid, represents that it has obtained and considered all available geotechnical information, has utilized said geotechnical information and that, based on such information and the BIDDER's own information, the BIDDER has sufficient knowledge of the Project's surface and subsurface site conditions and characteristics to assure BIDDER's compliance with the applicable Trench Safety Standards in designing the trench safety system(s) for the Project. BIDDER: W&I ConstrVdionCoro. By:� Erik Costin Position or Title: Vice President Date: 7/13/18 STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Brevard Personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, Erik Costin who after first being sworn by me, affixed his/her signature in the space provided above on this — day of iftiy , 20_j_&_- oeft•. SHELLEY D. SUTHERLAND otary Publ' ate at large :� �_ MY COMMISSION # FF 224378 My Commis Expires:. EXPIRES: June 8, 2019 od Bonded Thnr Notary Public Underwriters * * END OF SECTION * * 00454 - Florida Trench Safety Act - REV 04-07 00454 - 2 F:\PubticWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00454 - Florida Trench Safety Act - REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00456 - QUALIFICATIONS QUESTIONNAIRE NOTICE: THE OWNER RETAINS THE DISCRETION TO REJECT THE BIDS OF NON - RESPONSIBLE BIDDERS. UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY, the undersigned Bidder Guarantees the truth and accuracy of all statements and answers herein contained. Failure to comply with these requirements may be considered sufficient justification to disqualify a Bidder. Attach additional sheets as required. Documentation Submitted with Project No: IRC -1744 Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Bidder's Name / Address: W&J Construction Corp. 10;R Harvin Way, Suite 120 RnrklPrlgP, F 'A 955 2. Bidder's Telephone & FAX Numbers: 321.632.7660 321.632.5927 3. Licensing and Corporate Status: a. Is Contractor License current? yes b. Bidder's Contractor License No: CGC34068 [Attach a copy of Contractor's License to the bid] c. Attach documentation from the State of Florida Division of Corporations that indicates the business entity's status is active and that lists the names and titles of all officers. 4. Number of years the firm has performed business as a Contractor in construction work of the type involved in this contract: 53 5. What is the last project OF THIS NATURE that the firm has completed? W&J renovated three Brevard County Tax Collector Offices Melbourne location was 6,200 SF Merritt Island location was 11,000 SF and Viera location was 6 848 SF. 6. Has the firm ever failed to complete work awarded to you?. No [If your answer is "yes", then attach a separate page to this questionnaire that explains the circumstances and list the project name, Owner, and the Owner's telephone number for each project in which the firm failed to complete the work.] 7. Has the firm ever been assessed liquidated damages? No [If your answer is "yes", then attach a separate page to this questionnaire that explains the circumstances and list the project name, Owner, and the Owner's telephone number for each project in which liquidated damages have been assessed.] 8. Has the firm ever been charged by OSHA for violating any OSHA regulations? No [If your answer is "yes", then attach a separate page to this questionnaire that explains the circumstances and list the project name, Owner, and the Owners telephone number for each project in which OSHA violations were alleged.] 00456 - Qualifications Questionnaire 00456 - i FAPublic WorkMENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comerski-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00456 - Qualifications Questionnaire.doc 9. Has the firm implemented a drug-free workplace program in compliance with Florida Statute 287.087? Yes (In the case of a tie, preference will be given to businesses with drug-free workplace programs) 10. Has the firm ever been charged with noncompliance of any public policy or rules? No [If your answer is "yes", then attach a separate page to this questionnaire that explains the circumstances and list the project name, Owner, and the Owner's telephone number for each project.] 11. Attach to this questionnaire, a notarized financial statement and other, information that documents the firm's financial strength and history. 12. Has the firm ever defaulted on any of its projects? No [If your answer is "yes", then attach a separate page to this questionnaire that explains the circumstances and list the project name, Owner, and the Owner's telephone number for each project in which a default occurred.] 13. Attach a separate page to this questionnaire that summarizes the firm's current workload and that demonstrates its ability to meet the project schedule. 14. Name of person who inspected the site of the proposed work for the firm: Name: Denise Marschhauser Date of Inspections: June 20, 2018 15. Name of on-site Project Foreman: Brian Seli Number of years of experience with similar projects as a Project Foreman: 17 16.— Name of Project Manager: Chad Laston Number of years of experience with similar projects as a Project Manager: 25 17. State your total bonding capacity: $35,000,000 18. State your bonding capacity per job: $25,000,000 19. Please provide name, address, telephone number, and contact person of your bonding company: David Carr, Willis of Florida, Inc., 4211 W. Boy Scout Blvd, Suite 1000, Tampa, FL 33607 PH: 813.281.2095 [The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally] 00456 - Qualifications Questionnaire 00456-2 F1Pub1ic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContractXMaster Contract Documents00456 - Qualificabons Questionnaire.doc cri m� c = O 7 U E RQ U. r = i+ O = U o 'R E cQ O 'm m E _ M O Z= a E N U) i G1 'C aQ cc =E OW U `m _ O d d d — ++ R E O U W l7 V Q a m �O L N X aw z ,- O W d L E w m Z Ln w J a �p N O0 Cl Ql 00 O 00 N C Cl t0 m Ln Ln to Ln O C Ln tko N N C p N > '� >m > M a -i Q1 N I, > .--I 00 > In N > 3 p O V N f0 M N al 01 N l0 m cn to N w V m N of M N N m N Ln 141 a- � l0Ln 00 Ln l0t Ln l0 M CL t0 Q N i..j Q m i? 0 to 0 V., 0 LL�* 0 O V). 0 `^ `^ O O O Li A •- M 00 M N cn n C C LD rl LO Ln .mi ^ m rn LO LO V O M d' N C Ln O1 r -I I, f6 E i� vi Ol 000 00 I -t .� Vl• tn N I/} tn 0 V1 Ln OC1 E O ri O Ln cn E O m m m m > N N N 01 -J X E OJ O J O j O Q-1 N 00 a O O O O O UJ C \ O 0) LL M co N LL rn M m p1 LL M n3 OD i� Y 00 t c Q�1 O .4nO 0�1 O O E -;r Ln as s E 0� Ou E 0� $ E 0 co a _c Al _� •� �� cmn c v @J 3 m o 3 `° m No 3� m N O_ O d O LL u up 0_ LL J J Z N 01 V M m cn U M V M m Or O d O L L Co Q O` O ` LL M E LL l0 f�6 LL M E LL lD ` LL m LL l0 fu6 L 4i r4 C7 N N L (� N N � (� V N N w a -i lD L y., 'E, w �..� l0 n3 0�0 y N ni 0�0 N _E !O 0�0 O1 N C Q w M @ C m C M �. 01 au Q> >, rn -O m � m -0 . M = w 2 LO N 00 3 :3 u ti'1 t% Nbi N �."" O N In to L lD l0 L lD 14O1 O O O ,.� N I� r-4 n N n rI LO N N N LO W ua1 u O t2 O y O O O u O u ` C [0 N T u C m N T y G m N T y C y u OO O In a c E 'vi C c C c O C U u (.1 L O L 7 3 N = 3 In O O O LL 0_ LL O V of U U E O of U u E O U of U E 0 T Y T Y T Y Y L Y „ (6 O E O E O E U CJ U = _ > U > cu U > U F- d L 01 L Ol L CO in m w 00 00 00 00 ^ M a" N a" 0 E f0 L ¢ L a T T > > z p z u a-1 N m 0 _ L O u O Z O Z O Z O ,.. i 001L C O O O C U O u c 01 O d c c c > c c o O o p O 0 0 > U > O_ Y�O-+ YO Y YO Y N (a 11: O_ O O U C C x Om CO C N Ll N `l cn OL/ N T O t C c C m 01 X 01 cc T W C=m O) 01 E I..L 11 11 U cc W _ f0 N U Y U c U Z > _ O a1 O O u 0 u U U Z v [NOTE: If requested by the County, the Bidder shall furnish references, and other information, sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of its abilities as a contractor.] By: Erik Costin (Signature) Vice President (Position or Title) 7/13/18 (Date) * * END OF SECTION * * 00456 - Qualifications Questionnaire 00456-4 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\13id Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00456 - Qualifications Questionnaire.doc SECTION 00458 - List of Subcontractors The Bidder MUST list below the name and address of each Subcontractor who will perform work under this Contract in excess of one-half percent of the total bid price, and shall also list the portion of the work which will be done by such Subcontractor. After the opening of Bids, additions, changes or substitutions will not be allowed unless approved by Indian River County after a request for such a change has been submitted in writing by the Contractor, which shall include reasons for such request. Subcontractors must be properly licensed and hold a valid Certificate of Competency. Documentation Submitted with Project No. IRC -1744 for NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS 01 Note: Attach additional sheets if required. * * END OF SECTION * * 00458 - List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A 00458-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\8id Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00458 -List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A.doc Work to be Performed Subcontractor's Name/Address Portion of Work 1. Site work Cathco Vero Beach 1.2 2. Demolition Coastline W. Melbourne 1.4 3. Concrete Leo's Concrete Palm Bay 1 4. Structural Steel Structural Steel of Brevard Melbourne 1.1 5. Cabinets & Panels Elegance by Design Mims 19 s. Roof Patch G&G Roofing Rockledge .75 7. Storefront East Coast Arch Glass Indian Harbor Beach 5.5 8. Framing & Drywall Brevard Framing & Drywall Melbourne 5.1 s. Flooring BHI Orlando 10 10. Access Floor Irvine Access Floor Orlando 2.5 11. Painting PCC Longwood 2.9 12. Plumbing Certified Plumbing Palm Bay 2.3 13. Fire S rinkler K&N Fire Melbourne Beach .8 14. 3.1 Comm. Cabling 01 Note: Attach additional sheets if required. * * END OF SECTION * * 00458 - List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A 00458-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\8id Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00458 -List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A.doc SECTION 00458 - List of Subcontractors The Bidder MUST list below the name and. address of each Subcontractor who will perform work under this Contract in excess of one-half percent of the total bid price, and shall also list the portion of the work which will be done by such Subcontractor. After the opening of Bids, additions, changes or substitutions will not be allowed unless approved by Indian River County after a request for such a change has been submitted in writing by the Contractor, which shall include reasons for' such request. Subcontractors must be properly licensed and hold a valid Certificate of Competency. Documentation Submitted with Project No. IRC -1744 for NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Note: Attach additional sheets if required. * * END OF SECTION * * 00458 - List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A 00458-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS11744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin0d DocumentsVulasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00458 -List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A.doc Work to be Performed Subcontractor's Name/Address Portion of Work 1. HVAC VLD -(' (Li -c 2 Electrical � �n LCL i C n I l {.15 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13, 14. Note: Attach additional sheets if required. * * END OF SECTION * * 00458 - List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A 00458-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS11744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin0d DocumentsVulasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00458 -List of Subcontractors REV 3-18A.doc Go C4 N T 7 N a C O O Y � a O CL r- U0 Y C 33 c w 0 U ao` W 3° m yQ) cu ru ' CO p O ., O Ln LM � 0 Q) Q) M IOL Z3 O O aU 4n O N C) N N a ' ti; ti L LV � `—' �� "I c 0. 'C 0, m 3 - LL C 'LL. �. E m ALJ '.� m LJ. U 'V Q O M N .L Qm N m- J _j O •p LL .'Q L✓N F -CLL 3 O N N U- C" 3 .v N _'Y LL Y U -, ALL C �pv1J Y� = U LL M O LL N C E O v) m U-0 O cn m U-0 ti N 0 C QJ 4i 2C' .� _J J N C O Q O QJ ,, C 3 C O a� 3 LLL 10 3'LJL 1 U 3 N Z O J �' 3 'J U o C O'vYi 'o Z 3 Io = O U X O Ln O O > N. vN N NN N BOJ] �� ru �m v =m a '`COa �� 01 aj �Q �. Q' 0N CU m N _ m N> '0] N'> �O .CL U C x � � V �m N O vOi Ln U> m Ln : L N Ln v4O N -. LI1 .o.N O.. 2 ol U. N W:.: N C, U - m Q NC✓0 �� 0, -L1 �UN �m l7" m "UN 3 "m J . Y N ti Em EN rum CN. o m a'' r u OJ` Qj .Q u-, I..' LJi_ L u of v .0 LL ruLLnn¢ 'Z 'Q' U ru_J O •C LL LJ •Y LL - E'.J Q1 m LL' Q y m Qj L 2 C J V V] L m - fG Qj V 2 ` V UJ N E vii V aJ Q C v V N QJ C .LY 41 w C Z 7 O QJ N ` 3 Q Z M ti X O 7 •C 7 Z _U : 7 -', •' 4 �. ` O YOL QJ m of Ln O - 4J O •i OL H QJ 6 .O d1 300 C O Q o Z O O .Q O` N a O COQ LL N „� o t,.p �: � N , m O .O Um> I—m 0- Ln °m Z F.w G� tf1 Ln �O Ln O (7, of N N � n O' _ Je^ co CD O O O C co co W -o i�—,� p N \ :p.pO N \ N \\ O O NN O O N \ N O O O m O. Cr O n p m Ln O ^ .� Cr ll n Oco 0 Ln coo m N coC�Ln a n m N (moi s m Sc N v N ^ • CU -j C LL + —Iaj LL -:3L ` C . :Ll v L Y C m CL C . N a m m of Y o .a v -i i C� CL U �c �C CU =CU> Li- ti ai 3U L -o O ti Q .� o O 'O dl U ru >�v E Y 0 ru C��L Ln 3 ru O QJ -� S vo J In v C 3 p. 0 �' 3 O` � u Y 0 L C U U N E V) '� _ O a �� vii ' O C2 � E2 c Q O Y v O ru u pl N •O O u i -moi- LALL()-- LL 0- uCA 2> RICK SCOTT, GOVERNOR KEN LAWSON, SECRETARY STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION (_nNATMICTICIN INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD CGC34068 rho r.FNFRAL CONTRACTOR Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter 489 FS Expiration date: AUG 31, 2018 WITEK NICHOLAS J " W & J CONSTRUCTION a OR, AATt 170 ST. CROIX AVE �a COCOA BEACH, FL32931 `« k ISSUED: 08/04/2016 DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW SEQ # L1608040001518 MINUTES OF A SPECIAL MEETING OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF W & J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION Minutes of a Special Meeting of the Board of Directors of W & J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION held at the offices of the corporation in Rockledge, Florida on July 1, 2013. The following director, being the sole director of the corporation, was present: NICK WITEK By his signature to these minutes at the end hereof, the sole director waived notice of this meeting and approved and consented to the business transactions set forth in these minutes. items: NICK WITEK was chairman and secretary of the meeting. The chairman stated that the meeting had been called especially to adopt the following 1. Appoint ERIK COSTIN as Vice President and Chief Operating Officer of the corporation. 2. Authorize ERIK COSTIN to have signature authority for the corporation and its bank accounts. The chairman then opened the meeting for consideration of the stated items of business. After discussion and upon motion duly made and carried, the above items were unanimously adopted. There being no further business to come before the meeting, the same was, on motion duly made and carried, adjourned. i VL, W, NICK WITEK, Chairman, Acting Secretary, and Sole Director r CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION RESUMES Years with WBJ: 2 years Years in Industry: 25 years Licenses/Credentials: LEED AP TWIC Security Clearance SWPPP Education: Bowling Green State University, OH Bachelor of Science in Technology - 1995 Dual Major: Construction Management / AE Design CHAD LASTON, LEED AP Current Title: Project Manager Project Role: Construction Project Manager Responsible for all facets of project construction and team leadership from initial project planning and logistics and buy-out through construction and project close-out. Daily management and interaction with a dynamic range of personalities through fast -paced and technically demanding projects. Maintains monthly cost and schedule reporting for both internal and external clients, assists owners in making value -based decisions within their budgetary bottom line. Focus on client satisfaction to earn valued repeat customers. PROJECT EXPERIENCE City of Cocoa Fire Stations 1, 2 & 3 Combined for new Fire Department headquarters an emergency response stations for the City of Cocoa. Cocoa, FL Health First Business Center and Renovation Renovation of existing 2 -story, 60,000 SF building for Health First, Inc. Complete interior demolition and remodel of office space. Includes all new finishes, full mechanical, electrical and plumbing refit. New windows and exterior paint. Rockledge, FL Prior to W&J Canaveral Port Authority, Cruise Terminal No. 6 110,000 -SF, design -build, two-story cruise terminal with full Customs Operation Center and Embark / Disembark Operations Areas. Heavy multi - entity coordination between Homeland Security, Canaveral Port Authority, Carnival Cruise Line tenant, Berth Contractor, active Fuel Line Owner and adjacent cruise terminal operations. 10 Month schedule from ground breaking to operation on schedule and on budget. Cape Canaveral, FL Canaveral Port Authority, Welcome Center 17,000 -SF, 175 -ft tall Welcome Center on twenty-five acres of developed site. Facility houses theater, exhibit floors, function rooms and cafe. One -of -a - kind exterior parabolic curved metal "sail"wall involved heavy coordination and prefabrication with little to no allowable field construction tolerances. Cape Canaveral, FL Federal Express Ground, Distribution Hub 450,000 -SF new distribution facility with 150 acres of site Development. Project was completed on time and on budget and exceed the Owner's expectations setting a new standard for expectations for quality within the FedEx organization for new Hub Construction. Facility goes into operation. Ocala, FL W8J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION CGC 34068 0 U/iCONSTRUCTION CORPORATION RESUMES Years with W8J: 3 years Years in Industry: 17 years Licenses/Credentials: General Contractor License (inactive) OSHA 30 SWPPP BRIAN SELI Current Title: Superintendent Project Role: Construction Superintendent A superintendent's job is to run the day-to-day operations on the construction site including controlling the short term schedule. Brian will work closely with the Project Manager to refine and coordinate schedules and responsibilities. Brian has extensive experience with field management including: planning, implementation and coordination of multiple trades and specialties as they relate to specific projects and he will ensure the best practices are being executed. Brian is effective in communicating project status and operational issues to the Project Manager. He is capable of making clear, sound and accurate judgment decisions to keep the project moving forward. It is mandatory that all superintendents are familiar with all city and state requirements to assure code compliance and safety regulations. PROJECT EXPERIENCE Brannon Civic Center Construction of new single story civic center (13,900 gross square feet) with associated sitework, parking and landscaping. Some unique construction methods for this project are the auger cast piles, the large curtainwall systems along the waterfront, and operable partitions within the building. High end finishes, automatic window shades, a complete audio/visual and intrusion detection package, and the site's close proximity to the Halifax River all offer the City of New Smyrna Beach residents a stunning venue for concerts, weddings and multiple other uses. New Smyrna Beach, FL Health First Business Center and Renovation Renovation of existing 2 -story, 60,000 SF building for Health First, Inc. Complete interior demolition and remodel of office space. Includes all new finishes, full mechanical, electrical and plumbing refit. New windows and exterior paint. Rockledge, FL Northside Presbyterian Church Expansion 12,000 square foot expansion of existing church. The sanctuary will seat up to 400 parishioners, additional meeting and classroom space, a welcome center, coffee bar and storage areas complete the design. Melbourne, FL Prior to W8J Brian was superintendent to multiple confidential projects for NASA. Operations & Checkout Facility; 600,000 SF complete renovation Pad 39B Catacomb Roof Replacement; 376 panels removed and rebuilt of crawler launch pad; each panel weighed 30,000 pounds Patrick Air Force Base Camera Site Facility; 3 -story rocket camera site facility, high-technology administration Launch Control Center; 4 -story, 140,000 SF high-technology building Fire Suppression & Fire Alarm Replacement; replacement of fire suppression and fire alarm systems in 9 NASA facilities; Brian received an award for this work. W&J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION CGC 34068 6/25/2018 Detail by FEI/EIN Number £ �JII FJ �rllf i'` .OP r._ Deoartment of State / Division of Corporations / Search Records / Detail Ey Document Number / http://search.sunbiz.org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/SearchResultDetail?inquirytype=FeiNumber&directionType=Initial&searchNameOrder=-591091576... 1/3 6/25/2018 1038 HARVIN WAY, STE 120 ROCKLEDGE, FL 32955 Title VP Costin, Erik B 1038 HARVIN WAY, STE 120 ROCKLEDGE, FL 32955 Title VP Herman, Daniel 1038 HARVIN WAY, STE 120 ROCKLEDGE, FL 32955 Annual Reports Report Year Filed Date 2016 04/04/2016 2017 03/03/2017 2018 02/26/2018 Document Images 02/26/2018 —ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format � 03/03/2017 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/04/2016 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/08/2015 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 03/17!2014 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in FDF format 03126!2013 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/10/2012 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/12/2011 — ANNUAL REPORT View imaae in FDF format 12/21/2010 -- AC View image in PDF format 04/06/2010 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/14/2009 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/22/2008 -- ANNUAL REPORT View irnage in PDF format 07/19/2007 —.ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/14/2006 --.ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/26/2005 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/20/2004 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/14/2003 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/05/2002 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 08/06/2001 --ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 05/04;2000 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 03/08/1999 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 04/27/1998 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 05!20/1997 —ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/24/1996 --ANNUAL REPORT Vievv image in PDF format 06/28/1995 — ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format Detail by FEI/EIN Number http://search. sunbiz. org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/Search ResultDetail?i nqui rytype=Fei Number&directionType= I nitial&searchN ameOrd er-591091576... 2/3 I 6/25/2018 Detail by FEI/EIN Number http://search.sunbiz. org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/Search ResultDetail?i nquirytype=Fei Number&directionType=Initial&search N ameOrder-591091576... 3/3 VVi� CONSTRUCTION - CORPORATION FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION DECEMBER 31, 2017 and 2016 � McDonough CPA Solutions, PA TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANT'S REVIEW REPORT FINANCIAL STATEMENTS Balance Sheets Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income Statements of Stockholders' Equity Statements of Cash Flows Notes to Financial Statements SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION Schedules of General and Administrative Expenses Schedule of Earnings from Contracts Schedule of Contracts Completed Schedule of Contracts in Progress Page No. 1-2 3 4 5 6 7-17 19 20 21 22 MCDONOUGH • CPA SOLUTIONS, PA TAX & ACCOUNTING SERVICES INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANT'S REVIEW REPORT To the Stockholders of W&J Construction Corporation Rockledge, Florida We have reviewed the accompanying financial statements of W&J Construction Corporation (an S -corporation), which comprise the balance sheets as of December 31, 2017 and 2016, and the related statements of income and comprehensive income, changes in stockholders' equity and cash flows for the years then ended, and the related notes to the financial statements. A review includes primarily applying analytical procedures to management's financial data and making inquiries of company management. A review is substantially less in scope than an audit, the objective of which is the expression of an opinion regarding the financial statements as a whole. Accordingly, we do not express such an opinion. Management's Responsibility for the Financial Statements Management is responsible for the preparation and fair presentation of these financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America; this includes the design, implementation, and maintenance of internal control relevant to the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement whether due to fraud or error. Accountant's Responsibility Our responsibility is to conduct the review engagement in accordance with Statements on Standards for Accounting and Review Services promulgated by the Accounting and Review Services Committee of the AICPA. Those standards require us to perform procedures to obtain limited assurance as a basis for reporting whether we are aware of any material modifications that should be made to the financial statements for them to be in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. We believe that the results of our procedures provide a reasonable basis for our conclusion. Accountant's Conclusion Based on our review, we are not aware of any material modifications that should be made to the accompanying financial statements in order for them to be in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. 445 W. Merritt Avenue I Merritt Island, FL 52953 1 phone 321.453.6256 fax 321.455.2223 1025 N. Wickham Rd., Ste 110 1 Melbourne, FL 32940 phone 321141.4866 Supplementary Information The supplementary information, as listed in the table of contents, is presented for purposes of additional analysis and is not a required part of the basic financial statements. The information is the representation of management. We have reviewed the information and, based on our review, we are not aware of any material modifications that should be made to the information in order for it to be in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. We have not audited the information and, accordingly, do not express an opinion on such information. fu ck> ;,. ,/" CPA k(MhCva , P►4 Melbourne, Florida April 11, 2018 4 W&J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION BALANCE SHEETS December 31, ASSETS CU RRENT ASSETS Cash and cash equivalents Restricted cash Contract receivables Cost and estimated earnings in excess of billings on uncompleted contracts Other current assets Total current assets PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, NET LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY CURRENT LIABILITIES Accounts payable Accrued expenses Billings in excess of costs and estimated earnings on uncompleted contracts Advances received on contracts Current portion of long-term debt Total current liabilities LONG-TERM LIABILITIES Long-term debt, net of current portion STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY Common stock, 100 shares with no par value, authorized, issued, and outstanding Retained earnings 2017 2016 $ 104,277 $ 1,648,760 - 281,477 7,195, 804 5,361,288 78,479 48,245 15,200 349 71393,760 7,340,119 372,822 318,476 $ 7,766,582 $ 7,658,595 $ 5,595,689 $ 4,461,574 29,997 42,357 1,304,198 955,579 - 901,474 13,471 22,057 6,943, 345 6,383,041 43,031 36,602 2,900 2,900 777,306 1,236,052 780,206 1,238,952 $ 7,766,582 $ 7,658,595 3 See accompanying notes and independent accountant's review report. W&J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION STATEMENTS OF INCOME AND COMPREHENSIVE INCOME For the Years Ended December 31, CONTRACT REVENUES COST OF CONTRACT REVENUES Gross profit OPERATING EXPENSES General and administrative Depreciation and amortization INCOME FROM OPERATIONS OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE) 2017 2016 $ 43, 379, 762 $ 36, 665, 602 39, 774, 296 33, 809, 004 3,605,466 2,856,598 1,589,774 1,309,315 96,531 86,744 1,686,305 1,396,059 1,919,161 1,460, 539 599 402 (5,600) (17,152) - 8,835 7,745 9,707 2,744 1,792 1,921,905 1,462, 331 untant's review report. Z O_ F M cr O W N a °C W O J U 0 Z Y O u H o U LL OC 0 Z Z O WC U Lu W Q N Y O IAc O E E O tJ, me w P. In 0 i M M .--1 m O In 0 E F Ol r, M r•1 m m tD N ate+ O '3 m m n q w tD N 01 M v W a--1' v c-1 r -II N' O tn 'O > M L 4J E 4- a c u0 u E - Q u vs V� w -4 N Lna-i w M N W M r -I O m w M d C c M F, E 't0 •C d' tND w to m N w W IL 16 •_ o u Y C Ci t N N N' 3 O E Q o $A o O f6 H me w P. In 0 N vi 0 rq N m A v E v � Ol d d o E F v _ d G u z g 0 = Y Z O N m L , cu u g O •� �- Z o m Ln z u 5 m m m me W&J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS For the Years Ended December 31, CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES Net income Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities: Depreciation and amortization Proceeds from insurance settlement for property and equipment Gain on insurance settlement of property and equipment (Increase) decrease in assets: Contract receivables Cost and estimated earnings in excess in billings on uncompleted contracts Prepaid expenses Increase (decrease) in liabilities: Accounts payable Accrued expenses Advances received on contracts Billings in excess of costs and estimated earnings on uncompleted contracts Net cash provided by operating activities CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES Purchase of property and equipment CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES' Changes in restricted cash Net activity on line of credit Payment on loan from stockholder Payments on longterm debt Stockholder distributions Net cash used in financing activities NET INCREASE (DECREASE) IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, beginning of the year CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, end of the year 2017 2016 $ 1,921,905 $ 1,462,331 96,531 86,744 11,890 (8,835) (1,834, 516) (66,042) (30,234) 44,966 (14, 851) - 1,134,114 113,807 (12,360) (158,480) (901,474) 901,474 348,609 346,619 707,724 2,734,474 (127,508) (36,280) 281,477 (281,477) - (400,000) - (95,709) (25, 525) (18, 604) (2,380,651) (661,117) (2,124,699) (1,456,907) (1,544,483) 1,241,287 1,648,760 407,473 $ 104,277 $ 1,648,760 SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION Cash paid for interest $ 5,600 $ 17,152 NON-CASH OPERATING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES: Note payable for the purchase of a vehicle $ 35,704 $ 34,220 6 See accompanying notes and independent accountant's review report. Indian River County Purchasing Division 180027 th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 Phone (772) 226-1416 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: June 22, 2018 Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN OFFICES Bid Number: 2018059 Bid Opening Date: July 11, 2018 at 2:00 p.m. This addendum is released to provide minutes to the mandatory pre-bid meeting. The information herein is incorporated into the bid documents: Attachments: Pre -Bid Meeting Minutes Pre -Bid Sign In Sheet Itemized Bid Form (Section 00310) ********This Addendum MUST be acknowledged where indicated on the Bid Form and/or by return of this page with your proposal********* Company Name W&J Construction Corp. Name: Erik Costin Title: Vice President (Type / Printed) Authorized Signature: � S -L Date: 6/22/18 Telephone: 321.632.7660 Fax: 321.632.5927 Page 1 of I Nose 1 of 4 Board of County Commissioners a z 180127th Street c Vero Beach, Florida 32960-3365 �LORL4A Telephone: (772) 567-8000 Fax: (772) 778-9391 PRE-BID MEETING AGENDA JUNE 20, 2018, 10:00 A. M. INDIAN RIVER COUNTY ADMINISTRATION BUILDING Room Al -303 Building A Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Project Number: IRC -1744 Bid Number: 2018059 The following meeting notes set forth our understanding of the discussions and decisions made at the subject meeting. If no objections, questions, additions, or comments are received within two (2) working days from issuance of the meeting notes, we will assume that our understandings are correct. The project will move forward according to the bid plans and specifications and the understandings herein. INTRODUCTIONS/ SIGN IN SHEET This is a Pre -Bid Meeting; Attendance at this conference by all bidders is MANDATORY. Bidders must sign in before 10:00 A.M. to receive credit for attending. PROJECT DESCRIPTION. This project consists of the construction of ±8,400 S.F. of new office space and related facilities forthe relocation of Indian River County professional offices. The project includes new restrooms, storefront window replacement, electrical and plumbing work, raised floors and the replacement of rooftop air conditioning units. In addition, site related improvements will include new parking lot striping, curb repair, new external lighting and exterior building cleaning and repainting. CONTRACT DETAILS Bid opening: Wednesday, July 11, 2018 at 2:00 PM Contract time: 120 days to substantial completion 150 days to final completion Estimate: $1,025,000.00 (includes force account) Liquidated Damages: $1665.00 per day CONTACTS BIDDING PROCESS All communications concerning this bid shall be directed to Indian River County Purchasing Division at purchasing@ircgov.com PROJECT CONSULTANTS. Native Design Architecture, LLC F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1766 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Meetings\PreBid\IRC-1766-Pre-Bid Ager d..doc Pale 2 of 4 MBV Engineering, INC Treasure Coast Engineering, INC F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Meetings\PreBid\IRC-1744-Pre-Bid Agenda.doc OTHER COORDINATION City of Sebastian Building Department Sebastian Corners Roof Replacement (Project) PROJECT CONSIDERATIONS o Project includes a multitude of specialties, trades and components o Contractor shall submit a public safety plan, including separation of work areas from the general public, public parking areas, and public access points to the existing tenant spaces o Standard work hours 7AM to 5PM o Contractor must submit a request for proposed weekend or night work o Tennant finish selections • Staging and Material Storage o Storage areas must be preapproved by county staff o Portable restroom facilities • Addendums o Provide project related comments and questions ASAP. Response to comments and questions received within .10 days of the bid opening date will not be provided DISCUSSION Questions & Answers Andy Sobczak, Indian River County Infrastructure Project Manager, began the meeting with an attendee introduction and a description of the project which included a technical description by the County's consultants, Valerie Slack, Native Design Architecture, LLC, Todd Howder, MBV Engineering Inc., and Bryant Jenks, Treasure Coast Engineering, Inc. During the project description the following questions were asked by attendees: 1) A contractor asked about the project force account and the source of its funding. Andy Sobczak responded that the force account was a sort of contingency fund for unforeseen project related work, and the force account's source of funding is the County (for reimbursement of unforeseen work by the contractor). 2) A contractor asked about the lead time for the project's raised access flooring areas. Based on a discussion with the raised flooring manufacturer, the lead time is 6 to 8 weeks. Page 3 of 4 3) A contractor asked about the lead time for the County -supplied rooftop AC units to be changed out by the contractor. Chuck Belcher, County Facilities Manager, responded that the units would be available before the project starts. 4) A contractor asked about fire suppression in the Tax Collector's IT/Server room. County staff will work with the Contractor's fire sprinkler sub -contractor to implement sprinkler heads that are acceptable for use in the IT/Server room. Following the project description Andy Sobczak opened the meeting for additional questions, comments or concerns. The following issues were discussed: 5) A contractor asked about permit fees. Andy Sobczak explained that the permit application fees were paid by the County to the City of Sebastian. Based on a discussion with the City of Sebastian's Building Official, the additional permit review fees due are $5,252.29, based on a project construction value of $1,000,000.00. The contract price for the project will determine the ultimate permit review fee total, the $5,252.29 permit review fee is based on a project value (hypothetical contract value) of $1,000,000.00. 6) A contractor asked about the contractor's contractual obligation to provide project site insurance aside from the County's insurance. Insurance against building damage or destruction by the contractor, related to the contractor's work on the building, is the obligation of the contractor. The subject building's current insured value is $2,689,750.00. 7) A contractor asked about the bid form, whether it is a lump sum or itemized bid. Attached to this addendum is the project's itemized bid form (Section 00310). 8) A contractor asked about sales tax on project related items. Jennifer Hyde, IRC Purchasing Manager, responded that sales tax is the responsibility of the contractor. 9) A contractor asked about equipment provided for the Tax Collector's IT/Server room, and security cameras for the Tax Collector's office area. Dan Baker, IRC Tax Collector IT and Facilities Manager, responded that all equipment for the IT/Server room will be provided to the contractor by the Tax Collector, the contractors responsibilities include running wires to the IT/Server room. In addition, the security cameras will be provided and installed by the Tax Collector's staff or consultant. With no further questions, the meeting ended at 10:50 AM. On Wednesday 6/27/2018 at 10AM, an onsite meeting will be held to allow interested parties access into the Sebastian Corners Building, and the County will provide a bucket truck to allow access onto the roof. The building is located at 1919 US 1 in Sebastian Florida, 32958. Please contact the Purchasing Division if you have questions or need an alternative date to inspect the building and roof. Z. ceb- Mi xi��; .f .s� :JFK "" �� • , •. _' a foro i to 1i. iy" .10 Vo ra� �• �_ e C.I G N � �. m s.nMc s Frog. J ;u —` s 51 -t7 rS_ ti. max.. CS" lo PIN Z; a- Gt' ♦SRN +' '!�� 4 � � r tri �*»� ^ .� , •� exll tA ry n IV- J; -i -j 24 N: rm J �'xs'Pfd .('` A , •A^ X. Tyf�J- yf'S�5M3} a .. - �✓,+M-, �r 'to`y�,�`°`'•4"�'*�^�.;'0.F +' +`z�i O 'Y�Y'F} f 1wt'a�'STll y�l � iF �� + S 3-iti n S • f j � '"hM�tu ANX. .4r G:.�t y�i�,�iFb?�4 � � �j�'ti` 4f °',�r 51_ -� rs14 .�, V4 L^ n i LN P, _x NJ rj 4. da - lV} � a�� '''�X,~v1•f TIT co VY f Cl o- ism& SECTION 00310 - Bid Form PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS County Project Number: Bid Number: Project Address: Project Description: THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: IRC -1744 2018059 1919 US 1 SEBASTIAN, FLORIDA 32958 THIS PROJECT CONSISTS OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF ±8,400 S.F. OF NEW OFFICE SPACE AND RELATED FACILITIES FOR THE RELOCATION OF INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PROFESSIONAL OFFICES. THE PROJECT INCLUDES NEW RESTROOMS, STOREFRONT WINDOW REPLACEMENT, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK, RAISED FLOORS AND THE REPLACEMENT OF ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS. IN ADDITION, SITE RELATED IMPROVEMENTS WILL INCLUDE NEW PARKING LOT STRIPING, CURB REPAIR, NEW EXTERNAL LIGHTING AND EXTERIOR BUILDING CLEANING AND REPAINTING. INDIAN RIVER COUNTY 1800 271 Street VERO BEACH, FLORIDA 32960 1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 90 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of OWNER. 3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents, as set forth in the Agreement, that: A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged. Addendum Date Addendum Number 00310 -Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian ComersN-AdminlBid DocumentsWasterContractWaster Contract Documents\00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/16/01 B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress and performance of the Work. D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents. I. Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to Bidder. J. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted. 4.01 Bidder further represents that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization or corporation; Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and Bidder has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over OWNER. [The remainder of page intentionally left blank] 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-2 F:%Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS11744 Sebastian Comers%1-Admin\Bid DocumentsWlasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00310 -Bid Form REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/16/01 ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE PROJECT NAME:NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS IRC PROJECT NO. 1744 BID NO. 2018059 BIDDER'S NAME: .;'j_Umt Pnces� � x 001 SITE DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION - PROVIDED PER PLAN SET LS I 1 002 SIGNING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS - PROVIDED PER PLANS SET I LS 1 1 003 DIVISION 02 - INTERIOR DEMOLITION AND TEMPORARY PROTECTION LS 1 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 004 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE LS 1 033000 CONCRETE - CAST IN PLACE 005 DIVISION 05 - METALS LS 1 1 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055813 COLUMN COVERS 057000 DECORATIVE METAL 006 DIVISION 06 -WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES LS 1 1 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061600 SHEATHING 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064116 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064216 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 064219 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 066116 SOLID SURFAC FABRICATION 007 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION LS 1 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 074646 FIBER -CEMENT SIDING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 008 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS LS I 1 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 084113 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING 00310-3 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid DocumentsWasterContrachMaster Contract.Documents\Itemized Bid Schedule IRC 1744 ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE PROJECT NAME:NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS IRC PROJECT NO. 1744 BID NO. 2018059 B!DDER'C NAME' '1 �-y,.;� �a4 Ver ' mUriit' h„ Item No ,. Division Descr�pt3on. M; fl � M " Quanti Unit Price t Amoun' a s 09 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES LS 1 092216 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093013 CERAMIC TILING 095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096900 ACCESS FLOORING 099000 PAINT AND FINISH SYSTEMS SCHEDULE 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 INTERIOR PAINTING 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 099600 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 010 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT LS 1 113013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 011 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS LS I 1 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 012 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING LS 1 220000 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 220001 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS 221113 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM 221116 PLUMBING PIPING 221119 PIPE, VALVES & FITTINGS:POTABLE WATER 221316 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 221319 PIPE, VALVES & FITTINGS:STORM, SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN 223300 WATER HEATER: ELECTRIC 224000 PLUMBING 224001 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND SPECIALTIES 013 DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL LS 1 230000 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 230001 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 230553 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 230593 TEST AND BALANCE - PRELIMINARY 230594 TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL 230713 INSULATION, THERMAL 230900 THERMOSTAT 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPES, VALVES, AND SPECIALTIES 233113 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 233120 ROOF CURBS 233421 FANS, POWER ROOF VENTILATOR 233713 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 237413 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS:DIRECT EXPANSION 00310.4 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\Itemized Bid Schedule IRC 1744 ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE PROJECT NAME:NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS IRC PROJECT NO. 1744 BID NO. 2018059 B!DDER'S NAME: ,`ItemNo`ii� ivFsrohN�„�DescnpGon`�=��7� _ '�,+„,`„,,„,Pass, urs, ��. .,m,a- ;.Uni4EQuanti ,etJnitPhce�. ��.Amount „ 014 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL LS 1 1 260100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260519 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT 260526 GROUNDING 260533 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS AND BOXES 290923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262416 PANELBOARDS 262513 LOW VOLTAGE BUSWAYS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262817 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 265100 LIGHTING FIXTURES FORCE ACCOUNT 1 100,000.00 TOTAL BID AMOUNT (INCLUDING FORCE ACCOUNT) TOTAL TOTAL PROJECT BID AMOUNT IN WORDS NOTE: IF THERE IS A DISCREPENCY BETWEEN THE PLANS (SUMMARY OF PAY ITEMS) AND THE ITEMIZED BID SCHEDULE, THE BID DOCUMENTS WILL GOVERN. LS = LUMP SUM 1X1310-5 F:\Public Works\ENGINEER] NG DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid DoaimentsWlasterContract\Master Contract Documents\ltemized Bid Schedule IRC 1744 5.01 Bidder shall complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the price(s) contained in the Bid Schedule: A. The Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of the words. B. The Owner reserves the right to omit or add to the construction of any portion or portions of the work heretofore enumerated or shown on the plans. Furthermore, the Owner reserves the right to omit in its entirety any one or more items of the Contract without forfeiture of Contract or claims for loss of anticipated profits or any claims by the Contractor on account of such omissions. C. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on actual quantities provided. The quantities actually required to complete the contract and work may be less or more than so estimated, and, if so, no action for damages or for loss of profits shall accrue to the Contractor by reason thereof. D. Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with paragraph 11.03.6 of the General Conditions. 6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07.13 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement. 6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified, which shall be stated in the Agreement. 7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: A. Itemized Bid Schedule B. Required Bid security in the form of ; C. Sworn Statement under Section 105.08, Indian River Code, on Disclosure of Relationships; D. Sworn Statement Under the Florida Trench Safety Act; E. Qualifications Questionnaire; F. List of Subcontractors 8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings indicated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. SUBMITTED on , 20_ State Contractor License No 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-6 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PR6JECTS\1744 Sebastian ComerW-Admin\Bid Dowments\MasterContractWaster Contract Documents\00310 -Bid Form REV 04-07.doc If Bidder is: An Individual Name (typed or printed): By: (SEAL) (Individual's signature) Doing business as: Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: Email: A Partnership Partnership Name: By: (Signature of general partner — attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: Email: A Corporation (SEAL) Corporation Name: (SEAL) State of Incorporation: Type (General Business, Professional, Service, Limited Liability): By: (Signature — attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: (CORPORATE SEAL) Attest (Signature of Corporate Secretary) Business address: Phone No.: Email: Date of Qualification to do business is A Joint Venture 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-7 F:\Public WorksXENGINEERING DNISION PROJECTW744 Sebastian Comers\t-Admin\Bid DocumentsXMasterContractXMaster Contract Documents\00310 - Bid Form REV Joint Venture Name: (SEAL) By: (Signature of joint venture partner -- attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: Business address: Phone No.: Email: Joint Venture Name: FAX No.: By: (Signature — attach evidence of authority to sign) Name (typed or printed): Title: Business address: Phone No.: FAX No.: Email: Phone and FAX Number, and Address for receipt of official communications: (SEAL) (Each joint venturor must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.) * * END OF SECTION * * 00310 - Bid Form REV 04-07 00310-8 F:\Public WorkstENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-AdminOd DocumentsWlasterContractVAaster Contract Documents\00310 -Bid Form REV 04-07.doc Indian River County Purchasing Division 180027 1h Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 Phone (772) 226-1416 ADDENDUM NO. 2 Date: July 5, 2018 Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN OFFICES Bid Number: 2018059 Bid Opening Date: July 11, 2018 at 2:00 p.m. This addendum is released to answer questions received and modify the bid documents. The information herein is incorporated into the invitation to bid: Attachments: Trane HVAC Scope Updated plan sheets: SK -01, SK-02,SK-03 and SK -04 The following questions have been received: Question 1. Will you be bidding out the furniture for this project in a separate bid? If not, who will be handling the procurement for this project? Answer: 1. Procurement of furniture, fixtures and equipment (FF&E) is the responsibility of the contractor. Per the project's specifications, these items must be procured from American Business Interiors (ABI). Based on an estimate from ABI, please include an allowance of $80,000.00 in your bid to accommodate for the procurement of FF&E items. Question 2. Can you please provide information on the HVAC System that is being installed separately? Answer: The Trane scope is attached. Question 3. Based on current construction conditions we believe there is not any way to complete this project in 120 days. As you know, the industry is extremely booming at the moment. This has led to extended lead times on material as well as a shortage of qualified skilled workers that are in very high demand. We would recommend extending the construction time frame to 180 days to ensure a complete, competitive bidding process as well construction process. Answer: The bid documents are hereby modified as follows: The references to Contract length found in Sections 520 — Agreement (Public Works) and Section 550 — Notice to Proceed have been amended as follows: SECTION 520 — Agreement (Public Works) ARTICLE 4 — Contract Times Page 1 of 4 4.01 Time of the Essence A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 4.02 Days to Achieve Substantial Completion, Final Completion and Final Payment A. The Work will be substantially completed on or before the 148180th calendar day after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions on or before the 4-59 210th calendar day after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. SECTION 550 — Notice to Proceed You are notified that the Contract Times under the above contract will commence to run on . By that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. The contract has allocated 428 180 calendar days for Substantial Completion of this project and 1-59 210 calendar days for Final Completion. In accordance with Article 4 of the Agreement the date of Substantial Completion is and the date of readiness for final payment is Question 4. Building Elevation on sheet A5.1 shows 8 lites to the left of door 151. The floor plan shows 7. Which is correct? Answer: There are seven panels of storefront between Door 151 and the solid wall panel by Door 1018. The East Elevation on Sheet A5.1 will be revised accordingly in the Released for Construction plan set. Question 5. Are wood doors factory or field finished? Answer: The wood doors are factory finish. Alternatively, the millwork subcontractor may shop -finish both the doors and the micro -perforated wood veneer acoustical panels to the standard in the specifications. Field finish on site is not acceptable. Question 6. What is the RAF fascia panel? Answer: The RAF fascia panel is the raised access flooring manufacturer's standard closure for vertical faces that are not against a conventionally -constructed wall. In this project, they are only used in the Clerk of Court and Utilities areas where the ramp cuts through the access flooring on one side. The fascia panels should be used between the ramp and the adjacent access flooring, and at the vertical face of the platform that continues to the wall west of the raised area. This allows for enclosure of the cabling route from the IT Room. Question 7. We need some idea as to wall covering due to a large variation in price. Answer: Allow $30 per yard for vinyl wallcovering (material cost only). Question 8. Will alkyd Dryfall paint be acceptable for exposed structure ceilings? Answer: Alkyd dry fall paint will be acceptable, in semi -gloss, for the overhead exposed structure, hangers, and underside of roof deck. Question 9. Are electric locks required or will electric strikes be acceptable. There is a significant cost difference. Answer: 1. Door hardware on doors with access control devices will be coordinated with the County's security team, project manager, architect, contractor and hardware subcontractor. County to provide electronic devices to read key fob (or other security ID) to unlock doors with hardware groups 4, 5, 7, and 8. Contractor to route power to same. As County has not yet specified their selected hardware, Contractor shall provide pricing information for the more costly option. Price the coordinating door hardware and power/data supply option which will be more costly. Page 2 of 4 Question 10. Life safety plan shows "SR", which I take to be sensor, at two wall locations only. Are all other locks to have "sensors" built-in? What do they actually mean by "sensors"? Answer: The sensors allow access control override during a fire alarm event or power outage, allowing egress through the secured area without a key fob in case of emergency. They must meet the requirements of the 2017 edition of the Florida Building Code, Building, Section 101.1.9.9: Electromagnetically locked egress doors - Doors in the means of egress in buildings with an occupancy in Group A, B, E, 1-1, 1-2,1-4, M, R-1 or R-2 and doors to tenant spaces in Group A, B, E, I- 1, 1-2, 1-4, M, R-1 or R-2 shall be permitted to be locked with an electromagnetic locking system where equipped with hardware that incorporates a built-in switch and where installed and operated in accordance with all of the following: 1. The hardware that is affixed to the door leaf has an obvious method of operation that is readily operated under all lighting conditions. 2. The hardware is capable of being operated with one hand. 3. Operation of the hardware directly interrupts the power to the electromagnetic lock and unlocks the door immediately. 4. Loss of power to the locking system automatically unlocks the door. 5. Where panic or fire exit hardware is required by Section 1010.1.10, operation of the panic or fire exit hardware also releases the electromagnetic lock. 6. The locking system units shall be listed in accordance with UL 294. Question 11. Is there an electronic security integrator involved? Answer: Yes, there is an electronic security -integrator. Question 12. Who will provide the sensors, power supplies,.intercom, wiring diagrams? Answer: The County's security team will be responsible forthese items. Question 13. There are multi -point locks specified at a few locations. Is there a specific lock they were looking for, would a surface vertical rod exit device be acceptable? Answer: Surface mounted multi -point locks are not acceptable, and the locksets for Hardware Groups 5 & 8 must respond to access control system. Question 14. At a couple of locations it says "Elct lock w/override". What do they mean by "override"? Answer: The sensors allow access control override during a fire alarm event or power outage, allowing egress through the secured area without a key fob in case of emergency. Question 15. It looks like most of the building has electrified hardware on it. The exterior doors or the main interior doors being electrified isn't that big of a deal, 1 will have to add electrified hinges and power supplies to those hardware sets, which it does not call for but will be needed. My main question though is most all of the interior doors are calling for electrified locks, for instance hardware set 7 is calling for an electrified lock but it only states that it's a sensor with a storeroom lock. So I need to know if I need to bid that as an electrified lock which would have to have electrified hinges and power supplies or if that is just a storeroom lock with like a door position sensor? Big differences in price. Answer: The doors that separate public areas from private areas, including the Tax Collector's IT room and Safe Room (for example) have electrified hardware. Some internal doors, such as the door leading into the supervisor's office do not. Most doors included in the project have electrified hardware. Question 16. Can you give me the frame type and thickness for the interior glass @ A8.1 1,2,3 and 4? Page 3 of 4 Answer: Frame type is 3/4" deep brushed or satin finish stainless channel, with 1/2" thick glass. The glass can be divided up into sections with one panel per clerk, butt glazed between sections with. structural sealant. Ease all exposed edges at openings in glass. Brushed or satin clips may be used in lieu of continuous channel. Question 17. Elevations, at 8.13,4,and 5 look different than section 2 on A6.2. please clarify? Answer: Revised drawings are attached for the sheets in question, please see attached revised plan pages: SK -01, SK -02, SK -03 and SK -04. These revised plan pages will be included in the Released for Construction plan set. ********This Addendum MUST be acknowledged where indicated on the Bid Form and/or by return of this page with your proposal********* Company Name W&J Construction Corp. Name: Erik Costin Title: Vice President (Type / Printed) C Authorized Signature: / (, Date: 07/05/18 Telephone: 321.632.7660 Fax: 321.632.5927 Page 4 of 4 SK— 01 PROJECT SKETCH Native Desrgn Native Design Architecture, L.L.C. • 5103 Palmetto Avenue • Fort Pierce, FL 34982 -1(772) 519-1216 • vdsarch@gmail.com PROJECT NAME: North County Offices at Sebastian Corners Date: 03JUL2018 TOP OF CAP +V-0" A.F.F. 10 TOP OF WALL +5'-6" A.F.F. CLERK AISLE dk TOP OF COUNTER +3'-5" A.F.F. TOP OF RAISED ,k FLOORING (RAF) GLAZED. PARTITION. @a SUPERVISOR 112" .1'-0" +1'-0" A.F.F. TOP OF EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB +/-01-011 SK- 02 PROJECT SKETCH Native DeIsTgn Native Design Architecture, L.L.C. • 5103 Palmetto Avenue • Fort Pierce, FL 34982 • (772) 519-1216 vdsarch@gmaii.com PROJECT NAME: Date: 03JUL2018 North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 1120'11' ®� 1 ,UUP Le.e��, 1/411 -it-o" SK -03 PROJECT SKETCH Native De -5199 n Native Design Architecture, LLC. • 5103 Palmetto Avenue • Fort Pierce, FL 34982 • (772) 519-1216 • . vdsarch@gmaii.com PROJECT' NAME: North County Offices at Sebastian C< Date: 03JUL2018 $K-04 PROJECT SKETCH Native Des'`gn Native Design Architecture, LLC. • 5103 Palmetto Avenue • Fart. Pierce, FL 34982 • (772) 519-1216 • vdsarch@gmail.com PROJECT NAME - North County Offices at Sebastian Comers Date: 03JUL2018 NORTH SIDE OF SUPERVISOR ENCLOSURE A8.1 J 1{4"' -1'-o" Scope TALWE(Valid for 30 days from Proposal date) PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL PROPERTY OF Trane U.S. Inc. DISTRIBUTION TO OTHER THAN THE NAMED RECIPIENT IS PROHIBITED 2016 Trane All rights reserved Prepared For: All Bidders Job Name: IRC - Sebastian Corners Delivery Terms: Freight Allowed and Prepaid - F.O.B. Jobsite Date: June 27, 2018 Engineer: Treasure Coast Engineering Payment Terms: Net 30 Days Trane U.S. Inca is pleased to provide the following proposal for your review and approval. Scope and pricing based on mechanical plans dated 3-12-18. Tag Data - 3-10 Ton R -410A PKGD Unitary Cooling Rooftop (Qty: 5 Item Tag(s) P36 Description Model Number Al RTU -4, 5 4 Ton R -410A PKGD Unita CoolingRTU THC048F1 RDA A2 RTU -6, 7, 8 Ton R -410A PKGD Unitary Cooling RTU THC074F3RGA Product Data - 3-10 Ton R -410A PKGD Unitary. Cooling Rooftop All Units DX cooling High efficiency Microprocessor controls Convertible configuration Economizer Comparative Enthalpy 0-100% with Barometric Relief Hinged panels/2" Mery 8 Pleated Filters — 1 set Standard condenser coil with hail guard Professionally -applied condenser coil coating Through the base BACnet communications interface Condensate Drain Pan Overflow Switch Fan status switch Demand control ventilation CO2 field sensors (Fid) Wind -load rated curb adapter as required (Fld) Item: Al Qty: 2 Tag(s): RTU -4, 5 4 Ton 208-230/60/1 Electric heater - 10 kW @240,480,600 derate to unit voltage Item: A2 Qty: 3 Tag(s): RTU -6,7,8 6 Ton Dual compressor 208-230/60/3 Electric heater -18 kW@240,480,600 derate to unit voltage NOT INCLUDED: Installation, Rigging, Start up, Warranty beyond Trane standard other than listed above, Power Wiring, Smoke Detectors, External Vibration Isolation, Flat curbs, Pitched curbs, Disconnects, Extra Filters, Convenience Outlet, Coatings of any kind, any material or labor not mentioned above. J:IJobs146151871111Scope - IRC - Sebastian Corners 6-27-18.doc IRC - Sebastian Corners May 9, 2018 Tag Data — Mini Splits (Qty. 1 Item Ta I Qty Description Model Number 131 IT-AHU/CU-1 11 12 Ton Mini Split Systems PKAA / PUY - Size 24 Product Data - Split System Air Conditioning Units (Small) Item: 131 Qty: 1 Side Discharge Outdoor Unit — cooling only 2 Ton Nominal Cooling Capacity Professionally -applied condenser coil coating 208-230/1/60 volts 2 Ton Wall Mounted Ductless Air Handler Wireless Remote Programmable Controller (Fld) Condensate Pump (Fld) NOT INCLUDED: Installation, Line sets, Startup, Warranty beyond standard, Power Wiring, External Vibration . Isolation, Refrigerant Piping and Specialties, Disconnects on condensing unit, Coatings of any kind, any material or labor not mentioned above. Item X: - TRANE TRACER BAS SYSTEM PROPOSAL TIE INTO EXISTING COUNTY TRACER ES SYSTEM TRACER SC WEB ENABLED SYSTEM CONTROLLER • Time of Day Schedule Control • AHU Trends capability • Local & Remote Alarms Set-up • Web -based mobile access available ROOF TOP UNITS WITH BACNET CONTROLS, TYPICAL FOR 5 (RTU -4, 5, 6, 7, 8), INCLUDING: • Factory Mounted Controls • Space Temperature/Setpoint Adjustment Sensor • Return Air CO2 Sensor LABOR INCLUDING: • Engineering • Installation • Startup & checkout of BAS System (Mechanical System Startup is not included) • Cost allowance to assist TAB contractor (up to 4 Hrs) • Owner training (up to 4 Hrs) • One year warranty PRICE ASSUMES: • Based on Treasure Coast Eng. Mechanical drawings dated 3-12-18 • Specifications were not provided for review • Floor plan CAD files to be provided by Mechanical Engineer • Power Wiring to BAS Controllers by Div.26 • All wiring at or above 110/120 volts by Division 26 contractor. • Standard production & delivery cycles • All work to be performed during normal working hours • All Trane mechanical equipment (i.e., RTU's, etc.) • Plenum rated cable where concealed and allowed by code • 1/2" Minimum size conduit in exposed areas • System shall reside on the Customer's Network • Owner must provide static IP Address and access to the internet PRICE DOES NOT INCLUDE: • Provision, installation & commissioning of a Tracer ES System (Web -based Enterprise Building Management). New System to be integrated to the existing central BMS belonging to River County • Smoke control sequences, material or labor • Davis Bacon Wages for Electrical Low Voltage Installation FLD = Furnished by Trane U.S. Inc. /Installed by Equipment Proposal Page 2 of 6 Others IRC - Sebastian Corners May 9, 2018 • Dampers/damper actuators not integral to the HVAC equipment and/or associated wiring • Mechanical Equipment Startup • LEED commissioning and Enhanced Commissioning (Commissioning Agent) • Provision, installation, and wiring of Duct Smoke Detectors • Provision and installation of Control/ Motorized Dampers • Work, material, and/or labor associated with Low Voltage Wiring for any other system not specifically indicated above. • Provision, installation, and wiring of Firestats and/or freezestats • Work, material, and/or labor associated with Toilet Exhaust Fans. • Provision and installation of Thermostat Guards • Work, material, and/or labor associated with Ductless Split System or Mini -Split Units • Work, material, and/or labor associated with integrating other existing pieces of equipment into the Trane BAS, or integrating devices from the Trane BAS into any 3rd party BAS (if applicable) • Work, material, and/or labor associated with integrating new units into an existing BMS, if applicable • Work, material, and/or labor associated with Existing Air Handling Units including but not limited to their integration into the new Building Automation System • Provision, installation and wiring of a high speed Ethernet communications network or any of its components. • Excludes provision and/or programming of a dedicated front end workstation of any kind. o System interface to be achieved through standard internet browser • Any scope of work not specifically outlined above Sincerely, James DeSousa & Chris Cowling Trane U.S. Inc. — South Florida 6965 Vista Parkway North, Suite 11 West Palm Beach, FL 33411 Phone: (561) 683-1521 This proposal is subject to your acceptance of the attached Trane terms and conditions. FLD = Furnished by Trane U. S. Inc. / Installed by Equipment Proposal Page 3 of 6 Others IRC - Sebastian Corners May 9, 2018 TERMS AND CONDITIONS — COMMERCIAL INSTALLATION "Company" shall mean Trane U.S. Inc.. 1. Acceptance; Agreement. These terms and conditions are an integral part of Company's offer and form the basis of any agreement (the "Agreement") resulting from Company's proposal (the "Proposal") for the commercial goods andlor services described (the "Work"). COMPANY'S TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARE SUBJECT TO PERIODIC CHANGE OR AMENDMENT. The Proposal is subject to acceptance in writing by the party to whom this offer is made or an authorized agent ("Customer") delivered to Company within 30 days from the date of the Proposal. If Customer accepts the Proposal by placing an order, without the addition of any other terms and conditions of sale or any other modification, Customer's order shall be deemed acceptance of the Proposal subject to Company's terms and conditions. If Customer's order is expressly conditioned upon Company's acceptance or assent to terms and/or conditions other than those expressed herein, return of such order by Company with Company's terms and conditions attached or referenced serves as Company's notice of objection to Customer's terms and as Company's counter-offer to provide Work in accordance with the Proposal and the Company terms and conditions. If Customer does not reject or object in writing to Company within 10 days, Company's counter-offer will be deemed accepted. Customer's acceptance of the Work by Company will in any event constitute an acceptance by Customer of Company's terms and conditions. This Agreement is subject to credit approval by Company. Upon disapproval of credit, Company may delay or suspend performance or, at its option, renegotiate prices and/or terms and conditions with Customer. If Company and Customer are unable to agree on such revisions, this Agreement shall be cancelled without any liability, other than Customer's obligation to pay for Work rendered by Company to the date of cancellation. 2. Pricing and Taxes. Unless otherwise noted, the price in the Proposal includes standard ground transportation and, if required by law, all sales, consumer, use and similar taxes legally enacted as of the date hereof for equipment and material installed by Company. Tax exemption is contingent upon Customer furnishing appropriate certificates evidencing Customer's tax exempt status. Company shall charge Customer additional costs for bonds agreed to be provided. Equipment sold on an uninstalled basis and any taxable labor/labour do not include sales tax and taxes will be added. Following acceptance without addition of any other terms and condition of sale or any other modification by Customer, the prices stated are firm provided that notification of release for immediate production and shipment is received at the factory not laterthan 3 months from order receipt. If such release is received later than 3 months from order receipt date, prices will be increased a straight 1% (not compounded) for each one-month period (or part thereof) beyond the 3 month firm price period up to the date of receipt of such release. If such release is not received within 6 months after date of order receipt, the prices are subject to renegotiation, or at Company's option, the order will be cancelled. Any delay in shipment caused by Customer's actions will subject prices to increase equal to the percentage increase in list prices during that period of delay and Company may charge Customer with incurred storage fees. 3. Exclusions from Work. Company's obligation is limited to the Work as defined and does not include any modifications to the Work site under the Americans With Disabilities Act or any other law or building code(s). In no event shall Company be required to perform work Company reasonably believes is outside of the defined Work without a written change order signed by Customer and Company. 4. Performance. Company shall perform the Work in accordance with industry standards generally applicable in the area under similar circumstances as of the time Company performs the Work Company may refuse to perform any Work where working conditions could endanger property or put at risk the safety of persons. Unless otherwise agreed to by Customer and Company, at Customer's expense and before the Work begins, Customer will provide any necessary access platforms, catwalks to safely perform the Work in compliance with OSHA or state industrial safety regulations. 5. Payment. Customer shall pay Company's invoices within net 30 days of invoice date. Company may invoice Customer for all equipment or material furnished, whether delivered to the installation site or to an off-site storage facility and for all Work performed on-site or off-site. No retention shall be withheld from any payments except as expressly agreed in writing by Company, in which case retention shall be reduced per the contract documents and released no later than the date of substantial completion. Under no circumstances shall any retention be withheld for the equipment portion of the order. If payment is not received as required, Company may suspend performance and the time for completion shall be extended for a reasonable period of time not less than the period of suspension. Customer shall be liable to Company for all reasonable shutdown, standby and start-up costs as a result of the suspension. Company reserves the right to add to any account outstanding for more than 30 days a service charge equal to 1.5% of the principal amount due at the end of each month. Customer shall pay all costs (including attorneys' fees) incurred by Company in attempting to collect amounts due and otherwise enforcing these terms and conditions. If requested, Company will provide appropriate lien waivers upon receipt of payment. Customer agrees that, unless Customer makes payment in advance, Company will have a purchase money security interest in all equipment from Company to secure payment in full of all amounts due Company and its order for the equipment, together with these terms and conditions, form a security agreement. Customer shall keep the equipment free of all taxes and encumbrances, shall not remove the equipment from its original installation point and shall not assign or transfer any interest in the equipment until all payments due Company have been made. 6. Time for Completion. Except to the extent otherwise expressly agreed in writing signed by an authorized representative of Company, all dates provided by Company or its representatives for commencement, progress or completion are estimates only. While Company shall use commercially reasonable efforts to meet such estimated dates, Company shall not be responsible for any damages for its failure to do so. 7. Access. Company and its subcontractors shall be provided access to the Work site during regular business hours, or such other hours as may be requested by Company and acceptable to the Work site' owner or tenant for the performance of the Work, including sufficient areas for staging, mobilization, and storage. Company's access to correct any emergency condition shall not be restricted. Customer grants to Company the right to remotely connect (via phone modem, internet or other agreed upon means) to Customer's building automation system (BAS) and or HVAC equipment to view, extract, or otherwise collect and retain data from the BAS, HVAC equipment, or other building systems, and to diagnose and remotely make repairs at Customer's request. 8. Completion. Notwithstanding any other term or condition herein, when Company informs Customer that the Work has been completed, Customer shall inspect the Work in the presence of Company's representative, and Customer shall either (a) accept the Work in its entirety in writing, or (b) accept the Work in part and specifically identify, in writing, any exception items. Customer agrees to re -inspect any and all excepted items as soon as Company informs Customer that all such excepted items have been completed. The initial acceptance inspection shall take place within ten (10) days from the date when Company informs Customer that the Work has been completed. Any subsequent re -inspection of excepted items shall take place within five (5) days from the date when Company informs Customer that the excepted items have been completed. Customer's failure to cooperate and complete any of said inspections within the required time limits shall constitute complete acceptance of the Work as of ten (10) days from date when Company informs Customer that the Work, or the excepted items, if applicable, has/have been completed. 9. Permits and Governmental Fees. Company shall secure (with Customer's assistance) and pay for building and other permits and governmental fees, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper performance and completion of the Work which are legally required when bids from Company's subcontractors are received, negotiations thereon concluded, or the effective date of a relevant Change Order, whichever is later. Customer is responsible for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes to existing facilities. If the cost of such permits, fees, licenses and inspections are not included in the Proposal, Company will invoice Customer for such costs. 10. Utilities During Construction. Customer shall provide without charge to Company all water, heat, and utilities required for performance of the Work. 11. Concealed or Unknown Conditions. In the performance of the Work, if Company encounters conditions at the Work site that are (i) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated on drawings expressly incorporated herein or (ii) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those conditions ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the type and character as the Work, Company shall notify Customer of such conditions promptly, prior to significantly disturbing same. If such conditions differ materially and cause an increase in Company's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, Company shall be entitled to, and Customer shall consent by Change Order to, an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price, contract time, or both. 12. Pre -Existing Conditions. Company is not liable for any claims, damages, losses, or expenses, arising from or related to conditions that existed in, on, or upon the Work site before the Commencement Date of this Agreement ("Pre -Existing Conditions"), including, without limitation, damages, losses, or expenses involving Pre -Existing Conditions of building envelope issues, mechanical issues, plumbing issues, and/or indoor air quality issues involving mold/mould and/or fungi. Company also is not liable for any claims, damages, losses, or expenses, arising from or related to work done by or services provided by individuals or entities that are not employed by or hired by Company. 13. Asbestos and Hazardous Materials. Company s Work and other services in connection with this Agreement expressly excludes any identification, abatement, cleanup, control, disposal, removal or other work connected with asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl ("PCB"), or other hazardous materials (hereinafter, collectively, "Hazardous Materials"). Customer warrants and represents that, except as set forth in a writing signed by Company, there are no Hazardous Materials on the Work site that will in any way affect Company's Work and Customer has disclosed to Company the existence and location of any Hazardous Materials in all areas within which Company will be performing the Work. Should Company become aware of or suspect the presence of Hazardous Materials, Company may immediately stop work in the affected area and shall notify Customer. Customer will be exclusively responsible for taking any and all action necessary to correct the condition in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. Customer shall be exclusively responsible for and, to the fullest extent permitted by law, shall indemnify and hold harmless Company (including its employees, agents and subcontractors) from and against any loss, claim, liability, fees, penalties, injury (including death) or liability of any nature, and the payment thereof arising out of or relating to any Hazardous Materials on or about the Work site, not brought onto the Work site by Company. Company shall be required to resume performance of the Work in the affected area only in the absence of Hazardous Materials or when the affected area has been rendered harmless. In no event shall Company be obligated to transport or handle Hazardous Materials, provide any notices to any governmental agency, or examine the Work site for the presence of Hazardous Materials. 14. Force Majeure. Company's duty to perform under this Agreement is contingent upon the non-occurrence of an Event of Force Majeure. If Company shall be unable to carry out any material obligation under this Agreement due to an Event of Force Majeure, this Agreement shall at Company's election (i) remain in effect but Company's obligations shall be suspended until the uncontrollable event terminates or (ii) be terminated upon 10 days notice to Customer, in which event Customer shall pay Company for all parts of the Work furnished to the date of termination. An "Event of Force Majeure" shall mean any cause or event beyond the control of Company. Without limiting FLD = Furnished by Trane U. S. Inc. / Installed by Equipment Proposal Page 4 of 6 Others IRC - Sebastian Corners May 9, 2018 the foregoing, "Event of Force Majeure" includes: acts of God; acts of terrorism, war or the public enemy; flood; earthquake; tomado; storm; fire; civil disobedience; pandemic insurrections; riots; labor/labour disputes; labor/labour or material shortages; sabotage; restraint by court order or public authority (whether valid or invalid), and action or non-action by or inability to obtain or keep in force the necessary governmental authorizations, permits, licenses, certificates or approvals if not caused by Company; and the requirements of any applicable government in any manner that diverts either the material or the finished product to the direct or indirect benefit of the government. 15. Customer's Breach. Each of the following events or conditions shall constitute a breach by Customer and shall give Company the right, without an election of remedies, to terminate this Agreement or suspend performance by delivery of written notice: (1) Any failure by Customer to pay amounts when due; or (2) any general assignment by Customer for the benefit of its creditors, or if Customer becomes bankrupt or insolvent or takes the benefit of any statute for bankrupt or insolvent debtors, or makes or proposes to make any proposal or arrangement with creditors, or if any steps are taken for the winding up or other termination of Customer or the liquidation of its assets, or if a trustee, receiver, or similar person is appointed over any of the assets or interests of Customer; (3) Any representation or warranty furnished by Customer in this Agreement is false or misleading in any material respect when made; or (4) Any failure by Customer to perform or comply with any material provision of this Agreement. Customer shall be liable to Company for all Work furnished to date and all damages sustained by Company (including lost profit and overhead). 16. Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Company and Customer shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless each other from any and all claims, actions, costs, expenses, damages and liabilities, including reasonable attorneys' fees, resulting from death or bodily injury or damage to real or tangible personal property, to the extent caused by the negligence or misconduct of their respective employees or other authorized agents in connection with their activities within the scope of this Agreement. Neither party shall indemnify the other against claims, damages, expenses or liabilities to the extent attributable to the acts or omissions of the other party. If the parties are both at fault, the obligation to indemnify shall be proportional to their relative fault. The duty to indemnify will continue in full force and effect, notwithstanding the expiration or early termination hereof, with respect to any claims based on facts or conditions that occurred prior to expiration or termination. 17. Limitation of Liability. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT SHALL COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOST DATA, LOST REVENUE, LOST PROFITS, LOST DOLLAR SAVINGS, OR LOST ENERGY USE SAVINGS, EVEN IF A PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF SUCH POSSIBLE DAMAGES OR IF SAME WERE REASONABLY FORESEEABLE AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CAUSE OF ACTION IS FRAMED IN CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, ANY OTHER TORT, WARRANTY, STRICT LIABILITY, OR PRODUCT LIABILITY). In no event will Company's liability in connection with the provision of products or services or otherwise under this Agreement exceed the entire amount paid to Company by Customer under this Agreement. 18. Patent Indemnity. Company shall protect and indemnify Customer from and against all claims, damages, judgments and loss arising from infringement or alleged infringement of any United States patent by any of the goods manufactured by Company and delivered hereunder, provided that in the event of suit or threat of suit for patent infringement, Company shall promptly be notified and given full opportunity to negotiate a settlement. Company does not warrant against infringement by reason of Customer's design of the articles or the use thereof in combination with other materials or in the operation of any process. In the event of litigation, Customer agrees to reasonably cooperate with Company. in connection with any proceeding under the provisions of this Section, all parties concerned shall be entitled to be represented by counsel at their own expense. 19. Limited Warranty. Company warrants for a period of 12 months from the date of substantial completion ("Warranty Period") commercial equipment manufactured and installed by Company against failure due to defects in material and manufacture and that the labor/labour furnished is warranted to have been properly performed (the "Limited Warranty'). Trane equipment sold on an uninstalled basis is warranted in accordance with Company's standard warranty for supplied equipment. Product manufactured by Company that includes required startup and is sold in North America will not be warranted by Company unless Company performs the product start-up. Substantial completion shall be the earlier of the date that the Work is sufficiently complete so that the Work can be utilized for its intended use or the date that Customer receives beneficial use of the Work. If such defect is discovered within the Warranty Period, Company will correct the defect or furnish replacement equipment (or, at its option, parts therefor) and, if said equipment was installed pursuant hereto, labor/labour associated with the replacement of parts or equipment not conforming to this Limited Warranty. Defects must be reported to Company within the Warranty Period. Exclusions from this Limited Warranty include damage or failure arising from: wear and tear; corrosion, erosion, deterioration; Customer's failure to follow the Company-provided maintenance plan; refrigerant not supplied by Trane; and modifications made by others to Company's equipment. Company shall not be obligated to pay for the cost of lost refrigerant. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all warranties provided herein terminate upon termination or cancellation of this Agreement. No warranty liability whatsoever shall attach to Company until the Work has been paid for in full and then said liability shall be limited to the lesser of Company's cost to correct the defective Work and/or the purchase price of the equipment shown to be defective. Equipment, material and/or parts that are not manufactured by Company are not warranted by Company and have such warranties as may be extended by the respective manufacturer. THE WARRANTY AND LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIABILITIES, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR IN NEGLIGENCE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN LAW OR IN FACT, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND/OR OTHERS ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR TRADE. COMPANY MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING PREVENTION BY THE WORK, OR ANY COMPONENT THEREOF, OF MOLD/MOULD, FUNGUS, BACTERIA, MICROBIAL GROWTH, OR ANY OTHER CONTAMINATES. COMPANY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IF THE WORK OR ANY COMPONENT THEREOF IS USED TO PREVENT OR INHIBIT THE GROWTH OF SUCH MATERIALS. 20. Insurance. Company agrees to maintain the following insurance while the Work is being performed with limits not less than shown below and will, upon request from Customer, provide a Certificate of evidencing the following coverage: Commercial General Liability $2,000,000 per occurrence Automobile Liability $2,000,000 CSL Workers Compensation Statutory Limits If Customer has requested to be named as an additional insured under Company's insurance policy, Company will do so but only subject to Company's manuscript additional insured endorsement under its primary Commercial General Liability policies. In no event does Company waive its right of subrogation. 21. Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period. Except as to warranty claims, as may be applicable, any applicable statutes of limitation for acts or failures to act shall commence to run, and any alleged cause of action stemming therefrom shall be deemed to have accrued, in any and all events not later than the last date that Company or its subcontractors physically performed work on the project site. 22. General. Except as provided below, to the maximum extent provided by law, this Agreement is made and shall be interpreted and enforced in accordance with the laws of the state or province in which the Work is performed, without regard to choice of law principles which might otherwise call for the application of a different state's or province's law. Any dispute arising under or relating to this Agreement that is not disposed of by agreement shall be decided by litigation in a court of competentjurisdiction located in the state or province in which the Work is performed. Any action or suit arising out of or related to this Agreement must be commenced within one year after the cause of action has accrued. To the extent the Work site is owned and/or operated by any agency of the Federal Government, determination of any substantive issue of law shall be according to the Federal common law of Government contracts as enunciated and applied by Federal judicial bodies and boards of contract appeals of the Federal Government. This Agreement contains all of the agreements, representations and understandings of the parties and supersedes all previous understandings, commitments or agreements, oral or written, related to the subject matter hereof. This Agreement may not be amended, modified or terminated except by a writing signed by the parties hereto. No documents shall be incorporated herein by reference except to the extent Company is a signatory thereon. If any term or condition of this Agreement is invalid, illegal or incapable of being enforced by any rule of law, all other terms and conditions of this Agreement will nevertheless remain in full force and effect as long as the economic or legal substance of the transaction contemplated hereby is not affected in a manner adverse to any party hereto. Customer may not assign, transfer, or convey this Agreement, or any part hereof, or its right, title or interest herein, without the written consent of the Company. Subject to the foregoing, this Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of Customer's permitted successors and assigns. This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts, each of which when executed shall be deemed to be an original, but all together shall constitute but one and the same Agreement. A fully executed facsimile copy hereof or the several counterparts shall suffice as an original. 23. Equal Employment Opportunity/Affirmative Action Clause. Company is a federal contractor that complies fully with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the applicable regulations contained in 41 C.F.R. Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 29 U.S.C. Section 793 and the applicable regulations contained in 41 C.F.R. Part 60-741; and 38 U.S.C. Section 4212 and the applicable regulations contained in 41 C.F.R. Part 60-250 Executive Order 13496 and Section 29 CFR 471, appendix A to subpart A, regarding the notice of employee rights in the United States and with Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms Schedule B to the Canada Act 1982 (U.K.) 1982, c. 11 and applicable Provincial Human Rights Codes and employment law in Canada. 24. U.S. Government Work. The following provision applies only to direct sales by Company to the US Government. The Parties acknowledge that all items or services ordered and delivered under this Agreement are Commercial Items as defined under Part 12 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR). In particular, Company agrees to be bound only by those Federal contracting clauses that apply to "commercial" suppliers and that are contained in FAR 52.212-5(e)(1). Company complies with 52.219-8 or 52.219-9 in its service and installation contracting business. The following provision applies only to indirect sales by Company to the US Government. As a Commercial Item Subcontractor, Company accepts only the following mandatory flow down provisions: 52.219-8; 52.222-26; 52.222-35; 52.222-36; 52.222-39; 52.247-64. If the Work is in connection with a U.S. Government contract, Customer certifies that it has provided and will provide current, accurate, and complete information, representations and certifications to all government officials, including but not limited to the contracting officer and officials of the Small Business Administration, on all matters related to the prime contract, including but not limited to all aspects of its ownership, eligibility, and performance. Anything herein notwithstanding, Company will have no obligations to Customer unless and until Customer provides Company with a true, correct and complete executed copy of the prime contract. Upon request, Customer will provide copies to Company of all requested written FLD = Furnished by Trane U.S. Inc. / Installed by Equipment Proposal Page 5 of 6 Others IRC - Sebastian Corners May 9, 2018 communications with any government official related to the prime contract prior to or concurrent with the execution thereof, including but not limited to any communications related to Customer's ownership, eligibility or performance of the prime contract. Customer will obtain written authorization and approval from Company prior to providing any government official any information about Company's performance of the work that is the subject of the Proposal or this Agreement, other than the Proposal or this Agreement. 25. Limited Waiver of Sovereign Immunity. If Customer is an Indian tribe (in the U.S.) or a First Nation or Band Council (in Canada), Customer, whether acting in its capacity as a government, governmental entity, a duly organized corporate entity or otherwise, for itself and for its agents, successors, and assigns: (1) hereby provides this limited waiver of its sovereign immunity as to any damages, claims, lawsuit, or cause of action (herein "Action") brought against Customer by Company and arising or alleged to arise out of the furnishing by Company of any product or service under this Agreement, whether such Action is based in contract, tort, strict liability, civil liability or any other legal theory; (2) agrees that jurisdiction and venue for any such Action shall be proper and valid (a) if Customer is in the U.S., in any state or United States court located in the state in which Company is performing this Agreement or (b) if Customer is in Canada, in the superior court of the province or territory in which the work was performed; (3) expressly consents to such Action, and waives any objection to jurisdiction or venue; (4) waives any requirement of exhaustion of tribal court or administrative remedies for any Action arising out of or related to this Agreement; and (5) expressly acknowledges and agrees that Company is not subject to the jurisdiction of Customer's tribal court or any similartribal forum, that Customer will not bring any action against Company in tribal court, and that Customer will not avail itself of any ruling or direction of the tribal court permitting or directing it to suspend its payment or other obligations under this Agreement. The individual signing on behalf of Customer warrants and represents that such individual is duly authorized to provide this waiver and enter into this Agreement and that this Agreement constitutes the valid and legally binding obligation of Customer, enforceable in accordance with its terms. 1-26.251-10(0315) Supersedes 1-26.251-10(0614) FLD = Furnished by Trane U S. Inc. / Installed by Equipment Proposal Page 6 of 6 Others Indian River County Purchasing Division 180027 th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 Phone (772) 226-1416 ADDENDUM NO. 3 Date: July 9, 2018 Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN OFFICES Bid Number: 2018059 Bid Opening Date: UPDATED to -July 13, 2018 at 2:00 p.m. This addendum is released to provide additional information on finishes. The information herein is incorporated into the invitation to bid: The deadline for receipt of bids is hereby extended to July 13, 2018 at 2:00 p.m. Previous addenda included information regarding costs for the vinyl wallcovering, types of allowed paints, and bulk cost for furnishings. Floor coverings are: carpet (Shaw Unity 59416, color Sweet Spot 14365) and vinyl plank flooring (Interface Level Set, color Grey Dune A00405). The solid surface areas are Corian in high use areas (pubic counters) and laminate in private areas, and the in the restroom areas. Lastly, the veneer on the acoustical wall panels are SounclPly Acoustic Products microperforated wood veneer acoustical wall panels, developed and manufactured by Navy Island, Inc. These panels will be faced with Sawcut Oak veneer, stain color TBD, with Ulti-Matte Conversion Varnish. ********This Addendum MUST be acknowledged where indicated on the Bid Form and/or by return of this page with your proposal********* Company Name W&T Construction Corp. Name: Erik Costin (Type / Printed) Title: Vice President Authorized Signature: CJ� Date: Telephone: 321.632.7660 Fax: Page I of 1 321.632.5927 07/09/18 BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS VE s August 14, 2018 via Email W&1 Construction Corp. Attn: Mr. Erik Costin 1038 Harvin Way, Suite 120 Rockledge, FL 32955 NOTICE OF AWARD Reference: Indian River County Bid No. 2018059 North County Offices at Sebastian Corners Dear Mr. Costin: It is my pleasure to inform you that on August 14, 2018, the Board of County Commissioners awarded the above - referenced project to your company. The following documents are required before the applicable County department can issue a "Notice to Proceed" letter. 1. Public Construction Bond (unrecorded) in the amount of 100% of the contract amount ($1,775,911.00). 2. Two Signed Copies of Enclosed Agreement. 3. Certificate of Insurance indicating coverage required by Article 5 of the General Conditions (section 00700 of the bid documents) and Supplemental Conditions (Section 00800 of the bid documents). Certificate(s) must name Indian River County as additional insured and must provide for a 30 day Notice of Cancellation. In accordance with section 255.05(1)(a), Florida Statutes, you are required to execute a Public Construction Bond for the above referenced project. Please submit the Bond, the Certificate(s) of Insurance and two fully -executed copies of the enclosed agreement to this office at the address provided below no later than Wednesday, August 29, 2018. Failure to comply with the established deadline for submittal of required documents may be grounds for cancellation of award. . Thank you for your prompt attention and if you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact our office. Sincerely, 1enntf ' „ Purchasing Manager Office of Management and Budget • Purchasing Division 180027 1h Street, Vero Beach, Florida 32960•(772) 226-1416•Fax: (772) 770-5140 E-mail: purchasing@ircaov.com SECTION 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) TABLE OF CONTENTS Title Paqe ARTICLE1 - WORK.................................................................................................................................2 ARTICLE2 - THE PROJECT..................................................................................................................2 ARTICLE3 - ENGINEER .... :................................................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT TIMES......................................................................................................... 2 ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE.......................................................................................................... 3 ARTICLE 6 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES............................................................................................. 3 ARTICLE 7 - INDEMNIFICATION........................................................................................................ 5 ARTICLE 8 - CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS.....................................................................5 ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS............................................................................................ 6 ARTICLE 10 - MISCELLANEOUS.........................................................................................................7 [THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE WAS LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY] 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-1 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail CenteA00520 -Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc SECTION 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) THIS AGREEMENT is by and between INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, a Political Subdivision of the State of Florida organized and existing under the Laws of the State of Florida, (hereinafter called OWNER) and W&J Construction Corp. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 - WORK 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: This project consists of the construction of ±8,400 S.F. of new office space and related facilities for the relocation of Indian River County professional offices. The project includes new restrooms, storefront window replacement, electrical and plumbing work, raised floors and the replacement of rooftop air conditioning units. In addition, site related improvements will include new parking lot striping, curb repair, new external lighting and exterior building cleaning and repainting. ARTICLE 2 - THE PROJECT 2.01 The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is generally described as follows: Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS County Project Number: IRC -1744 Bid Number: 2018059 Project Address: 1919 US -1 SEBASTIAN, FLORIDA 32958 ARTICLE 3 — ENGINEER 3.01 The Indian River County Public Works Department is hereinafter called the ENGINEER and will act as OWNER's representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT TIMES 4.01 Time of the Essence A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 4.02 Days to Achieve Substantial Completion, Final Completion and Final Payment A. The Work will be substantially completed on or before the 180th calendar day after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-2 FAPurchasinglBidst2017-2018 FY (2018000)t2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions on or before the 210th calendar day after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 4.03 Liquidated Damages A. CONTRACTOR and OWNER recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 4.02 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. Liquidated damages will commence for this portion of work. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER 11&L5.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 4.02 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER $1,665.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 4.02 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment. ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE 5.01 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraph 5.01.A and summarized in paragraph 5.01.13, below: A. For all Work, at the prices stated in CONTRACTOR's Bid, attached hereto as an exhibit. B. THE CONTRACT SUM subject to additions and deductions provided in the Contract: Numerical Amount: $ 1,775,911.00 Written Amount: One million, seven hundred seventy-five thousand, nine hundred eleven dollars and zero cents ARTICLE 6 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions and the Contract Documents. 6.02 Progress Payments. A. The OWNER shall make progress payments to the CONTRACTOR on the basis of the approved partial payment request as recommended by ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act, Florida Statutes section 218.70 et. seq. The OWNER shall retain ten percent (10%) of the payment amounts due to the CONTRACTOR until fifty percent (50%) completion of the work. After fifty percent (50%) completion of the work is attained as certified to OWNER by ENGINEER in writing, OWNER shall retain five percent (5%) of the payment amount due to CONTRACTOR until final 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-3 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 -Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc completion and acceptance of all work to be performed by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8)(b), fifty percent (50%) completion means the point at which the County as OWNER has expended fifty percent (50%) of the total cost of the construction services work purchased under the Contract Documents, together with all costs associated with existing change orders and other additions or modifications to the construction services work provided under the Contract Documents. 6.03 Pay Requests. A. Each request for a progress payment shall be submitted on the application for payment form supplied by OWNER and the application for payment shall contain the CONTRACTOR'S certification. All progress payments will be on the basis of progress of the work measured by the schedule of values established, or in the case of unit price work based on the number of units completed. After fifty percent (50%) completion, and pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8)(d), the CONTRACTOR may submit a pay request to the County as OWNER for up to one half (1/2) of the retainage held by the County as OWNER, and the County as OWNER shall promptly make payment to the CONTRACTOR unless such amounts are the subject of a good faith dispute; the subject of a claim pursuant to Florida Statutes section 255.05; or otherwise the subject of a claim or demand by the County as OWNER or the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that where such retainage is attributable to the labor, services, or materials supplied by one or more subcontractors or suppliers, the Contractor shall timely remit payment of such retainage to those subcontractors and suppliers. Pursuant to Florida Statutes section 218.735(8)(c), CONTRACTOR further acknowledges and agrees that: 1) the County as OWNER shall receive immediate written notice of all decisions made by CONTRACTOR to withhold retainage on any subcontractor at greater than five percent (5%) after fifty percent (50%) completion; and 2) CONTRACTOR will not seek release from the County as OWNER of the withheld retainage until the final pay request. 6.04 Paragraphs 6.02 and 6.03 do not apply to construction services work purchased by the County as OWNER which are paid for, in whole or in part, with federal funds and are subject to federal grantor laws and regulations or requirements that are contrary to any provision of the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. In such event, payment and retainage provisions shall be governed by the applicable grant requirements and guidelines. 6.05 Acceptance of Final Payment as Release. A. The acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to the OWNER from all claims and all liability to the CONTRACTOR other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the CONTRACTOR for all things done or furnished in connection with the work under this Contract and for every act and neglect of the OWNER and others relating to or arising out of the work. Any payment, however, final or otherwise, shall not release the CONTRACTOR or its sureties from any obligations under the Contract Documents or the Public Construction Bond. ARTICLE 7 - INDEMNIFICATION 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-4 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 -Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 7.01 CONTRACTOR shall indemnify OWNER, ENGINEER, and others in accordance with paragraph 6.20 (Indemnification) of the General Conditions to the Construction Contract. ARTICLE 8 - CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 8.01 In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: A. CONTRACTOR has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. CONTRACTOR has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. CONTRACTOR is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. CONTRACTOR has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified, in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions and (2) reports and drawings of a Hazardous Environmental Condition, if any, at the Site which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions. E. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, if any, expressly required by the Contract Documents to be employed by CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto F. CONTRACTOR does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. G. CONTRACTOR is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. H. CONTRACTOR has correlated the information known to CONTRACTOR, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. I. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that CONTRACTOR has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-5 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 -Agreement (Public Works) REV 0614.doc J. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. This Agreement (pages 00520-1 to 00520-9, inclusive); 2. Notice to Proceed (page 00550-1 ; 3. Public Construction Bond (pages 00610-1 to 00610-3, inclusive); 4. Sample Certificate of Liability Insurance (page 00620-1); 5. Contractor's Application for Payment (pages 00622-1 to 00622-6 inclusive); 6. Certificate of Substantial Completion (pages 00630-1 to 00630-2, inclusive); 7. Contractor's Final Certification of the Work (pages 00632-1 to 00632-2, inclusive); 8. Professional Surveyor & Mapper's Certification as to Elevations and Locations of the Work (page 00634-1): 9. General Conditions (pages 00700-1 to 00700-44, inclusive); 10. Supplementary Conditions (pages 00800-i to 00800-11, inclusive); 11. Specifications as listed in Division 1 (General Requirements) and Division 2 (Technical Provisions); 12. Drawings consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered A0.0 through M2.1, inclusive, with each sheet bearing the following general title: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS; 13. Addenda (if applicable 1 — 3 ); 14. Appendices to this Agreement (enumerated as follows): Appendix A — Indian River County Fertilizer Ordinance 15. CONTRACTOR'S BID (pages 00310-1 to 00310-7, inclusive); 16. Bid Bond (page 00430-1), Qualifications Questionnaire (page 00456-1 to 00456-4, inclusive), List of Subcontractors (page 00458-1 ; 17.Sworn Statement Under Section 105.08, Indian River County Code, on Disclosure of Relationships (pages 00452-1 to 00452-2, inclusive); 18.Sworn Statement Under the Florida Trench Safety Act (pages 00454-1 to 00454-2, inclusive); 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-6 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 08-14.doc 19.The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: a) Written Amendments; b) Work Change Directives; c) Change Order(s); ARTICLE 10 - MISCELLANEOUS 10.01 Terms A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 10.02 Assignment of Contract A. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 10.03 Successors and Assigns A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 10.04 Severability A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. 10.05 Venue A. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Florida. Venue for any lawsuit brought by either party against the other party or otherwise arising out of this Contract shall be in Indian River County, Florida, or, in the event of a federal jurisdiction, in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Florida. 10.06 Public Records Compliance A. Indian River County is a public agency subject to Chapter 119, Florida Statutes. The Contractor shall comply with Florida's Public Records Law. Specifically, the Contractor shall: 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-7 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 -Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14. doe (1) Keep and maintain public records required by the County to perform the service (2) Upon request from the County's Custodian of Public Records, provide the County with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in Chapter 119 or as otherwise provided by law. (3) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the County. (4) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the County all public records in possession of the Contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the County to perform the service. If the Contractor transfers all public records to the County upon completion of the contract, the Contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the Contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the County, upon request from the Custodian of Public Records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the County. B. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, TO THE CONTRACTOR'S DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT, CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT: (772) 226-1424 publicrecordsAircgov.com Indian River County Office of the County Attorney 1801 27th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 C. Failure of the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall be a material breach of this Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or on their behalf. 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-8 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc This Agreement will be effective on Auq 14 , 2018 (the date the Contract is approved by the Indian River County Board of County Commissioners, which is the Effective Date of the Agreement). OWNER: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY By: r f C zo� Pet Bryan, C it By: 0�v— Jason V. Br wn, County Administrator APPROVEt9' AS TO FORM A LEGAL SUFFI I Y: By xylan Reingold, County Attorney Jeffrey R. Smith, Clerk of Court and Comptroller Attest: V v Deputy Clerk (SEAL) Designated Representative: Name: Richard B. Szpyrka, P.E. Title: Public Works Director 1801 27th Street Vero Beach, Florida 32960 (772) 226-1234 Facsimile: (772) 778-9391 CONTRACTOR: Construction Co .....;,'his;;•. 0ContracTor) _ :' .• (CORP O TE SEAL_) 'OUNTY'• ..,.. st Shery osia, Secretary & Treasures Address for giving notices: 1038 Harvin Way, Suite 170 Rnrklerigp FI 37955 License No. CGC34068 (Where applicable) Agent for service of process: Designated Representative: Name: Erik Costin Title: Vice President Address: 1038 Harvin Way, Suite 120 Rockledge, FL 32955 Phone: 321.632.7660 Facsimile: 371 637 5977 (If CONTRACTOR is a corporation or a partnership, attach evidence of authority to sign.) * * END OF SECTION * * 00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc 00520-9 F:\Purchasing\Bids\2017-2018 FY (2018000)\2018059 Sebastian Comers Retail Center\00520 - Agreement (Public Works) REV 06-14.doc MINUTES OF A SPECIAL MEETING OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF W & J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION Minutes of a Special Meeting of the Board of Directors of W & J CONSTRUCTION CORPORATION held at the offices of the corporation in Rockledge, Florida on July 1, 2013. The following director, being the sole director of the corporation, was present: NICK WITEK By his signature to these minutes at the end hereof, the sole director waived notice of this meeting and approved and consented to the business transactions set forth in these minutes. items: NICK WITEK was chairman and secretary of the meeting. The chairman stated that the meeting had been called especially to adopt the following 1. Appoint ERIK COSTIN as Vice President and Chief Operating Officer of the corporation. 2. Authorize ERIK COSTIN to have signature authority for the corporation and its bank accounts. The chairman then opened the meeting for consideration of the stated items of business. After discussion and upon motion duly made and carried, the above items were unanimously adopted. There being no further business to come before the meeting, the same was, on motion duly made and carried, adjourned. Jh"IW'' NICK WITEK, Chairman, Acting Secretary, and Sole Director SECTION 00550 - Notice to Proceed Dated TO: (BIDDER) ADDRESS: Contract For: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Project No: IRC -1744 IRC Bid No. 2018059 You are notified that the Contract Times under the above contract will commence to run on By that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. The contract has allocated 180 calendar days for Substantial Completion of this project and 210 calendar days for Final Completion. In accordance with Article 4 of the Agreement the date of Substantial Completion is and the date of readiness for final payment is CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under Article 5 and such insurance has been delivered to the OWNER and approved by the OWNER, nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow any Subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until all similar insurance required of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. All such insurance shall remain in effect until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article 13. Also, before you may start any Work at the Site, you must: (add other requirements, if applicable) By: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY (OWNER) (AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE) (TITLE) 00550 - Notice to Proceed ADD#3 00550-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bids\13id DocumentsWddendums\IRC-1744 Addendum#3_20180629\00550 - Notice to Proceed ADD#3.doc Rev. 05/01 3120180053239 RECORDED IN THE RECORDS OF JEFFREY R. SMITH, CLERK OF CIRCUIT COURT INDIAN RIVER CO FL BK: 3144 PG:„ 1724,8/29/2018 2:37 PM PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND Bond No. 9298151 (enter bond number) BY THIS BOND, We W&J Construction Corp. , as Principal and Zurich American Insurance Companya Corporation, as Surety, are bound to Indian River County , herein called Owner, in the sum of $1,775,911.00 , for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Principal: 1. Performs the contract dated August 1 2018 , between Principal and Owner for construction of North County Offices at Sebastian Corners , the contract being made a part of this bond by reference, at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Principal with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Principal under the contract; and 4. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance.,, with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's , obligation under this bond. August 23rd, 2018 c4 v;,a `; '� •;;`�c DATED ON Name of Princi' By (As A tornev in Zurich American Insurat� +^• ,� r.: •; (Name of SlireAr• _4 - 00610-3 00610 - Public Construction Bond FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00610 -Public Construction Bond.doc ,.,.. '! i t,A�I i .u1 e" t.it d� BK: 3144 PG: 1725 • ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation of the State of New York, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Maryland, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND a corporation of the State of Maryland (herein collectively called the "Companies"), by DAVID MCVICKER, Vice President, in pursuance of authority granted by Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute, and appoint Jeffrey R. JUNOD, Peter GONZALEZ and Cindy J. GOTHAM, all of Winter Park, Florida, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to make, execute, sea] and deliver, for, and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, and the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at its office in New York, New York., the regularly elected officers of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., and the regularly elected officers of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at its office in Owings Mills, Maryland., in their own proper persons. The said Vice President does hereby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of said Companies, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President has hereunto subscribed his/her names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 21st day of August, A.D. 2018. ATTEST: Assistant Secretary Dawn E. Brown ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND O _ ,� ..,,:� �� , �� • Lam'. Vice President David McVicker State of Maryland County of Baltimore On this 21st day of August, A.D. 2018, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, DAVID MCVICKER, Vice President, and DAWN E. BROWN, Assistant Secretary, of the Companies, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and acknowledged the execution of same, and being by me duly swom, deposeth and saith, that he/she is the said officer of the Company aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and the signature as such otTicer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. e Constance A. Dunn, Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 9, 2019.i'.i• 6' :. . POA -F 031-4436 �i��;�t i!," �"?`"yN`p`• ...1.-tt 7 L x .: iQi4r n' p ,, Q.. hiu:�.'e jr...n!"!t_i i'vi: BK: 3144 PG: 1726 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF THE COMPANIES "Article V, Section 8, Attorneys -in -Fact. The Chief Executive Officer, the President, or any Executive Vice President or Vice President may, by written instrument under the attested corporate seal, appoint attomeys-in-fact with authority to execute bonds, policies, recognizances, stipulations, undertakings, or other like instruments on behalf of the Company, and may authorize any officer or any such attomey-in-fact to affix the corporate seal thereto; and may with or without cause modify of revoke any such appointment or authority at any time." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Vice President of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, and the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that Article V, Section 8, of the By -Laws of the Companies is still in force. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 15th day of December 1998. RESOLVED: "That the signature of the President or a Vice President and the attesting signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any Power of Attorney ... Any such Power or any certificate thereof bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company." This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994, and the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: 'That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. INTESTIMOTyY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this L day of HL4 veSA 120 8;"AL Michael Bond, Vice President TO REPORT A CLAIM WITH REGARD TO A SURETY BOND, PLEASE SUBMIT ALL REQUIRED INFORMATION TO: Zurich American Insurance Co. Atm: Surety Claims 1299 Zurich Way Schaumburg, IL 60196-1056 STATE OF FLORIDA INDIAN RIVER COUNTY THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THIS ISATRUE AND CORRECT COPY OF THE ORIGINAL ON FILE IN THIS OFFICE. THIS ORIGINAL MAY HAVE RE ED INFORMATION AS ST�M IN FLORIDA STATUTE 1 i•ecooHr�. J H, E 4 + y t B �':: •°' DATE W&JCONS-01 DSMITH2 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE C01VFRA(.FS RFRTIFICATF NIIIMRFR- oClncin nu rnnoco o THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD DATE 08/31/2018 ) 08/31/2018 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Hub International Florida 3760 N. Wickham Road, Suite 2 Melbourne, FL 32935 CONTACT NAME: PHO(A/C, No, Ext): (321) 255-2220 FAX No):(321) 255-7770 E-MAIL ADDRESS: INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # X INSURER A: National Fire Insurance of Hartford 20478 5095130716 INSURED INSURER B: The Continental Insurance Company 35289 INSURER C: Valley Forge Insurance Company 20508 W&J Construction Corporation INSURER D:XL Specialty Insurance Company 37885 1038 Harvin Way #120 Rockledge, FL 32955 INSURER E: Columbia Casualty Company 31127 INSURER F: - C01VFRA(.FS RFRTIFICATF NIIIMRFR- oClncin nu rnnoco o THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSD SUBR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF MM/DD/YYYY POLICY EXP MM/DD/YYYY LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ❑X OCCUR CLAIMS-MADEIS X 5095130716 01/31/2018 01/31/2019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 PREM SESOEa occur ante $ 100'000 MED EXP (Any oneperson) $ 15,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY ❑ PRO -D LOC JECT GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2'000'000 PRODUCTS -COMP/OP AGG $ 2'000' 000 $ OTHER: B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED SCHEDULED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNEDPROPERTY AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY X 6023792443 01/31/2018 01/31/2019 COMaBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 fEaX BODILY INJURY Per erson $ BODILY INJURY Per accident $ DAMAGE Per accident $ PIP 10,000 B C X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE NIA 6023792457 602379246D 01/31/2018 01/31/2018 , 01/31/2019 01/31/2019 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 10,000,000 DED X RETENTION $ 10,000 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y/N O Mandatory in N R EXCLUDED? ❑ (Mandatory in and If yes, describe under PER OTH- X STAT T - ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,OOU E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1'000'000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 Leased/Rented 50,000 $1,000,000 per Claim 2,000,000 D E DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Equipment /Ded $1000 Pollution/Enviro UM00028344MA18A 6042787076 01/31/2018 01/31/2018 01/31/2019 01/31/2019 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/ LOCATIONS /VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Indian River County Florida is included as Additional Insured for General Liability & Auto Liability, when required in a written contract or agreement with the Insured. Should a policy be cancelled before the expiration date, a 30 days' notice is to be provided by the Insurer to the certificate holder. roorrcirw rr r ...-.-. v _I9tW-Zu15 AGORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD I IUIV Indian River County Florida 1801 27th St. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Vero Beach, FL 32960 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25 (2016/031 _ v _I9tW-Zu15 AGORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AC"R& EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) ��. 08/24/2018 THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAMED BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE ADDITIONAL INTEREST. AGENCY PHONE +1 407 894 5431 A1C No Ems• COMPANY HUB INTERNATIONAL FLORIDA American Zurich Insurance Company 1560 ORANGE AVE STE 750 WINTER PARK, FL 32789-5552 FAX No : +1 407 629 6378 aoDRIESS: tiffany.wos@hubinternational.com CODE: 02218774 SUB CODE: AGENCY CUSTOMER ID p: INSURED LOAN NUMBER POLICY NUMBER W&J Construction Corporation BRI 1993518 1038 Harvin Way EFFECTIVE DATE EXPIRATION DATE Suite 120 09/15/2018 09/15/2019 CONTINUED UNTIL Rockledge, FL 32955 TERMINATED IF CHECKED THIS REPLACES PRIOR EVIDENCE DATED: LOCATION/DESCRIPTION 1919 US Highway 1, Sebastian, FL 32958 THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. COVERAGE/PERILS/FORMS AMOUNT OF INSURANCE DEDUCTIBLE Builders Risk Coverage Form $5,000 Renovations and Improvements $1,775,911 All Covered Property at all Locations $1,775,911 RFMARKS CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. ADDITIONAL INTEREST NAME AND ADDRESS Indian River County MORTGAGEE ADDITIONAL INSURED 1800 27th St X LOSS PAYEE Vero Beach, FL 32960 LOAN a AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 27 (2009/12) 1993-2009 ORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD SECTION 00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Application for Payment No. For Work Accomplished through the period of through To: Indian River County (OWNER) From: (CONTRACTOR) Project No.: IRC -1744 Bid No.: 2018059 1) Attach detailed schedule and copies of all paid invoices. 1. Original Contract Price: $ 2. Net change by Change Orders and Written Amendments (+ or -): $ 3. Current Contract Price (1 plus 2): $ 4. Total completed and stored to date: $ 5. Retainage (per Agreement): % of completed Work: % of retainage: $ Total Retainage: $ 6. Total completed and stored to date less retainage (4 minus 5): $ 7. Less previous Application for Payments: $ 8. DUE THIS APPLICATION (6 MINUS 7): $ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION: UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY, the undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that (1) the labor and materials listed on this request for payment have been used in the construction of this Work; (2) payment received from the last pay request has been used to make payments to all subcontractors, laborers, materialmen and suppliers except as listed on Attachment A, below; (3) title of all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all Liens, security interests and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a Bond acceptable to OWNER indemnifying OWNER against any such Lien, security interest or encumbrance); (4) all Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents and not defective; and (5) If this Periodic Estimate is for a Final Payment to project or improvement, I further certify that all persons doing work upon or furnishing materials or supplies for this project or improvement under this foregoing contract have been paid in full, and that all taxes imposed by Chapter 212 Florida Statutes, (Sales and Use Tax Act, as Amended) have been paid and discharged, and that I have no claims against the OWNER. Attached to or submitted with this form are: 1. Signed release of lien forms (partial or final as applicable) from all subcontractors, laborers, materialmen and suppliers except as listed on Attachment A, together with an explanation as to why any release of lien form is not included; 00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev 00622-1 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00622 -Contractors Application for Payment - 03-10 rev.doc Rev. 05/01 2. Updated Construction Schedule per Specification Section 01310, and Dated STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF INDIAN RIVER By: Page 2 of 5 (CONTRACTOR — must be signed by an Officer of the Corporation) Print Name and Title Before me, a Notary Public, duly commissioned, qualified, and acting, personally appeared who being by me first duly. sworn upon oath, says that he/she is the of the CONTRACTOR mentioned above and that he/she has been duly authorized to act on behalf of it, and that he/she executed the above Contractor's Application for Payment and Contractor's Certification statement on behalf of said CONTRACTOR; and that all of the statements contained herein are true, correct, and complete. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 (SEAL) Please remit payment to: Contractor's Name: Address: is personally known to me or has produced as identification. NOTARY PUBLIC: Printed name: Commission No.: Commission Expiration: **************************************************************************************************** [The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally] 00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev 00622-2 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev.doc Rev. 05/01 Page 3 of 5 SURETY'S CONSENT OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR: The Surety, ,a corporation, in accordance with Public Construction Bond Number , hereby consents to payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR, for the amounts specified in this CONTRACTOR's APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT. TO BE EXECUTED BY CORPORATE SURETY: Attest: Secretary Corporate Surety Business Address BY: Print Name: Title: STATE OF FLORIDA (Affix Corporate SEAL) COUNTY OF INDIAN RIVER Before me, a Notary Public, duly commissioned, qualified, and acting, personally appeared , to me well known or who produced as identification, who being by me first duly sworn upon oath, says that he/she is the for and that he/she has been authorized by it to approve payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR of the foregoing Contractor's Application for Payment. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20 Notary Public, State of _ My Commission Expires: **************************************************************************************************** [The remainder of this page was left blank intentionally] 00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev 00622-3 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\Mastercontract\Master Contract Documents\00622 -Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev.doc Rev. 05/01 Page 4 of 5 CERTIFICATION OF ENGINEER: I certify that I have reviewed the above and foregoing Periodic Estimate for Partial Payment; that to the best of my knowledge and belief it appears to be a reasonably accurate statement of the work performed and/or material supplied by the Contractor. I am not certifying as to whether or not the Contractor has paid all subcontractors, laborers, materialmen and suppliers because I am not in a position to accurately determine that issue. Dated SIGNATURE CERTIFICATION OF INSPECTOR: I have checked the estimate against the Contractor's Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments and the notes and reports of my inspections of the project. To the best of my knowledge, this statement of work performed and/or materials supplied appears to be reasonably accurate, that the Contractor appears to be observing the requirements of the Contract with respect to construction, and that the Contractor should be paid the amount requested above, unless otherwise noted by me. I am not certifying as to whether or not the Contractor has paid all subcontractors, laborers, materialmen and suppliers because I am not in a position to accurately determine that issue. Dated SIGNATURE **************************************************************************************************** [The Remainder of This Page Was Left Blank Intentionally] 00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev 00622-4 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev.doc Rev. 05/01 Page 5 of 5 ATTACHMENT A 1. List of all subcontractors, laborers, materialmen and suppliers who have not been paid from the payment received from the last Pay Request and the reason why they were not paid (attach additional pages as necessary): 2. List of all subcontractors, laborers, materialmen and suppliers for which a signed release of lien form (partial or final as applicable) is not included with this Pay Request, together with an explanation as to why the release of lien form is not included (attach additional pages as necessary): 00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev 00622-5 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00622 - Contractor's Application for Payment - 03-10 rev.doc Rev. 05101 PROJECT NAME: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Project No. IRC -1744 Payment Application No. i �� F.\Publk Works\ENGINEERING DMSION PROJECTS\3744 Sebartlan Comers\Ildmle\Bid Documems\MarterComntt\Harter Carttntt Do[vmmts\00622{ontnttor's FPPIka 1-kor Payment Spreadsheet Eaample.d. SCHEDULED VALUE PREVIOUS APPLICATION BALANCE TO THIS PERIOD TOTAL COMPLETED % MATERIALS FINISH Item N. Description Unit Quantity Unit Price Amount QUANTITY TOTAL QUANTITY TOTAL QUANTITY TOTAL STORED QUANTITY TOTAL SUBTOTAL SUBTOTAL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 FORCE ACCOUNT 1 LS GRAND TOTAL TOTAL 0.00 D Q m 0 rn N � AMOUNT COMPLETED TO DATE $0.00 MATERIALS STORED TO DATE $0.00 SUBTOTAL MATERIALS STORED AND COMPLETED TO DATE $0.00 RETAINAGE AT 10 % TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED LESS RETAINACE LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENT AMOUNT DUE CONTRACTOR F.\Publk Works\ENGINEERING DMSION PROJECTS\3744 Sebartlan Comers\Ildmle\Bid Documems\MarterComntt\Harter Carttntt Do[vmmts\00622{ontnttor's FPPIka 1-kor Payment Spreadsheet Eaample.d. SECTION 00630 - Certificate of Substantial Completion Date of Issuance: 20 OWNER: Indian River County CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT FOR: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Project No.: IRC -1744 Project Description: This project consists of the construction of ±8,400 S.F. of new office space and related facilities for the relocation of Indian River County professional offices. The project includes new restrooms, storefront window replacement, electrical and plumbing work, raised floors and the replacement of rooftop air conditioning units. In addition, site related improvements will include new parking lot striping, curb repair, new external lighting and exterior building cleaning and repainting. OWNER's Bid No. 2018059 This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to all Work under the Contract Documents or to the following specified parts thereof: T And T OWNER CONTRACTOR The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, and that Work is hereby declared to be substantially complete in accordance with the Contract Documents on DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. This list may not be all- inclusive, and the failure, to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The items in the tentative list shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR within 30 calendar days of the above date of Substantial Completion. 00630 - Certificate of Substantial Completion REV 0407 00630-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00630 -Certificate of Substantial Completion REV 04-07.doc The responsibilities between OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties and guarantees shall be as follows: OWNER:- WNER: CONTRACTOR:- CONTRACTOR: The The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: [For items to be attached see definition of Substantial Completion as supplemented and other specifically noted conditions precedent to achieving Substantial Completion as required by Contract Documents.] This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is it a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Executed by ENGINEER on: ENGINEER: By: (Authorized Signature) (Date). CONTRACTOR accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on (date). CONTRACTOR: By: (Authorized Signature) OWNER accepts this Certificate of Substantial Completion on (date). OWNER: INDIAN RIVER COUNTY By: (Authorized Signature) * * END OF SECTION * * 00630 - Certificate of Substantial Completion REV 0407 00630-2 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin4d Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00630 -Certificate of Substantial Completion REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00632 - CONTRACTOR'S FINAL CERTIFICATION OF THE WORK (TO ACCOMPANY CONTRACTOR'S FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT) PROJECT NAME: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS PROJECT NO: IRC -1744 STATE OF _ COUNTY OF Personally before me the undersigned officer, authorized by the laws of said state to administer oaths, comes , who on oath says: That he is the CONTRACTOR with whom Indian River County, Florida, a political subdivision of said state, did on the day of ,20 , enter into a contract for the performance of certain work, more particularly described as follows: UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY, affiant further says that said construction has been completed and the Contract therefore fully performed and final payment is now due and that all liens of all firms and individuals contracting directly with or directly employed by such CONTRACTOR have been paid in full EXCEPT: Name Description/Amount who have not been paid and who are due the amount set forth. Affiant further says that: CONTRACTOR has reviewed the Contract Documents. 2. CONTRACTOR has reviewed the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. CONTRACTOR has completed the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. All equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the ENGINEER or his representative and are fully operational with no defects or deficiencies except as listed below. 00632-1 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00632 - Contractor's Final Certification REV 04-07.doc 5. The Work is complete and ready for final acceptance by the OWNER. 6. CONTRACTOR hereby certifies that it has no claims against the OWNER. (Corporate Seal) (Contractor) By: Subscribed and sworn to before me this _ day of , 20 Notary Public State of Florida at Large My Commission expires: + + END OF SECTION + + 00632-2 ' F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00632 - Contractor's Final Certification REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00634 - PROFESSIONAL SURVEYOR AND MAPPER'S CERTIFICATION AS TO ELEVATIONS AND LOCATIONS OF THE WORK (TO BE COMPLETED BY A FLORIDA PROFESSIONAL SURVEYOR AND ,MAPPER RETAINED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND TO ACCOMPANY CONTRACTOR'S FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT) I CERTIFY that I am a Florida Professional Surveyor and Mapper retained by: (Insert name of CONTRACTOR) Who is the CONTRACTOR for the following Project: PROJECT NAME: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS PROJECT # IRC -1744 I FURTHER CERTIFY that I have personally performed the survey work for the preparation of Record Drawings for the CONTRACTOR for this project or that such work was performed under my direct control and supervision. I FURTHER CERTIFY that all constructed elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents, except for discrepancies listed below. [Attach additional sheets as necessary] (SURVEYOR'S SEAL) CERTIFIED BY: Printed Name: Florida Professional Surveyor and Mapper Registration Number: Date Signed and Sealed by Professional Surveyor and Mapper: Company Name: Company Address: Telephone Number: 00634-1 00634 - Professional Surveyor and Mapper's Cert F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00634 -Professional Surveyor and Mapper's Cert.doc Rev. 06/01 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly By PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS COUNCIL AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America Construction Specifications Institute Copyright ©1996 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 American Society of Civil Engineers 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 TABLE OF CONTENTS Title Page ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY.................................................................................................... 5 1.01 Defined Terms.................................................................................................................................. 5 1.02 Terminology...................................................................................................................................... 7 ARTICLE2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS..................................................................................................................... 8 2.01 Delivery of Bonds.............................................................................................................................. 8 2.02 Copies of Documents....................................................................................................................... 8 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.................................................................. 8 2.04 Starting the Work.............................................................................................................................. 8 2.05 Before Starting Construction............................................................................................................ 8 2.06 Preconstruction Conference............................................................................................................. 9 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules........................................................................................................ 9 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE............................................................... 9 3.01 Intent................................................................................................................................................. 9 3.02 Reference Standards........................................................................................................................10 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies..........................................................................................10 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents.......................................................................10 3.05 Reuse of Documents........................................................................................................................10 ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS.....................................................................................................................................................11 4.01 Availability of Lands..........................................................................................................................11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions................................................................................................11 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions....................................................................................11 4.04 Underground Facilities......................................................................................................................12 4.05 Reference Points..............................................................................................................................13 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site....................................................................................13 ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE....................................................................................................................14 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds.......................................................................................14 5.02 Licensed Sureties andInsurers........................................................................................................ 15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance...................................................................................................................15 5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance...............................................................................................15 5.05 OWNER's Liability Insurance...........................................................................................................16 5.06 Property Insurance...........................................................................................................................16 5.07 Waiver of Rights...............................................................................................................................17 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds..............................................................................18 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace................................................................18 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of PropertyInsurer..................................................................18 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES.................................................................................................18 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence...................................................................................................18 6.02 Labor; Working Hours.......................................................................................................................19 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment.................................................................................................19 6.04 Progress Schedule...........................................................................................................................19 6.05 Substitutes and"Or-Equals".............................................................................................................19 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................... 22 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-2 R\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\I-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContractWaster Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13.doc 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties............................................................................................................... 22 6.08 Permits.............................................................................................................................................. 22 6.09 Laws and Regulations...................................................................................................................... 22 6.10 Taxes................................................................................................................................................ 22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas............................................................................................................. 22 6.12 Record Documents........................................................................................................................... 23 6.13 Safety and Protection....................................................................................................................... 23 6.14 Safety Representative...................................................................................................................... 24 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs................................................................................................... 23 6.16 Emergencies.....................................................................................................................................24 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples........................................................................................................... 24 6.18 Continuing the Work......................................................................................................................... 25 6.19 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee...................................................................... 25 6.20 Indemnification.................................................................................................................................. 26 ARTICLE7 - OTHER WORK.......................................................................................................................................26 7.01 Related Work at Site......................................................................................................................... 26 7.02 Coordination...................................................................................................................................... 27 ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES.............................................................................................................27 8.01 Communications to Contractor......................................................................................................... 27 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER............................................................................................................ 27 8.03 Furnish Data..................................................................................................................................... 27 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due.................................................................................................................. 27 8.05 Lands and Easements, Reports and Tests...................................................................................... 27 8.06 Insurance.......................................................................................................................................... 28 8.07 Change Orders................................................................................................................................. 28 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals................................................................................................... 28 8.09 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilities........................................................................................ 28 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition........................................................................... 28 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements................................................................................................ 28 ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION............................................................................28 9.01 OWNER'S Representative............................................................................................................... 28 9.02 Visits to Site...................................................................................................................................... 28 9.03 Project Representative..................................................................................................................... 28 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations...................................................................................................... 29 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work.......................................................................................................... 29 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work.................................................................................................................29 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments.............................................................................. 29 9.08 Determination for Unit Price Work.................................................................................................... 29 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ............................ 29 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilities............................................................ 30 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS................................................................................................... 30 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work.................................................................................................... 30 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work............................................................................................... 30 10.03 Execution of Change Orders.......................................................................................................... 30 10.04 Notification to Surety....................................................................................................................... 31 10.05 Claims and Disputes....................................................................................................................... 31 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-3 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid DocumentsWasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13.doc ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK..............................................31 11.01 Cost of the Work............................................................................................................................. 31 11.02 Cash Allowances............................................................................................................................ 33 11.03 Unit Price Work............................................................................................................................... 34 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES.............................................34 12.01 Change of Contract Price .......... :.................................................................................................... 34 12.02 Change of Contract Times.............................................................................................................. 35 12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control..................................................................................... 35 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control....................................................................................... 35 12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER'S and Contractor's Control..................................................................... 35 12.06 Delay Damages.............................................................................................................................. 35 ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVEWORK.................................................................................................................................36 13.01 Notice of Defects............................................................................................................................ 36 13.02 Access to Work............................................................................................................................... 36 13.03 Tests and Inspections..................................................................................................................... 36 13.04 Uncovering Work............................................................................................................................ 36 13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work.......................................................................................................... 37 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work...................................................................................... 37 13.07 Correction Period............................................................................................................................ 37 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work....................................................................................................... 37 13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work........................................................................................... 38 ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION....................................................................... 38 14.01 Schedule of Values......................................................................................................................... 38 14.02 Progress Payments........................................................................................................................ 38 14.03 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title................................................................................................ 40 14.04 Substantial Completion................................................................................................................... 40 14.05 Partial Utilization............................................................................................................................. 41 14.06 Final Inspection............................................................................................................................... 41 14.07 Final Payment................................................................................................................................ 41 14.08 Final Completion Delayed............................................................................................ 42 14.09 Waiver of Claims............................................................................................................................. 42 ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION.................................................................................42 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work......................................................................................................... 42 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause................................................................................................ 43 15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience.................................................................................... 43 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate.............................................................................. 43 ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION......................................................................................................................44 16.01 Methods and Procedures............................................................................................................... 44 ARTICLE17 - MISCELLANEOUS................................................................................................................................44 17.01 Giving Notice................................................................................................................................... 44 17.02 Computation of Times..................................................................................................................... 44 17.03 Cumulative Remedies.................................................................................................................... 44 17.04 Survival of Obligations.................................................................................................................... 44 17.05 Controlling Law...............................................................................................................................44 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-4 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\l-Admin\Bid DocumentsWasterContractWaster Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13.doc GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Contract Documents and printed with initial or all capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1. Addenda --Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents. 2. Agreement --The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment --The form acceptable to ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos --Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupa- tional Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid --The offer or proposal of a bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidding Documents --The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 7. Bidding Requirements --The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security form, if any, and the Bid form with any supplements. 8. Bonds --Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. 9. Change Order --A document recommend- ed by ENGINEER which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim --A demand or assertion by OWNER or CONTRACTOR seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract --The entire and integrated written agreement between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents --The Contract Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and ENGINEER's written interpretations and clarifications issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Approved Shop Drawings and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in this paragraph are Contract Documents. Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, and the like that may be furnished by OWNER to CONTRACTOR are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price --The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times --The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Substantial Completion; and (ii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final pay- ment. 15. CONTRACTOR --The individual or entity with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work --See paragraph 11.01.A for definition. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-5 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comets\1-Admin\Bid DocmnentsWaste[ContractWaster Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13.doc 17. Drawings --That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by ENGINEER which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by CONTRACTOR. Shop Drawings and other CONTRACTOR submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement --The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. ENGINEER --The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 21. Field Order --A written order issued by ENGINEER which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 22. General Requirements --Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifica- tions. 23. Hazardous Environmental Condition --The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 24. Hazardous Waste --The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulat- ions --Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all govern- mental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 26. Liens --Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 27. Milestone --A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Comple- tion of all the Work. 28. Notice of Award --The written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. 29. Notice to Proceed --A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 30. OWNER --The individual, entity, public body, or authority with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 31. Partial Utilization --Use by OWNER of a substantially completed part of the Work for the pur- pose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 32. PCBs --Polychlorinated biphenyls. 33. Petroleum --Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 34. Project --The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as may be indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 35. Project Manual --The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 36. Radioactive Material --Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 37. Resident Project Representative --The authorized representative of ENGINEER who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-6 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc 38. Samples --Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. Shop Drawings --All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for CONTRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work. 40. Site --Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by OWNER upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by OWNER which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. 41. Specifications --That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 42. Subcontractor --An individual or entity having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 43. Substantial Completion --The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 44. Supplementary Conditions --That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 45. Supplier --A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 46. Underground Facilities --All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 47. Unit Price Work --Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 48. Work --The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof re- quired to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 49. Work Change Directive --A written statement to CONTRACTOR issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subse- quently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 50. Written Amendment --A written statement modifying the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly construction -related aspects of the Contract Docu- ments. 1.02 Terminology A. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as allowed," "as approved," or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-7 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to ENGI- NEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. B. Day 1. The word "day" shall constitute a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. C. Defective 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recom- mendation of final payment (unless responsi- bility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance with paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The werd "furnish," when used in GenneGtlGn With seFAoes, materials, OF leRt, shall rneaR to supply and delive ai.dse.p.gin-es,ate.ials 9F equipmeRt t 4h Site (9F same other speGified lGGatiGR) Feady-fGF e , . ...e and i usableEIF epeFable cepditiGR installation 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide' is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of CONTRACTOR, "provide" is implied. E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Docu- ments, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds A. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten copies of the Contract Documents. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agree- ment or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Pro- ceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the ninetieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times com- mence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. CONTRACTOR's Review of Contract Docu- ments: Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-8 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\Mastercontract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Preliminary Schedules: Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRAC- TOR shall submit to ENGINEER for its timely review: 1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals which will list each required submittal and the times for sub- mitting, reviewing, and processing such submittal; and 3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, at least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and others as appropri- ate will be held to review for acceptability to ENGI- NEER as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.05.B. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until acceptable schedules are submitted to ENGINEER. 1. The progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's full responsibility therefor. 2. CONTRACTOR's schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals will be acceptable to ENGINEER if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. CONTRACTOR's schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are comple- mentary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part there- of) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-9 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifica- tions, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the stan- dard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or ENGINEER, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employ- ees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or instruction be effective to assign to OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents, or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Con- tract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, CONTRACTOR shall report it to ENGINEER in writing at once. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.04; provided, however, that CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy unless CON- TRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: (i) a Written Amendment; (ii) a Change Order; or (iii) a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: (i) a Field Order; (ii) ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; or (iii) ENGINEER's written interpretation or clarifi- cation. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. CONTRACTOR and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-10 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER: (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, including electronic media editions; and (ii) shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaption by ENGINEER. This prohibition will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work, or termination or completion of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude CONTRACTOR from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. OWNER shall furnish the Site. OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which CONTRACTOR must comply in performing the Work. OWNER will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in OWNER's furnishing the Site, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, OWNER shall furnish CONTRACTOR with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and OWNER's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations ,and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that ENGINEER has used in preparing the Contract Documents; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that ENGI- NEER has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized. CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementa- ry Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If CONTRACTOR believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which CONTRAC- TOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-11 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inher- ent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do SO. B. ENGINEER's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by paragraph 4.03.A, ENGINEER will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of OWNER's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise OWNER in writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an in- crease or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in para- graph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.08 and 11.03. 2. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: a. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR made a final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CON- TRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR's making such final commitment; or c. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written notice within the time and as re- quired by paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. However, OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or com- pleteness of any such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and CONTRAC- TOR shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data, 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-12 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc - b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including OWNER, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGI- NEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CON- TRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the ENGINEER in the preparation of the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR on Technical Data Authorized: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any Claim against OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700- 13 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc C. CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. D. If CONTRACTOR encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if CONTRACTOR or anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, CONTRACTOR shall immediately:, (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.16); and (iii) notify OWNER and ENGI- NEER (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). OWNER shall promptly consult with ENGINEER concerning the necessity for OWNER to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to CONTRACTOR written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by CONTRACTOR, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice CONTRACTOR does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special condi- tions, then OWNER may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and CON- TRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. OWNER may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by OWNER's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, OWNER shall indemnify and hold harmless CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGI- NEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this para- graph 4.06.E shall obligate OWNER to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, other consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by CONTRACTOR or by anyone for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. Nothing in this paragraph 4.06.E shall obligate CONTRACTOR to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negli- gence. I. The provisions of paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 are not intended to apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds 00700 - General Conditions REV 5.10-13 00700-14 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc B. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Com- panies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular -\570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CON- TRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.01.13, CONTRACTOR shall within 20 days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs 5.01.6 and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWN- ER or any other additional insured) which CON- TRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain. t9 eash additienal insared reafi ed ' the Supple 5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be per- formed by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: (i) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by CONTRACTOR, or (ii) by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, mainte- nance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.04 to be purchased and maintained shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700- 15 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Condi- tions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respec- tive officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations under paragraphs 6.07, 6.11, and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the CON- TRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when CON- TRACTOR may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter). 5.05 OWNER's Liability Insurance 5.06 Property Insurance 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-16 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MaslerContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc 5.07 Waiver of Rights D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchas- ing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-17 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in cover- age necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CON- TRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of OWNER or ENGINEER in the design or specification of a specific 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-18 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin0d Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. CON- TRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall assign a competent resident superintendent thereto who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on CONTRACTOR. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out, and construct the Work as required by the Contract Docu- ments. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to ENGINEER. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the General Re- quirements, CONTRACTOR shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All warranties and guarantees specifically called for by the Specifica- tions shall expressly run to the benefit of OWNER. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 6.04 Progress Schedule A. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptance (to the extent indi- cated in paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times (or Milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additional- ly will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order or Written Amendment in accor- dance with Article 12. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or -Equals" A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or -equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circumstances described below. 1. "Or -Equal" Items: If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-19 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc ENGINEER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substi- tute items. For the purposes of this paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment ENGINEER determines that: (i) it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, and; b. CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is no increase in cost to the OWNER; and (ii) it will conform substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. Substitute Items a. If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. CONTRACTOR. shall submit suffi- cient information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. c. The procedure for review by ENGI- NEER will be as set forth in paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The application shall certify that the proposed substitute item will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application will state the extent, if any, to which the use of the pro- posed substitute item will prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substan- tial Completion on time, whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item and whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substi- tute item in connection with the Work is sub- ject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified will be identified in the application, and available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized esti- mate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute item. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Proce- dures: If a specific means, method, technique, se- quence, or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to para- graphs 6.05.A and 6.05.6. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or -equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until ENGINEER's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." ENGINEER will advise 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-20 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc CONTRACTOR in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's ex- pense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. ENGINEER's Cost Reimbursement: ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.13 and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER approves a substitute item so pro- posed or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CON- TRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute. F. CONTRACTOR's Expense: CONTRACTOR shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or `or -equal" at CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to OWNER as indicated in paragraph 6.06.8), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom OWNER may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reason- able objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to OWNER in advance for acceptance by OWNER by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcon- tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. C. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcon- tractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR. E. CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontrac- tors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to commu- nicate with ENGINEER through CONTRACTOR. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifica- tions and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against OWNER, CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and all other individuals or entities 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-21 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, CONTRACTOR will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent 'permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees or agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple- mentary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto, such as plant investment fees. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compli- ance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work know- ing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to . all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consum- er, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. B. OWNER qualifies for state and local sales tax exemption in the purchase of all material and equipment. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of 00700 - General Conditions REV 5.10-13 00700-22 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work CONTRAC- TOR shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materi- als, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applica- ble Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall clean the Site and make it ready for utilization by OWNER. At the com- pletion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifica- tions, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGI- NEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equip- ment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applica- ble Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-23 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 -General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any. other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged be- tween or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protec- tion of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required be- cause of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. All submittals will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in the number of copies specified in the General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified perfor- mance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show ENGINEER the services, materials, and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. B. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. Each Sample will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, and the use for which intended and otherwise as ENGINEER may require to enable ENGI- NEER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.17.E. The numbers of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. C. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to ENGI- NEER as required by paragraph 2.07, any related Work performed prior to ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. D. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified: a. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and safety 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-24 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review and approval of that submittal. 3. At the time of each submittal, CON- TRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written com- munication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be Made on each Shop Drawing and Sample sub- mitted to ENGINEER for review and approval of each such variation. E. ENGINEER's Review 1. ENGINEER will timely review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals acceptable to ENGINEER. ENGINEER's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. ENGINEER's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of con- struction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the time of each submittal as required by paragraph 6.17.D.3 and ENGI- NEER has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CON- TRACTOR from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.17.D.1. F. Resubmittal Procedures 1. CONTRACTOR shall make correc- tions required by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CON- TRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall cavy on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.04 or as OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-25 FAloublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc B. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: observations by ENGINEER; 2. recommendation by ENGINEER or payment by OWNER of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Sub- stantial Completion by ENGINEER or any payment related thereto by OWNER; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; 5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do so; 6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by ENGINEER; 7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage: 1. is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and 2. is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of an individual or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemni- fied party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such individual or entity. B. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compen- sation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of CON- TRACTOR under paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants or to the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or. 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK 7.01 Related Work at Site A. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the Site by OWNER's employees, or let other direct contracts therefor, or have other work 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-26 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 -General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. B. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is per- forming the other work with OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the Site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends upon work per- formed by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects, or deficien- cies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR's Work. CONTRACTOR's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If OWNER intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, OWNER shall issue all communi- cations to CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. 8.02 Replacement of ENGINEER A. In case of termination of the employment of ENGINEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer to whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER. 8.03 Furnish Data A. OWNER shall promptly furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay Promptly When Due A. OWNER shall make payments to CONTRAC- TOR promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.02.0 and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-27 F:\PublieWorksNENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 -General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to OWNER's identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 Insurance A. OWNER's responsibilities, if any, in respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insur- ance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders A. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 10.03. 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. OWNER's responsibility in respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on OWNER's Responsibilities A. The OWNER shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, se- quences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OWNER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OWNER's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. If and to the extent OWNER has agreed to furnish CONTRACTOR reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy OWNER's obligations under the Contract Documents, OWNER's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 OWNER'S Representative A. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. 9.02 Visits to Site A. ENGINEER will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construc- tion as ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER, for the benefit of OWNER, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Con- tract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. B. ENGINEER's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibility set forth in paragraph 9.10, and particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's visits or observations of CONTRACTOR's Work ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGI- NEER will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The responsibilities and 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-28 F:\PublicWorksNENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 -General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc authority and limitations thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraph 9.10 and in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER designates another represen- tative or agent to represent OWNER at the Site who is not ENGINEER's Consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpreta- tions of the requirements of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER and CON- TRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a written clarification or interpretation, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Authorized Variations in Work A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compati- ble with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of a Field Order, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 9.06 Rejecting Defective Work A. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.07 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. C. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.08 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. ENGINEER will determine the actual quanti- ties and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR the ENGINEER's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by ENGINEER to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, subject to the provisions of paragraph 10.05. 9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work, the quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, and Claims seeking changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05, with a request for a formal decision. B. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this paragraph 9.09, ENGINEER will not show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to this paragraph 9.09 with respect to any such Claim, dispute, or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14.07) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by OWNER or 00700 - General Conditions REV 5.10-13 00700-29 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such Claim, dispute, or other matter. 9.10 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither ENGINEER's authority or respon- sibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcon- tractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, se- quences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibil- ity set forth in this paragraph 9.10 shall also apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident Project Repre- sentative, and assistants. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly,proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.04.8. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGI- NEER (or Written Amendments) covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.08.A or OWNER's correction of defective Work under paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-30 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc pursuant to paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regula- tions, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility. The amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims and Disputes A. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with supporting data shall be delivered to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accom- panied by claimant's written statement that the adjust- ment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). B. ENGINEER's Decision: ENGINEER will render a formal decision in writing within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. ENGINEER's written decision on such Claim, dispute, or other matter will be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR unless: 1. an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the time limits and in accordance with the dispute resolution procedures set forth in Article 16; or 2. if no such dispute resolution procedures have been set forth in Article 16, a written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER's written decision is delivered by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to the other and to ENGINEER within 30 days after the date of such decision, and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction within 60 days after the date of such decision or within 60 days after Substantial Completion, whichever is later (unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and CONTRACTOR), to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such Claim, dispute, or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. If ENGINEER does not render a formal decision in writing within the time stated in paragraph 10.05.13, a decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to have been issued 31 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any. D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to CONTRACTOR will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in para- graph 11.01.13. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-31 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, includ- ing costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CON- TRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER, who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this para- graph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary trans- portation, travel, and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in dis- charge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equip- ment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not con- sumed which remain the property of CON- TRACTOR. C. Rentals of all construction equip- ment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. e . Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Sub- contractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sus- tained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-32 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expressage, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. When the Cost of the Work is used to determine the value of a Change Order or of a Claim, the cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of the changes in the Work or caused by the event giving rise to the Claim. j. When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, the costs of premiums for all Bonds and insurance CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, princi- pals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR, whether at the Site or in CONTRACTOR's principal or branch office for general 'administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR's fee. 2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's princi- pal and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR's office at the Site. 3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR's capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of CON- TRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.6. C. CONTRACTOR's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, CONTRACTOR's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, CONTRACTOR's fee shall be determined as set forth in paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.6, CONTRACTOR will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Cash Allowances A. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has in- cluded in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that: 1. the allowances include the cost to CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and 2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional 00700 - General Conditions REV 5.10-13 00700-33 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. B. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Con- tract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, .initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaran- teed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Deter- minations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER subject to the provisions of paragraph 9.08. B. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be ade- quate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. C. OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accor- dance with paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of para- graph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.03 ); or 2. where the Work involved is not cov- ered by unit prices contained in the Contracl Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not cov- ered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in paragraph 11.01) plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in paragraph 12.01.C). C. CONTRACTOR's Fee: The CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under para- graphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.01.A.3, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be five percent; 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-34 RNPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 -General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc c. where one or more tiers of subcon- tracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent. of paragraph 12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcon- tractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.6; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the claim to the ENGINEER and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times (or Milestones) covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. 12.04 Delays Within CONTRACTOR's Control A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) will not be extended due to delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRAC- TOR. 12.05 Delays Beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's Control A. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. 12.06 Delay Damages A. In no event shall OWNER or ENGINEER be liable to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from: 1. delays caused by or within the control of CONTRACTOR; or 2. delays beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. B. Nothing in this paragraph 12.06 bars a change in Contract Price pursuant to this Article 12 to compensate CONTRACTOR due to delay, interference, or disruption directly attributable to actions or inactions of OWNER or anyone for whom OWNER is responsible. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-35 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which OWNER or ENGINEER has actual knowledge will be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Con- sultants, other representatives and personnel of OWNER, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR's Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. IT .,, WN0.1m W, MEMO C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of inspec- tion or approval. D. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for OWNER's and ENGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by CON- TRACTOR without written concurrence of ENGI- NEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncov- ered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.03.E shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable prompt- ness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGI- NEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. B. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by ENGI- NEER or inspected or tested by others, CONTRAC- TOR, at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspec- tion, or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all neces- sary labor, material, and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observa- tion, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-36 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 -General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such ' uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. 13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. CONTRACTOR shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGI- NEER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.07 Correction Period (u) Gerrest sash defesa o e o o eF,4-e�dereG,ve Week has been F ee+ed by OWNER, FeMOVA it frAm le '+ i+h 1.Ne�k +he+ + the Pre}est and Fep^.ase .c va cn�vvrn—cnG_� Ret ;d FeplaGe aRY damage to 9theF Work, to the #rte If CONTRACTOR, does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. B. eaFlieF date if 69 previded OR the Spe--ifinations or by 1A/�i++en Amen.+men+ C. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. D. CONTRACTOR's obligations under this paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final pay- ment, ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00100-37 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc ENGINEER as to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's recom- mendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 13.09 OWNER May Correct Defective Work A. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice from ENGINEER to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 13.06.A, or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may, after seven days written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph, OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, take possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, .OWNER's representatives, agents and employees, OWNER's other contractors, and ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants access to the Site to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. C. All Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph 13.09 will be charged against CON- TRACTOR, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, OWNER may make a Claim therefor as provided in paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. D. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies under this paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The schedule of values established as provid- ed in paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to ENGI- NEER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equip- ment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect OWNER's interest 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-38 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc therein, all of which must be satisfactory to OWNER. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge CONTRACTOR's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. ENGINEER will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CON- TRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on ENGINEER's observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in, accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.08, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. The conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's . being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment ENGINEER will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: (i) inspec- tions made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsi- bilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents; or (ii) that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR. 4. Neither ENGINEER's review of CONTRACTOR's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on ENGINEER to supervise, direct, or control the Work or for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Additionally, said review or recommendation will not impose responsibility on ENGINEER to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens. 5. ENGINEER may refuse to recom- mend the whole or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to OWNER referred to in paragraph 14.02.B.2. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-39 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Orders; c. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accor- dance with paragraph 13.09; or +erre .E)GG..F Fe Ge of a., of the events eRuFner- ated in aph 15.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due D. Reduction in Payment 1. OWNER. may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER because: a. claims have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's performance or furnishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling OWN- ER to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If OWNER refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER, OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. OWNER shall promptly pay CONTRACTOR the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when CONTRACTOR corrects to OWNER's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that OWNER's refusal of payment was not justified; the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by paragraph 14.02.C.1. 14.03 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title A. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Promptly thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefore. if ENGINEER GGnsiders the —1Ale„t sul3stantially- Geanplete, € GINEER will prepaFe and - d r_e to OWNER a tentative r1•f to f e h + « I Gempletien whish shall fix the date f Substa„t�} Gempletien. Therrre-shall he „«« erl te the r1•f + before final n eRt Q A,AICC ell .h..h11_1e..e seve.. ,+.,..s malice writte" ehieGtien +e ENGINEER as + .z.o.,s of the -Gertifisate-er attaehed-lost. I# - after sensidering suGhebieGtia,=rs, GIN G, that the oVeFk is not —substantially—Gemplete, F=Alf_IAICF=R ..A,ill Md+hmA 14 days af+eF hm•c f the in =R R9ti GONTRAGTOR teRtatffive in writing, stating the Feasens therefer. if, Gensideratien of WNER'sebjel3tm,s, ENGINEER ENGINEER will within said 14 days exeGete a„a deli..°. +e ll1 NFR r`/IAITGAr`Tlll7 a .+ f '+' FefleGtiR9 SUGh Granges { the «e. tati GeFtifiGate as ENGINEER her, , i +ified f+ + t m 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-40 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc B. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CON- TRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following conditions. 1. OWNER at any time may request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substan- tially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 2. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will promptly make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After CONTRACTOR has, in the opinion of ENGINEER, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guaran- tees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.12), and other documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment follow- ing the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.04.B.7; (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Lien 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-41 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satis- fied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CON- TRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien. B. Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to OWNER for payment. At the same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application for Payment to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminat- ing the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by CONTRAC- TOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing which are still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. CON- TRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. iR theta eRtr aGt P„oc of a i e)deRS*GR of FAY --the Go ytFaGt 00700-42 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\Mastercontract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc 15.02 OWNER May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. CONTRACTOR's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.04); 2. CONTRACTOR's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. CONTRACTOR's disregard of the authority of ENGINEER; or 4. CONTRACTOR's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in paragraph 15.02.A occur, OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if any) seven days written notice, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of -the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by OWNER arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by ENGINEER, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. C. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CON- TRACTOR from liability. 15.03 OWNER May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to CON- TRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to terminate the Contract. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items): 1. for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. for all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) in- curred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other eco- nomic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-43 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 -General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc A. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, eF OWNER fails fbF 30 days to pay CON TRACTOR ARY SUM fiRally d-e-teRmipe-d- to- be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.03. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, GF OWNER has hailed fn -.r 2-0 days to pa CONTRACTOR may, seven days after written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.04 are. not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making a Claim under paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping the Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Dispute resolution methods and procedures, if any, shall be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. If no method and procedure has been set forth, and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.09 and 10.05, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies avail- able hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warran- ties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or comple- tion of the Agreement. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 00700 - General Conditions REV 5-10-13 00700-44 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00700 - General Conditions REV 5- 10-13.doc SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS Article Title Article Number Introduction SC — 1.00 Defined Terms Sc — 1.01 Terminology SC — 1.02 Before Starting Construction SC — 2.05 Preconstruction Conference SC — 2.06 Coordination of Plans, Specifications, and Special Provisions SC — 3.06 Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC — 4.02 Performance, Payment and Other Bonds SC — 5.01 Certificates of Insurance SC — 5.03 CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance SC — 5.04 OWNER's Liability Insurance SC — 5.05 Property Insurance SC — 5.06 Waiver of Rights SC — 5.07 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds SC — 5.08 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace SC — 5.09 Labor; Working Hours SC — 6.02 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others SC — 6.06 Permits SC — 6.08 Cost of the Work Sc — 11.01 Test and Inspections SC — 13.03 OWNER May Stop the Work SC — 13.05 Correction Period SC — 13.07 Progress Payments SC — 14.02 Substantial Completion SC — 14.04 00800-i 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 IF:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc Final Payment OWNER May Suspend Work OWNER May Terminate for Cause CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate Mediation Liens SC — 14.07 SC — 15.01 SC — 15.02 SC — 15.04 SC —16.02 SC — 17.06 +++ END OF THIS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS INDEX +++ i 00800 -ii 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 HFAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS SC -1.00 Introduction These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1996 Edition) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions, which are not so amended or supplemented, remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. SC -1.01 Defined Terms SC -1.01.A.20. Delete paragraph GC 1.01.A.20 in its entirety. SC -1.02 Terminology SC -1.02.D.1, 2, and 3 Delete paragraphs GC -1.02.D.1, 2, and 3 in their entirety and insert the following paragraphs in their place: D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word "furnish" shall mean to supply and deliver services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install' shall mean to put into use or place in final position services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide" shall mean to furnish and install services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. SC -2.05 Before Starting Construction SC -2.05.C. Delete paragraph GC 2.05.0 in its entirety and insert the following paragraph in its place: C. Evidence of Insurance: CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required under Article 5 and such insurance has been delivered to the OWNER and approved by the OWNER, nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow any Subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until all similar insurance required of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. All such insurance shall remain in effect until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article 13. SC -2.06 Preconstruction Conference SC -2.06 Delete paragraph GC -2.06.A in its entirety and insert the following paragraph in its place: A. Immediately after awarding the contract, but before the CONTRACTOR begins work, the Project Manager will call a preconstruction conference at a place the ENGINEER designates to establish an understanding among the parties as to the work and to discuss schedules referred to in paragraph 2.05.13, procedures 00800-1 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, and maintaining required records. Utility companies and others as appropriate will be requested to attend to discuss and coordinate work. B. Per the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, the Contractor will certify to the Engineer the following: 1. A listing of on-site clerical staff, supervisory personnel and their pro -rated time assigned to the contract, 2. Actual Rate for items listed in Table 4-3.2.1 (see below), 3. Existence of employee benefit plan for Holiday, Sick and Vacation benefits and a Retirement Plan, and, 4. Payment of Per Diem is a company practice for instances when compensation for Per Diem is requested. Such certification must be made by an officer or director of the Contractor with authority to bind the Contractor. Timely certification is a condition precedent to any right of the Contractor to recover compensations for such costs, and failure to timely submit the certification will constitute a full, complete, absolute and irrevocable waiver by the Contractor of any right to recover such costs. Any subsequent changes shall be certified to the Engineer as part of the cost proposal or seven calendar days in advance of performing such extra work. FDOT Table 4-3.2.1 Item Rate FICA Rate established by Law FUTA/SUTA Rate established by Law Medical Insurance Actual Holidays, Sick & Vacation Benefits Actual Retirement Benefits Actual Workers Compensation Rates based on the National Council on Compensation Insurance basic rates tables adjusted by Contractor's actual experience modification factor in effect at the time of the additional work or unforeseen work Per Diem I Actual but not to exceed State of Florida's rate Insurance* I Actual *Compensation for Insurance is limited solely to General Liability Coverage and does not include any other insurance coverage (such as, but not limited to, Umbrella Coverage, Automobile Insurance, etc.). SC -3.06 Coordination of Plans, Specifications, and Special. Provisions SC -3.06 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph GC -3.05: SC -3.06 Coordination of Plans, Specifications, and Special Provisions A. In case of discrepancy, the governing order of the documents shall be as follows: 1. Written Interpretations 2. Addenda 3. Specifications 4. Supplementary Conditions to the General Conditions 5. General Conditions 6. Approved Shop Drawings 7. Drawings 8. Referenced Standards. B. Written/computed dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions. 00800-2 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 2FAPub1ic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc SC -4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC -4.02 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph GC -4.02.8: C. In the preparation of Drawings and Specifications, ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultants relied upon the following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the Site: N/A SC -5.01 Performance, Payment and Other Bonds SC -5.01.A. Delete paragraph GC -5.01.A in its entirety and insert the following paragraphs in its place: Within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contract Documents for execution, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a Public Construction Bond in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Price. 1. In lieu of the Public Construction Bond, the CONTRACTOR may furnish an alternative form of security in the form of cash, money order, certified check, cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit or a security as listed in Part II of F.S. Chapter 625. Any such alternative form of security shall be for the same purpose, and be for the same amount and subject to the same conditions as those applicable to the bond otherwise required. The determination of the value of an alternative form of security shall be made by the OWNER. 2. Such Bond shall continue in effect for one (1) year after acceptance of the Work by the OWNER. 3. The OWNER shall record the Public Construction Bond with the Public Record Section of the Indian River County Courthouse located at 2000 16th Avenue, Vero Beach, Florida 32960. SC -5.03 Certificates of Insurance SC -5.03 Delete the second sentence of paragraph GC -5.03 in its entirety. SC -5.04 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance SC -5.04 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph GC -5.04.8: C. The limits of liability for the insurance required by paragraph 5.04 of the General Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by Laws and Regulations: 1. Worker's Compensation: To meet statutory limits in compliance with the Worker's Compensation Law of Florida. This policy must include Employer Liability with a limit $100,000 for each accident, $500,000 disease (policy limit) and $100,000 disease (each employee). Such policy shall include a waiver of subrogation as against OWNER and ENGINEER on account of injury sustained by an employee(s) of the CONTRACTOR. 2. Commercial General Liability: Coverage shall provide minimum limits of liability of $1,000,000 per occurrence Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage. This shall include coverage for: a. Premises/Operations 00800-3 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 3FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc b. Products/Completed Operations C. Contractual Liability d. Independent Contractors e. Explosion f. Collapse g. Underground. 3. Business Auto Liability: Coverage shall provide minimum limits of liability of $1,000,000 per occurrence Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage. This shall include coverage for: a. Owned Autos b. Hired Autos C. Non -Owned Autos. 4. CONTRACTOR's "All Risk" Insurance: CONTRACTOR shall secure Builders' Risk "All Risk" insurance at his expense and provide properly completed and executed "Certificates of Insurance and Insurance Endorsement" forms in the exact wording and format presented in these Contract Documents before starting work 5. Special Requirements: a. Ten (10) days prior to the commencement of any work under this Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsement forms in the exact wording and format as presented in these Contract Documents will be provided to the OWNER's Risk Manager for review and approval. b. "Indian River County Florida" will be named as "Additional Insured" on both the General Liability, Auto Liability and Builder's Risk "All Risk" Insurance. C. The OWNER will be given thirty (30) days notice prior to cancellation or modification of any stipulated insurance. Such notification will be in writing by registered mail, return receipt requested and addressed to the OWNER's Risk Manager. d. An appropriate "Indemnification" clause shall be made a provision of the Contract (see paragraph 6.20 of the General Conditions). e. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to insure that all subcontractors comply with all insurance requirements. f. It should be remembered that these are minimum requirements, which are subject to modification in response to high hazard operation. g. Insured must be authorized to do business and have an agent for service of process in Florida and have Best's Rating of A -VII or better. D. Additional Insureds: 1. In addition to "Indian River County, Florida," the following individuals or entities shall be listed as "additional insureds" on the CONTRACTOR's liability insurance policies: a. NONE SC -5.05 OWNER's Liability Insurance SC -5.05 Delete paragraph GC -5.05.A in its entirety. 00800-4 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 4F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\t-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc SC -5.06 Property Insurance SC -5.06 Delete paragraphs GC -5.06.A, B, and C in their entirety and insert the following paragraphs in their place: A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof. This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents and other consultants and subcontractors of any of them each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "All Risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by ENGINEER; and 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any deductible or self-insured retention. C. The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with this paragraph SC -5.06 shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5.06.0 of the General Conditions. SC -5.06.E Delete paragraph GC -5.06.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place: E. Additional Insureds: 1. The following individuals or entities shall be listed as "additional insureds" on the CONTRACTOR's property insurance policies: a. Indian River County, Florida 00800-5 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 5F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc SC -5.07 Waiver of Rights SC75.07 Delete GC -5.07 (paragraphs A, B, and C) in its entirety. SC -5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds SC -5.08 Delete GC -5.08 (paragraphs A and B) in its entirety. SC -5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace SC -5.09 Delete GC-5.09(paragraph A)in its entirety. SC -6.02 Labor; Working Hours SC -6.02.6. Add the following paragraphs immediately after paragraph GC -6.02.8: 1. Regular working hours are defined as Monday through Friday, excluding Indian River County Holidays, from 7 a.m. to 5 p.m. 2. Indian River County Holidays are: New Year's Day, Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving, Christmas Eve and Christmas Day. Working on these days will not be permitted without prior written permission and approval from the Construction Coordination Manager. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall receive no additional compensation for overtime work, i.e., work in excess of eight hours in any one calendar day or 40 hours in any one calendar week, even though such overtime work may be required under emergency conditions and may be ordered by the ENGINEER in writing. 4. All costs of inspection and testing performed during overtime work by the CONTRACTOR, which is allowed solely for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR, shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR, and a credit given to the OWNER to deduct the costs of all such inspection and testing from any payments otherwise due the CONTRACTOR. 5. All costs of OWNER's employees and costs of ENGINEER's Consultant resulting from overtime work by the CONTRACTOR, which is allowed solely for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR, shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR, and a credit given to OWNER to deduct all such costs from any payments otherwise due the CONTRACTOR. 6. No work shall commence before 7 a.m. or continue after 5 p.m. except in case of emergency upon specific permission of the ENGINEER. SC -6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others SC -6.06.C. Add the following sentence at the end of paragraph GC -6.06. C: OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to CONTRACTOR on account of Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a particular Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. 00800-6 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 6FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc SC -6.08 Permits SC -6.08 Add the following paragraphs immediately after paragraph GC -6.08.A: 1. The OWNER has obtained the following permits (copies of these permits are contained in Appendix "A"): A. City of Sebastian — Building Permit: Pending 2. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all other required permits and licenses. The CONTRACTOR shall provide copies of the permits to the OWNER and ENGINEER and shall comply with all conditions contained in the permits at no extra cost to the OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall be familiar with all permit requirements during construction and shall be responsible for complying with these requirements. The cost of this effort shall be included in the pay item in which the work is most closely associated with. SC -11.01 Cost of the Work SC -11.01.A.1. Delete paragraph GC -11.01.A.1 in its entirety, and insert the following sentences in its place: CONTRACTOR will receive payment for actual costs of direct labor and burden (see SC -2.06.B) for the additional or unforeseen work. Labor includes foremen actually engaged in the work; and will not include project supervisory personnel nor necessary on-site clerical staff, except when the additional or unforeseen work is a controlling work item and the performance of such controlling work item actually extends completion of the project due to no fault of the Contractor. Compensation for project supervisory personnel, but in no case higher than a Project Manager's position, shall only be for the pro -rata time such supervisory personnel spent on the contract. In no case shall an officer or director of the Company, nor those persons who own more. than 1% of the Company, be considered as project supervisory personnel, direct labor or foremen hereunder. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by OWNER. SC -13.03 Test and Inspections SC -13.03.8. Delete paragraph GC -13.03.6 in its entirety, and insert the following sentences in its place: B. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all initial inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except those inspections, tests, or approvals listed immediately below. Subsequent inspections, tests, or approvals required after initial failing inspections, tests, or approvals shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR by back charge to subsequent applications for payment. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange, obtain, and pay for the following inspections, tests, or approvals: 1. inspections, tests, or approvals covered by paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.D below; 2. costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 13.04.B; 00800-7 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 7FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc 3. tests otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. SC -13.05 OWNER May Stop the Work SC -13.05.A. Delete paragraph GC -13.05.A in its entirety and insert the following paragraph in its place: A. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to comply with permit requirements, or fails to comply with the technical specifications, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. SC -13.07 Correction Period SC -13.07 A. Delete the first sentence of paragraph GC -13.07.A in its entirety and insert the following sentence in its place A. If within one year after the date of Final Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for CONTRACTOR's use by OWNER or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions: (i) repair such defective land or areas, or (ii) correct such defective Work or, if the defective Work has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (iii) satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. SC -13.07 B. Delete paragraph GC -13.07.B in its entirety and insert the following sentence in its place B. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continu- ous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. SC -14.02 Progress Payments SC -14.02.13.5. Delete paragraph GC-14.02.B.5.d in its entirety and insert the following paragraph in its place: d. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraph 15.02.A; or 00800-8 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 8F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc SC -14.02.13.5. Add the following sentences at the end of paragraph GC -14.02.6.5: e. OWNER has been required to pay ENGINEER additional compensation because of CONTRACTOR delays or rejection of defective Work; or OWNER has been required to pay an independent testing laboratory for subsequent inspections, tests, or approvals taken after initial failing inspections, tests, or approvals. SC -14.02.C.1. Delete paragraph GC -14.02.C.1 in its entirety and insert the following paragraph in its place: C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Payment shall be made by OWNER to CONTRACTOR according to the Local Government Prompt Payment Act. F.S. 218.70 et. seq. SC -14.04 Substantial Completion SC -14.04A. After the third sentence in paragraph GC -14.04A of the General Conditions, delete the remainder of paragraph 14.04A in its entirety and replace with the following: "If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion that shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. In accordance with the provisions of Florida Statutes section 208.735(7)(x)(2005), upon receipt of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion from Engineer, the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor shall conduct a walk-through inspection of the Project to document a list of any items required to render the Work on the Project complete, satisfactory, and acceptable under this Agreement (herein the "Statutory List"). The Statutory List shall be reduced to writing and circulated among the Owner, the Engineer, and the Contractor by the Owner or the Engineer within 30 calendar days after substantial completion. The Owner and Contractor acknowledge and agree that: 1) the failure to include any corrective work, or pending items that are not yet completed, on the Statutory List does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all of the Work under this Agreement; 2) upon completion of all items on the Statutory List, the Contractor may submit a pay request for all remaining retainage except as otherwise set forth in this Agreement; and 3) any and all items that require correction under this Agreement and that are identified after the preparation of the Statutory List remain the obligation of the Contractor to complete to the Owner's satisfaction under this Agreement. After receipt of the Statutory List by the Contractor, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it will diligently proceed to complete all items on the Statutory List and schedule a final walk-through in anticipation of final completion on the Project." SC -14.04B Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph GC 14.048: C. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees 00800-9 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 9F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc SC -14.07 Final Payment SC -14.07.C.1. Delete paragraph GC -14.07.C.1 in its entirety and insert the following paragraph in its place: C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Payment shall be made by OWNER to CONTRACTOR -according to the " Local Government Prompt Payment Act" , Florida Statutes section 218.70, et. seq. SC -15.01 OWNER May Suspend Work SC -15.01.A Delete the last sentence in paragraph GC -15.01.A and insert the following in its place: CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an extension of the Contract Times, directly attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR makes a Claim for an extension as provided in paragraph 10.05. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an adjustment of the Contract Price and CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other eco- nomic loss arising out of or resulting from such Work suspension. SC -15.02 OWNER May Terminate For Cause SC -15.02.A.5 and SC -15.02.A.6 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph GC -15.02.A.4: 5. CONTRACTOR's violation of Section 02225 – "Erosion Control and Treatment of Dewatering Water From the Construction Site." 6. CONTRACTOR's failure to make payment to Subcontractors or Suppliers for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractors or Suppliers. SC -15.04 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate SC -15.04 Delete the following text from the first sentence of paragraph GC -15.04.A: SC -15.04 Delete the following text from the second sentence of paragraph GC -15.04.A: . , , MR:— Emm, LK nrw_711-2 EMM RM-MMATMIN 0 1 fZATM Iral- SC -16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION SC -16.02 Mediation SC -16 Add the following new paragraph immediately after paragraph GC -16.01. SC -16.02 Mediation A. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that they shall submit any and all unsettled Claims or counterclaims, disputes, or other matters in question between them arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, to 00800-10 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 10FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc mediation by a certified mediator of the 191 Judicial Circuit in Indian River County unless delay in initiating mediation would irrevocably prejudice one of the parties. The mediator of any dispute submitted to mediation under this agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such dispute unless otherwise agreed. SC -17 Miscellaneous SC -17.06 Liens Add the following new paragraphs immediately after paragraph GC 17.05: SC -17.06 Liens A. This project is a "Public Works" under Chapter 255, Florida Statutes. No merchant's liens may be filed against the OWNER. Any claimant may apply to the OWNER for a copy of this Contract. The claimant shall have a right of action against the CONTRACTOR for the amount due him. Such action shall not involve the OWNER in any expense. Claims against the CONTRACTOR are subject to timely prior notice to the CONTRACTOR as specified in Florida Statutes Section 255.05. The CONTRACTOR shall insert the following paragraph in all subcontracts hereunder: "Notice: Claims for labor, materials and supplies are not assessable against Indian River Countv and are subject to proper prior notice to (CONTRACTOR'S Name) and to (CONTRACTOR Surety Company Name) pursuant to Chapter. 255 of the Florida Statutes This paragraph shall be inserted in every sub - subcontract hereunder." The payment due under the Contract shall be paid by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR only after the CONTRACTOR has furnished the OWNER with an affidavit stating that all persons, firms or corporations who are defined in Section 713.01, Florida Statutes, who have furnished labor or materials, employed directly or indirectly in the Work, have been paid in full. The OWNER may rely on said affidavit at face value. The CONTRACTOR does hereby release, remiss and quit -claim any and all rights he may enjoy perfecting any lien or any other type of statutory common law or equitable lien against the job. ++END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS++ 00800-11 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev 00800 1 1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00800 - Supplementary Conditions 05-13 rev.doc DATE OF ISSUANCE: SECTION 00942 - Change Order Form No. EFFECTIVE DATE: OWNER: Indian River Countv CONTRACTOR Project: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS OWNER's Project No. IRC -1744 OWNER'S Bid No. 2018059 You are directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents: Description: Reason for Change Order: Attachments: (List documents supporting change) CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE: Description Amount Original Contract Price $ Net Increase (Decrease) from $ previous Change Orders No. to Contract Price prior to this $ Change Order: Net increase (decrease) of this $ Change Order: Contract Price with all approved $ Change Orders: ACCEPTED: By: CONTRACTOR (Signature) Date: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES Description Time Original Contract Time: (days or dates) Substantial Completion: Final Completion: Net change from previous Change Orders No. to (days) Substantial Completion: Final Completion: Contract Time prior to this Change Order: , (days or dates) Substantial Completion: Final Completion: Net increase (decrease) this Change Order: (days or dates) Substantial Completion: Final Completion: Contract Time with all approved Change Orders: (days or dates) Substantial Completion: Final Completion: RECOMMENDED: By: ENGINEER (Signature) Date: APPROVED: By: OWNER Date: 00942 - Change Order Form REV 04-07 00942-1 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00942 -Change Order Form REV 04-07.doc Rev. 05/01 SECTION 00946 - Field Order Form DATE OF ISSUANCE: OWNER: Indian River County CONTRACTOR Project: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS OWNER's Project No. IRC -1744 OWNER'S Bid No. 2018059 Field Activity Description: Reason for Change: Recommended Disposition: Field Operations Officer / Engineer (Signature) Disposition: Contractor's Onsite Supervisor (Signature) Distribution: Field Operations Officer Others as Required: On-site Supervisor Project File * * END OF SECTION 00946-1 Field Change No.: EFFECTIVE DATE: Date Date 00946 - Field Order Form REV 04-07 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00946 - Field Order Form REV 04-07.doc SECTION 00948 - Work Change Directive m DATE OF ISSUANCE: EFFECTIVE DATE: OWNER: Indian River County CONTRACTOR: Project: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS OWNER's Project No. IRC -1744 You are directed to proceed promptly with the following changes: Description: Purpose of Work Change Directive: Attachments: (List documents supporting change) If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price any Claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods as defined in the Contract Documents. Method of determining change in Contract Prices ❑ Unit Prices ❑ Lump Sum ❑ Other: ❑ By Change Order: Method of determining change in Contract Times II Contractor's Records II Engineer's Records II Other: II By Change Order: Estimated increase (decrease) of this Work Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Times: Change Directive $ Substantial Completion: days; If the change involves an increase, the estimated amount is not to be exceeded without further authorization. Ready for Final Completion: days. If the change involves an increase, the estimated time is not to be exceeded without further authorization. ACCEPTED: RECOMMENDED: APPROVED: By: By: By: CONTRACTOR (Signature) ENGINEER (Signature) OWNER (Signature) Date: Date: Date: * * END OF SECTION * * 00948-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\00948 - Work Change Directive Rev 06-2013.doc DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS TITLE SECTION NO. SPECIAL PROVISIONS 01009 FORCE ACCOUNT 01024 FIELD ENGINEERING AND LAYOUT 01050 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL 01215 PROGRESS MEETINGS 01220 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01520 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 01541 ACCESS ROADS, PARKINGS AREAS AND USE OF PUBLIC STREETS 01550 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS 01610 AND EQUIPMENT STORAGE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01611 SUBSTITUTIONS 01630 SITE CLEANUP AND RESTORATION 01710 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 POST FINAL INSPECTION 01820 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.doc SECTION 01009 SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1.1 GENERAL A. Visits to the construction site may be made by representatives of permitting or governing bodies. Submit details of all instructions from the above to the ENGINEER immediately. The Work will not be accepted by the OWNER until final acceptance has been received from the various Regulatory Agencies having jurisdiction. B. Furnish sufficient labor, construction equipment and materials, and work such hours, including night shifts and overtime operations, as may be necessary to insure the prosecution of the work in accordance with the approved progress schedule. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR falls behind the progress schedule, take such steps as may be necessary to improve progress, all without additional cost to the OWNER. The ENGINEER shall be compensated, for his overtime services in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, SC -6.02. C. All salvageable material and equipment for which specific use, relocation or other disposal is not specifically noted, shall remain the property of the OWNER and shall be delivered to the OWNER at the following location: 4550 41St Street, at the CONTRACTOR's expense. All material and equipment not in salvageable condition, as determined by the ENGINEER and the OWNER, shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR, at the CONTRACTOR's expense. D. In addition to these Specifications all work must comply with the requirements of the local governing agency, St. Johns River Water Management District, Department of Environmental Protection, Army Corps of Engineers, Indian River Farms Water Control District, and all other applicable State or Federal agencies' specifications and permits. In the event of a conflict, the more stringent specification or requirement shall govern. E. Before performing any work outside the designated limits of the work site, secure any necessary permits and authorization from the applicable owner, or verify in writing that such has been previously obtained. Follow all requirements of any said permits or authorization. Give the ENGINEER and appropriate owner ten (10) days minimum notice before commencing construction operations outside the designated limits of the work site. 01009-1 01009 -Special Provisions F:\PublieWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01009 - Special Provisions.doc SECTION 01024 FORCE ACCOUNT 1.1 General CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform additional work not covered on the Contract Drawings. The force Account is intended as a contingency for unforeseen work. 1_1 PAYMENT A. Lump sum amount for force account work is included in the bid schedule. The value of force account work will be determined in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. + + END OF SECTION + + 01024-1 FAPub1ic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01024 - Force Account.doc SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND LAYOUT 1.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR will furnish all construction staking for the project. All staking from control will be under the supervision of a Florida Registered Land Surveyor. B. Develop and make all detail surveys and measurements needed for construction including but not limited to, slope stakes, batter boards, piling layouts and all other working lines, elevations and cut sheets. C. Keep a transit and leveling instrument on the site at all times and a skilled instrument man available whenever necessary for layout of the Work. D. Provide all material required for benchmarks, control points, batter boards, grade stakes, and other items. E. Be solely responsible for all locations, dimensions and levels. No data other than written orders of the ENGINEER shall justify departure from the dimensions and levels required by the Drawings. F. Safeguard all points, stakes, grademarks, monuments and benchmarks made or established on the Work, and reestablish same, if disturbed. Rectify all Work improperly installed because of not maintaining, not protecting or removing without authorization such established points, stakes, marks and monuments. G. When requested by the ENGINEER, provide such facilities and assistance as may be necessary for the ENGINEER to check line and grade points placed by the CONTRACTOR. Do no excavation or embankment work until all cross -sectioning necessary for determining pay quantities has been completed and checked by the ENGINEER. H. The cost of performing engineering and layout work described above shall be included in the contract unit prices for the various items of work to which it is incidental. No separate payment will be made for surveying or engineering. 1.2 SURVEY WORK AND QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR A. Prior to commencing work, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of all survey and existing site information as indicated in the Contract Documents. Immediately notify the ENGINEER upon discovery of any errors, inaccuracies or omissions in the survey data. The commencing of any of the work by the CONTRACTOR shall be held as the CONTRACTOR's acceptance that all survey or existing site information is correct and accurate, without any reasonably inferable errors, inaccuracies or omissions. 1050-1 01050 Field Engineering I'APublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01050 -Field Engineering.doc B. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully preserve all control stakes, benchmarks, reference points and property corners and will be responsible for any mistake or loss of time caused by their unnecessary loss or disturbance. If the loss or disturbance of the stakes or marks cause a delay in the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall have no claim for damages or extension of time. Control stakes, benchmarks, reference points and property corners disturbed by the CONTRACTOR's work shall be replaced by a Florida Registered Land Sur- veyor and Mapper, at the CONTRACTOR's expense. In the event the Owner must provide the services of the Florida Registered Surveyor and Mapper to perform this replacement work, the cost of the surveying services will be deducted from any sums due the CONTRACTOR for the work performed under this Contract. C. All survey work shall be performed under the guidance and direction of a Florida Registered Surveyor and Mapper. D. All survey work for Record Drawings shall be performed by a Florida Registered Surveyor and Mapper. 1_3 STATION BOARDS A. CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain white/black standard FDOT station markers every 100 feet. 1.4 LAYOUT OF STRIPING Establish by instrument, and mark the finished surface, the points necessary for striping finished roadway in conformance with Section 5-7 of FDOT Standard Specifications. + + END OF SECTION + + 1050-2 01050 Field Engineering F:\PubIicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01050 -Field Engineering.doc SECTION 01091 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.1 GENERAL A. Whenever reference is made to the furnishing of materials or testing thereof to conform to the standards of any technical society, organization or body, it shall be construed to mean the latest standard, code, specification or tentative specification adopted and published at the date of advertisement for bids, unless noted otherwise in the Technical Specifications or on the Drawings. When a reference standard is specified, comply with requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when they are modified by the Contract Documents, or when applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or codes establish stricter standards. The list of specifications presented in Paragraph B is hereby made a part of the Contract, the same as if repeated herein in full. B. Reference to a technical society, organization, or body may be made in the Specifications by abbreviations, in accordance with the following list: AASHTO The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AGA American Gas Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWWA American Water Works Association AWS American Welding Society FED.SPEC. Federal Specifications 01091-1 01091 Reference Standards FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01091 - Reference Standards.doc CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute FDEP/DEP Florida Department of Environmental Protection DNR Department of Natural Resources NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEC National Electric Code NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute FDOT/DOT Florida Department of Transportation U. L., Inc. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council SJRWMD St. Johns River Water Management District C. When no reference is made to a code, standard or specification, the standard specifications of ASTM, FDOT, or ANSI shall govern. D. In the event of a conflict between the specifications prepared by the ENGINEER and the above referenced specifications and standards, or any other regulatory specification or standard, the more stringent requirement prevails. + + END OF SECTION + + 01091-2 01091 Reference Standards FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01091 -Reference Standards.doc SECTION 01215 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: Specific quality control requirements for the work are indicated throughout the Contract Documents. The requirements of this section are primarily related to the performance of the work beyond the furnishing of manufactured products. The term "Quality Control" includes, but is not necessarily limited to, inspection and testing and associated requirements. This section does not specify or modify the OWNER and ENGINEER duties relating to quality review and Contract surveillance. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY FOR INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. Residual OWNER Responsibility: The OWNER will employ and pay for the services of independent testing laboratories to perform those required inspections and tests. B. CONTRACTORS General Responsibility: No failure of test agencies, whether engaged by the OWNER or CONTRACTOR, to perform adequate inspections of tests or to properly analyze or report results, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for the fulfillment of the requirements of the Contract Documents. It is recognized that the required inspection and testing program is intended to assist the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, ENGINEER, and governing authorities in the nominal determination of probable compliance with requirements for certain crucial elements of work. The program is not intended to limit the CONTRACTOR in his regular quality control program, as needed for general assurance of compliance. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General Workmanship Standards: It is a requirement that each category of tradesman or installer performing the work be pre -qualified, to the extent of being familiar with the applicable and recognized quality standards for his category of work, and being capable of workmanship complying with those standards. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY -STORAGE -HANDLING Handle, store and protect materials and products, including fabricated components, by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and losses (and resulting delays), thereby ensuring highest quality results as the performance of the work progresses. Control delivery schedules so as to minimize unnecessary long-term storage at the project site prior to installation. 01215-1 01215 General Quality Control F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01215 General Quality.doc SECTION 01215 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL 1.5 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS/VIDEOS A. The CONTRACTOR shall make provisions, at his expense, for photographs and video tapes of all work areas just prior to construction, and for unusual conditions during construction. The photographs and videos shall show pertinent physical features along the line of construction. The purpose of the videos is to determine any damage to private or public property during construction. The video must be performed by a professional videographer. B. Pre -Construction Photographs and Video: 1. Contractor shall provide the Owner with photographs and video record and one copy of the existing conditions prior to construction. These photographs and videos shall be a standard DVD format and shall be narrated. 2. The photographs and video shall include, but not be limited to, the following items shown in a clear manner: 1) All existing features within the right-of-way. 2) All existing features within the temporary construction easement. 3) All existing features within permanent easements. 4) All existing features adjacent to any construction. 3. Detail of the photographs and video shall be such that the following examples shall be clear and visible: 1) Cracks in walls. 2) Condition of fencing. 3) Condition of planted areas and types of vegetation. 4) Condition of sodded areas. 5) Conditions of sprinkler systems and associated controls and wiring. 6) Condition of signs. 7) Conditions of lighting and associated wiring. 8) Significant detail of any pre-existing damages physical features shall be shown. The coverage of the photographs and video should include the limits of effects of the use of vibratory rollers. 9) These photographs and video record shall be presented and approved by the Owner prior to the Notice to Proceed. A copy shall be kept in the Contractor's field office. 10)Payment — No additional payment will be made for this work. + + END OF SECTION + + 01215-2 01215 General Quality Control FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01215 General Quality.doc SECTION 01220 PROGRESS MEETINGS 1.1 SCOPE A. Date and Time: 1. Regular Meetings: As mutually agreed upon by ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. 2. Other Meetings: On call. B. Place: CONTRACTOR'S office at Project site or other mutually agreed upon location. C. ENGINEER shall prepare agenda, preside at meetings, and prepare and distribute a transcript of proceedings to all parties. D. CONTRACTOR shall provide data required and be prepared to discuss all items on agenda. 1.2 MINIMUM ATTENDANCE A. CONTRACTOR B. SUBCONTRACTOR: When needed for the discussion of a particular agenda item, CONTRACTOR shall require representatives of Subcontractors or suppliers to attend a meeting. C. CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION MANAGER D. OWNER'S representative, if required. E. Utility Representatives F. Others as appropriate. G. Representatives present for each party shall be authorized to act on their behalf. 1.3 AGENDA Agenda will include, but will not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Transcript of previous meeting. 2. Progress since last meeting. 3. Planned progress for next period. 4. Problems, conflicts and observations. 5. Change Orders. 6. Status of Shop Drawings. 7. Quality standards and control. 8. Schedules, including off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. Corrective measures, if required. 9. Coordination between parties. 10. Safety concerns. 11. Other business. + + END OF SECTION + + 01220-1 01220 Progress Meetings FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01220 - Progress Meetings.doc SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. No partial payments shall be approved by the ENGINEER until there is an approved construction progress schedule on hand. B. Designate an authorized representative who shall be responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of all progress and payment reports. This representative shall have direct project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR in fulfilling the commitments of the CONTRACTOR's schedules. 1.2 REVISIONS TO THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES When the ENGINEER requires the CONTRACTOR to submit revised (updated) progress schedules on a monthly basis the CONTRACTOR shall: A. Indicate the progress of each activity to the date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since the previous submission listing: 1. Major changes in scope. 2. Activities modified since the previous submission. 3. Revised projections of progress and completion. 4. Other identifiable changes. C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. 1.3 SUBMISSION OF THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES On or before the tenth day after the effective date of the Agreement, submit the initial schedules to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will review the schedules and return a review copy to the CONTRACTOR within 21 days after receipt. If required by the ENGINEER, resubmit revised schedules on or before the seventh day after receipt of the review copy. If required by the ENGINEER, submit revised monthly progress schedules with that month's application for payment. 01310-1 01310 Construction Schedule FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01310 - Construction Schedule.doc SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.4 DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A. After receiving approval by the ENGINEER, distribute copies of the approved initial schedule and all reviewed revisions (updated) to: 1. Job site file. 2. Subcontractors. 3. Other concerned parties. 4. OWNER (two copies). 5. ENGINEER B. In the cover letter, instruct recipients to report promptly to the CONTRACTOR, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections shown in the schedules. + + END OF SECTION + + 01310-2 01310 Construction Schedule F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01310 - Construction Schedule.doc SECTION 01340 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS 1.1 SCOPE A. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples as required by or inferred by the Drawings and Specifications. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Article 6.17 of the General Conditions, Section 00700, and as described in this Section. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings are original drawings, prepared by the CONTRACTOR, a subcontractor, supplier, or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the work; showing fabrication, layout, setting, or erection details. Shop drawings are further defined in Article 6.17, Section 00700. B. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer and shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail numbers on the Contract Drawings. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA A. Product data are manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations, and other standard descriptive data. Product data are further defined in Article 6.17, Section 00700. B. Modify standard drawings to delete information which is not applicable to the project and supplement them to provide additional information applicable to the project. C. Clearly mark catalog sheets, brochures, etc., to identify pertinent materials, products, or models. 1.4 SAMPLES Samples are physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and to establish standards by which work is to be evaluated. Samples are further defined in Article 6.17, Section 00700. 01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings 01340-1 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings.doc SECTION 01340 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. The CONTRACTOR's responsibilities for submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples are set forth in paragraph 6.17 of the General Conditions and as further explained herein. B. Prior to submission, thoroughly check shop drawings, product data, and samples for completeness and for compliance with the Contract Documents, verify all dimensions and field conditions, and coordinate the shop drawings with the requirements for other related work. Also review each shop drawing before submitting it to the ENGINEER to determine that it is acceptable in terms of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and operations of construction, safety precautions and programs incidental thereto, all of which are the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 1. It is CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to review submittals made by his suppliers and Subcontractors before transmitting them to ENGINEER to assure proper coordination of the Work and to determine that each submittal is in accordance with its desires and that there is sufficient information about materials and equipment for ENGINEER to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Incomplete or inadequate submittals will be returned for revision without review. C. The CONTRACTOR's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by the ENGINEER's review of submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall approve the shop drawings based on his in -the -field measurements, prior to submittal to the ENGINEER for his review. D. Notify the ENGINEER, in writing at the time of submission, of deviations in submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR's responsibility for deviations in submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents is not relieved by the ENGINEER's review of submittals, unless the ENGINEER gives written acceptance of specific deviations. E. Begin no work, which requires submittals until return of submittals with the ENGINEER's stamp and initials or signature indicating the submittal has been reviewed. 01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings 01340-2 F:\PubIicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings.doc SECTION 01340 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND ENGINEER'S REVIEW FOR SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. Submit to: Indian River County Engineering Division 1801 27th Street Vero Beach, FL 32960 B. A letter of transmittal shall accompany each submittal. If data for more than one Section of the Specifications is submitted, a separate transmittal letter shall accompany the data submitted for each Section. C. At the beginning of each letter of transmittal, provide a reference heading indicating the following: 1. OWNER'S Name 2. Project Name 3. Project Number 4. Transmittal Number 5. Section Number D. All submittals shall have a title block with complete identifying information satisfactory to the ENGINEER. The following is a sample Submittal Form that the CONTRACTOR may use: [The remainder of this page has been left blank intentionally] 01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings 01340-3 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings.doc Contractor: SECTION 01340 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS SUBMITTAL NO. Date Sent to County No. Copies Sent to County ❑ Original Submittal ❑ Re -Submittal Project Name: NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS Project No.: IRC -1744 ❑ Shop Drawing Description: Sub -Contractor:_ Remarks: ❑ Cut Sheet ❑ Other Reviewing Agency: (As checked below) Date Received Date Returned No. Copies Ret'd F] I R C Engineering Div. ❑ I R C Utilities Services Remarks: IRC Engineering Division 1801 27th Street Vero Beach, FI. 32960 Remarks: Distribution of Copies: IRC Engineering Division Office File Field Office File Date Rec'd from Contractor Date Ret'd to Contractor_ No. Copies Ret'd 01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings 01340-4 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings.doc SECTION 01340 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS E. All submittals shall bear the stamp of approval and signature of CONTRACTOR as evidence that they have been reviewed by CONTRACTOR. Submittals without this stamp of approval will not be reviewed by the ENGINEER and will be returned to CONTRACTOR. F. Assign a number to each submittal starting with No. 1 and thence numbered consecutively. Identify resubmittals by the original submittal number followed by the suffix "A" for the first resubmittal, the suffix "B" for the second resubmittal, etc. G. Initially submit to ENGINEER a minimum of two (2) copies of all submittals that are on 11 -inch by 17 -inch or smaller sheets (no less than 8 1/2 -inch x 11 -inch). H. After ENGINEER completes his review, Shop Drawings will be marked with one of the following notations: 1. Approved 2. Approved as Noted 3. NOT Approved - Resubmit If a submittal is acceptable, it will be marked "Approved" or "Approved as Noted". One (1) electronic copy of the submittal will be returned to CONTRACTOR. J. Upon return of a submittal marked "Approved" or "Approved as Noted", CONTRACTOR may order, ship or fabricate the materials included on the submittal, provided it is in accordance with the corrections indicated. K. If a submittal is unacceptable, one (1) copy will be returned to CONTRACTOR with following notation, "NOT Approved - Resubmit". L. Upon return of a submittal marked "NOT Approved - Resubmit", make the corrections indicated and repeat the initial approval procedure. Upon return of a submittal so marked, repeat the initial approval procedure utilizing acceptable material or equipment. M. Work shall not be performed nor equipment installed with an ENGINEER "Approved" or "Approved as Noted" Shop Drawing. N. Submit Shop Drawings well in advance of the need for the material or equipment for construction and with ample allowance for the time required to make delivery of material or equipment after data covering such is approved. CONTRACTOR shall assume the risk for all materials or 01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings 01340-5 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings.doc SECTION 01340 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to the approval of Shop Drawings. Materials or equipment requiring Shop Drawings which have not yet received approval by the ENGINEER shall not be installed on the project. Materials or equipment will not be included in periodic progress payments until approval thereof has been obtained in the specified manner. P. ENGINEER will review and process all submittals promptly, but a reasonable time should be allowed for this, for the Shop Drawings being revised and resubmitted, and for time required to return the approved Shop Drawings to CONTRACTOR. Q. Furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within three submittals. All costs to ENGINEER involved with subsequent submittals of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval, will be back -charged to CONTRACTOR in accordance with the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions. If the CONTRACTOR requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of ENGINEER'S costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be back -charged to CONTRACTOR unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of CONTRACTOR. + + END OF SECTION + + 01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings 01340-6 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasteiContract\Master Contract Documents\01340 - Submittal of Shop Drawings.doc SECTION 01520 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide all construction equipment and facilities and temporary controls required to satisfactorily complete the work represented on the Drawings and described in the Specifications. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY A. All construction facilities and temporary controls remain the property of the Contractor establishing them and shall be maintained in a safe and useful condition until removed from the construction site. B. All false work, scaffolding, ladders, hoistways, braces, pumps, roadways, sheeting, forms, barricades, drains, flumes, and the like, any of which may be needed in construction of any part of the work and which are not herein described or specified in detail, must be furnished, maintained and removed by the CONTRACTOR, who is responsible for the safety and efficiency of such work and for any damage that may result from their failure or from their improper construction, maintenance or operation. C. In accepting the Contract, the CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility for the sufficiency and safety of all hoists, cranes, temporary structures or work and for any damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction, maintenance or operation and will indemnify and save harmless the OWNER and ENGINEER from all claims, suits or actions and damages or costs of every description arising by reason of failure to comply with the above provision. 1.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND SERVICES A. TEMPORARY WATER 1. Provide a temporary water service as required for all construction purposes and pay for all water used. 2. Furnish potable drinking water in suitable dispensers and with cups for use of all employees at the job. 3. Provide all temporary piping, hoses, etc., required to transport water to the point of usage by all trades. 4. When temporary water service is no longer required, remove all temporary water lines. 01520-1 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01520 - Construction Facilities.doc SECTION 01520 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS B. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 1. Provide temporary toilet facilities separate from the job office. Maintain these during the entire period of construction under this Contract for the use of all construction personnel on the job. Provide enough chemical toilets to conveniently serve the needs of all personnel. Properly seclude toilet facilities from public observation. 2. Chemical toilets and their maintenance shall meet the requirements of State and local health regulations and ordinances. Immediately correct any facilities or maintenance methods failing to meet these requirements. Upon completion of work, remove the facilities from the premises. 1.4 SECURITY Full time watchmen will not be specifically required as a part of the Contract, but the CONTRACTOR shall provide inspection of work area daily and shall take whatever measures are necessary to protect the safety of the public, workmen, and materials, and provide for the security of the site, both day and night. 1.5 TEMPORARY CONTROLS Take all necessary precautions to control dust and mud associated with the work of this Contract. In dry weather, spray dusty areas daily with water in order to control dust. Take necessary steps to prevent the tracking of mud onto adjacent streets and highways. 1.6 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Remove the various temporary facilities, services, and controls and legally dispose of them as soon as the work is complete. The areas of the site used for temporary facilities shall be properly reconditioned and restored to a condition acceptable to the OWNER. + + END OF SECTION + + 01520-2 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01520 - Construction Facilities.doc SECTION 01541 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 1.1 GENERAL A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for taking all precautions, providing all programs, and taking all actions necessary to protect the Work and all public and private property and facilities from damage as specified in the General Conditions and herein. B. In order to prevent damage, injury or loss, CONTRACTOR'S actions shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Store apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that will not unduly interfere with the progress of the Work or the Work of any other Contractor or utility service company. 2. Provide suitable storage facilities for all materials, which are subject to injury by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or otherwise. 3. Place upon the Work or any part thereof, only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. 4. Clean up frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials, and debris caused by construction operations, so that at all times, the site of the Work presents a safe, orderly, and workmanlike appearance. 5. Provide barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways and other hazardous areas. C. Except after written consent from proper parties, do not enter or occupy privately -owned land with men, tools, materials or equipment, except on easements provided herein. D. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of all public and private property or facility on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect or misconduct in the execution of the Work by the CONTRACTOR, it shall be restored by the CONTRACTOR, at its expense, to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. 1.2 BARRICADES AND WARNING SIGNALS CONTRACTOR's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, lights, and for providing watchmen shall continue until OWNER accepts the Project. 01541-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\Mastercontract\Master Contract Documents\01541 - Protection of Property.doc SECTION 01541. PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 1.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Protect existing trees, shrubs and plants on or adjacent to the site that are shown or designated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of trunk, branches, bark or roots. B. Do not store or park materials or equipment within the drip line of trees that are to remain. C. Install temporary fences or barricades to protect trees and plants in areas subject to traffic. D. Fires shall not be permitted under or adjacent to trees and plants. E. Within the limits of the Work, water trees and plants that are to remain, in order to maintain their health during construction operations. F. Cover all exposed roots with burlap and keep it continuously wet. Cover all exposed roots with earth as soon as possible. Protect root systems from mechanical damage and damage by erosion, flooding, run-off or noxious materials in solution. G. If branches or trunks are damaged, prune branches immediately and protect the cut or damaged areas with emulsified asphalt compounded specifically for horticultural use. H. Remove all damaged trees and plants that die or suffer permanent injury and replace them with a specimen of equal or better quality. Coordinate Work in this Section with requirements of other sections herein. 1.4 PROTECTION OF IRRIGATION The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining in good condition all irrigation systems within the easements, which could be damaged by construction activities. The CONTRACTOR shall repair any irrigation systems damaged by construction activities within two (2) days. Irrigation systems partially within the property limits may be cut off and capped or connected to same system to maintain functionality. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining the functionality of the remaining portion of the system if it should fall outside of the project limits. 01541-2 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01541 - Protection of Property.doc SECTION 01541 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 1.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES A. Underground Structures: 1. Underground structures are defined to include, but not be limited to, all sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical conduits, tunnels and other existing subsurface work located within or adja- cent to the limits of the Work. 2. All underground structures known to ENGINEER except service connections for water, sewer, electric, and telephone are shown. This information is shown for the assistance of CONTRACTOR in accordance with the best information available, but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. The existing utilities shown on the Contract Drawings are located according to the information available to the ENGINEER at the time the Drawings were prepared and have not been independently verified by the OWNER or the ENGINEER. Guarantee is not made that all existing underground utilities are shown or that the locations of those shown are accurate. The locations shown are for bidding purposes only. Finding the actual location of any existing utilities is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility and shall be done before it commences any work in the vicinity. Furthermore, the CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for any and all damages, which might be occasioned by the CONTRACTOR's failure to exactly locate and preserve any and all underground utilities. The OWNER or ENGINEER will assume no liability for any damages sustained or costs incurred because of the CONTRACTOR's operations in the vicinity of existing utilities or structures, nor for temporary bracing and shoring of same. If it is necessary to shore, brace, or swing a utility, contact the utility company or department affected and obtain their permission regarding the method to use for such work. 3. Contact the various utility companies which may have buried or aerial utilities within or near the construction area before commencing work. Provide 48 hours minimum notice to all utility companies prior to beginning construction. 4. Schedule and execute all work involving existing utilities in order to minimize necessary interruption of services. Whenever such interruption is necessary for completion of the work, notify the ENGINEER and the appropriate utility at least 48 hours in advance. Perform all work to repair/restore utility service to the satisfaction of the appropriate utility. Include all costs related to service maintenance, interruption, and restoration in the appropriate line item in the Contract. 5. Where it is necessary to temporarily interrupt house or business services, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the owner or occupant, both before the 01541-3 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01541 - Protection of Property.doc SECTION 01541 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY interruption (24-hour minimum), and again immediately before service is resumed. Before disconnecting and pipes or cables, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain permission from their owner, or shall make suitable arrangement for their disconnection by their owner. 6. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover all obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of the services which such structures provide. If CONTRACTOR damages an underground structure, restore it to original condition at CONTRACTOR's expense. 7. Necessary changes in the location of the Work may be made by ENGINEER, to avoid unanticipated underground structures. 8. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface facility is required and is not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, ENGINEER will direct CONTRACTOR in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the provisions of Article 11 of the General Conditions. B. Surface Structures: 1. Surface structures are defined as structures or facilities above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations and any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to, buildings, tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage, piping, poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks and all other facil- ities that are visible above the ground surface. C. Protection of Underground and Surface Structures: 1. Sustain in their places and protect from direct or indirect injury, all underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Such sustaining and supporting shall be done carefully, and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before proceeding with the work of sustaining and supporting such structure, satisfy the ENGINEER that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the party owning same. 2. Assume all risks attending the presence or proximity of all underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by its Work to any structure. CONTRACTOR shall repair immediately all damage caused by his work, to the satisfaction of the OWNER of the damaged structure. D. All other existing surface facilities, including but not limited to, guard rails, posts, guard cables, signs, poles, markers, and curbs which are temporarily removed to facilitate installation of the Work shall be replaced and restored to their original condition at CONTRACTOR'S expense. 01541-4 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\13id Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01541 - Protection of Property.doc SECTION 01541 PROTECTION OF THE WORK AND PROPERTY 1.6 DAMAGE TO EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and make good all damage to pavement beyond the limits of this Contract, buildings, telephone or other cables, water pipes, sanitary pipes, or other structures which may be encountered, whether or not shown on the Drawings. B. Information shown on the Drawings as to the location of existing utilities has been prepared from the most reliable data available to the Engineer. This information is not guaranteed, however, and it shall be this CONTRACTOR's responsibility to determine the location, character and depth of any existing utilities. He shall assist the utility companies, by every means possible to determine said locations. Extreme caution shall be exercised to eliminate any possibility of any damage to utilities resulting from his activities. 1.7 ADJUSTMENTS OF UTILITY CASTINGS, COVERS AND BOXES A. All existing utility castings, including valve boxes, junction boxes, manholes, pull boxes, inlets and similar structures in the areas of construction that are to remain in service shall be adjusted by the CONTRACTOR to bring them flush with the surface of the finished work. B. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the utilities to ensure proper construction sequencing. CONTRACTOR shall make available survey reference markers to the various utility companies. + + END OF SECTION + + 01541-5 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01541 - Protection of Property.doc SECTION 01550 ACCESS ROADS, PARKING AREAS AND USE OF PUBLIC STREETS 1.1 GENERAL A. Provide all temporary construction roads, walks and parking areas required during construction and for use of emergency vehicles. Design and maintain temporary roads and parking areas so they are fully usable in all weather conditions. B. Prevent interference with traffic and the OWNER's operations on existing roads. Indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from any expenses caused by CONTRACTOR's operations over these roads. C. Roadways damaged by CONTRACTOR shall be restored to their original condition by the CONTRACTOR subject to approval of the OWNER or ENGINEER. D. Remove temporary roads, walks and parking areas prior to final acceptance and return the ground to its original condition, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 1.2 USE OF PUBLIC STREETS The use of public streets and alleys shall be such as to provide a minimum of inconvenience to the public and to other traffic. Any earth or other excavated material spilled from trucks shall be removed immediately by the CONTRACTOR and the streets cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1.3 USE OF PUBLIC STREETS FOR HAUL ROADS A. Prior to construction, the CONTRACTOR shall designate all proposed haul roads to be used during the life of the project. Any earth or other materials spilled from trucks shall be removed by the CONTRACTOR and streets cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner. He further shall be responsible for repairs to any damages caused by his operations, prior to final payment. B. All trucks carrying earth shall be covered while moving with an appropriate tarpaulin. Should trucks hauling earth fail to cover their loads, the CONTRACTOR will be given two (2) written warnings, after which the CONTRACTOR shall pay a fine of $50 per uncovered truck to the Owner when invoked by the Owner to Owner's Engineer. All cleanup shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. C. All trucks/moving equipment shall have backup warning horns in proper working order while on the job site. + + END OF SECTION + + 01550 Access Roads 01550-1 F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01550 - Access Roads.doc SECTION 01610 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.1 GENERAL A. Make all arrangements for transportation, delivery and handling of equipment and materials required for prosecution and completion of the Work. B. Shipments of materials to CONTRACTOR or Subcontractors shall be delivered to the site only during regular working hours. Shipments shall be addressed and consigned to the proper party giving name of Project, street number and city. Shipments shall not be delivered to OWNER except where otherwise directed. C. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, CONTRACTOR shall move or cause to be moved materials and equipment without any additional compensation. 1.2 DELIVERY A. Arrange deliveries of products in accord with construction schedules and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors, or OWNER. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. OWNER'S use of premises. C. Do not have products delivered to project site until related Shop Drawings have been approved by the ENGINEER. D. Do not have products delivered to site until required storage facilities have been provided. E. Have products delivered to site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. Keep ENGINEER informed of delivery of all equipment to be incorporated in the Work. F. Partial deliveries of component parts of equipment shall be clearly marked to identify the equipment, to permit easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. 01610-1 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01610 - Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment.doc SECTION 01610 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT G. Immediately on delivery, Contractor shall inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact, labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by OWNER, by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring or otherwise damaging products or surrounding surfaces. C. Handle products by methods to prevent bending or overstressing. D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. E. Materials and equipment shall at all times be handled in a safe manner and as recommended by manufacturer or supplier so that no damage will occur to them. Do not drop, roll or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. + + END OF SECTION + + 01610-2 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01610 - Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment.doc SECTION 01611 STORAGE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.1 GENERAL A. Store and protect materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of Specifications. B. Make all arrangements and provisions necessary for the storage of materials and equipment. Place all excavated materials, construction equipment, and materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, so as not to injure any part of the Work or existing facilities, and so that free access can be had at all times to all parts of the Work and to all public utility installations in the vicinity of the Work. Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. C. Areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment shall be as shown or approved by the ENGINEER. D. Store materials and equipment which are to become the property of the OWNER to facilitate their inspection and insure preservation of the quality and fitness of the Work, including proper protection against damage by extreme temperatures and moisture. E. Do not use lawns, grass plots or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the OWNER or other person in possession or control of such premises. F. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for loss or damage to stored materials and equipment. G. Do not open manufacturers containers until time of installation unless recommended by the manufacturer or otherwise specified. H. When appropriate store materials on wood blocking so there is no contact with the ground. + + END OF SECTION + + 01611-1 01611—Storage of Material F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01611 -Storage of Materials.doc SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS 1.1 GENERAL A. Requests for review of a substitution shall conform to the requirements of Article 6.05, "Substitutes and Or -Equals," of the General Conditions, and shall contain complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For materials or equipment (hereinafter products) specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard by any manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor (hereinafter manufacturer). To the maximum extent possible, provide products of the same generic kind from a single source. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or manufacturers named which complies with Specifications. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equivalent," submit a request for a substitution for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named. D. For products specified by naming only one product or manufacturer and followed by words indicating that no substitution is permitted, there is no option and no substitution will be allowed. E. Where more than one choice is available as a CONTRACTOR's option, select product which is compatible with other products already selected or specified. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. During a period of 15 days after date of commencement of Contract Time, ENGINEER will consider written requests from CONTRACTOR for substitution of products or manufacturers, and construction methods (if specified). 1. After end of specified period, requests will be considered only in case of unavailability of product or other conditions beyond control of CONTRACTOR. B. Submit 5 copies of Request for Substitution. Submit a separate request for each substitution. In addition to requirements set forth in Article 6.05 of General Conditions, include in the request the following: 1. For products or manufacturers: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. 01630-1 01630 Substitutions F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01630 - Substitutions.doc SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS c. Samples, if appropriate. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date of installation. 2. For construction methods (if specified): a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Drawings illustrating method. 3. Such other data as the ENGINEER may require to establish that the proposed substitution is equal to the product, manufacturer or method specified. C. In making Request for Substitution, CONTRACTOR represents that: 1. CONTRACTOR has investigated proposed substitution, and deter- mined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to the product, manufacturer or method specified. 2. CONTRACTOR will provide the same or better guarantees or warranties for proposed substitution as for product, manufacturer, or method specified. 3. CONTRACTOR waives all claims for additional costs or extension of time related to a proposed substitution that subsequently may become apparent. D. A proposed substitution will not be accepted if: 1. Acceptance will require changes in the design concept or a substantial revision of the Contract Documents. 2. It will delay completion of the Work, or the work of other contractors. 3. It is indicated or implied on a Shop Drawing and is not accompanied by a formal Request for Substitution from CONTRACTOR. E. If the ENGINEER determines that a proposed substitute is not equal to that specified, furnish the product, manufacturer, or method specified at no additional cost to OWNER. F. Approval of a substitution will not relieve CONTRACTOR from the requirement for submission of Shop Drawings as set forth in the Contract Documents. G. The procedure for review by Engineer will include the following: 1. Requests for review of substitute items of material and equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. 2. Upon receipt of an application for review of a substitution, Engineer will determine whether the review will be more extensive than a normal shop drawing review for the specified item. ' 3. If the substitution will not require a more extensive review, Engineer will proceed with the review without additional cost to CONTRACTOR. 01630-2 01630 Substitutions F:\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01630 - Substitutions.doc SECTION 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS 4. If the substitution requires a more extensive review, Engineer will proceed with the review only after CONTRACTOR has agreed to reimburse Owner for the review cost. 5. Engineer may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense additional data about the proposed substitute. H. Any redesign of structural members shall be performed by, and the plans signed and sealed by, a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. The redesign shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Any redesign will require an extensive review by the Engineer. The CONTRACTOR must agree to reimburse the Owner for the review cost prior to the Owner's Engineer proceeding with the design review. The ENGINEER's estimated cost of review shall be provided to the CONTRACTOR prior to proceeding with the review to allow the CONTRACTOR the opportunity to rescind the request. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposed substitution. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability and shall have the right to deny use of any proposed substitution. The CONTRACTOR shall not order, install, or utilize any substitution without either an executed Change Order or Engineer's notation on the reviewed shop drawing. Owner may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special manufacturer's performance guarantee(s) or other surety with respect to any substitute and an indemnification by the CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will record time required by Engineer and Engineer's consultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR and in making changes in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or not a proposed substitute is sued, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer and Engineer's consultants for evaluating each proposed substitute. J. Substitute materials or equipment may be proposed for acceptance in accordance with this Section. In the event that substitute materials or equipment are used and are less costly than the originally specified material or equipment, than the net difference in cost shall benefit the Owner and CONTRACTOR in equal proportions. This cost difference shall not be reduced by any failure of the CONTRACTOR to base his bid on the named materials or equipment. + + END OF SECTION + + 01630-3 01630 Substitutions F:\PublicWorkskENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\i-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01630 - Substitutions.doc SECTION 01710 SITE CLEANUP AND RESTORATION 1.1 SCOPE Furnish all labor, equipment, appliances, and materials required or necessary to clean up and restore the site after the construction is completed. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS A. During the progress of the project, keep the work and the adjacent areas affected thereby in a neat and orderly condition. Remove all rubbish, surplus materials, and unused construction equipment. Repair all damage so that the public and property owners will be inconvenienced as little as possible. B. Provide onsite containers for the collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish and empty such containers in a legal manner when they become full. C. Where material or debris has been deposited in watercourses, ditches, gutters, drains, or catch -basins as a result of the CONTRACTOR's operations, such material or debris shall be entirely removed and satisfactorily disposed of during the progress of the work, and the ditches, channels, drains, etc., shall be kept clean and open at all times. D. Before the completion of the project, unless otherwise especially directed or permitted in writing: 1. Tear down and remove all temporary buildings and structures; 2. Remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery, or other construction equipment furnished; 3. Remove all rubbish from any grounds occupied; and 4. Leave the roads, all parts of the premises, and adjacent property affected by construction operations, in a neat and satisfactory condition. E. Restore or replace any public or private property damaged by construction work, equipment, or employees, to a condition at least equal to that existing immediately prior to the beginning of the operations. To this end, the CONTRACTOR shall restore all highway, roadside, and landscaping work within any right-of-way, platted or prescriptive. Acceptable materials, equipment, and methods shall be used for such restoration. F. Thoroughly clean all materials and equipment installed and on completion of the work, deliver the facilities undamaged and in fresh and new - appearing condition. 01710 Site Cleanup 01710-1 I'APublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01710 -Site Cleanup.doc SECTION 01710 SITE CLEANUP AND RESTORATION G. It is the intent of the Specifications to place the responsibility on the CONTRACTOR to restore to their original condition all items disturbed, destroyed, or damaged during construction. Particular attention will be placed on restoration of canals to equal or better condition than prior to construction. H. When finished surfaces require cleaning with cleaning materials, use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage the surfaces. Use cleaning materials only on those surfaces recommended by the manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer's directions and recommendations at all times. I. Keep the amount of dust produced during construction activities to a minimum. At CONTRACTOR's expense, spray water or other dust control agents over the areas, which are producing the dust. Schedule construction operations so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces. 1.3 SITE CLEANUP AND RESTORATION Prior to final completion, the OWNER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall review the site with regards to site cleanup and restoration. Clean and/or restore all items determined to be unsatisfactory by the OWNER or ENGINEER, at no additional expense. + + END OF SECTION + + 01710 Site Cleanup 01710-2 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01710 - Site Cleanup.doc SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures 2. Warranties 3. Final cleaning B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 4. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 5. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 6. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 01770 Closeout Procedures 01770-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\]-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01770- Closeout Procedures.doc SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. ' Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items 01770 Closeout Procedures 01770-2 FA\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01770- Closeout Procedures.doc SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name b. Date C. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor e. Page number 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch (215 -by -280 -mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title 'WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 01770 Closeout Procedures 01770-3 FA\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\I-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01770- Closeout Procedures.doc SECTION 01770 PART 2 -PRODUCTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 01770 Closeout Procedures 01770-4 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PRO.IECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\l-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01770- Closeout Procedures.doc SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 Closeout Procedures 01770-5 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\ 4aster Contract Documents\01770- Closeout Procedures.doc SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings 2. Record Product Data B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit two set(s) of marked -up Record Prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of corrected Record Transparencies and one set(s) of marked -up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each transparency and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return transparencies and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. b. Final Submittal: Submit two set(s) of marked -up Record Prints, one set(s) of Record Transparencies, and three copies printed from Record Transparencies. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. C. Final Submittal: Submit two set(s) of marked -up Record Prints, one set(s) of Record CAD Drawing files, one set(s) of Record CAD Drawing plots, 01781 Project Record Documents 01781-1 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\ 4aster Contract Documents\01781 -Project Record Documents.doc SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS and three copies printed from record plots. Plot and print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Product Data: Submit two copy of each Product Data submittal. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked -up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings C. Depths of foundations below first floor d. Locations and depths of underground utilities e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits f. Revisions to electrical circuitry g. Actual equipment locations h. Duct size and routing i. Locations of concealed internal utilities j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive k. Changes made following Architect's written orders I. Details not on the original Contract Drawing m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically 01781 Project Record Documents 01781-2 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DNISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\I-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01781 - Project Record Documents.doc SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked -up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 3. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies. Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place transparencies in durable tube -type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included. 01781 Project Record Documents 01781-3 FA\Public Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01781 -Project Record Documents.doc SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name b. Date C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS" d. Name of Architect e. Name of Contractor 2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 Project Record Documents 01781-4 FAPublic Works\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Comers\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\01781 -Project Record Documents.doc SECTION 01820 POST FINAL INSPECTION 1.1 GENERAL A. Approximately one year after Final Completion, the OWNER will make arrangements with the Construction Coordination Manager and the CONTRACTOR for a post final inspection and will send a written notice to said parties to inform them of the date and time of the inspection. B. Corrections of defective work noted by OWNER and Construction Coordination Manager shall comply with the applicable sections of Article 13, General Conditions. C. After the inspection, the OWNER will inform the CONTRACTOR of any corrections required to release the performance and payment bonds. 001820 - Post Final Inspection rev 05-13 001820-1 F:\PublicWorks\ENGINEERING DIVISION PROJECTS\1744 Sebastian Corners\1-Admin\Bid Documents\MasterContract\Master Contract Documents\001820 -Post Final Inspection rev 05-13.doc PROJECT MANUAL FOR NORTH COUNTY OFFICES AT SEBASTIAN CORNERS BID NO. 2018059 PROJECT NO. IRC -1744 122EVARED BY: EBB Im IE=MBV ENGINEERING, INC. MOIA BOWLES VILLAMIZAR & ASSOCIATES CIVIL STRUCTURAL ■ SURVEYING ■ ENVIRONMENTAL 1835 14ih Street mVero Beach, FL 32960 772.569.0035 ■ Fax: 772.778.3617 www.mbveng.com CA #3728 1 PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION NO. TITLE CIVIL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 001 Technical Specification 101 Mobilization 102 Maintenance of Traffic DIVISION 02 - INTERIOR DEMOLITION AND TEMPORARY PROTECTION 0241 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 30 00 Concrete — Cast -in -Place DIVISION 05 — METALS 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 0552 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 05 70 00 Decorative Metal DIVISION 06 - WOOD; PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 20 13 Exterior Finish Carpentry 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 0641 16 Plastic — Laminate — Clad Architectural Cabinets 06 42 16 Flush Wood Paneling 06 42 19 Plastic — Laminate — Faced Wood Paneling 0661 16 Solid Surfacing Fabrications DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 07 46 46 Fiber -Cement Siding 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 0784 13 Penetration Firestopping DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors 0841 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 0851 13 Aluminum Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 09 22 16 Non -Structural Metal Framing 09 24 00 Cement Plastering 09 29 00 Gypsum Board PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION NO. TITLE DIVISION 09 — FINISHES (Continued 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 0965 13 Resilent Base and Accessories 09 69 00 Access Flooring 09 90 00 Paint and Finish Systems Schedule 09 91 13 Exterior Painting 09 91 23 Interior Painting 09 93 00 Staining and Transparent Finishes 09 96 00 High -Performance Coatings DIVISION 11- EOUIPMENT 1130 13 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 22 00 00 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work 22 00 01 Instructions and Maintenance Manuals 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports: Piping Systems 22 11 13 Domestic Water System 2211 16 Plumbing Piping 2211 19 Pipe, Valves and Fittings: Potable Water 2213 16 Sanitary Drainage System 2213 19 Pipe and Fittings: Sanitary, Waste, Vent, and Drain 22 33 00 Water Heater: Electric 22 40 00 Plumbing 22 40 01 Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Specialties DIVISION 23 — MECHANICAL 23 00 00 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work 23 00 01 Instructions and Maintenance Manuals 23 05 53 Identification of Mechanical Systems 23 05 93 Test and Balance — Preliminary 23 05 94 Test and Balance — Final 2307 13 Insulation, Thermal 23 09 00 Controls and Instrumentation — Programmable Thermostat 23 23 00 Refrigerant Pipes, Valves and Specialties 2331 13 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork 23 31 20 Roof Curbs 23 34 21 Fans, Power Roof Ventilator 2337 13 Air Distribution Equipment 2374 13 Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units: Direct Expansion PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 Basic Electrical Requirements 2605 19 Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt 26 05 26 Grounding 26 05 33 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 24 16 Panelboards 2625 13 Low Voltage Busways 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2628 17 Motor and Circuit Disconnects 2643 13 Surge Protective Devices for Low -Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 26 51 00 Lighting Fixtures + + END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS + + CIVIL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 001- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Refer to Civil Plan Sheets Cl -C4 for the Site work specifications and details. The below is supplemental guidelines and are in addition to the Civil plan documents. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. All work of this Contract shall conform to the applicable technical specifications of Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2015, and Supplemental Specification, Special Provisions and addenda thereto, except as modified and supplemented hereinafter. Reference to Article numbers herein -after apply to the FDOT Standard Specifications, and reference in FDOT Standard Specifications to Department shall be taken as the Owner or its appointed Representative. Wherever the Specifications, Supplementals, etc. may refer to the "Owner", "Department", "State of Florida Department of Transportation", or words relating to offices of State Government, such words shall be taken as meaning Owner or Indian River County, Florida. Wherever the word "Owner's Engineer", "District Engineer", "Engineer", "Project Engineer", etc., appears, it shall be taken to mean the Registered Professional Project Engineer of the Indian River County Public Works Department, Engineering Division acting directly or through duly authorized representatives. Wherever the word "Resident Engineer" appears, it shall be taken to mean an authorized representative of the Owner's Engineer on the Project (Resident Construction Inspector) who will act as an agent for Indian River County, assigned to observe the progress quantity and quality of the work. SECTION 101- MOBILIZATION The work specified in this section shall conform to Section 101 of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Item of Payment Payment for the work specified in this item shall be made under: Bid Item No. 001-1 - Mobilization — To be included with Site Demolition and Construction SECTION 102 - MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC The work specified in this item shall conform to Section 102 of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, except as modified herein. A. GENERAL PROVISIONS -DESCRIPTION: The work specified in this Section consists of maintaining traffic within the limits of the project for the duration of the construction period, including any temporary suspensions of the work. It shall include the construction and maintenance of any necessary detour facilities; the providing of necessary facilities for access to residences, businesses, etc., along the project; the furnishing, installing and maintaining of traffic control and safety devices during construction, the control of dust through the use of calcium chloride if necessary, and any other special requirements for safe and expeditious movement of traffic as may be called for on the plans. The term, Maintenance of Traffic, as used herein, shall include all of such facilities, devices and operations as are required for the safety and convenience of the public as well as for minimizing public nuisance; all as specified in this Itemized Section 14 of these provisions and Paragraph 24 in General Conditions Section. Technical Specifications 01025-1 B. BEGINNING DATE OF CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY: The Contractor shall present his Maintenance of Traffic Plan at the pre -construction conference. The Maintenance of Traffic Plan shall indicate the type and location of all signs, lights, barricades, striping and barriers to be used for the safe passage of pedestrians and vehicular traffic through the project and for the protection of the workmen. The plan will indicate conditions and setups for each phase of the Contractor's activities. When the project plans include or specify a specific Maintenance of Traffic Plan, alternate proposals will be considered when they are found to be equal to or better than the plan specified. In no case may the Contractor begin work until the Maintenance of Traffic Plan has been approved in writing by the Owner. Modifications to the Maintenance of Traffic Plan that become necessary shall also be approved in writing. Except in an emergency, no changes to the approved plan will be allowed until approval to change such plan has been received. The cost of all work included in the Maintenance of Traffic Plan shall be included in the pay item for Maintenance of Traffic. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing daily inspections, including weekends and holidays, with some inspections at nighttime, of the installations on the project and replace all equipment and devices not conforming with the approved standards during that inspection. The project personnel will be advised of the schedule of these inspections and be given the opportunity to join in the inspection as is deemed necessary. C. TRAFFIC CONTROL - STANDARDS: The FDOT Design Standards For Design, Construction, Maintenance and Utility Qperations On The State Highway System, Edition as dated on the plans set forth the basic principles and prescribes minimum standards to be followed in the design, application, installation, maintenance and removal of all traffic control devices and all warning devices and barriers which are necessary to protect the public and workmen from hazards within the project limits. The standards established in the aforementioned manual constitute the minimum requirements for normal conditions, and additional traffic control devices warning devices, barriers or other safety devices will be required where unusual, complex or particularly hazardous conditions exist. The above referenced standards were developed using F.H.W.A., U.S.D.O.T. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES, WARNING DEVICES AND BARRIERS - INSTALLATION: The responsibility for installation and maintenance of adequate traffic control devices, warning devices and barriers, for the protection of the travel in public and workmen, as well as to safeguard the work area in general shall rest with the Contractor. Consideration shall be given to recommendations of the Engineer. The required traffic control devices, warning devices and barriers shall be erected by the Contractor prior to creation of any hazardous condition and in conjunction with any necessary re-routing of traffic. The Contractor shall immediately remove, turn or cover any devices or barriers which do not apply to existing conditions. All traffic control devices shall conform to MUTCD standards and shall be clean and relatively undamaged. Damaged devices diminishing legibility and recognition, during either night or day conditions, are not acceptable for use. Technical Specifications 01025-2 E. NO WAIVER OF LIABILITY: The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a manner that no undue hazard will result due to the requirements of this article, and the procedures and policies described therein shall in no way act as a waiver of any of the terms of the liability of the Contractor or his surety. F. Contractor's Maintenance of Traffic Plan shall maintain continuous vehicular traffic movement into/out of the project site. The contractor shall coordinate with IRC to maintain existing business operation MOT plans. Item of Payment Payment for the work specified in this item shall be made under: Bid Item No. 002-1 - Maintenance of Traffic — To be included with Signing and Pavement Markings ++ END OF SECTION ++ Technical Specifications 01025-3 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner - occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 013516 "Alteration Project Procedures" for general protection and work procedures for alteration projects. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and store. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control, and for noise control]. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0241 19-1 Selective Demolition 1.6 1.7 1.8 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA -approved certification program. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner's tenants will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are. encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that are known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0241 19-2 Selective Demolition SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations, and coordinate with other contractors on site for separate work under County contracts. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE Al 0.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. D. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de - tensioning. E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0241 19-3 Selective Demolition SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire -suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0241 19-4 Selective Demolition SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire - suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and until temperature has normalized after flame - cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Work in Historic Areas: Selective demolition may be performed only in areas of Project that are not designated as historic. In historic spaces, areas, and rooms, or on historic surfaces, the terms "demolish" or "remove" shall mean historic "removal" or "dismantling" as specified in Section 024296 "Historic Removal and Dismantling." D. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. E. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pac or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0241 19-5 Selective Demolition SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. F. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power -driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power -driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power -driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. D. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent -based adhesive strippers. F. Roofing: Coordinate with County's roofing contractor on site. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Refer to Demolition drawings. See plan page A2.0. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0241 19-6 Selective Demolition SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION END OF SECTION 02 41 19 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0241 19-7 Selective Demolition SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. 2. Section 035300 "Concrete Topping" for emery- and iron -aggregate concrete floor toppings. 3. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 4. Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Fiber reinforcement. 5. Curing compounds. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 1 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives. 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Semirigid joint filler. 11. Joint -filler strips. 12. Repair materials. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of fonnwork. 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI -certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI - certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DIA/D IAM. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M), and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 2 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 2.2 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of j oints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1. 3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass -fiber -reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Pan -Type Forms: Glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. H. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. I. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed. C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184/A184M, fabricated ASTM A706/A706M, deformed bars, assembled with clips. D. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M. E. Deformed -Steel Wire: ASTM A I 064/A I 064M. F. Plain -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M, plain, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 3 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE G. Deformed -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A I 064/A I 064M, flat sheet. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain -steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A775/A775M. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded -wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless- steel bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I with a maximum 15 percent of tricalcium aluminate, or Type II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F or C. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595/C595M, Type IL, portland-limestone cement. 5. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 5S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M, 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II. G. Water: ASTM C94/C94M and potable. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 4 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro -fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM Cl 116/C1116M, Type III, 1 to 2-1/4 inches long. B. Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro -fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long. C. Synthetic Macro -Fiber: Polyolefin macro -fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM CI 116/CI 116M, Type 111, 1 to 2-1/4 inches long. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. B. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D4397, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. 2.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 2.9 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating. Verify with manufacturer that retained products have been tested against interference with bonding of floor covering. 2.10 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, according to ASTM D2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 5 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two -component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022 -inch -thick, galvanized -steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. , B. Repair Overlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion -inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 6 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Normal -weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Slabs -on -Grade: Normal -weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 4701b/cu. yd.. 4. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 7. Synthetic Micro -Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.5 lb/cu. yd.. 2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.15 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete. according to ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For mixer capacity larger than I cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.. 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI I I7M). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 7 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast -concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 8 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 3.5 VAPOR -RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS DIA/D IAM, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded -wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 9 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch -wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 10 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth -formed -finished as -cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth -Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout -Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1- 1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 3. Cork -Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 11 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull - floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power -driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin -film -finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15. b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs -on -grade. C. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs. d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10 -ft. -long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 12 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Slip -Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip -resistive aggregate finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. of dampened slip -resistive aggregate over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface. 2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose slip -resistive aggregate. G. Dry -Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry -shake floor hardener to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly apply dry -shake floor hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer. 2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry -shake floor hardener over surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second dry -shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed by power floating. 3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry -shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after final finishing. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor -bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 13 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast -in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308. 1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. C. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture - retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 14 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second _coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.13 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.14 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from j oints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2- 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 15 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 16 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner may engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM CI72/CI72M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ]one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C567/C567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 8. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one set of two laboratory - cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 03 30 00- 17 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 9. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M) within 48 hours of finishing. 3.17 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION 033000 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 03 30 00- 18 Cast -In -Place Concrete SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Field -installed shear connectors. 4. Grout. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel. 2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural -steel frame and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface -preparation and priming requirements. 5. Section 133419 "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-1 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical, high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic -Load -Resisting System. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade naive, for demand critical welds. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct -tension indicators. 3. Tension -control, high-strength, bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Survey of existing conditions. G. Source quality -control reports. H. Field quality -control reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172). B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom -flange, demand - critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-2 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341 s 1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners maybe repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies after lubrication. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored -load level. 2.2 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. Channels, Angles -Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Corrosion -Resisting Structural -Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A588/A588M, Grade 50 (345). D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, structural tubing. E. Corrosion -Resisting, Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A847/A847M, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-3 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING G. Steel Castings: ASTM A216/A216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S 11. H. Steel Forgings: ASTM A668/A668M. I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 (Grade A325M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1 (Type 8.8-1), compressible -washer type with plain finish. B. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A490 (Grade A490M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts[ or Grade F2280 tension -control, bolt -nut -washer assemblies with splined ends]; ASTM A563, Grade DH (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 490-1 (Type 10.9-1), compressible -washer type with plain finish. C. Zinc -Coated High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325 (Grade A325M), Type 1, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH (ASTM A563M, Class 10S), heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon -steel washers. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold - finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Hooked. - 2. Nuts:. ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F436 (ASTM F436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A153/A153M, Class C. F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 55, weldable. 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F436 (ASTM F436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A153/A153M, Class C. G. Threaded Rods: ASTM AI93/A193M, Grade B7. 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A153/A153M, Class C. H. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold -finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1030. I. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold -finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1018. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-4 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Structural Slide Bearings: Low -friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that provide vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane of expansion joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint. 2.4 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer. E. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M. 2.5 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/CI107M, factory -packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30 -minute working time. 2.6 B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30 -minute working time. FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS DLUDLIM. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-5 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Wall -Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall - opening framing to be attached to structural -steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth. H. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural -steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug -weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.8 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS A. Prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural -steel members protected by concrete fireproofing encased in an outer non -load-bearing steel shell. B. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building column listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E119. 2.9 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-6 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 5. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning." 6. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near -White Blast Cleaning." 8. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning." 9. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one -coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC- PS. Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One -Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2.10 GALVANIZING A. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A123/A123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, and welded door frames attached to structural -steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop -bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop -welded connections according to AWS Dl. I/D 1.1 M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-7 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop -welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS Dl. 1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perforin bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less -than -continuous 360 - degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D 1.1/D 1.1 M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast -in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Baseplates Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. I. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-8 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS DI. I/D 1.1 M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M[ and AWS D1..8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material. 3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire - resistance rating indicated. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural -steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 1200-9 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power -tool cleaning. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High - Performance Coatings." END OF SECTION 051200 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 12 00 - 10 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non -load-bearing wall framing. 3. Interior non -load-bearing wall framing exceeding height limitations of standard, nonstructural metal framing. 4. Floor joist framing. 5. Roof rafter framing. 6. Ceiling joist framing. 7. Soffit framing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf angles, and connections used with cold -formed metal framing. 2. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non - load -bearing, metal -stud -framed, shaft -wall assemblies, with height limitations. 3. Section 092216 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non -load- bearing, metal -stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling -suspension assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: L Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: For cold -formed steel framing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Certificates: For each type of code -compliance certification for studs and tracks. D. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power -actuated anchors. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-1 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. E. Evaluation Reports: For nonstandard cold -formed steel framing post -installed anchors and power -actuated fasteners, from ICC -ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base -metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic -coating thickness. C. Code -Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product -certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS Dl.l/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/Dl.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold -formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold -formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non -Load -Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height. b. Interior Non -Load -Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch. 5. horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-2 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING C. Cold -Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI 5200, and the following: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI 5211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213. D. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 COLD -FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/AI003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation per Structural specifications. B. Steel Sheet for Clips: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating per Structural specifications 2.3 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and per Structural specifications. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and per Structural specifications. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep -leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and per Structural specifications E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep -leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and per Structural specifications Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and per Structural specifications. F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. 2.4 INTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and per Structural specifications IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-3 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and per Structural specifications C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep -leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and per Structural specifications. E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep -leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and per Structural specifications Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows: F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. 2.5 SOFFIT FRAMING A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and per Structural specifications. 2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories from ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole -reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A123/A123M. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-4 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, per Structural specifications. C. ICC -ES ACO1 and ICC -ES AC193 are for expansion anchors in masonry and mechanical anchors in concrete respectively, and ICC -ES AC58 and ICC -ES AC308 are for adhesive anchors in masonry and concrete. Do not use expansion -type anchors where expansion can cause damage to the substrate material. D. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, as appropriate for the substrate. E. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC70. F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self - tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low -profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory -packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C1107/CI107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30 -minute working time. D. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold -formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims. E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold -formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold -formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-5 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold -formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold -formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out -of -square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire - resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire -resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold -formed framing without reducing thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required to obtain fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire -resistive materials from damage. C. Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold -formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-6 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING B. Install cold -formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field -fabricated, cold -formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true -to -line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. D. Install cold -formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold -formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold -formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing -assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole -reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. 3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and, securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: Refer to Structural drawings. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks, with gap not exceeding 1/8 inch between the end of wall -framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space framing per design drawings. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-7 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall -framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full - height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically 48 inches. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges, and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges; terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip -angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.5 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-8 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold -formed steel framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at 96 -inch centers. G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.6 INTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-9 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 4. Connect drift clips to cold -formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Channel Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. 1. Install solid blocking at 96 -inch centers. G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install cold -formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Cold -formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold -formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-10 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 40 00 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold -formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054000 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 054000-11 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Shelf angles. 6. Zinc -coated steel cable. 7. Metal ladders. 8. Ladder safety cages. 9. Structural -steel door frames. 10. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings and loading -dock edge angles. 11. Metal bollards. 12. Pipe Downspout guards. 13. Abrasive metal thresholds. 14. Metal downspout boots. 15. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, wedge -type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-1 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Shelf angles. 6. Zinc -coated steel cable. 7. Metal ladders. 8. Ladder safety cages. 9. Structural -steel door frames. 10. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings, and loading -dock edge angles. 11. Metal bollards. 12. Pipe Downspout guards. 13. Abrasive metal thresholds. 14. Metal downspout boots. 15. Loose steel lintels. C. Samples for Verification: For cable. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For ladders and alternating tread devices, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post -installed anchors, from ICC -ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-2 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders and alternating tread devices. B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. E. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. F. Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304. G. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304. H. "Rolled -Steel Floor Plate" Paragraph below specifies yield strength of 30 ksi (205 MPa); revise if higher strength is required. I. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D. Rolled -Stainless -Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793. K. Abrasive -Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel. L. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold -formed steel tubing. M. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. N. Zinc -Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A741. 1. Wire -Rope Fittings: Hot -dip galvanized -steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-3 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS O. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: As indicated — re: Structural drawings. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230)], with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.064 -inch (1.6 -mm) nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A1008/A1008M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230); 0.0528 -inch (1.35 -mm) minimum thickness; unfinished. P. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated. Q. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), Alloy 6061-T6. R. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063-T6. S. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM 13632/13632M, Alloy 6061-T6. T. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy 443.0-F. U. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). V. Bronze Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semired brass). W. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B151/B15IM, Alloy UNS No. C74500. X. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M,Grade A325 (Grade A325M), Type 3, heavy -hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH3, (ASTM A563M, Class 10S3) heavy -hex carbon -steel nuts; and where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless -Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2 (A4). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-4 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F2329. H. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M), and nuts, ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M). I. Slotted -Channel Inserts: Cold -formed, hot -dip galvanized -steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee -head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 'Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 Interior Painting. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. C. Water -Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat. D. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. E. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. G. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM DI 187/D1187M. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 055000-5 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. I. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6 -inch embedment and 2 -inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-6 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated or recommended by partition manufacturer (whichever is more stringent) with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated. 1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. 2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field -bolted connections where indicated. 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes at 24 inches o.c. E. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2 -inch baseplates with four 5/8 -inch anchor bolts and 1/4 -inch top plates. F. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. G. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc -rich primer. 2.6 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4 -inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc -rich primer. E. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast - in -place concrete. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-7 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.7 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2 -by -2 -1/2 -inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4 -inch -square steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum -oxide granules set in epoxy -resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum -oxide grout. 6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. 7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure -locked steel bar grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch in least dimension. 8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 9. Galvanize and prime ladders, including brackets. 10. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc -rich primer. 2.8 LADDER SAFETY CAGES A. General: 1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c. between primary hoops. 3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages: 1. Primary Hoops: 1/4 -by -4 -inch flat bar hoops. 2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4 -by -2 -inch flat bar hoops. 3. Vertical Bars: 3/16 -by -1 -1/2 -inch flat bars secured to each hoop. 4. Galvanize and prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners. 5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc -rich primer. 2.9 STRUCTURAL -STEEL DOOR FRAMES A. Fabricate structural -steel door frames from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 5/8 -by -1 -1/2 -inch steel channel stops, unless otherwise indicated. Plug -weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints. Secure removable stops to frame with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced at not more than 10 inches o.c. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to accept finish hardware. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-8 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to frames for anchoring frame to floor with expansion shields and bolts. C. Galvanize and prime steel frames. D. Prime exterior steel frames with zinc -rich primer. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize and prime miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc -rich primer. 2.11 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4 -inch -thick steel plate. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide cutouts for controls and holes for wire. 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire. B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8 -inch -thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4 -inch anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 -inch- thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4 -inch wall -thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4 -inch steel machine bolt. E. Prime bollards with zinc -rich primer. F. Wire Rope Parking Garage Guards: 3/4 -inch -diameter, zinc -coated steel wire ropes with wire rope fittings for securing to parking garage columns and walls and for tightening wire rope. 2.12 PIPE and DOWNSPOUT GUARDS A. Fabricate guards from 3/8 -inch -thick by 12 -inch -wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2 -inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4 -inch anchor bolts. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-9 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Galvanize and prime guards. C. Prime guards with zinc -rich primer. 2.13 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates. C. Prime plates with zinc -rich primer. 2.14 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc -rich primer. 2.15 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.16 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.17 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel andiron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel andiron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc -rich primer is indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-10 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc -Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High - Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2.18 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. As -Fabricated Finish: AA -M12. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA -M I 2C22A4 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 055000-11 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled. 3.3 INSTALLING PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," and with requirements applicable to listing and labeling for fire -resistance rating indicated. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal -capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with anchor bolts. Provide four 3/4 -inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete. C. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core -drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. E. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in formed or core -drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of sleeve]. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward internal sleeve. F. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 50 00 - 12 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS G. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4 -inch machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner furnishes padlocks. H. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.5 INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS A. Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4 -inch bolts at each pipe guard. Mount pipe guards with top edge 26 inches above driving surface. 3.6 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated. B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation. 3.7 INSTALLING CAST-IRON WHEEL GUARDS A. Anchor wheel guards to concrete or masonry construction to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Fill cores solidly with concrete. 3.8 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 055000 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 05 50 00 - 13 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum pipe and tube railings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055112 "Metal Pan Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal pan stairs. 2. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental railings fabricated from pipes and tubes. 3. Section 096933 "Low -Profile, Fixed Height Access Flooring" for railings included with access flooring. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed fmish required. 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters, including finish. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. a. Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections. D. Delegated -Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-1 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E894 and ASTM E935. F. Evaluation Reports: For post -installed anchors, from ICC -ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS Dl. 1/D1.IM, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART2=PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-2 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1 -1/2 -inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. 2.4 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. B. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52. C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B429/13429M, Alloy 6063-T6. 1. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe unless otherwise indicated. D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B210, Alloy 6063-T832. E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6. F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B247, Alloy 6061-T6. G. Castings: ASTM 1326/1326M, Alloy A356.0 -T6. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 2. Hot -Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot -dip zinc -coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329 for zinc coating. 3. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Stainless -Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 5. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-3 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 3. Provide tamper-resistant or square or hex socket flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Post -Installed Anchors: Torque -controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc -rich primer. F. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. G. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. H. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." I. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat. J. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-4 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS K. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/1) 1 1 87M. L. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. M. Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic -controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water -Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-5 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. K. Form Changes in Direction as Follows: 1. As detailed. 2. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush -elbow fittings. L. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. M. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. O. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush -resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Mill Finish: AA -M12, nonspecular as fabricated. C. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to' receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-6 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws. D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-7 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. 2. For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces. 3. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces. F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip -fit metal sockets cast in concrete. 3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel -framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire -retardant - treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. For steel -framed partitions, use self -tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. 6. For steel -framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0552 13-8 Pipe and Tube Railings SECTION 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal reveals at wood paneling. 2. Metal brackets and cables at wave soffit and fin walls. 3. Stainless base and caps 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative metal. 1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details. 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. 1. Sections of linear shapes. 2. Samples of welded joints showing quality of workmanship and color matching of materials. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. C. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3/D1.3M- "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 057000-1 Decorative Metal SECTION 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for the following types of decorative metal: a. Reveal of each size, corner bead, and j -mold for wood veneer acoustical panels and plastic laminated wood panels. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store decorative metal in a well -ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity. B. Deliver and store cast -metal products in wooden crates surrounded by enough packing material to ensure that products are not cracked or otherwise damaged. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with decorative metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Use materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Use materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 2.2 ALUMINUM A. Fabricate products from alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below. B. Bars and Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52. C. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003-H14. D. Forgings: ASTM B247, Alloy 6061-T6. E. Castings: ASTM 1326/1326M, Alloy A356.0 -T6. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL A. Castings: ASTM A743/A743M, Grade CF 8M or Grade CF 3M. B. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A666, Type 316. C. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316. D. Wire Rope and Fittings: 1. Wire Rope: 7 -by -7 Type 316. wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A492, IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 057000-2 Decorative Metal SECTION 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL 2. Wire -Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel, and with capability to sustain without failure a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Aluminum Items: Aluminum. 2. Stainless -Steel Items: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to other types of construction indicated. C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching decorative metal items to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable. 1. Provide tamper-resistant or square or hex socket flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. D. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC 193. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Make up wire -rope assemblies in the shop to field -measured dimensions with fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire -rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation. C. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris. D. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 057000-3 Decorative Metal SECTION 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL E. Form simple and compound curves in bars, pipe, tubing, and extruded shapes by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. F. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. G. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. H. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. I. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as needed to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Weld behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 1. Where welding cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no evidence of a welded joint. K. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks. 2.7 METAL REVEALS A. Fabricate metal reveals for wood paneling from 3/4 -by -3/4 -by -0.025 -inch or 1-1/4 by 1- 1/4 by 0.025 -inch brake -formed, stainless-steel channels. Drill for mounting screws 6 inches from ends of channels and not more than 24 inches o.c. Locate mounting screws at same heights for all channels. Provide hex -socket, wafer -head screws for mounting reveals. 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 057000-4 Decorative Metal SECTION 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL 2.10 FINISHES A. Medium -Satin Finish: M32 (Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, medium satin). 2.11 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. D. Dull Matte Finish: Pickled and annealed. E. Bright Matte Finish: Vacuum annealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative metal. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in- place construction. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative metal. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting, welding, and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of decorative metal, restore finishes to eliminate evidence of such corrective work. D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses. F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be performed at same location. 1. Retain protective coverings intact; remove coverings simultaneously from similarly finished items to preclude nonuniform oxidation and discoloration. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 057000-5 Decorative Metal SECTION 05 70 00 DECORATIVE METAL G. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding and requirements for welding and for finishing welded connections in "Fabrication, General" Article. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. H. Field Brazing: Comply with requirements for brazing and for finishing brazed connections in "Fabrication, General' Article. Braze connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop brazed because of shipping size limitations. I. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL REVEALS AT WOOD PANELING A. Install metal reveals between wood panels as paneling is installed. Secure to wood grounds with specified screws. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths. B. Protect finishes of decorative metal from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by decorative metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. C. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 057000 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 057000-6 Decorative Metal SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 4. Shear wall panels. 5. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 6. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 7. Wood furring. 8. Wood sleepers. 9. Utility shelving. 10. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061063 "Exterior Rough Carpentry." 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing, subflooring, and underlayment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. D. OSB: Oriented strand board. E. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal size or greater in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners. 061000-1 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC -ES: 1. Wood -preservative -treated wood. 2. Fire -retardant -treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power -driven fasteners. 6. Post -installed anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire -retardant treated material, ' an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2 -inch nominal thickness or less; 19 percent for more than 2 -inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research ,or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061000-2 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated, items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame - spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire -retardant -treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061000-3 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6841. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by testing agency. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade. 1. Species: a. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. b. Southern pine; SPIB. C. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. d. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB. . e. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA. f. Douglas fir -south; WWPA. g. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA. h. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA. i. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. B. Hand -select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot -holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of [the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061000-4 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA. 4. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. C. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of the following species and grades: 1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 1 grade; SPIB. 3. Hem -fir or hem -fir (north); Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or spruce -pine -fir; Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 2 or 3 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or hem -fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common, or Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or spruce -pine -fir; Construction or No. 2 Common, or Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 or 3 Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species; No. 2 or 3 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common, or Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, exterior, A -C, [ire -retardant treatedjin thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure - preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 06 1000-5 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC70. D. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES ACO1 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Glass -fiber -resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1 -inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. D. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. E. Water -Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3- iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire -retardant -treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. E. Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061000-6 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood -framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 -inch nominal thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative - treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. M. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. N. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in (IBC). 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," Code for One- and Two -Family Dwellings. 3. ICC -ES evaluation report for fastener. ICC's International Building Code for Structural Members," and in ICC's International Residential O. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061000-7 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. P. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard. 2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061000-8 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water -resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing. 2. Section 092216 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5516. 4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. For air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing, include manufacturer's technical data and tested physical and performance properties of products. B. Shop Drawings: For air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing assemblies. 1. Show locations and extent of sheathing, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions. 2. Include details for sheathing joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: From air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing manufacturer, certifying compatibility of sheathing accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the sheathing. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061600-1 Sheathing SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING C. Product Test Reports: For each air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing assembly, indicating compliance with specified requirements, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC -ES: 1. Wood -preservative -treated plywood. 2. Fire -retardant -treated plywood. 3. Air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer of air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing. 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project. B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly for one exterior siding panel and one column base assembly. incorporating backup wall construction, window, storefront, door frame and sill, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate crack and joint treatment and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air -barrier sheathing assembly. a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection and testing of sheathing before external insulation and cladding are installed. b. Include junction with adjacent existing building elements which are to remain. C. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups until mockups are approved. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. For testing agency providing classification marking for fire -retardant -treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 2. For testing and inspecting agency providing tests and inspections related to air - barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing: an independent agency, qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated, and certified by Air Barrier Association of America, Inc. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on field mockups. B. Mockup Testing: Air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing assemblies shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 061600-2 Sheathing SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING mockup testing by a qualified testing agency. This requirement shall apply to exterior wall panels between and including adjacent storefront sections, not to column bases assemblies. 1. Air -Leakage -Location Testing: Mockups will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM El 186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers or ASTM El 186, chamber depressurization with detection liquids. 2. Air -Leakage -Volume Testing: Mockups will be tested for air -leakage rate according to ASTM E783 or ASTM E2357. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. B. Air -Barrier and Water -Resistant Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Performance: Air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing assembly, and seals with adjacent construction, shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid - water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air -barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, tie-ins to other installed air barriers, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. 2.2 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire -retardant -treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061600-3 Sheathing SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201/D3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to ASTM D5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. C. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1 177/C I 177M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. USG Corporation. 2. Type and Thickness: 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches or 48 by 120 inches for vertical installation. B. Air -Barrier and Water -Resistant Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1 177/C I 177M, Type X, coated fiberglass mat gypsum sheathing with integral weather -resistant barrier and air barrier complying with ASTM E2178. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches or 48 by 120 inches for vertical installation. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Flashing and Transitions Strips: As acceptable to sheathing manufacturer. 6. Air Penneance: Maximum 0.004 cfin/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference when tested according to ASTM E2178. 7. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 20 perms when tested according to ASTM E96/E96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A. 8. Sheathing Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cftn/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E2357. 9. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Complies with NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. 10. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 30 days according to manufacturer's written instructions. 11. Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by sheathing manufacturer to produce a complete air -barrier assembly and IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061600-4 Sheathing SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING that are compatible with primary air -barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. For wall sheathing, provide fasteners with organic -polymer or other corrosion - protective coating having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC70. D. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. I. For steel framing less than 0.0329 -inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 -inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C954. 2.5 SHEATHING JOINT -AND -PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium -modulus, neutral -curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." B. Sealant for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass -fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. I . Sheathing Tape: Self -adhering glass -fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass -mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. C. Sheathing Tape for Foam -Plastic Sheathing: Pressure -sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061600-5 Sheathing L_ SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two -Family Dwellings. 3. ICC -ES evaluation report for fastener. D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA -253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold -formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8 -inch gap where non -load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4 -inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V -grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self -furring metal lath is screw -attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of panels. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self -furring metal lath is screw -attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061600-6 Sheathing SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass -fiber sheathing tape to glass -mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. F. Air -Barrier and Water -Resistant Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Install accessory materials according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction, to seal fasteners, and ensure continuity of air and water barrier. a. Coordinate the installation of sheathing with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. b. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing, so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. 2. Connect and seal sheathing material continuously to air barriers specified under other Sections as well as exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. 3. Apply joint sealants forming part of air -barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. 4. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip or preformed silicone extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact. a. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. b. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air -barrier material. 5. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of sheathing material with foam sealant. 6. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. 7. Seal top of through -wall flashings to sheathing with an additional 6 -inch -wide, transition strip. 8. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations; and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. 9. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ABAA Quality Assurance Program: Perform examinations, preparation, installation, testing, and inspections under ABAA's Quality Assurance Program. B. Testing and Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061600-7 Sheathing SECTION 06 16 00 SHEATHING C. Inspections: Air -barrier and water-resistant glass -mat gypsum sheathing, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air -barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 3. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 4. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 5. Compatible materials have been used. 6. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 7. Connections between assemblies (sheathing and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 8. All penetrations have been sealed. D. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Air -Leakage -Location Testing: Air -barrier sheathing assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to. ASTM E1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers or ASTM El 186, chamber depressurization using detection liquids. 2. Air -Leakage -Volume Testing: Air -barrier assemblies will be tested for air -leakage rate according to ASTM E783 or ASTM E2357. E. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 061600 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 061600-8 Sheathing SECTION 06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior primed hardboard trim. 2. Hardboard siding. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Section 074646 `Fiber Cement Siding" for exterior siding and trim material standards. 3. Section 092216 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for framing not exposed to view. 4. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for glass -mat gypsum sheathing with air and vapor barrier. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. - MDO: Plywood with a medium -density overlay ,on the face. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and'certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical -treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. C. Samples for Verification: For hardboard siding, 50 sq. in. for board types and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. 1. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0620 13-1 Exterior Finish Carpentry SECTION 06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 2. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Hardboard Siding and Trim: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period for Factory -Applied Finish: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Siding and Trim (Excluding Finish): 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR TRIM A. Primed Hardboard Trim: ANSI A135.6, primed with manufacturer's standard exterior primer. Recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. B. Surface: Rough sawn texture with grain. 2.2 HARDBOARD SIDING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2. Approved comparable product manufacturer. B. Hardboard Siding: ANSI A135.6, primed with manufacturer's standard exterior primer. 1. Type: 7/16 -inch -thick by 6 -inch -wide lap siding. 2. Texture: Wood grain. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into metal stud or blocking/backing substrate. 1. For face -fastening siding, provide stainless steel ringed -shank siding nails. 2. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face fastening is required. 3. For pressure -preservative -treated wood, provide stainless steel fasteners. 4. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless steel fasteners. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 062013-2 Exterior Finish Carpentry SECTION 06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY B. Wood Glue: Waterproof resorcinol glue recommended by manufacturer for exterior carpentry use. C. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. 1. Horizontal Joint Flashing for Panel Siding: Preformed, stainless steel Z-shaped flashing. D. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," and recommended by sealant and substrate manufacturers for intended application. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Tremco, Inc. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except members with ends exposed in finished work. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16 -inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 -inch radius. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for , installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory primed. 1. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 'Exterior Painting." 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. 1. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 2. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0620 13-3 Exterior Finish Carpentry SECTION 06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 3. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32 -inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 -inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 5. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. 6. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install trim with minimum number of joints as is practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. B. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. 1. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight -fitting joints, with full -surface contact throughout length of j oint. 2. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. C. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 SIDING INSTALLATION A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Hardboard Siding: 1. Install hardboard siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install panels with edges over framing or blocking. 3. Leave 3/16 -inch (5 -mm) gap at perimeter, openings, and horizontal panel joints unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 4. Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations. 5. Install continuous metal flashing at horizontal panel joints. 6. Apply battens and corner trim as indicated. 7. Align fasteners to greatest practical extent and verify that their alignment will engage metal studs or backing plates. C. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding manufacturer. Include base flashing at exterior of assembly. Leave 2" gap between slab or pavement and bottom of siding. D. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. 1. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 062013-4 Exterior Finish Carpentry SECTION 06 20 13 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY B. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. B. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062013 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0620 13-5 Exterior Finish Carpentry SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Closet and utility shelving. 3. Interior frames and jambs. 4. Shop priming of interior architectural woodwork. 5. Shop finishing of interior architectural woodwork. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing interior architectural woodwork that are concealed within other construction before interior architectural woodwork installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections, to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Anchors. 2. Adhesives. 3. Shop finishing materials. 4. Wood -Preservative Treatment: a. Include data and warranty information from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. b. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. C. Include chemical -treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material and manufacturer's written warranty. 5. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Include data and warranty information from chemical - treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 6. Waterborne Treatments: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include the following: a. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections. b. Attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-1 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and reinforcement concealed by construction and specified in other Sections. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each shop -applied color and finish specified. 1. Size: a. Panel Products: 12 inches by 12 inches. b. Lumber Products: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber for Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Veneer Leaves: Representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent -finished interior architectural woodwork. 3. Lumber and Panel Products with Shop -Applied Opaque Finish: 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color. a. Finish entire exposed surface. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Adhesives. B. Evaluation Reports: For fire -retardant -treated wood materials, from ICC -ES. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTLAS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program 2. Installer Qualifications: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical interior architectural woodwork as shown on Drawings: a. Low wall cap b. Field -built vision lites at Supervisor office enclosure 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Owner specifically approves such deviations by Change Order. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-2 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 2. B. Do not deliver interior architectural woodwork until painting and similar finish operations that might damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. Complete woodwork installation and finishing prior to installation of floor finishes. C. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1. Handle and store fire -retardant -treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels or certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the Architectural Woodwork Standards. Comply with Contract Documents and Architectural Woodwork Standards. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-3 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. B. Hardwood Lumber: 1. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent -finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building unless otherwise indicated. 2. Species: Red oak or similar species, final selection TBD. 3. Cut: Quarter cut/quarter sawn. 4. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 5. For trim items other than base wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 6. For base wider than available lumber, glue for width. Do not use veneered construction. 7. For rails thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for thickness. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. 1. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood 2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 2.4 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Economy. B. Shelf Material: 3/4 -inch solid lumber. C. Cleats: 3/4 -inch solid lumber. D. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood. E. Wood Finish: Opaque. 2.5 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent - finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building unless otherwise indicated. 1. Species: Red oak or similar species, final selection TBD. 2. Cut: Quarter cut/quarter sawn. 3. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 4. Provide split species on frames and jambs that face areas with different wood species, matching each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished. C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 1. Do not use plain -sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-4 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2.6 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED WOOD MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood Materials: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products according to test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln -dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained, transparent, or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment, and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Fire -retardant -treated softwood lumber, kiln -dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 1. Preservative Treatment: Provide softwood lumber treated by pressure process, AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b. a. Provide where in contact with concrete or masonry and as indicated on drawings. b. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. C. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. d. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 2. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Complying with requirements; provide where indicated. B. Provide self -drilling screws for metal -framing supports, as recommended by metal -framing manufacturer. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-5 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. 2. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. D. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: a. Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. b. Edges of Rails, Wall Caps and Similar Members 3/4 Inch Thick or more: 1/4 inch. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. 1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times interior architectural woodwork fabrication will be complete. 4. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. a. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. b. Verify that parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. 2.9 SHOP PRIMING A. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. B. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer as specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end -grain surfaces. C. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Transparent Finish: Shop -seal concealed surfaces with required pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-6 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end -grain surfaces. 2.10 SHOP FINISHING A. Finish interior architectural woodwork with transparent finish at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of interior architectural woodwork. Apply two coats to end - grain surfaces. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom finished. 2. Finish: System: Polyurethane, Catalyzed. 3. Wash Coat for Closed -Grain Woods: Apply wash -coat sealer to woodwork made from closed -grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 5. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash -coat sealer and allow to dry 6. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60 -degree gloss meter according to ASTM D523. D. Opaque Finish: 1. Architectural Woodworking Standards Grade: Same as item to be finished. 2. Finish: System - Lacquer, Pre Catalyzed. 3. Color: Per Owner's final selection, TBD. 4. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60, gloss units measured on 60 -degree gloss meter according to ASTM D523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition interior architectural woodwork to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of installation. B. Before installing interior architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming of concealed surfaces. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble interior architectural woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed during shop fabrication. C. Install interior architectural woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-7 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut interior architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Preservative -Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4. F. Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: Install fire -retardant -treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. G. Anchor interior architectural woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. 1. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. 2. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with interior architectural woodwork. 3. For shop -finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. H. Standing and Running Trim: 1. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. 2. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single -length pieces are necessary. 3. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 4. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with latex sealant, painted to match wall. 5. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. I. Railings: 1. Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch variation from a straight line. 2. Stair Rails: Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads and railings, and railings to newel posts. a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with wood surface. 3. Wall Rails: Support rails on wall brackets securely fastened to wall framing. a. Space rail brackets not more than 3' — 0" o.c. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program certifying that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade. 1. Inspection entity shall prepare and submit report of inspection. 3.4 REPAIR A. Repair damaged and defective interior architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects and to result in interior architectural woodwork IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 064023-8 Interior Architectural Woodwork 3.5 SECTION 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK being in compliance with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade. B. Where not possible to repair, replace defective woodwork. C. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of interior architectural woodwork. 1. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 2. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied. D. Field Finish: See Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. CLEANING A. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064023 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064023-9 Interior Architectural Woodwork SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -clad architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate - clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 066116 "Solid Surfacing Countertops" for counters at these cabinets. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. B. Hardware Coordination: Hardware selection for cabinets per Owner's final selection, TBD. Hardware to have brushed stainless construction and finish. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic -laminate architectural cabinets. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or manufacturer's standard size. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish. E. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge. IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641 16-1 Architectural Cabinets SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1. 2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: 8 by 10 inches for each color, pattern, and surface finish. a. Provide edge banding on one edge. 3. Corner Pieces: a. Cabinet -front frame joints between stiles and rails and at exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 4. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. High-pressure decorative laminate. 4. Glass. 5. Adhesives. B. Evaluation Reports: For fire -retardant -treated materials, from ICC -ES. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical architectural cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641 16-2 Architectural Cabinets SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork and installation complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Face frame. D. Door and Drawer -Front Style: Flush overlay. 1. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. E. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart LLC. C. Comparable product manufacturer. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641 16-3 Architectural Cabinets SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS 4. Edges: Grade HGS 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS a. Edges of Plastic -Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. C. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic -laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid -hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic -Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 2. Wood veneer plywood for cabinet body and base. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire - test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641 16-4 Architectural Cabinets SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln -dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of architectural cabinets. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Accuride International. b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. C. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company. d. Manufacturer of comparable product. B. Butt Hinges: 2 -3/4 -inch, five -knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095 -inch -thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. C. Back -Mounted Pulls: BHMA Al 56.9, B02011. D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1 HD -100 and Grade 1 HD -200: Side mounted; full -extension type; zinc - plated -steel ball-bearing slides. 2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2. 3. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1. IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641 16-5 Architectural Cabinets 2.5 2.6 SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200. I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. L. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2 -inch OD, molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Color: brown. M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA Al 56.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample. 2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel base. 3. Bright Brass, Vacuum Coated: BHMA 723 for brass base; BHMA 729 for zinc - coated -steel base. 4. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base; BHMA 636 for steel base. 5. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 6. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base. 7. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. N. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant -treated softwood lumber, kiln -dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement or Contact cement. 1. -Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641 16-6 Architectural Cabinets SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at manufacturer's shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer -head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish or toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program certifying that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade. 1. Inspection entity shall prepare and submit report of inspection. IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641 16-7 Architectural Cabinets SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 IRC Admin Complex Plastic -Laminate -Clad North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0641,16-8 Architectural Cabinets SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flush wood veneer wall panels. 2. Flush acoustical wood veneer wall panels. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing flush wood pan- eling that is not concealed within other construction. 4. Shop finishing of flush wood paneling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hang- ing strips required for installing paneling that is concealed within other construc- tion before paneling installation. 2. Section 057000 "Decorative Metal" for metal reveals at plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Test Methods: 1. ASTM C 423 — Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Re- verberation Room Method performed by an independent testing agency. 2. ASTM E 84 — Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build- ing Materials. 3. ASTM E 90 — Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Trans- mission Loss. 4. ASTM C 635 — Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acous- tical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 5. ASTM C 636 — Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspen- sion Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 6. ASTM E 1264 — Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. 7. AWI — Architectural Woodwork Institute. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other re- lated units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treated manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials complies with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: For flush wood paneling: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show details full size. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking specified in other Sections. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064216-1 Flush Wood Paneling 1.6 1.7 SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 4. For paneling produced from pre -manufactured sets, show finished panel sizes, set numbers, sequence numbers within sets, and method of cutting panels to produce indicated sizes. 5. For paneling veneered in fabrication shop, show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified in manufacturer or fabricator's standard sizes. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish. E. Sample for Verification: For the following: 1. Lumber for Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Veneer Leaves: Representative of and selected from flitches to be used for trans- parent -finished paneling. 3. Veneer -Faced Panel Products for Transparent Finish: 8 by 10 inches, for each spe- cies and cut. Include at least one face -veneer seam and finish as specified. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Installation Instructions: Manufacture's installation instructions for wall and ceiling panels. C. Evaluation Reports: For fire -retardant treated materials, from ICC -ES. D. Certifications: Certified test reports showing compliance with performance requirements specified. E. Operation and Maintenance Data for Installed Products: Include precautions relating to harmful cleaning materials and methods that would affect the service of life of the panels. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide wood veneer wall panels from a single manufacturer with at least 2 years prior experience fabricating projects of similar size and complexity. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate prod- ucts similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of success- ful in-service performance. C. Install Qualifications: Installation shall be done by qualified Carpenters experience in the installation of architectural woodwork. Installers shall receive training on handling, cut- ting, machining, and field fmishing the specific product prior to receiving the materials on site. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample Submittals to demon- strate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical paneling as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064216-2 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING E. Fire Performance Characteristics: Class A as tested by an independent, accredited testing facility. 1. Tests: ASTM E 84 a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 450 or less as specified by State or local codes. F. Coordination of Work: Installing contractor shall organize and conduct a pre -installation survey of temperature, humidity, and construction elements attaching, penetrating, or con- cealed behind the wood veneer wall panels. G. Wood veneer wall panels shall be manufactured from no less than 75 percent post-indus- trial recycled materials by weight. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panels to the project in original, unopened packages. Inspect containers for visible damage and report any questionable condition to the shipper and manufacturer immedi- ately. B. Store products out of direct sunlight in a fully enclosed, clean, dry space and protected from damage with temperature controlled between 50 and 86 degrees F. C. Handle products carefully to avoid damaging panel surfaces or chipping edges. Report damage immediately. Installation of damaged panels is not covered by the manufacturer's warranty. 1.9 FIELD CONITIONS A. Do not install wood veneer wall panels until space is enclosed and weather proofed, wet work is completely dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for the project when occupied for its intended use. B. Permit panels to reach room temperature, 50 to 86 degrees F, and stabilized moisture con- tent of 25 to 55 percent relative humidity for at least 72 hours before installation per AWI Standards. Building shall be enclosed and HVAC systems functioning in continuous oper- ation with relative humidity maintained between 25 and 55 percent. C. Field Measurements: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimen- sions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measure- ments on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support paneling by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where paneling is indicated to fit other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimen- sions. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0642 16-3 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16; FLUSH WOOD PANELING PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELING FABRICATIONS A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsi- bility for production of paneling specified in this Section. 2.2 PANELING, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of flush wood paneling (wood veneer wall surfacing) indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the ref- erenced woodwork quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Doc- uments in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.3 FLUSH ACOUSTICAL WOOD VENEER WALL PANELS (WD-PNL-1) A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provided by Navy Is- land, Inc.; SoundPly RF M19, or comparable product by another in accordance with Pro- visions for Substitution. B. Acoustical Panel as Follows: An architectural face mater, wood veneer, laminated to a rigid backer with a combined thickness of not less than 0.080 inch. C. Acoustical Panels: Panels shall be furnished with a perforated face consisting of 0.020 inch diameter holes in an offset pattern. The perforations shall be clean without rounded edges or grain pull out between perforations. A minimum of 99.5% of the perforations shall be acoustically functional, providing unobstructed passage into the open cavities of the core. Perforations diameter shall be uniform in diameter the full thickness of the face and not tapered or rough. An appropriate backer sheet, designed to balance the face, shall be fur- nished on the back of the panels and will vary based on the face sheet specified. D. Panels Edge Treatment: Panels shall be edge banded with the matching materials and fin- ish, or as specified by the Architect, to match or contrast with the panel face. E. Panel Weight: Panels with supports shall not exceed 1.45 lbs/sql. F. Panel Sizes: panels shall be custom -sized based on Drawings and field dimensions up to a maximum of 60 inches by 144 inches. G. Panel Thickness 1. Wall Panels: 3/4 inch. H. Flame Resistance: Class 1(A) rating based on ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Sur- face Burning Characteristics in Building Materials. Some veneer species and other face materials may not achieve an overall Class 1(A) rating. Check with local building codes for requirements or exemptions. I. NRC — Noise Reduction Coefficient for acoustical panels shall not be less than 0.70 with Type F6 mount for wall and panels and no added acoustical insulation. Panel Stability: Linear contraction or expansion shall not exceed 0.4% maximum variation in width or height per ASTM D 1037. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064216-4 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING K. Veneer Faced Panels: 1. Species: White Oak. 2. Cut: Rift cut. 3. Grade: Trugrade 90. 4. Matching Veneer Leaves: Slip matching. 5. Matching Between Panels: Blueprint and endmatched. 6. Finishes, shall be applied in the shop: Clear finish. 2.4 FLUSH ACOUSTICAL WOOD VENEER CEILING PANELS (WS PNL-2) A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provided by Navy Is- land, Inc.; SoundPly RF M25, or comparable product by another in accordance with Pro- visions for Substitution. B. Acoustical Panels as Follows: An architectural face material, wood veneer, laminated to a rigid backer with a combine thickness of not less than 0.080 inch. C. Acoustical Panels: Panels shall be furnished with a perforated face consisting of 0.020 inch diameter holes in an offset pattern. The perforations shall be clean without rounded edges or grain pull out between perforations. A minimum of 99.5% of the perforations shall be acoustically functional, providing unobstructed passage into the open cavities of the core. Perforations diameter shall be uniform in diameter the full thickness of the face and not tapered or rough. An appropriate backer sheet, designed to balance the face, shall be fur- nished on the back of the panels and will vary based on the face sheet specified. D. Panels Edge Treatment: Panels shall be edge banded with the matching materials and fin- ish, or as specified by the Architect, to match or contrast with the panel face. E. Panel Weight: Panels with supports shall not exceed 1.75 lbs/sq'. F. Panel Sizes: Panels shall be custom -sized based on Drawings and field dimensions up to a maximum of 60 inches by 144 inches. G. Panel Thickness: 1. Ceiling Panels: 1 inch. H. Flame Resistance: Class 1(A) rating based on ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Sur- face Burning Characteristics in Building Materials. Some veneer species and other face materials may not achieve an overall 1(A) rating. Check with local building codes for re- quirements or exemptions. I. NRC — Noise Reductions Coefficient for acoustical panels shall not be less than 0.90 with Type E400 or F6 mount for ceiling panels and no added acoustical insulation. Panel Stability: Linear contraction or expansion shall not exceed 0.4% maximum variation in width or height per ASTM D 1037. K. Veneer Faced Panels: 1. Species: White Oak. 2. Cut: Rift cut. 3. Grade: Trugrade 90. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064216-5 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 4. Matching Veneer Leaves: Slip matching. 5. Matching Between Panels: Blueprint and endmatched 6. Finishes, shall be applied in the shop: Clear finish. 2.5 FLUSH WOOD VENEER WALL PANELS (WD PNL-3) A. Grade: Premium B. Wood Species and Cut: White Oak, Rift cut. C. Veneer Matching Method: 1. Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 2. Matching Between Panels: Blueprint and endmatched. D. Panel Core Construction: Fire retardant particleboard or fire -retardant MDF. 1. Thickness: 1 inch. E. Exposed Panel Edges: Inset solid -wood or wood -veneer matching faces. F. Fire Retardant Treated Paneling: Panels shall consist of wood -veneer and fire -retardant particleboard or fire -retardant medium -density fiberboard (MDF). Panels shall have a flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84, and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. G. Assemble panels by gluing and concealed fastening. H. Shop Finishing: Clear. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of reference quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Moisture Content: 5% to 10% C. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. D. Provide solid wood trim matching panels behind open panel joints as indicated on Drawings. 2.7 FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED MATERIAL A. Fire -Retardant Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant treated materials are indi- cated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality stand- ard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064216-6 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 2. Use fire -retardant treatment formulations that do not bleed though or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 of less and smoke-developed.index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 ex- cept for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300.000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw -holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250.000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw -hold- ing capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf, respectively. C. Fire -Retardant Fiberboard: MDF panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from soft- wood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at a time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.8 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15% moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure an- chorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls. C. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by panel fabricator for each substrate for se- cure anchorage. 2.9 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacture's standard direct hung metal sus- pension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as deter- mined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, con- ducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Post installed expansion anchors. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064216-7 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service con- dition. 2. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for appli- cation indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construc- tion, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a quali- fied testing and inspecting agency. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 inch diameter wire. D. Hanger Rods or Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.040 inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. 2.10 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or comparable products by another in accordance with Provisions for Substitu- tion: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Wide -Face, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653, not less than G40 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16 inch wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold -rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Color as selected by Architect. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Sand fire -retardant treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Arrange paneling in shop or other suitable space in proposed sequence for examination by Architect. Mark units with temporary sequence numbers to indicate position in proposed layout. 1. Layout one elevation at a time if approved by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the date and time when layout will be available for viewing. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 064216-8 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 3. Provide lighting of similar type and level as that of final installation for viewing layout unless otherwise approved by Architect. 4. Rearrange paneling as directed by Architect until layout is approved. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of layout before start of assembly. Mark units and Shop Drawings with assemble sequence numbers based on approval layout. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project Site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times paneling fabrication will be complete. D. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped_ openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.12 SHOP FABRICATION A. General: Finish paneling at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing paneling, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Back priming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to conceal surfaces of paneling. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System -5, conversion varnish. 3. Wash Coat for Closed Grain Woods: Apply wash -coat sealer to woodwork made from closed -grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Clear finish. 5. Open Finish for Open Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open grain woods. 6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60 degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect installation area and conditions under which work is to be performed for compli- ance with all manufacturers' environmental requirements. Wet work in the installation ar- eas shall be complete, cured, and dry prior to installation. Do not proceed until unsatisfac- tory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition paneling to humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing paneling, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back priming. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 064216-9 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with quality standard grade of paneling to be installed. B. Install paneling level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96 inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96 inches horizontal variation from a true plane. 1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal with, align- ment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceed- ing 1/32 inch. C. Anchor wall paneling to supporting substrate with concealed Z -bars and panel hanger clips. D. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of paneling. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/primer coast are shop applied. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL WOOD VENEER WALL PANELS A. Installation shall be done by qualified carpenters experienced in the installation of archi- tectural woodwork. The firm shall demonstrate successful experience installing materials of similar type and quality of those required for this project. The use of proper carpentry tool and techniques shall be required for the installation. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of wall panels consistent with industry standards. C. Confirm field dimensions are coordinated with shop drawings. D. Coordinate the exact size, location, and sequencing of panels including penetrations by building components. E. Lay out wall panels per approved shop drawings. Report interferences or deviations before proceeding. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL WOOD VENEER CEILING PANELS A. Ceiling panels shall not be installed in grid suspension system until rough -in inspection has been approved by the following: (MAC Trades and Departments) HVAC (EMC), Electri- cal, Fire, Plumbing, and Building Inspections. Work covered without first obtaining the required inspections and approval shall require the covering to be removed to make the necessary inspections. B. Installation shall be done by qualified carpenters experienced in the installation of archi- tectural woodwork. The firm shall demonstrate successful experience installing materials of similar type and quality of those required for this project. The use of proper carpentry tools and techniques shall be required for the installation. C. Comply with manufacturer's instruction and recommendations for installation of ceiling panels consistent with industry standards. D. Confirm field dimensions are coordinated with shop drawings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064216-10 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 16 FLUSH WOOD PANELING E. Coordinate the exact size, location, and sequencing of penetrations of ceiling panels by building components. F. Lay out ceiling pattern per approved shop drawings. Where not otherwise indicated, lay out panels so margins on opposite sides of rooms are equal or greater than 1/2 panel width. G. Where ceilings of different heights abut, install per approved Shop Drawings. H. Suspension System: Work shall comply with Section 09511 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings." 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damage and defective paneling where possible, to eliminate defects. Where not pos- sible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance. B. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. C. Adjust panels after installation so that surfaces are aligned with gaps or reveals between units straight and consistent in width. END OF SECTION 064216 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 06 42 16 - 11 Flush Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 19 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate - faced wood paneling that is not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 057000 "Decorative Metal" for metal reveals at plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling. 2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing paneling that is concealed within other construction before paneling installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: C. Shop Drawings: For plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show details full size. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking specified in other Sections. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size. E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of plastic laminate. F. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed laminate, 8 by 10 inches. 1. Provide one Sample applied to core material and with specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each'type of product. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064219-1 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 19 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program. D. Evaluation Reports: For fire -retardant -treated materials, from ICC -ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of front panel at Tax Collector Reception Desk. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver paneling until painting and similar operations that might damage paneling have been completed in installation areas. Store paneling in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet -work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support paneling by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Established Dimensions: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064219-2 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 19 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELING, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of plastic -laminate -faced wood paneling (decorative laminate surfacing) indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide inspections including installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents may contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced woodwork quality standard. Comply with most stringent requirements. 2.2 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Custom. B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and the following requirements: 1. Faces: Grade HGS. 2. Backs: Grade BKH. 3. Exposed Edges: Same as faces where exposed, Grade VGS where panel abuts a stainless reveal. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2. Grain Direction: Vertical. D. Panel Core: Fire -retardant veneer plywood, fire -retardant particleboard or fire -retardant MDF. 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. E. Panel Reveals: Stainless-steel channels with attachment leg, 3/4 by 3/4 by 1/16 inch thick. F. Adhesives for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement or Contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot -melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. G. Assemble panels by gluing and concealed fastening. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. C. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0642 19-3 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 19 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING 2.4 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire - test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln -dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of paneling. C. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw -holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw - holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf , respectively. D. Fire -Retardant Fiberboard: MDF panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E84. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant -treated softwood lumber, kiln -dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064219-4 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Paneling SECTION 06 42 19 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD PANELING B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrous - metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls. C. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by panel fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times paneling fabrication will be complete. B. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition paneling to humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing paneling, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with quality standard grade of paneling to be installed. B. Install paneling level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96 -inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96 -inch horizontal variation from a true plane. 1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. C. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel -hanger clips, splined connection strips, or blind nailing. Do not use face fastening. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING. A. Repair damaged and defective paneling, where possible, to eliminate defects. Where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance. B. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 064219 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 064219-5 Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Paneling SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide. solid surfacing fabrications including but not limited to following: 1. Window sills. 2. Millwork counter tops with or without cove backsplashes. B. Related Sections: Following description of work is included for reference only and shall not be presumed complete: 1. Section 064000 — "Finish Carpentry". 2. Section 064023 — "Architectural Woodwork". 3. Division 22 Plumbing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Solid Surface: Non -porous, homogeneous material maintaining the same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment. B. Reference Standards: 1. ANSI/NPA A208.2-09 - Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) For Interior Applications 2. ASTM C920 -14a - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D638-10 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics 4. ASTM D785-08 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 5. ASTM D790-10 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials 6. ASTM D5420-10 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact) 7. ASTM E84-14 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 8. ASTM E228-11 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials with a Push -Rod Dilatometer 9. ASTM G21-13 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi 10. ASTM G22-76(96) - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria 11. ASTM G155-13 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non -Metallic Materials 12. CSA B45.5-11/IAPMO Z124-2011 - Plastic Plumbing Fixtures 13. NFPA 255-06 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 14. NSF/ANSI 51-07 - Food Equipment Materials 15. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications (amended January 2005) IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0661 16-1 Solid Surfacing Fabrications SECTION 06 61.16 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 16. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 17. UL Environment - Standard for Chemical Emissions for Building Materials, GREENGUARD - Finishes and Furnishings, Section 7.1 UL 2818 18. UL Environment - Gold Standard for Chemical Emissions for Building Materials, GREENGUARD - Finishes and Furnishings, Section 7.1 and 7.2 UL 2818 19. UL 2824 - GREENGUARD Certification Program, Method for Measuring Microbial Resistance from Various Sources Using Static Environmental Chambers 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate Product description including solid surface sheets, sinks, bowls and illustrating full range of standard colors, fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements. Submit Product data with resistance to list of chemicals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for work of this Section. Indicate plans, sections, dimensions, component sizes, edge details, thermosetting requirements, fabrication details, attachment provisions, sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and coordination requirements with adjacent work. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, waste receptacles and other items installed in solid surface. C. Coordination Drawings: Submit coordination drawings indicating plumbing and miscellaneous steel work indicating locations of wall rated or non -rated, blocking requirements, locations and recessed wall items and similar items. D. Samples: Submit samples, minimum 6" x 6" size. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples will be retained as standards for work. E. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit flammability test reports. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operational and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout documents. 2. Provide a commercial care and maintenance kit and video. Review maintenance procedures and warranty details with Owner upon completion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum 5 -years' experience in the application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of the Product manufacturers. B. Mock -Ups: 1. Prior to final approval of Shop Drawings, erect 1 full size mock-up of each component at Project site demonstrating quality of materials and execution for Architect review. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0661 16-2 Solid Surfacing Fabrications SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 2. Should mock-up not be approved, rework or remake until approval is secured. Remove rejected units from Project site. 3. Approved mock-up will be used as standard for acceptance of subsequent work. 4. Approved mock-ups may remain as part of finished work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver no components to Project site until areas are ready for installation. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store components indoors prior to installation. 2. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for material only for period of 10 years against defects and/or deficiencies in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Promptly correct any defects or deficiencies which become apparent within warranty period, to satisfaction of Architect and at no expense to Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer List: Products of following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of Drawings, Schedules and Specifications: 1. Conan® by DuPont; www.corian.com 2. Samsung Chemical USA; www.staron.com 3. Wilsonart Contract; www.Wilsonartcontract.com Substitution Limitations: This Specification is based on Corian® Products. Comparable Products from manufacturers listed herein will be accepted provided they meet requirements of this Specification. 2.02 MATERIALS Description: Performance/Design Criteria: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0661 16-3 Solid Surfacing Fabrications SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 1. Solid Surface Based Products: Property Requirement Test Procedure (min or max) a. Tensile Strength 6000 psi min ASTM -D638 b. Tensile Modulus 1.5 x 106 psi min ASTM D638 c. Tensile Elongation 0.4% min. ASTM D638 d. Flexural Strength 10000 psi min ASTM D790 e. Flexural Modulus 1.2 x 106 psi min ASTM D790 f. Hardness >85 -Rockwell "M" scale ASTM D785 min g. Thermal Expansion 2.2 x 10-5 in./in./°F ASTM E228 h. Fungi and Bacteria Does not support ASTM G21 & G22 microbial growth i. Microbial Resistance Highly resistant to mold UL 2824 growth j. Ball Impact No fracture - 1/2 lb. Ball: NEMA LD 3 6 mm slab - 36" drop Method 3.8 12 mm slab - 144" drop k. Weatherability DE*94<5 in 1,000 hrs ASTM G155 1. Flammability ASTM E84, NFPA 255 & UL 723 All Colors 6mm 12mm In. Flame Spread <25 <25 n. Smoke Developed <25 <25 o. Class A A NFPA 1010, Life Safety Code Solid Surface Material: Non -porous, homogeneous material maintaining the same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment; not coated, laminated or of composite construction; meeting following criteria: Flammability: Class 1 and A when tested to UL 723. Adhesive for Bonding to Other Products: One component silicone to ASTM C920. Sealant: A standard mildew -resistant, FDA/UL® in all areas, and NSF/ANSI 51 compliant in Food Zone areas, recognized silicone color matched sealant or clear silicone sealant. Heat Reflecting Tape: Manufacturer's standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with cutouts near heat sources. Insulating Nomex® Fabric: Manufacturer's standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid surface material from adjacent heat source. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0661 16-4 Solid Surfacing Fabrications SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 2.03 COMPONENTS Window Sills: 1/2" thick solid surfacing material, adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams, edge details as indicated on Drawings. Color selected later by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. Counter Perimeter Frame: Ensure 3/4" thick, moisture resistant, fire -retardant treated cores for counter tops in wet areas having sinks or lavatories are 3/4" thick exterior grade plywood with waterproof adhesive, Fir or Poplar plywood, veneer core only. Ensure fire retardant Product contains fire -retardant chemicals injected with raw materials during manufacturing and achieves a maximum flame -spread rating of 25 with a maximum smoke development of 200 when tested to ASTM E84. Lavatory Tops with Seamed Bowls: 1/2" thick countertop of solid polymer 100% acrylic solid surfacing material, cast to desired profiles and sizes having edge details conforming to CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124,. Provide countertops complete with backsplashes of size shown on Drawings. Ensure countertop and backsplash is of single color; coved solid surface as selected by Owner, TBD. Refer to Mechanical drawings and specifications for sinks. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and solid polymer manufacturer requirements. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on Drawings. 2. Where indicated, thermoform corners and edges or other objects to shapes and sizes indicated on Drawings, prior to seaming and joining. Cut components larger than finished dimensions and sand edges to remove nicks and scratches. Heat entire component uniformly prior to forming. 3. Ensure no blistering, whitening and cracking of components during forming. 4. Fabricate backsplashes from solid surfacing material with optional radius cove where counter and backsplashes meet as indicated on Drawings. Backsplashes for most colors may be fabricated by traditional means discussed in K-25294 Backsplashes. Colors with metallic/mica particle or veined colors creating directional aesthetics (K-26833 Directional Aesthetics) may require the techniques in Technical Bulletin K-28235 Thermoformed Backsplash. 5. Fabricate joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive. Ensure joints are inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 2" wide reinforcing strip of solid polymer material under each joint. Reinforcing strip of solid polymer material is not required when using DuPontTM Joint Adhesive 2.0. 6. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on Drawings. 7. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout cutouts, then sand edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work. 8. Finish: Ensure surfaces have uniform finish. Finish and color per final selection by Owner, TBD. a. Matte, with a 60° gloss rating of 5 - 20. b. Semi -gloss, with a 60° gloss rating of 25 - 50. C. Polished, with a 60° gloss rating of 55 - 80. 9. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Variation in Component Size: +/-1/8". b. Location of Openings: +/-1/8" from indicated location. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0661 16-5 Solid Surfacing Fabrications . SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Verify actual site dimensions and location of adjacent materials prior to commencing work. 3. Examine cabinets upon which counter tops are to be installed. Verify cabinets are level to within 1/8" in 10'- 0". 4. Notify Architect in writing of any conditions which would be detrimental to installation. B. Evaluation and Assessment: Commencement of work implies acceptance of previously completed work. 3.02 INSTALLATION Install components plumb, level, rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings and Product installation details. Fabricate field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints being inconspicuous in finished work. Exposed joints/seams are not permitted. Keep components and hands clean when making joints. Reinforce field joints as specified herein. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. Route radii and contours to template. Anchor securely to base component or other supports. Align adjacent components and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match work. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. Install countertops with no more than 1/8" sag, bow or other variation from a straight line. Adhere undermount/submount/bevel mount sinksibowls to countertops using manufacturer's recommended adhesive and mounting hardware. Adhere topmount sinks/bowls to countertops using manufacturer recommended adhesives and color -coordinated silicone sealant. Secure seam mount bowls and sinks to counter tops using color matched joint adhesive. Seal between wall and components with joint sealant as specified herein and in Section 07 92 00, as applicable. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on Drawings. Adhere to countertops using a standard color -coordinated silicone sealant. Adhere applied sidesplashes to countertops using a standard color -matched silicone sealant. Provide coved backsplashes and sidesplashes at walls and adjacent millwork. Fabricate radius cove at intersection of counters with backsplashes to dimensions shown on reviewed Shop Drawings. Adhere to countertops using manufacturer's standard color -coordinated joint adhesive. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0661 16-6 Solid Surfacing Fabrications . -- SECTION 06 61 1.6 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Ensure components are clean on date of Substantial Completion of the Work. Coordinate connections of plumbing fixtures with Mechanical drawings and specifications Division 22 Mechanical. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with the same. 3.03 REPAIR Repair minor imperfections and cracked seams and replace areas of severely damaged surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's "Technical Bulletins". 3.04 SITE QUALITY CONTROL Non -Conforming Work: Replace damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, restored or cleaned, to satisfaction of Architect at no cost to Owner. 3.05 CLEANING Remove excess adhesive and sealant from visible surfaces. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's "Care and Maintenance Instructions". 3.06 PROTECTION Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of Project. Protect surfaces from damage until date of Substantial Completion of the Work. END OF SECTION 066116 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 0661 16-7 Solid Surfacing Fabrications SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Polyisocyanurate foam -plastic board. 2. Glass -fiber blanket. 3. Mineral -wool blanket. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Evaluation Reports: For foam -plastic insulation, from ICC -ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM -PLASTIC BOARD A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced: ASTM C1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Dow Chemical Compan (The). b. Manufacturer of comparable product. 2. , Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. 2.2 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET A. Glass -Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corrine. C. Manufacturer of comparable product. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 072100-1 Thermal Insulation SECTION 07 2100, THERMAL INSULATION B. Glass -Fiber Blanket, Polypropylene -Scrim -Kraft Faced: ASTM C665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame -spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville, a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corning. C. Manufacturer of comparable product. 2.3 MINERAL -WOOL BLANKETS A. Mineral -Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville: a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Rockwool International. C. Manufacturer of comparable product. B. Mineral -Wool Blanket, Reinforced -Foil Faced: ASTM C665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame -spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E84); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil -scrim kraft, or foil -scrim polyethylene. 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 -inch thick by 2 inches square. 2. Spindle: Copper -coated, low -carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation. B. Insulation -Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch -thick galvanized -steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. C. Insulation Standoff. Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild -steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1/2 inch between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached. D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 072100-2 Thermal Insulation SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R -value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities fonned by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3 -inch (76 -mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. Vapor -Retarder -Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor -retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction. b. Ceilings: Set units with facing placed on warm side of insulation (toward plenum/roof). B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass -Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. C. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 072100-3 Thermal Insulation SECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION END OF SECTION 072100 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 072100-4 Thermal Insulation SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building paper. 2. Building wrap. 3. Flexible flashing. 4. Drainage material. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For building wrap, include data on air and water -vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of building wrap at terminations, openings, and penetrations. Show details of flexible flashing applications. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For water -resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC -ES. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E1677, Type I air barrier; with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Water -Vapor Permeance: Not less than 20 perms per ASTM E96/E96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 2. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfin/sq. ft. at 0.3 -inch wg when tested according to ASTM E2178. 3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. 4. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285. B. Building -Wrap Tape: Pressure -sensitive plastic tape recommended by building -wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefm to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285. B. Rubberized -Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized -asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 072500-1 Weather Barriers SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285. C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing manufacturer for substrate. D. Nails and Staples: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing manufacturer and complying with ASTM F1667. 2.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL A. Drainage Material: Product shall maintain a continuous open space between water -resistive barrier and exterior cladding to create a drainage plane and shall be used under siding and portland cement plaster. 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to NFPA 285. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water -resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed. B. Cover sheathing with water -resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 -inch overlap unless otherwise indicated. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water -resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water -resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. 3.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Install drainage material over building wrap and flashing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 072500 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 072500-2 Weather Barriers SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER -CEMENT SIDING 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fiber -cement siding. B. Related Requirements: I Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Section 062013 "Exterior Finish Carpentry" for exterior trim. 3. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for weather -resistive barriers. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 6" primed fiber -cement beveled lap siding with rough sawn wood grain texture. 2. 2" x 4" nominal primed fiber -cement trim with rough sawn wood grain texture. B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required. 1. 12-inch4ong-by-actual-width Sample of siding. 2. 12 -inch -long -by -actual -width Samples of trim and accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of fiber -cement siding. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber -cement siding. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fiber -cement siding required, from ICC -ES. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Furnish full lengths of fiber -cement siding including related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 074646-1 Fiber -Cement Siding SECTION 07 46 46 FIBER -CEMENT SIDING 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. B. Build mockup of typical wall area as described in Section 062013, "Exterior Finish Carpentry." C. Build mockups for fiber -cement siding including accessories. D. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. E. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use. B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including cracking and deforming. 2. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering. 3. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Manufacturers: Refer to Section 062013, "Exterior Finish Carpentry." 2.2 FIBER -CEMENT SIDING A. General: ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber -cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E136; with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84. B. Labeling: Provide fiber -cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 7/16 inch. 2. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 6-1/4 to 6-1/2 inches wide in plain edge style. 3. Texture: Rough sawn Wood grain. 4. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 074646-2 Fiber -Cement Siding SECTION 07 46 46. FIBER -CEMENT SIDING 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. B. Provide accessories snatching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. C. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber -cement decorative accessories as indicated: D. Moldings and trim. E. Flashing: Provide stainless-steel flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated. F. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle -head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw -threads, into substrate. 2. For fastening fiber cement, use stainless-steel fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber -cement siding and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c. 3. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074646 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 074646-3 Fiber -Cement Siding SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each of the following 1. Underlayment materials. 2. Elastomeric sealant. 3. Butyl sealant. 4. Epoxy seam sealer. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: C. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 3. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 4. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 5. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 6. Include details of special conditions. 7. Include details of connections to adjoining work. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 tested and FM Approvals approved. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For copings and roof edge flashing, from an agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction showing compliance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Build mockups in conjunction with other trades and materials requirements — refer to Section 064013 "Exterior Finish Carpentry". 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Owner specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE; AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. 2. Protect stored sheet metal flashing and trim from contact with water. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies, including cleats, anchors, and fasteners, shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Architectural Metal Flashing, Condensation and Air Leakage Control, and Reroofing" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS I A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. 1. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA -M 12C22A4 1, Class I, 0.018 min or thicker. 2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D226/D226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt; nonperforated. B. Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene, synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures over 220 deg F; and complying with physical requirements of ASTM D226/D226M for Type I and Type II felts. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain underlayinent from single source from single manufacturer. C. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet Underlayment: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip -resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene -film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS -modified asphalt adhesive, with release -paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain underlayment from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Low -Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970/1)1970M; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower. D. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-3 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. C. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 2. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 3. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered and obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 4. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal in accordance with cited sheet metal standard to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-4 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM G. Seams: 1. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.6 ROOF -DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: 1. Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. 2. Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch -long sections. 3. Furnish flat -stock gutter brackets and flat -stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard, but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. 4. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 5. Gutter Profile: to match existing gutters. 6. Expansion Joints: to match existing gutters. 7. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 8. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 9. Gutters with Girth 21 to 25 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. 10. Gutters with Girth 26 to 30 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.063 inch thick. 11. Gutters with Girth 31 to 35 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Stainless Steel: 0.038 inch thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate downspouts to size required, to match existing for profile, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop fabricate elbows. 1. Fabricated Hanger Style: to match existing hangers. 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick. b. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. C. Roof -to -Wall Transition, Expansion -Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick. D. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior comers. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick. E. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 076200-5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick. F. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. 2.7 STEEP -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Apron Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. B. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. 2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through -Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 -inch -long, but not exceeding 12 -foot -long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2 -inch -high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Overhead -Piping Safety Pans: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-6 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62` 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water. 2. Lap joints not less than 2 inches. B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal. 1. Lap horizontal joints not less than 4 inches. 2. Lap end joints not less than 12 inches. C. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet Underlayment: 1. Install self -adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment; wrinkle free. 2. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 3. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. 4. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. 5. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. 6. Roll laps and edges with roller. 7. Cover underlayment within 14 days. D. Install slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Install in shingle fashion to shed water. 2. Lapp joints not less than 4 inches. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details indicated and recommendations of cited sheet metal standard that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Install fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, or sealant. 3. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 4. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. 5. Install continuous cleats with fasteners spaced not more than 12 inches o.c. 6. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil -canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 7. Do not field cut sheet metal flashing and trim by torch. 8. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure -treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 2. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant -filled joints unless otherwise indicated. a. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. b. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. C. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. d. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. 1) Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. 1. Pretin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pretinning where pretinned surface would show in completed Work. 2. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 3. Do not use torches for soldering. 4. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. a. Fill joint completely. b. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 5. Stainless Steel Soldering: a. Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. b. Promptly remove acid -flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. C. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 6. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper. 7. Copper -Clad Stainless Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper -clad stainless steel. H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOF -DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Install sheet metal roof -drainage items to produce complete roof -drainage system in accordance with cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof -drainage system. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-8 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Hanging Gutters: 1. Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. 2. Provide for thermal expansion. 3. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. 4. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 6. Slope to downspouts. 7. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 8. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to match existing condition. 9. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated on Drawings, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. C. Downspouts: 1. Join sections with 1 -1/2 -inch telescoping joints. 2. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. 3. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. 4. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system. D. Expansion -Joint Covers: Install expansion joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated on Drawings. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ROOF FLASHINGS A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. 1. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. 2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: 1. Install roof edge flashings in accordance with ANSVSPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. 1. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. 2. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. 3. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. . 4. Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap -in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF WALL FLASHINGS A. Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture in accordance with cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall -opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" and Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-9 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 3.7 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING A. Overhead -Piping Safety Pans: 1. Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system. 3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shiro and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended in writing by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. C. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures, as determined by Architect. END OF SECTION 076200 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 076200-10 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire -resistance -rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Penetration firestopping Work is part of an allowance. 1.4 UNIT PRICES A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire -protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire -resistance -rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0784 13 - 1 Penetration Firestopping SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core -drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire -resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire -Resistance -Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 -inch wg. 1. F -Rating: Not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 -inch wg. 1. F -Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. W -Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure, differential of 0.30 -inch wg. 1. L -Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfin/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0784 13-2 Penetration Firestopping SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast -in -Place Firestop Devices: Factory -assembled devices for use in cast -in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single -component latex formulations that do not re -emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory -assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluininum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized -steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single -component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat -expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass -fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral -fiber, water -insoluble expansion agents, and fire - retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel -reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. Silicone Sealants: Single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants. 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0784 13-3 Penetration Firestopping SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire -resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375 -inch strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor -ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0784 13-4 Penetration Firestopping SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self -adhering -type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E2174. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL -classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Where Intertek Group -listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek Group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems." C. Where FM Global -approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops." D. Penetration Firestopping Systems with No Penetrating Items FS -1 (through 2-1/2" thick concrete at raised access floor): 1. UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -0042 2. F -Rating: 2 hour. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0784 13-5 Penetration Firestopping SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 3. T -Rating: 3/4 hour. 4. L -Rating at Ambient: Less than 1 cfm/sq. ft. 5. L -Rating at 400 Deg F: Less than 1 cfin/sq. ft. 6. Type of Fill Materials: Rectorseal Metacaulk Fire -Rated Mortar E. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing, including TS column through raised access flooring FS -2 (through 2-1/2" thick concrete): 1. UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -1510 2. F -Rating: 2 hours 3. T -Rating: 0 hours 4. W -Rating: Class I 5. Type of Fill Materials: 3M FB -3000 WT Sealant F. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing FS -3 (through light gauge stud and gypsum board partition): 1. UL -Classified Systems: W -L-8062 . 2. F -Rating: Same as wall rating (1 or 2 hour) 3. T -Rating: 0 hour 4. W -Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing. 5. Type of Fill Materials: Rectorseal Metacaulk wrap strip plus Metacaulk composite sheet plus Metacaulk 1000. 6. Note: this system is also rated the same for cable trays, metallic penetrations, and individual cables. G. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Electrical Cables (see FS -3) H. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Cable Trays with Electric Cables FS -4 (or FS -3): 1. UL -Classified Systems: W -L-4018. 2. F -Rating: 1 hour. 3. T -Rating: 1/4 hour. 4. Type of Fill Materials: 3M COMPANY - CS -195+ Intumescent sheet top & bottom plus MP+ Stix putty, CP 25WB+ caulk, FB -3000 WT sealant or IC 15WB+ caulk. I. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants (see FS -3) END OF SECTION 078413 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0784 13-6 Penetration Firestopping SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames. B. Related Requirements: 1. Door and Hardware Schedules on drawing sheet A9.1 for door hardware for hollow -metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches. 2. Fabrication: Prepare Samples approximately 8 by 10 inches to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13 - 1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES a. Doors: Show vertical -edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable. b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow -metal panels and glazing if applicable. D. Product Schedule: For hollow -metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For door inspector. 1. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101. section 7.2.1.15.4. 2. Submit copy of DHI Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of windborne-debris impact resistance door for tests performed by a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with performance requirements. C. Field quality control reports. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents: For fire -rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of fire -rated door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, section 5.2.3.1 and the following: 1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification. B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of egress door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following: 1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow -metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow -metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4 -inch -high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13-2 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile -impact and cyclic - pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 2 for basic protection. 1. Large -Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade. B. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U -factor of not more than 0.50 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM C518. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow -metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Standard -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1; SDI A250.4, Level C, at locations noted on drawings A2.1 and A9.1 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Core: Manufacturer's standard. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch b. Construction: Fully welded C. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.3 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow -metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2; SDI A250.4, Level B, per drawing sheets A2.1 and A9.1. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Revise "Face" Subparagraph below if embossed or textured faces are required. d. Face: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with minimum A60 (ZF180) coating. e. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. f. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. g. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. h. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep -hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. i. Core: Polyisocyanurate. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13-3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2.4 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 (ZF 180) coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. C. Extra -Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level A at Receiving door only. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 (ZF180) coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep -hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. h. Core: Polyisocyanurate. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A60 (ZF 180) coating. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8 -inch -diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2 -inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment. D. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13-4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.5 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/AI0I IM, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M. E. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow -metal frames of type indicated. F. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.6 FABRICATION A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors at Receiving door. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. B. Hollow -Metal .Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. 3. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45 degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded -steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface - mounted door hardware. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13-5 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW _METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow -metal doors and frames for hardware. D. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal doors and frames. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 4. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. B. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat, and thermosetting topcoat, complying with SDI A250.3. 1. Color and Gloss: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory -applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap doors and fraines to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13-6 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2. Fire -Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 4. Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 5. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar. 6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus ,1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Steel Doors: Comply with SDI A250.8 or NAAMM-HMMA 841 and NAAMM-HMMA guide specification indicated. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow -metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect. B. Inspections: 1. Fire -Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire -rated door according to NFPA 80, section 5.2 2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements according to NFPA 101, section 7.2.1.15. C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP A. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13-7 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames is SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Factory -Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 11 13-8 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow -core flush wood veneer -faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Seven -ply flush wood veneer -faced doors for transparent finish. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. 2. Section 064216 "Flush Wood Paneling" for requirements for veneers from the same flitches for both flush wood doors and flush wood paneling. 3. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 4. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door louvers. 5. Door trim for openings. 6. Door frame construction. 7. Factory -machining criteria. 8. Factory -finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door and frame location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 7. Clearances and undercuts. 8. Requirements for veneer matching. 9. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. 10. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory -finished doors and factory -finished door frames. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 14 16-1 Flush Wood Doors ` II SECTION 08 1 116 FLUSH WOOD DOORS ( provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. 2. Polymer edging, in manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 4. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For door inspector. 1. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4. 2. Submit copy of DHI's Fire and' Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate. B. Field quality -control reports. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Special warranties. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification. B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality -control inspections of egress door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following: 1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons, and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and weathertight, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 08 1416-2 Flush Wood Doors SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors and frames that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 -by -84 -inch section. C. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 -inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors and frames. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for. Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 5. Warranty Period for Hollow -Core Interior Doors: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that doors and frames comply with requirements of grades specified. a. Contractor shall register the Work under this Section with the AWI Quality Certification Program at www.awiqcp.org or by calling 855-345-0991. 2. The Contract Documents may contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard, whichever is more stringent. 2.3 SEVEN -PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Doors (Re: A9.1, A2.1) 1. Performance Grade: a. WDMA I. S. I Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated in this section. b. WDMA I. S. IA Extra Heavy Duty: Public toilets, Janitor's closets, and exits. C. WDMA 1. S. I Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets). 2. Architectural Woodwork Standards or WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Custom. 3. Faces: two-ply wood panel with wood veneer not less than 1/50 inch thick. a. Species: Red oak or other as selected by Owner, TBD. b. Cut: Quarter sliced. C. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. e. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 1) Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 1416-3 Flush Wood Doors SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2) Screw -Holding Capability: 475 lbf in accordance with WDMA T.M. 10. 4. Core for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -1 particleboard. a. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as follows: 1) 5 -inch top -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. 2) 5 -inch bottom -rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. b. Provide doors with glued -wood -stave or WDMA I.S. 10 structural - composite -lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors scheduled to receive exit devices in Hardware Schedule (see A9.1). 5. Core for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Glued wood stave. 6. Core for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: WDMA 1. S. 10 structural composite lumber. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. 7. Core for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Either glued wood stave or WDMA 1. S. 10 structural composite lumber. 8. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. 9. Profile: Single rabbet. 10. Construction: Solid lumber, fire -retardant particleboard, or fire -retardant medium density fiberboard (MDF) with veneered exposed surfaces and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated on Drawings. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory -installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." D. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after fabrication has been completed but before factory finishing. 1. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 1416-4 Flush Wood Doors SECTION 08 14 16 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before fmishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: Architectural Woodwork Standards System -11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed. 3. Staining: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Satin. D. Opaque Finish: 1. Architectural Woodwork Standards, Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: Architectural Woodwork Standards System -11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed. 3. Color: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 4. Sheen: Semigloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors and frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1) For factory -finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 14 16-5 Flush Wood Doors SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS D. Job -Fitted Doors: 1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. 2 Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances: a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. E. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. F. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect. B. Inspections: 1. Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program certifying that wood doors and frames, including installation, comply with requirements of AWI/AWMCA/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for the specified grade. 2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements in accordance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15. C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 1416-6 Flush Wood Doors SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Storefront framing. 2. Manual -swing entrance doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 084126 "All -Glass Entrances and Storefronts" for systems without aluminum support framing. 2. Section 081216 "Aluminum Frames" for interior aluminum framing. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Source quality control and field quality control is part of testing and inspecting allowance. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical -to -horizontal intersection of aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. C. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. 4. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following: a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware. b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes, and number and size of wires. C. Samples for Verification: For clear anodized finish to match adjacent existing storefront, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical -to -horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12 -inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-1 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 5. Flashing and drainage. E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. F. Delegated -Design Submittal: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Submittals: 1. Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project. 2. Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup test. 3. Record Drawings: As -built drawings of preconstruction laboratory mockups showing changes made during preconstruction laboratory mockup testing. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum -framed entrance and storefront. D. Product Test Reports: Provide Florida Product Approval or Miami -Dade Notice of Approval documentation. E. Quality -Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C1401. Include periodic quality - control reports. F. Source quality -control reports. G. Field quality -control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural -sealant -glazed storefront to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C1401 recommendations for post -installation - phase quality -control program. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Laboratory Mockup Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E699 for testing indicated. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-2 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E699 for testing indicated. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Structural -Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C1401 for design and installation of storefront systems. 1.8 MOCKUPS. A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of area adjacent to existing storefront system that is to remain. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION LABORATORY MOCKUPS A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Covered by testing to achieve required Florida Product Approval or Miami -Dade Notice of Approval. B. Testing shall have conformed to: 1. Structural: ASTM E330/E330M at 50 percent of positive test load. 2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E283. 3. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E331. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1. 4. Structural: ASTM E330/E330M at 100 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E331. 5. Thermal Cycling: According to AAMA 501.5. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E331. 6. Structural: ASTM E330/E330M at 100 and 150 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the following: a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E283. b. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E331. C. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to structural glazing sealant manufacturer, for testing indicated below, Samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass -framing member that is in close proximity to or is touching the structural or nonstructural sealants of a structural glazed system. 1. Compatibility: Test materials or components using ASTM C1087. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-3 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Adhesion: Test for adhesion or lack of adhesion of a structural sealant to the surface of another material or component using ASTM C1135. 3. Submit no fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint -sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 6. Testing will not be required if data based on previous testing of current sealant products match those submitted. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. C. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No.8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum -framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. B. Basis -of -Design Product: 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. IR 501T/IR 501UT Framing— Impact Glazing 3. System Dimensions: 2-3/4" x 5" 4. Glass: Center Plane C. Substitutions: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements. 1. Pre -Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10) days prior to bid date. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-4 Entrances and Storefronts 2.2 SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Post -Contract (Construction Period) Substitutions: Submit written request in order to avoid storefront installation and construction delays. 3. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit specific project requirements and job conditions. 4. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence to specification requirements for storefront system performance criteria, and (2) has been engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum storefront for a period of not less than ten (10) years. 5. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by the project. 6. Samples: Provide samples of typical product sections and finish samples in manufacturer's standard sizes. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long- term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. C. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings; re: Structural drawings for design pressures. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans of up to 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16 -inch clearance between framing members and operable units. 3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows: a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/175 times span, for spans of less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian, Corners 0841 13-5 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static -air -pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Entrance Doors: a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static -air - pressure differential of 1.571bf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static -air -pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft. H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft. 2. AAMA 501.1's definition of water leakage allows up to 1/2 oz. of water to accumulate on an interior stop or stool integral to assembly in a 15 -minute period. 3. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior. I. Seismic Performance: Aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to FBC-B 2017. 1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement. J. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U -factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have U -factor of 0.27 to 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg as determined according to NFRC 100 and AAMA 507. a. 1" insulating glass: i. U -Factor not more than .33 BTU/hr/ft'/'F per AAMA 1503 with exterior 1/4" clear with e=0.035 low -e coating on surface #2, 1/2" air space with warm edge spacer and 90% argon gas fill, and interior clear impact glass. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-6 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGQ: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have SHGC of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a systein shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 65 as determined according to NFRC 500. K. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E90, with ratings determined by ASTM El 332, as follows. 1. Outdoor -Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 34. L. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile -impact and cyclic - pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 3 for enhanced protection. 1. Large -Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. M. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal -surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature: 0 deg F. C. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F. N. Structural -Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. O. Structural Sealant: ASTM C1184. Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural -sealant -glazed, aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate, because sealant -to -substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength. 2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis of Design 1. Kawneer Company Inc. 2. IR 501T/IR 501UT Framing — Impact Glazing 3. System Dimensions: 2-3/4" x 5" 4. Glass: Center Plane B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally improved 2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides, or retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural sealant on two sides. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-7 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 4. Glazing Plane: To match existing storefront which will remain at adjacent tenants. 5. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 6. Fabrication Method: Field -fabricated stick system. 7. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 8. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing or automatic operation. 1. Door Construction: 1 -3/4 -inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 -inch thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5 -inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed EPDM gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in descriptive Door Hardware Group schedule on drawing sheet A9.1. B. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, per Owner final selection of hardware, TBD. For bid purposes, select commercial grade hardware with brushed stainless fmish. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening -Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to set the door in motion and compliant with Florida Building Code — Accessibility 2017. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door. C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation will be listed upon Owner final selection, TBD. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-8 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. 1. Cylinders: Manufacturer and product designation will be listed upon Owner final selection, TBD. D. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 1. Offset -Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. E. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin 3. Quantities: a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per leaf. F. Continuous -Gear Hinges: BHMA Al 56.26. G. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. H. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 I. Automatic and Self -Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA Al 56.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. K. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include notation to be furnished by Owner. 2. Strikes: Provide strike with black -plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. L. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. M. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force. N. Concealed Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. O. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. P. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 molded PVC. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0841 13-9 Entrances and Storefronts 2.6 2.7 - SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon -fabric or aluminum -strip backing. Q. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior -door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip at all exterior doors. R. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch, compliant with Florida Building Code — Accessibility 2017. S. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge jamb at center -pivoted doors. GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed -corner pressure -glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. D. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C1184 chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact; specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural -sealant manufacturer for use in storefront system indicated. 1. Color: Manufacturer standard black -sealant E. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural - sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural -sealant -glazed storefront manufacturers for this use. 1. Color: Match structural sealant. MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221. C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM 13429B429M. D. Structural Profiles: ASTM 13308/13308M E. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/Al0l 1M. 4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 41 13 - 10 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads fabricated from 300 series stainless steel. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M requirements. C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt -mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat. E. Rigid PVC Filler. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Structural -Sealant -Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 41 13 - 11 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611 or thicker, to match existing storefront to remain at adjacent tenant spaces. . 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality -control procedures complying with ASTM C1401 recommendations, including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of buns and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 41 13 - 12 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field -Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface -mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. C. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field Quality -Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts, with manufacturer's representative present. 1. Water -Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect. b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. Perform at least three tests, prior to 70 percent completion. IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 41 13 - 13 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfin/sq. ft. at a static -air -pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. a. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect. b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. Perform at least three tests, prior to 70 percent completion. 3. Water Penetration: ASTM E1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static -air - pressure differential of 0.67 times the static -air -pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. and shall not evidence water penetration. C. Structural -Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2. 1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing. D. Aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. 2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. END OF SECTION 084113 IRC Admin Complex Aluminum -Framed North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 08 41 13 - 14 Entrances and Storefronts SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 084113 "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum windows. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, showing full range of color variations for finishes, and prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches. 2. Exposed Hardware: Full-size units. F. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Field quality -control reports. C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0851 13-1 Aluminum Windows SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of window unit at Utilities / Clerk of Court / Veteran's Services Break Room. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and air infiltration. C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Window Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each window. B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 1. Minimum Performance Class: CW. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 30. C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole -window U -factor of 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. D. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole -window SHGC of 0.27. E. Condensation -Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45. F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0851 13-2 Aluminum Windows SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. G. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than 26 STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. H. Outside -Inside Transmission Class (OITC): Rated for not less than 22 OITC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332. I. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Capable of resisting impact from windborne debris based on testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Casement: Project out. 2. Fixed. B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/ I. S.2/A440. 1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low -conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal -to -metal contact. C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. 1. Kind: Fully tempered where required. D. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: float glass. 1. Float Glass: Annealed. 2. Inner Ply: Clear. 3. Interlayer: 0.090 inch. 4. Outer Ply: Clear. 5. Low -E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. ASTM C 1172 with two plies of E. Insulating -Glass Units: ASTM E 2190. 1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Fully tempered where required. 2. Lites: Three. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon. 4. Low -E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0851 13-3 Aluminum Windows SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS F. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Insulating -Glass Units: ASTM E 2190 with two lites and complying with impact -resistance requirements in "Window Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Exterior Lite: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Heat strengthened. 2. Interior Lite: ASTM C 1172 clear laminated glass with two plies of float glass. a. Float Glass: As required by performance requirements indicated. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.090 inch. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon. 4. Low -E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. G. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory -glazing system that produces weathertight seal. H. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion -resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Projected Window Hardware: 1. Gear -Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A. Provide operators that function without requiring the removal of interior screens or using screen wickets. a. Type and Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of types and styles. 2. Hinges: Non -friction type, not less than two per sash. 3. Lock: Concealed multipoint lock operated by single lever handle or lift -type throw. 4. Limit Devices: Concealed support arms with adjustable, limited, hold -open limit devices designed to restrict sash opening. a. Limit clear opening to 4 inches for ventilation; with custodial key release. 5. Locks and Latches: Allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. 6. Tilt Latch: Releasing latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis to facilitate cleaning exterior surfaces from the interior. Weather Stripping: Provide full -perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated. K. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Subsills: Thermally broken extruded -aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on Drawings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0851 13-4 Aluminum Windows . SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS B. Interior Trim: Extruded -aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings. C. Panning Trim: Extruded -aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on Drawings. D. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap -together, thermally broken, extruded -aluminum receptor system that anchors windows in place. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. 1. Type and Location: Full, inside for project -out sashes. B. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet. C. Glass -Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18 -by -14 or 18 -by -16 mesh of PVC -coated, glass -fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D 3656/D 3656M. 1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. E. Provide water -shed members above side -hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration. F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0851 13-5 Aluminum Windows SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm. or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0851 13-6 Aluminum Windows SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed according to AAMA 502. 2. Air -Infiltration Testing: a. Test Pressure: That- required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated. b. Allowable Air -Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place. 3. Water -Resistance Testing: a. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated. b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration. 4. Testing Extent: One window of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. 5. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502. C. Windows will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 085113 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0851 13-7 Aluminum Windows SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Folding doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 064116 "Plastic -Laminate -Clad Architectural Cabinets" for cabinet door hardware provided with cabinets. 2. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for astragal at exterior door pair and for door silencers provided as part of hollow -metal frames. 3. Section 084113 "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance door hardware, including cylinders. 4. Coordinate with Owner's IT & Security team for access control hardware coordination. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's Facilities Management Staff. C. Electrical System Roughing -In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and fmishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-1 Door Hardware SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size. 1. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified. 1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2 -by -4 -inch Samples for sheet and 4 - inch long Samples for other products. a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. 2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule. F. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. C. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. G. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-2 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware. 1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of egress doors complies with egress requirements. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Field quality -control reports. E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Door Hardware: One set of each type of hardware for classroom leverset, cylinder, trim, overhead closer, butts (3 pr), strike, kickplate. 2. Electrical Parts: Sensor device for egress at controlled access doors. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) or Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC). 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-3 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 'Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a. Electromagnetic and Delayed -Egress Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with Florida Building Code — Accessibility 2017 edition. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. C. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-4 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position. 2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule. 1. Door hardware is scheduled on drawing sheet A9.1. 2.4 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template -produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow -metal doors and hollow -metal frames. 2.5 SELF-CLOSING HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA Al 56.17. B. Pin -and -Barrel -Type Hinges 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2 -inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4 -inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1 -inch bolt throw. C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated. 1. Levers: a. Per selection by Owner, TBD. b. Escutcheons (Roses): Per selection by Owner, TBD. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. D. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. E. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1, Series 4000. F. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12; Grade 1; Series 5000. 2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36: Grade 1, with strike that suits frame. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-5 Door Hardware SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 2.8 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS A. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full -exterior or full -interior type, as required by application indicated. 2.9 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1. 2.10 AUTOMATIC AND SELF -LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS A. Automatic Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Type 25; minimum 3/4 -inch throw; with dust - proof strikes; designed for mortising into door edge. Include wear plates. 2.11 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. B. Alarm -event sensor device — allows egress through controlled access door when device is engaged during an alarm event or loss of power. 2.12 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices. B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA Al 56.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match lockset. Core Type: Interchangeable. C. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. D. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2.13 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate cylinders. a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five each of master and grand master keys. B. Keys: Brass. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2.14 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked -enamel finish; containing key -holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key -gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-6 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 1. Wall -Mounted Cabinet: Grade 1 cabinet with hinged -panel door equipped with key -holding panels and pin -tumbler cylinder door lock. B. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of two keys. 2.15 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA Al 56.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 2.16 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active -leaf, hold -open lever and inactive -leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon -coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release; and with internal override. B. Carry -Open Bars: BHMA Al 56.3;. prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry -open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self -latching bolts are used. C. Astragals: BHMA A156.22. 2.17 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA Al 56.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key -operated valves and forged -steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.18 CONCEALED CLOSERS A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key -operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.19 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor -Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16. 2.20 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. 2.21 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA Al 56.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3 -inch wg, as follows: 1. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfin/sq. ft. of door opening. 2. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per foot of door opening. 2.22 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-7 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 2.23 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE A. General: BHMA Al 56.14; complete sets including overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 2.24 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050 -inch -thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self -tapping screw fasteners. 2.25 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire -rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fire -Rated Applications: a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following: 1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded -to -the -head wood screws for wood doors and frames. 2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames. b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided: 1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface -mounted exit devices. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow -metal doors. 4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.26 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-8 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface -applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSUSDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-9 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE E. Key Control System: 1. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant. H. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. I. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface -applied hardware. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. K. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 70 degrees and so that closing time complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 087100-10 Door Hardware SECTION 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. END OF SECTION 087100 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 087100-11 Door Hardware SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, and storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. 1. Coated glass. 2. Laminated glass. 3. Insulating glass. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12 -inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-1 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, glass testing agency, and sealant testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For glass. C. Product Test Reports: For coated glass, insulating glass, and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36 -month period. D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084113 "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Florida Product Approval or Miami -Dade Notice of Approval shall be acceptable preconstruction testing. 1. Further testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant. products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-2 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated - glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-3 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: 160 mph C. Risk Category II d. Exposure Category: D 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center - of -glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short - side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. D. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall pass ASTM E1886 missile - impact and cyclic -pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 2 for basic protection. 1. Large -Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4" / 6mm thick. 2. For laminated -glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U -Factors: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB -3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-4 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat - strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat -strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat -strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality -Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. C. Heat -Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. D. Pyrolytic-Coated, Low -Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer, or cast -in-place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-5 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. B. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements specified above for laminated glass except laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 2. Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film. 3. Ionomeric polymer interlayer. 4. Cast -in-place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer. 5. Cast -in-place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film. 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100150, Use NT. 2.8 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 81.0.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-6 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: 1. EPDM, Silicone, Neoprene, or Santoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Spacers: 1. Neoprene blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer. E. Edge Blocks: 1. EPDM, Silicone, Neoprene, or Santoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer. F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. B. Clean-cut or flat -grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and comers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-7 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass liter from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-8 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure -glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-9 Glazing SECTION 08 80 00 . GLAZING spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. . Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.8 GLASS SCHEDULE A. See Door and Window Schedule, Drawing Sheet A9.1. END OF SECTION 088000 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 088000-10 Glazing SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 054000 "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load- bearing and exterior non -load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; and roof rafters and ceiling joists. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code -compliance certification for studs and tracks. B. Evaluation Reports: For embossed, high-strength steel studs and tracks; firestop tracks; post -installed anchors; and power -actuated fasteners, from ICC -ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code -Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product -certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non -load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft.. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for steel unless otherwise indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092216-1 Non -Structural Metal Framing SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A653/A653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, high-strength steel studs and tracks. 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Minimum Base -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Embossed, High Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll -formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally comparable to conventional ASTM C645 steel studs and tracks. a. Minimum Base -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head -of -wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing vertical movement as required by Structural drawings. 2. If retaining "Single Long -Leg Track System" Subparagraph below, indicate type of bridging required on Drawings or by inserts. Strap and 1 -1/2 -inch cold -rolled steel channel are commonly used. 3. Single Long -Leg Track System: ASTM C645 top track with 2 -inch -deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 4. Double -Track System: ASTM C645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2 -inch - deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction -fit over inner track. 5. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. F. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538 -inch minimum base -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch -wide flanges. , 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092216-2 Non -Structural Metal Framing SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: hat shaped. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 - inch -wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge -type steel sheet with minimum uncoated -steel thickness of 0.0329 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch - diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch -diameter wire. Z -Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated -steel thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch -diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch -diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post -Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC01, AC193, AC58, or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. b. Type: Torque -controlled, expansion anchor or torque -controlled, adhesive anchor. C. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. d. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (Al) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M), and nuts, ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M). 2. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC -ES AC70. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A64IM, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, As indicated on Drawings. E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch -wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 - inch -wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0922 16-3 Non -Structural Metal Framing SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. a. Minimum Base -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base -Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch -deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: hat shaped. G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092216-4 Non -Structural Metal Framing SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single -Layer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements. 2. Multilayer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install fraining below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance - rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire - resistance -rated assembly indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0922 16-5 Non -Structural Metal Framing SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Z -Shaped Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24" o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092216-6 Non -Structural Metal Framing SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092216-7 Non -Structural Metal Framing SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco). 2. Exterior horizontal and nonvertical plasterwork (stucco). 3. Interior vertical plasterwork. 4. Interior horizontal and nonvertical plasterwork. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory -prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified, 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of one wall panel and one arcade column base in conjunction with other trades for cement plastering, including accessories. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C926 requirements. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092400-1 Cement Plastering SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 40 deg F for at least 48 hours before plaster application, and continuously during and after application. 1. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. 2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application and until plaster is dry. C. Factory -Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E119 by a qualified testing agency. 2.2 METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C847, cold -rolled carbon -steel sheet with ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating. 1. Diamond -Mesh Lath: Flat. 2.5 lb/sq. yd. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating. 3. External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized -zinc coating. 4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Smallnose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. C. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners. d. Bullnose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations indicated on Drawings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092400-2 Cement Plastering SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING 5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel; square -edged style; with expanded flanges. 6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel; one -piece -type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 7. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 8. Two -Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel; formed to produce slip joint and square -edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch wide; with perforated flanges. C. Plastic Accessories: Manufactured from high -impact PVC. 1. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. Smallnose cornerbead; use unless otherwise indicated. 2. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. Square -edge style; use unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: One -piece -type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 4. Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip joint and square -edged 1/2 -inch -wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline -resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C932. , D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C 1063. E. Wire: ASTM A64I/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475 -inch (1.21 -mm) diameter unless otherwise indicated. F. Sound -Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. 2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092400-3 Cement Plastering SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING C. Plastic Cement: ASTM C1328. D. Colorants for Job -Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color. E. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S; or ASTM C207, Type S. F. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C897. G. General: Comply with ASTM C926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base -coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. H. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three -coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 2. Masonry Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: Mix 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. b. Brown Coat: Mix 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 4. Plastic Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: Mix 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. b. Brown Coat: Mix 1 part plastic cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 5. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. I. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Unit Masonry and Concrete: Single base (scratch) coat for two -coat plasterwork on low -absorption plaster bases as follows: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092400-4 Cement Plastering SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 2. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 3. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Unit Masonry and Concrete: Single base (scratch) coat for two -coat plasterwork on high -absorption plaster bases as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. 3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 4. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. K. Job -Mixed Finish -Coat Mixes: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate. 3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 4. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate. L. Factory -Prepared Finish -Coat Mixes: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C926. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 092400-5 Cement Plastering SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING B. Sound -Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat -diamond -mesh lath. 2. Flat -Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat -diamond -mesh lath. 3. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self -furring, diamond -mesh lath. 3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners: 1. Install lath -type, external -corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior locations. C. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. b. Horizontal and Other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length -to -width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular -shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when.measured by a 10 -foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field -applied finishes indicated. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete substrates for direct application of plaster. C. Walls; Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three - coat plasterwork with 3/4 -inch total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland cement mixes. 2. Masonry cement mixes. 3. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 4. Plastic cement mixes. 5. Portland and plastic cement mixes. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092400-6 Cement Plastering SECTION 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING D. Ceilings; Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three -coat plasterwork and having thickness to match existing arcade soffits as follows: 1. Portland cement mixes. 2. Masonry cement mixes. 3. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 4. Plastic cement mixes. 5. Portland and plastic cement mixes. E. Walls; Base -Coat Mix: For base (scratch) coat, for two -coat plasterwork and having thickness to match adjacent stucco finish, as follows: 1. Portland cement mix. 2. Masonry cement mix. 3. Portland and masonry cement mix. 4. Plastic cement mix. 5. Portland and plastic cement mix. F. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match existing adjacent stucco finish. G. Acrylic -Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application is used as a base for adhered finishes, omit finish coat. 3.7 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 092400 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092400-7 Cement Plastering SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Texture finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. Section 092216 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 3. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft -wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft -wall assemblies. 4. Section 092613 "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for gypsum base for veneer plaster and for other components of gypsum -veneer -plaster finishes. 5. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product documentation for Credit MR 4 Recycled Content: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating contractor cost for each product having recycled content. 2. Product documentation for Credit MR 5 Regional Materials: For products and materials to comply with requirements for regional materials, provide documentation indicating location of product or material manufacturing location and the point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project, contractor cost for each regional material, and percent by weight that is considered regional. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12 -inch -long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-1 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Moisture- and Mold -Resistant Assemblies: Provide and install moisture- and mold - resistant glass -mat gypsum wallboard products with moisture -resistant surfaces complying with ASTM C 1658 and ASTM C 1177 where indicated on Drawings and in all locations which might be subject to moisture exposure during construction. B. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. C. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. D. Low -Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-2 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each type of gypsum board and related products is based on Georgia-Pacific Gypsum products named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Lafarge North America Inc. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. PABCO Gypsum. 6. Temple-Inland. 7. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus Fireguard High -Performance Interior Panel and ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board." 2. Thickness: 15/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus Fireguard High -Performance Interior Panel and ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board." 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus High - Performance Interior Panel and ToughRock CD Ceiling Board." 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Soffit Board" or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. C. Lafarge North America Inc. d. National Gypsum Company. e. PABCO Gypsum. f. Temple-Inland. g. USG Corporation. 2. Core: To match existing adjacent product. B. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensGlass Sheathing" or a comparable product by one of the following: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-3 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD a. CertainTeed Corp. b. National Gypsum Company. C. USG Corporation. Core: Per architectural drawings. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensShield Tile Backer" or a comparable product by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Core: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Long Edges: Square. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI Al 18.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C -Cure; C -Cure Board 990. b. CertainTeed Corp_; FiberCement BackerBoard. C. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard d. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker, Hardiebacker 500. e. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. f. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. g. Thickness: As indicated.. 2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead.. b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. L -Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U -Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-4 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. C. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion -resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Soffit: Fiberglass mesh. 4. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wallboard: 10 -by -10 fiberglass meh. 5. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -10 fiberglass mesh. 6. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. a. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Sandable Setting Compound." 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. a. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Ready Mix All -Purpose Joint Compound." b. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. a. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Ready Mix All -Purpose Joint Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix Topping Joint Compound." 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. a. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Ready Mix All -Purpose Joint Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix Topping Joint Compound." 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Levels finish, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. a. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Ready Mix All -Purpose Joint Compound or ToughRock Ready Mix Topping Joint Compound." D. Joint Compound for Exterior Soffit Applications: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Setting Compound." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-5 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting - type, sandable topping compound. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C: Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer -units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. C. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scald Environmental Chambers." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-6 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." 2.9 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job -mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum "ToughRock Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene"; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company. b. USG Corporation. 2. Texture: Fine. C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job -mixed, aggregated, drying -type texture finish for spray application. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum "ToughRock Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite" or a comparable product by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. USG Corporation. 2. Texture: To match existing adjacent texture. D. Non -Aggregate Finish: Pre -mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture. C. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture. 2. Texture: Orange Peel E. Acoustical Finish: Water-based, chemical -setting or drying -type, job -mixed texture finish for spray application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. International Cellulose Corp.; SonaSpray "fc." b. USG Corporation; USG Acoustical Plaster Finish. 2. Application Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 4. NRC: 0.55 according to ASTM C 423. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 092900-7 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch -wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-8 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. J. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board as indicated in the design drawings. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3. On Z -furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face -layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance - rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z -furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-9 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1/4 -inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4 - inch (6.4 -mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI Al 08.11, at janitor closet. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L -Bead: Use where indicated. D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1: Comerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-10 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." E. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Panel: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass -Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture -finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet of moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 092900-11 Gypsum Board SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 038J&Iu/-\I'Vd A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Quarry tile. 3. Pressed floor tile. 4. Porcelain tile. 5. Glazed wall tile. 6. Stone thresholds. 7. Tile backing panels. 8. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications 9. Crack isolation membrane. 10. Metal edge strips. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092613 "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for cementitious backer units. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer board and water- resistant backer board. 3. Section 093023 "Glass Mosaic Tiling." 4. Section 093033 "Stone Tiling." 5. Section 093500 "Chemical -Resistant Tiling." 6. Section 096340 "Stone Flooring" for stone thresholds. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI Al 37.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSIA108.113, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 093013-1 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING D. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 24' x 24", but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and texture as required to complete the assembly. 4. Stone thresholds in 6 -inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6 -inch lengths. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of product. D. Product Test Reports: For tile -setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. a. Specific tiles for extra materials to be noted upon selection of same by Owner. Selection process to take place at Owner's discretion. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated, in moisture -resistant packaging. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer meets one of the following criteria: 1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America. 2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 3. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 093013-2 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2. Obtain waterproof membrane and crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Cementitious backer units. 5. Metal edge strips. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 093013-3 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory -mounted tile, provide back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge - mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type CT-#: Factory -mounted glazed ceramic mosaic tile. 1. Tile products to be determined (TBD). 2. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain. 3. Certification: Porcelain tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 4. Module Size: TBD. 5. Thickness: TBD. 6. Face: TBD,] with cushion edges. 7. Surface: TBD if abrasive admixture. 8. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 9. Finish: Glaze TBD. 10. Tile Color and Pattern: TBD. 11. Grout Color: TBD. 12. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cove: Cove, module size TBD. b. Base Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size TBD. C. Base Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size TBD. d. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size TBD. e. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size TBD. f. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. g. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size TBD. h. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size TBD. i. Internal Corners: Cove, module size TBD. j. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. k. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch across nominal 4 -inch dimension. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0930 13-4 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING B. Ceramic Tile Type CT-#: Glazed pressed floor tile. 1. Product to be determined. 2. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain. 3. Face Size: TBD. 4. Face Size Variation:TBD. 5. Thickness: TBD. 6. Face: TBD. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Glaze: TBD. 9. Tile Color and Pattern: TBD. 10. Grout Color: TBD. 11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cove: Cove, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. Base Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size same as adjoining flat tile. C. Base Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. d. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size same as adjoining flat tile. e. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. f. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. g. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size same as adjoining flat tile. h. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. i. Internal Corners: Cove, module size same as adjoining flat tile. j. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. k. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 across nominal 4 -inch dimension. C. Ceramic Tile Type CT-#: Glazed porcelain tile. 1. Product to be determined. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: TBD. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: TBD. 6. Face: TBD. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: TBD. 9. Grout Color: TBD. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0930 13-5 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING a. Base Cap: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. C. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. d. External Corners: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. e. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners. f. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch across nominal 4 -inch dimension. D. Ceramic Tile Type CT-#: Glazed wall tile. 1. Product to be determined. 2. Module Size: TBD. 3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: TBD. 6. Finish: Glaze type TBD. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: TBD. 8. Grout Color: TBD. 9. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 10. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles are factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard white silicone rubber. 11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved, module size, dimensions TBD. b. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Straight, module dimensions TBD. C. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap, module size dimensions TBD. d. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size TBD. e. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile. f. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with radius of at least 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. g. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile. h. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. 2.4 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0930 13-6 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C503/C503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 according to ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241/C241M and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium -grained white stone with gray veining. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. USG Corporation. C. Comparable manufacturer. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2.6 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessoriesrecommended by manufacturer. B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric. 1. The Noble Company 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.030 inch. 3. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch. C. PVC Sheet: PVC heat -fused on both sides to facings of nonwoven polyester. 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.025 inch. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch. D. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008 -inch nominal thickness. 1. As required for selected product E. Fabric -Reinforced, Modified -Bituminous Sheet: Self -adhering, SBS -modified - bituminous sheet with fabric reinforcement facing; 0.040 -inch nominal thickness. 1. As required for selected product F. Fabric -Reinforced, Fluid -Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 1. As required for selected product G. Fluid -Applied Membrane: Liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. As required for selected product H. Latex -Portland Cement Waterproof Mortar: Flexible, waterproof mortar consisting of cement -based mix and latex additive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. MAPEI Corporation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 093013-7 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING C. Comparable product manufacturer. I. Waterproofing and Tile -Setting Adhesive: One -part, fluid -applied product intended for use as both waterproofing and tile -setting adhesive in a two-step process. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Manufacturer of comparable product. 2.7 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI Al 18.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030 -inch nominal thickness. 1. As required for selected product C. PVC Sheet: PVC heat -fused on both sides to facings of nonwoven polyester; 0.040 -inch nominal thickness. 1. As required for selected product D. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008 -inch nominal thickness. 1. As required for selected product E. Corrugated Polyethylene: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail -shaped corrugations and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 3/16 -inch nominal thickness. 1. As required for selected product F. Fabric -Reinforced, Modified -Bituminous Sheet: Self -adhering, modified -bituminous sheet with fabric reinforcement facing; 0.040 -inch nominal thickness. 1. As required for selected product G. Fabric -Reinforced, Fluid -Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement. 1. As required for selected product H. Fluid -Applied Membrane: Liquid -latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. As required for selected product _ I. Latex -Portland Cement Crack -Resistant Mortar: Flexible mortar consisting of cement - based mix and latex additive. 1. As required for selected product J. Crack Isolation Membrane and Tile -Setting Adhesive: One -part, fluid -applied product intended for use as both a crack isolation membrane and tile -setting adhesive in a two- step process. 1. As required for selected product IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 093013-8 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 2.8 SETTING MATERIALS A. Standard Dry -Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.1. 1. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1. B. Modified Dry -Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI At 18.4. 1. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene - butadiene -rubber liquid -latex additive at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. C. Medium -Bed, Modified Dry -Set Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI At 18.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 5/8 inch. 1. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene - butadiene -rubber liquid -latex additive at Project site. D. Improved Modified Dry -Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI Al 18.15. 1. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. 2. Provide prepackaged, dry -mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene - butadiene -rubber liquid -latex additive at Project site. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI At 18.15. E. Water -Cleanable, Tile -Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.9 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated. B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. C. High -Performance Tile Grout: ANSI At 18.7. 1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 2. Polymer Type: acrylic resin or styrene -butadiene -rubber in liquid -latex form for addition to prepackaged dry -grout mix. D. Water -Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. E. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0930 13-9 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement - based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. B. Vapor -Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mils thick. C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to snatch tile and setting -bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed -edge material. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. E. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile -setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives, bonded mortar bed, or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI Al 08.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 093013-10 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives, or thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Exterior tile floors. b. Tile floors in wet areas. C. Tile swimming pool decks. d. Tile floors in laundries. e. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. f. Tile floors consisting of rib -backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting -bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0930 13 - 11 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Pressed Floor Tile: 1/4 inch. 3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 4. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch. H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in improved modified dry -set mortar (thinset). 2. Do not extend cleavage membrane, waterproofing, or crack isolation membrane under thresholds. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on cleavage membrane, waterproofing, or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. K. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. L. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to floor -sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry -set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of, uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 09 30 13 - 12 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING 3.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.9 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation CT-#: Installation details to be developed in conjunction with final tile selection TBD by Owner. B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation CT-#: Installation details to be developed in conjunction with final tile selection TBD by Owner. END OF SECTION 093013 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 093013-13 Ceramic Tiling SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for interior ceilings. 2. Fully concealed, direct -hung, suspension systems. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory -applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below: 1. Acoustical Tiles: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Concealed Suspension -System Members: 6 -inch -long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6 -inch -long Samples of each type and color. 4. Seismic Clips: Full size. E. Delegated -Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems. 1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension -system members. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger -wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing. 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling -mounted items including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Diffusers. C. Grilles. d. Speakers. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-1 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. g. Perimeter moldings. 7 Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles. 8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system, from ICC -ES. E. Field quality -control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension -System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension -system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet -work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-2 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: 1. Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Directly Attached Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as. defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems. B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to Florida Building Code — Building, 2017 edition. C. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E1264. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. D. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. 1. Classification: Provide tiles as follows: To be developed in conjunction with final tile selection TBD by Owner. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Metal Suspension -System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct -hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system and accessories of type, structural classification, and finish indicated that complies with applicable requirements in ASTM C635/C635M. 1. High -Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C635/C635M. B. Direct -Hung, Double -Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot- dip galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty system. 2. Access: Upward with initial access openings of size indicated below and located throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles. a. Initial Access Opening: In each module, 24 by 24 inches. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-3 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M or ASTM E1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or Postinstalled bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated according to ASTM B633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition. C. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316. 2. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless -Steel Wire: ASTM A580/A580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106 -inch -diameter wire. C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -inhibitive paint. E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04 -inch - thick, galvanized -steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16 -inch -diameter bolts. F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces. H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical tiles in-place during a seismic event. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for of suspension -system runners. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-4 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. Finish: Painted white. B. Extruded -Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded -aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements. 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA -M 12C22A3 1, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 2. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with ASTM C635/C635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acoustical Tile Adhesive: Type recommended in writing by acoustical tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread. B. Staples: 5/16 -inch -long, divergent -point staples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Testing Substrates: Before adhesively bonding tiles to wet -placed substrates such as cast - in -place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. C. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's written instructions. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-5 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS Fire -Rated Assembly: Install fire -rated ceiling systems according to tested fire - rated design. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension -system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast -in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power -actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-6 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS E. Install suspension -system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2. Install tiles with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. 3. Install tiles in a basket -weave pattern. G. Install- acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension -system flanges into kerfed edges of tiles so tile -to -tile joints are interlocked. 1. Fit adjoining tiles to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tiles for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through ceiling. 2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf -type, spring -steel spacers between tiles and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c. 3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIRECTLY ATTACHED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. Adhesive Installation: Install acoustical tile by bonding to substrate, using acoustical tile adhesive and procedure recommended in writing by tile manufacturer and as follows: 1. Wipe and prime ceiling. 2. Remove loose dust from backs of tiles by brushing. 3. Install splines in joints between tiles and maintain bottom surface to a uniform level. Shim tile or correct substrate as required to maintain levelness. 4. Maintain tight butt joints, aligned in both directions and coordinated with ceiling fixtures. B. Stapled Installation: Fasten acoustical tile to substrate using a minimum of two staples per tile that are installed in flanges of tile and as follows: 1. Form double -lapped joint between tiles by securely pressing tile tongues into corresponding tile grooves. 2. Maintain bottom surface of tiles to a uniform level. Shim tile or correct substrate as required to maintain levelness. 3. Maintain tight butt joints, aligned in both directions and coordinated with ceiling fixtures. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. D. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non -cumulative. B. Directly Attached Ceilings: Install bottom surface of tiles to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 and not exceeding 1/4 inch cumulatively. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-7 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 5123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS C. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non -cumulative. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion, but no tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements. 1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power -actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension. 2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency. C. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095123 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 095123-8 Acoustical Tile Ceilings SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoset -rubber base. 2. Thermoplastic -rubber base. 3. Vinyl base. 4. Rubber stair accessories. 5. Vinyl stair accessories. 6. Rubber molding accessories. 7. Vinyl molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. F. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0965 13-1 Resilient Base and Accessories SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART2-PRODUCTS 1. To be developed in conjunction with final selection TBD by Owner. 2.1 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by resilient - product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient -product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair -Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair -tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish nominal 2 inches wide, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor -polish products recommended by resilient stair -tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0965 13-2 Resilient Base and Accessories SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft. , and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture -vapor -emission rate of 3 lb of water/ 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0965 13-3 Resilient Base and Accessories SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job -Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair -tread -nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal -length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. C. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s). D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0965 13-4 Resilient Base and Accessories SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Work of this section includes, but is not limited to: access floor panels, floor coverings, understructure and various electrical, data and communication accessories. 1.2 Related Sections A. Concrete sealer shall be compatible with pedestal adhesive, see Division 3. B. See Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for connection to ground of access flooring understructure. Note: The electrical engineer or contractor shall determine requirements for grounding and the electrical contractor shall provide the necessary labor and materials to electrically connect the access flooring to the building ground if it is required. 1.3 Environmental Conditions for Storage and Installation A. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperatures between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20 to 80%. All floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperatures between 50° to 90° F for at least 24 hours before installation begins. All areas of installation shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F and at relative humidity levels between 20% to 80% and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy. 1.4 References A. CISCA (Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association) - "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors" shall be used as a guideline when presenting load performance product information. 1.5 Performance Certification A. Product tests shall be witnessed and certified by independent engineering and testing laboratory based in the U.S. with a minimum of five years experience testing access floor components in accordance CISCA "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors". 1.6 Country -of -Origin and Product Marking A. Access floor materials shall comply with the provisions outlined in FAR Subpart 25.2 — Buy American Act — Construction Materials. B. Floor panels shall be permanently marked with manufacturer's name, product identification, manufacturing date and country -of -origin. Removable Product ID stickers are not acceptable. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 096900-1 Access Flooring SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING 1.7 Performance Requirements A. Design Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be capable of supporting a point load of 1000 lbs applied on a one square inch area at any location on the panel without experiencing permanent set as defined by CISCA. The loading method used to determine design (allowable) load shall be in conformance with CISCA Concentrated Load test method but with panel tested on actual understructure instead of steel blocks. B. Safety Factor: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall withstand a point load of no less than (2) two times the design load rating on a one square inch area anywhere on the panel without failure when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 2 "Ultimate Loading". Failure is defined as the point at which the system will no longer accept the load. C. Ultimate Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be capable of supporting a point load of at least 2000 lbs applied through a load indentor on a one square inch area at any location on the panel without failure (i.e. minimum safety factor of 2) when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 2, "Ultimate Loading". D. Rolling Load: Panel supported on actual understructure system shall be able to withstand the following rolling loads at any location on the panel without developing a local and overall surface deformation greater than 0.040 inches when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 3, "Rolling Loads". Note: wheel 1 and wheel 2 tests shall be performed on two separate panels. CISCA Wheel 1: Size: 3" dia x 1 13/16" wide Load: 800 lbs. Passes: 10 CISCA Wheel 2: Size: 6" dia x 2" wide Load: 600 lbs. Passes: 10,000 E. Impact Load: Panel supported on actual understructure (the system) shall be capable of supporting an impact load of 150 lbs. dropped from a height of 36 inches onto a one square inch area (using a round or square indentor) at any location on the panel when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F Section 8, "Drop Impact Load Test". F. Panel Drop Test: Panel shall be capable of being dropped face up onto to a concrete slab from a height of 36", after which it shall continue to meet all load performance requirements as previously defined. G. Panel Cutout: Panel with an 8" diameter interior cutout supported on actual understructure shall be capable of maintaining its design load strength with a minimum safety factor of 2 anywhere on the panel without the use of additional supports. H. Flammability: System shall meet Class A Flame spread requirements for flame spread and smoke development. Tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM -E84-1998, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials. I. Combustibility: All components of the access floor system shall qualify as noncombustible by demonstrating compliance with requirements of ASTM E 136, IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 096900-2 Access Flooring SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 1382 deg F. J. Recycled Content: Panel and understructure system shall be required to have a minimum post -consumer recycled content of 18% and a minimum total recycled content of 49%. K. Axial Load: Pedestal support assembly shall provide a minimum 6000 lb. axial load without permanent deformation when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 5, "Pedestal Axial Load Test.". L. Overturning Moment: Pedestal support assembly shall provide an average overturning moment of 1000 in -lbs. when glued to a clean, sound, uncoated concrete surface when tested in accordance with CISCA A/F, Section 6, "Pedestal Overturning Moment Test". ICBO number for the specific system or structural calculations shall be required attesting to the lateral stability of the system under seismic conditions. 1.8 Design Requirements: A. Access floor system, where indicated on the design documents, shall consist of modular and removable fully encased cementitious filled welded steel panels fastened onto, and supported by, adjustable height pedestal assemblies. Pedestal head and panel corner design must provide a positive location and lateral engagement of the panel to the understructure support system without the use of fasteners. B. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a suction cup lifting device and shall be interchangeable except where cut for special conditions. C. Quantities, finished floor heights (FFH) and location of accessories shall be as specified on the contract drawings. 1.9 Submittals for Review A. Detail sheets, for each proposed product type, which provide the necessary information to describe the product and its performance. B. Test reports, certified by an independent testing laboratory with a minimum of five years experience testing access floor components in accordance CISCA Recommended Test Procedures, certifying that component parts perform as specified. 1.10 Submittals for Information A. Manufacturer's installation instructions and guidelines. B. Manufacturer's Owner Manual outlining recommended care and maintenance procedures. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 096900-3 Access Flooring SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING A. Access floor system shall be as manufactured by Tate Access Floors, Inc. and shall consist of the ConCore 1000 access floor panel supported by PosiLock understructure system. B. Alternative products shall meet or exceed all requirements as indicated herein and must ' receive prior written approval by the architect or designer. C. Access floor manufacture shall be ISO9001:2000 certified demonstrating it has a robust and well documented quality management system with continual improvement goals and strategies. D. Access floor manufacturer's facilities shall be ISO14001:2004 certified demonstrating that they maintain an environmental management system. E. Access floor manufacturer's facilities shall be OHSAS 18001:2007 certified demonstrating that they maintain an Occupational Health and Safety Management system. 2.2 Support Components Pedestals: A. Pedestal assemblies shall be corrosive resistant, all steel welded construction, and shall provide an adjustment range of+/- 1" for finished floor heights 6" or greater. B. Pedestal assemblies shall provide a means of leveling and locking the assembly at a selected height, which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibration displacement. C. Pedestal head shall be designed with locating tabs and integral shape to interface with the panel for positive lateral retention and positioning without fasteners. Note: This allows the floor to be installed during the construction process without screws so that access by other related trades can be accomplished quickly and easily. It also enables the user to have a mixed installation of fastened and unfastened panels within the same installation. D. Hot dip galvanized steel pedestal head shall be welded to a threaded rod which includes a specially designed adjusting nut. The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate action is required to change the height setting. E. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed anti -rotation device, such that when the head assembly is engaged in the base assembly, the head cannot freely rotate (for FFH of 6" or greater). Note: This prevents the assembly from inadvertently losing its leveling adjustment when panels are removed from the installation during use. F. Hot dip galvanized pedestal base assembly shall consist of a formed steel plate with no less than 16 inches of bearing area, welded to a 7/8" square steel tube and shall be designed to engage the head assembly. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 096900-4 Access Flooring SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING 2.3 Panel Components Floor Panels: A. Panels shall consist of a top steel sheet welded to a formed steel bottom pan filled internally with a lightweight cementitious material. Mechanical or adhesive methods for attachment of the steel top and bottom sheets are unacceptable. B. Cementitious fill material shall be totally encased within the steel welded shell except where cut for special conditions. Note: This greatly reduces the potential for dust in the environment from exposed cement materials. Exposed concrete panels are unacceptable. C. Panel shall have an electrically conductive epoxy paint finish. D. Corner of panel shall have a locating tab and integral shape design to interface with the pedestal head for positive lateral retention and positioning with or without fasteners. E. Fastening of panels to pedestal heads shall be accomplished by the use of a machine screw which is specially designed to be self capturing within the body of the panel. Note: This prevents the inadvertent loss of panel fastening screws when accessing the underfloor space and potential damage to objects by screws which extend beyond the depth of the panel. F. Top surface of the panel shall have four positioning location holes to engage positioning buttons on the PosiTile® carpet tile for precise matching of the carpet tile to the panel. G. Fit between the pedestal head, panel, and screw shall enable an installation with an average panel to panel gap of 0.015". 2.4 Accessories A. UL listed Power, Voice & Data Servicenters shall be provided in locations as detailed on the contract drawings. B. Provide 25 spare floor panels and 10 square feet of understructure systems for each type used in the project for maintenance stock. Deliver to project in manufacturer's standard packaging clearly marked with the, contents. C. Provide 2 panel lifting devices. D. Manufacturer to provide metal closure panels at all exposed sides where the system does not abut a partition. E. Ramp components, supports, trim, and transitions shall be by access flooring manufacturer and meet the requirements of Florida Building Code — Accessibility 2017 edition and FBC - Building 2017 edition. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 096900-5 Access Flooring SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING 2.5 Finishes A. Finish the surface of floor panels with floor covering material as indicated on the contract drawings. Where floor coverings are by the access floor manufacturer, the type, color and pattern shall be selected from manufacturer's standard. All areas to be furnished with laminated floor panels must be maintained at ambient temperature between 50° to 90° F and at humidity level between 20% to 80% relative and shall remain within these ranges through installation and occupancy. B. Carpet tile: Access floor system shall be designed to accommodate a modular carpet tile (PosiTile) that precisely matches one carpet tile to one ConCore panel. This is accomplished utilizing four precisely located positioning buttons on the carpet tile which engage into four positioning location holes within the top surface of the access floor panel. The carpet tile's durable backing maintains dimensional stability, and holds the carpet tile flat without adhesives. Adhesives are not necessary and shall not be permitted on the Positile installation except where the carpet is cut and more than two positioners are removed. 2.6 Fabrication Tolerances A. Floor panel flatness measured on a diagonal: +/- 0.035" B. Floor panel flatness measured along edges: +/- 0.025" C. Floor panel width or length of required size: +/-0.01011 D. Floor panel squareness tolerance: +/- 0.015" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Examine structural subfloor for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect the quality and execution of the work. Do not proceed with installation until structural floor surfaces are level, clean, and dry as completed by others. B. Concrete sealers, if used, shall be identified and proven to be compatible with pedestal adhesive. Verify that adhesive achieves bond to slab before commencing work. C. Verify dimensions on contract drawings, including level of interfaces including abutting floor, ledges and doorsills. D. The General Contractor shall provide clear access, dry subfloor area free of construction debris and other trades throughout installation of access floor system. E. Area to receive and store access floor materials shall be enclosed and maintained at ambient temperatures between 35° to 95° F and relative humidity levels between 20 to 80%. At least 24 hrs. before installation begins, all floor panels shall be stored at ambient temperatures between 50° to 90° F and relative humidity levels between 20% to 80% and shall remain within these environmental limits throughout occupancy. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 096900-6 Access Flooring SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING 3.2 Installation A. Pedestal locations shall be established from approved shop drawings so that mechanical and electrical work can be installed without interfering with pedestal installation. B. Installation of access floor shall be coordinated with other trades to maintain the integrity of the installed system. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by access floor installer. No traffic but that of access floor installers shall be permitted on any floor area for 24 hours to allow the pedestal adhesive to set. Access floor panels shall not be removed by other trades for 72 hours after their installation. C. Floor system and accessories shall be installed under the supervision of the manufacturer's authorized representative and according to manufacturer's recommendations. D. No dust or debris producing operations by other trades shall be allowed in areas where access floor is being installed to ensure proper bonding of pedestals to subfloor. E. Access floor installer shall keep the subfloor broom clean as installation progresses. F. Partially complete floors shall be braced against shifting to maintain the integrity of the installed system where required. G. Additional pedestals as needed shall support panels where floor is disrupted by columns, walls, and perimeter cutouts. H. Understructure shall be aligned such that all uncut panels are interchangeable and fit snugly but do not bind when placed in alternate positions. I. Finished floor shall be level, not varying more than 0.062" in 10 feet or 0.125" overall. J. Inspect system prior to application of floor covering and replace any floor panels that are cracked, broken and structurally damaged and do not comply with specified requirements. K. Installed panels shall be straight and square and spaced so that the distance from one end to the other of any line of 12 panels is not less than 24 feet and does not exceed 24' 1/8". L. Acceptance: General contractor shall accept floor in whole or in part prior to allowing use by other trades. M. All cable and wire openings shall be sealed with manufacturer's removable cable cutout seal or grommets. END OF SECTION 096900 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 096900-7 Access Flooring SECTION 09 90 00 PAINT AND FINISH SYSTEMS SCHEDULE IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099000-1 Paint and Finish Systems Schedule AlB C I D I E F I G H I 1 System Code Location Notes Environmental Condition Finish S Type of Finish System Coat # Performance Criteria Grade Coat Name MPI # 2 3 4 5 1 EXT SAS - G5 Arcade steel structure, trash enclosure doors Color to be selected by Owner,TBD. EPDXY (over h.b. Self -priming epoxy) AG 1 H. B. Self -priming Epoxy 120 6 Gloss Level 5 ( Semi -Gloss) Pigmented 2E p o 177 Very High Performance 3 Epoxy 177 8 Premium 9 2 INT 4.2E - G3 Exposed CMU at Receiving area Color to be selected by OWner,TBD. INSTITUTIONAL LOW ODOR / LOW VOC N 1 Block Filler, Latex, Int/Ext 4 10 filler Pigmented (over latex block ) Pi g 2 Institutional Low Odor/Low VOC 145 11 Gloss Level 3 ( "Eggshell -Like") Moderate Performance 3 Institutional Low Odor/Low VOC 145 12 Premium 13 3 EXT 9. 1.1 - G3/4 Exterior stucco at walls and soffits Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. LATEX (over w.b. alkali -resistant primer) N 1 Alkali -Resistant Primer, W.B. 3 14 Gloss Level 3/4 () Pigmented 2 Latex 15 — 15 Moderate Performance 3 Latex 15 16 Premium 17 4 EXT SAF - G5 Gutters and downspouts Color to be selected by ALKYD (over cl.d. primer) N 1 Q. D. Primer 95 Gloss Levels Semi -Gloss Pigmented 2 Alkyd 94 19 Moderate Performance 3 Alkyd 94 20 Premium 21 5 EXT 5.31.- G6 Exterior steel doors/frames, exposed pipes, conduit, panel boxes, and other metal building elements Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. POLYURETHANE, PIGMENTED AG 1 Epoxy Primer 101 22 (over epoxy primer)(High Contact/Traffic) Pigmented 2 Polyurethane 72 23 R24 Gloss Level 6 ( Gloss) Very High Performance 3 Polyurethane 72 Premium 25 6 INT 9.2B - G3 Interior gypsum board walls with standard interior conditions, high to moderate traffic Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. HIGH PERFORMANCE ARCHITECTURAL LATEX N 1 Latex Primer/Sealer 50 26 (over latex primer/sealer) Pigmented 2 HI PAC Latex 139 27 Gloss Level 3 ( "Eggshell -Like") Intermediate Performance 3 HIPAC Latex 139 28 Premium IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099000-1 Paint and Finish Systems Schedule SECTION 09 90 00 PAINT AND FINISH SYSTEMS SCHEDULE IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 099000-2 Paint and Finish Systems Schedule A B C D E F G H I 1 System Code Location Notes Environmental Condition Finish System Type of Finish coat coat # Performance Criteria Grade Coat Name MPI k 2 3 4 29 8 INT 9.2B- G3 Interior gypsum board soffits Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. HIGH PERFORMANCE ARCHITECTURAL LATEX N 1 Latex Primer/Sealer 50 30 (over latex primer/sealer) Pigmented 2 HIPAC Latex 139 — 31 Gloss Level 3 ( "Eggshell -Like") Intermediate Performance 3 HIPAC Latex 139 32 Premium 33 9 INT 9.2N - G3-4 Interior wet locations: toilet rooms, break rooms, janitor closet Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. EPDXY HIGH BUILD (over latex sealer) AG 1 Latex Primer/Sealer 50 Pigmented Pi g 2 Epoxy High Build 108 Very High Performance 3 Epoxy High Build 108 Premium 34 35 36 37 10 INT S.1EE - GS Interior structural steel, steel deck, hangers, pipes, ductwork Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. ALKYD (over alkyd primer) N 1 Alkyd Primer 79 38 Gloss Level 5 ( Semi -Gloss) Pigmented 2 Alkyd 47 39 140 High Performance 3 Alkyd 47 Premium 41 11 INT5.3M -Interior G5 galvanized steel deck, hangers, pipes, ductwork Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. HIGH PERFORMANCE ARCHITECTURAL LATEX N 1 W.B. Galvanized Primer 134 42 (over w.b. galvanized primer) Pigmented 2 HIPAC Latex 141 43 Gloss Level 5 ( Semi -Gloss) Intermediate Performance 3 HIPAC Latex 141 44 Premium 45 12 INT 6.4V - G6 Interior solid wood trim, wood doors, and wood veneer acoustical panels Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. POLYURETHANE, CLEAR, MOISTURE CURED AG 1 Semi -Transparent Stain, S.B. 90 46 (over s.b. stain) Stain 2 Polyurethane 31 47 Gloss Level 6 ( Gloss) Very High Performance 3 Polyurethane 31 48 Premium 4 Polyurethane 31 49 13 INT 5.3M - G5 Interior galvanized steel at high traffic locations Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. HIGH PERFORMANCE ARCHITECTURAL LATEX N 1 W.B. Galvanized Primer 134 50 (over w.b. galvanized primer) Pigmented 2 HIPAC Latex 141 — 51 Gloss Level 5(Semi-Gloss) Intermediate Performance r3 HIPAC Latex 141 52 1Premium IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 099000-2 Paint and Finish Systems Schedule SECTION 09 90 00 PAINT AND FINISH SYSTEMS SCHEDULE IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 099000-3 Paint and Finish Systems Schedule A I B C D E F G H I 1 System Code Location Notes Environmental Condition Finish 5 Type of Finish System Coat # Performance Criteria Grade Coat Name MPI # 2 3 4 53 14 EXT 6.8D - G3/4 Exposed PVC and other plastic elements Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. HIGH PERFORMANCE ARCHITECTURAL LATEX N 1 W.B. Bonding Primer 17 54 (over w.b. bonding primer) Pigmented 2 HIPAC Latex 315 — 55 Gloss Level "Eggshell-like"3 ( "Eggshell -Like" ) Intermediate Performance 3 HIPAC Latex 315 56 Premium 57 15 EXT 6.213- G2 Rough sawn boards and trim at arcade columns Color to be selected by Owner, TBD. SOLID COLOR STAIN, W.B. N 1 Alkyd Oil Primer 5 58 (over alkyd oil primer) Pigmented 2 Latex stain 16 59 Gloss Level 2 ( "Velvet") Moderate Performance 3 Latex stain 16 60 Premium IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 099000-3 Paint and Finish Systems Schedule SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1. Concrete. 2. Fiber -cement board. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 4. Steel and iron. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Wood. 7. Fiberglass. 8. Plastic. 9. Portland cement plaster (stucco). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 3. Section 099000 "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule" for finish systems, components, and uses. 4. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates. 5. Section 099600 "High -Performance Coatings" for tile -like coatings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523. B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523. C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523. D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523. E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523. F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0991 13 - 1 Exterior Painting SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. at stucco wall. b. Other Items: One column base, one wall panel, one exterior steel door, and an area of stucco wall and trim. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0991 13-2 Exterior Painting SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber -Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0991 13-3 Exterior Painting SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING 5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11. G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0991 13-4 Exterior Painting SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the fmish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and boxes. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. IRC Admin.Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0991 13-5 Exterior Painting SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 099000 "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule." END OF SECTION 099113 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 0991 13-6 Exterior Painting SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Steel and iron. "3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Plastic. 6. Gypsum board. 7. Acoustic panels. B. Related Requirements: Retain subparagraphs below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections. 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 3. Section 099600 "High -Performance Coatings" for tile -like coatings. 4. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 5. Section 099000 "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule" for finish systems, components, and uses. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523. (Flat) B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523. (Matte / Velvet) C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523. (Eggshell) D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D523. E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523. (Semi -gloss) F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523. (Gloss) G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099123-1 Interior Painting SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099123-2 Interior Painting SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber -Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099123-3 Interior Painting SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11. G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove dust, grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099123-4 Interior Painting SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. i. Uninsulated ductwork IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099123-5 Interior Painting SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Uninsulated ductwork and hangers. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. i. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for. dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 099000 — Paint and Finish Systems Schedule. END OF SECTION 099123 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099123-6 Interior Painting SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood stains and transparent finishes. 1. Interior Substrates: a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry or woodwork). b. Wood -based panel products. C. Wood doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099000 "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule" for finish systems, components, and uses. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish required. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square or 8 inches long. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099300-1 Staining and Transparent Finishing SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 10 sq. ft. b. Other Items: One door, one fin wall, and one wall cap. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in wood finish systems schedules for the product category indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099300-2 Staining and Transparent Finishing SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING C. Stain Colors: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample wood finishing materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099300-3 Staining and Transparent Finishing SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. D. Exterior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. a. For solid hide stained wood, stain edges and ends after priming. b. For varnish -coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish. Prime undersides and backsides with varnish. 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color. Sand smooth when dried. E. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open -grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces exposed to view and dust off. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dry. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099300-4 Staining and Transparent Finishing SECTION 09 93 00 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD -FINISH -SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 099000 — "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule.". END OF SECTION 099300 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 099300-5 Staining and Transparent Finishing SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems. L Interior Substrates: a. Galvanized metal. b. Gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099000 "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule" for finish systems, components, and uses. 2. Section 099113 'Exterior Painting" for general field painting. 3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for general field painting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099600-1 High -Performance Coatings SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Exterior High -Performance Coating Schedule or Interior High -Performance Coating Schedule for the coating category indicated. 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099600-2 High -Performance Coatings SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS C. Colors: Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber -Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that fmishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099600-3 High -Performance Coatings SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1500 to 4000 psi at 6 to 12 inches. 2. Abrasive blast clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 100 to 600 psi at 6 to 12 inches. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. 1. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 2. SSPC-SP 11. 3. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. 4. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2. 5. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1. G. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. H. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer that is recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for coating system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with filler that is recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for coating system indicated. Sand smooth when dried. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099600-4 High -Performance Coatings SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 099000 — "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule." IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099600-5 High -Performance Coatings SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 099000 — "Paint and Finish Systems Schedule." END OF SECTION 099600 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 099600-6 High -Performance Coatings SECTION 1130 13 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cooking appliances. 2. Refrigeration appliances. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 224100 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks, dishwasher air -gap fittings, waste (garbage) disposers, and instant hot-water dispensers. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Subject to Owner's discretion. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and finishes for each appliance. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Product Schedule: For appliances. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance. C. Field quality -control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturers' special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 50 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. 1.8 - WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Microwave Oven: Limited warranty, including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter, for on-site service. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 1130 13-1 Residential Appliances SECTION 1130 13 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Refrigerator/Freezer with Icemaker, Sealed System: Limited warranty, including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter, for on-site service on the product. 1. Warranty Period for Five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Dishwasher: Limited warranty, including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter, for on-site service on the product. 1. Warranty Period for Five years from date of Substantial Completion. E. Garbage Disposal: Limited warranty, including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter, for on-site service on the product. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances from single source. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with applicable provisions in the Florida Building Code — Accessibility, 2017 edition. 2.3 . MICROWAVE OVENS A. Microwave Oven: Unit per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.4 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS A. Refrigerator/Freezer with Icemaker: Unit per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.5 DISHWASHERS A. Dishwasher: Unit per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of residential appliances. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 1130 13-2 Residential Appliances SECTION 1130 13 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES B. Examine roughing -in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before appliance installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install appliances according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative: 1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each manufacturer's appliance -performance parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and components. B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative , to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. END OF SECTION 113013 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 1130 13-3 Residential Appliances SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Manually operated roller shades with single rollers. Manually operated roller shades for skylights. Motor -operated roller shades with single rollers. Motor -operated roller shades for skylights. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Allowances are per Owner's discretion, TBD. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. 1. Motor -Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade. 1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if applicable. 2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long for each type of roller shade indicated. 3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long. F. Product Schedule: For roller shades. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 12 24 13- 1 Roller Window Shades SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than one unit. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS 1. Per final selection by Owner, TBD. 2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS 1. Per final selection by Owner, TBD. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 12 24 13- 2 Roller Window Shades SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain -loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb -to -jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 -inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head -to -sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width -to -length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. 2. Skylight Shades: Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband as required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion or sag of material. 3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll -width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll -width panel located at top of shadeband. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor -operated roller shades to building electrical system. C. Roller Shade Locations: Per Owner selection, TBD. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 1224 13-3 Roller Window Shades SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. & Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor -operated roller shades. END OF SECTION 122413 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 12 24 13- 4 Roller Window Shades SECTION 22 00 00 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Division: Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with requirements of the 2017 Florida Mechanical Code with local amendments and to other pertinent codes made a part of such code by reference and local state codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall be understood to include all work specified in Division 22, Mechanical Specifications. 1.02 Drawings: Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed buildings. Exact locations and arrangements of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the approval of the Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural (A -series) drawings and not by scalin drawings. 1.03 Coordination of Work: Coordinate all work, prior to installation, with work of other trades and with architectural and structural features to preclude interference's between the work of different trades and to insure necessary clearances at crossovers and equipment. Work requiring necessarily fixed locations (e.g., piping with required slopes, lighting fixtures, and diffusers in ceilings, etc.) takes precedence over work not requiring such fixed locations and shall establish permissible routing of services associated with the latter. Should work. be performed without adequate coordination so that interference's occur between work of different trades, the Contractor shall eliminate such interference's by requiring necessary rework by the trades involved. Such rework shall meet express approval of the Architect and shall be performed at no addition to the contract amount. 1.04 Shop Drawings: Refer to "General Conditions". Submit to Architect for approval, before commencing work, shop drawings for all mechanical materials and equipment to be provided. In addition, submit other drawings or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, requested by Architect to clarify the work intended or to show its relationship to adjacent work or work of other trades. Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress accruing directly or indirectly from late submission of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following: A. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the data given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specifications and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set -points, chemical compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item. B. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Engineer approve any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Architect's attention, in IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 1 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered. 1.05 Record drawinlzs: A. Maintain one extra set of black -line, white print drawings for use as Record drawings. Records shall be kept daily, using colored pencil. As the work is completed, relevant information shall be transferred to a reproducible set, and copies made shall be given to the Architect. B. As -built information shall be shown to scale, using standard symbols listed in the legend. As a minimum, show the following: 1. Location of stub -outs, dimensioned from permanent building lines. 2. Location and depth of under -slab and in -slab piping. 3. All routing of piping system. 4. Correct all equipment schedules. 5. Corrected numbers as they appear on the schedules. 6. Corrected motor horsepower electrical data. 1.06 Fees and Permit: A. All work done under this Contract shall comply with all State and Local Codes having jurisdiction and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose service may be used. All modifications required by these codes shall be made by this Contractor without additional charge. Where code requirements are less than those shown on the Plans or in the Specifications; the Plans and Specifications shall be followed. Where applicable, N.F.P.A. requirements shall be met. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature what -so -ever incidental to these permits, inspections, and approvals must be assumed and paid by this Contractor. C. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Williams -Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General: A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect. B. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested, and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested, and certified. C. Substitutions: The following paragraphs shall govern should any conflict exist between these "substitution" paragraphs and any other paragraphs of Division 15. 1. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 2 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 2. Note that the approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements herein before specified, does not assure that the Architect, or any other Owner's representative, attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the ability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of the equipment. Approval of shop drawings does not invalidate the plans and specifications if in conflict, unless a letter requesting such change is submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect. 3. Substitutions of mechanical equipment for that shown on the schedules or designated by model number in the specifications will not be considered if the item is not a regular catalogued item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer. 4. If bidder proposes to substitute materials and/or manufacturer's equipment in lieu of those specified, he shall submit written request to the Architect for approval no later than ten (10) days prior to the receipt of bids. 5. Requests submitted directly to the Owner or to the Architect's consultants and/or verbal requests will not be evaluated. 6. Should the proposed substitution be accepted, it will be incorporated into the Contract Documents by form of addendum. D. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows: 1. No overloading. 2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer. 3. Compatible with all systems. E. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows: 1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 2. Installed in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise. F. Ownership of existing equipment and handling thereof, demolition: 1. Comply with the requirements set forth in Section entitled "Special Requirements", for the removal, transportation and delivery of special equipment/material set forth to be delivered on a pre -arranged schedule. 2. Such equipment/material is owned by Project Owner is not to be taken or otherwise disposed of by the Contractor (or Subcontractors), unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. If such unauthorized removal of disposal is done, this Contractor will be back charged a sum representing fair market retail value of such items. 3. Provide demolition of existing mechanical work in remodeled areas. Demolition includes but is not limited to removal of all equipment, controls, piping, ducts, supports, etc. and filling, patching and painting to match existing surfaces. 2.02 Sleeves: A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during construction period shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire rated barriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' Laboratories approved method rated at least equal to the barrier being penetrated. Method submitted must show proof of UL label. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 3 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK B. Pipe sleeves: 1. Walls and partitions: a. Sleeves 8 inch Diameter and Smaller (above ade): Sleeves shall be 18 gauge steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have 18 gauge steel sleeves. b. Floors (above grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe or plastic, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend 1/2 inch above finished floor. C. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. d. Sealing of sleeves: 1. Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin -proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass. 2 Sealing Material: Where applicable and recommended by manufacturer, other sealing materials may be acceptable as options to above specified methods. Submit for Engineer approval prior to procurement. 2.03 Floor, Wall, and Ceiling Plates or Escutcheons, in Exposed Areas: Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or exposed duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be chromium plated brass and sleeves extending above floor shall be chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe. 2.04 Motors: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: A. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three-phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall be provided as scheduled and shall be two winding type. B. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40 degree C ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. C. Scheduled Horsepowers: The horsepowers scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepowers are non -overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impeller changes. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no change in contract price. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 4 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 2.05 Substitutions Involving Electrical Changes: If the Contractor proposes items which have different electrical and/or control characteristics (such as larger amperage requirements, etc.) than those specified and provided for and/or which otherwise change the electrical and/or control system(s), then (even if the Architect approves such items) the Contractor must correlate all sizes, voltages, amperages and wiring for applicable items so that applicable.electrical and/or control changes can be made. Contractor is responsible for all related additional costs. Other coordination is as specified elsewhere. 2.06 Belt Drives: Equip each motor driven machine not directly connected with V -belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor. A. Fan Belt Drives: Fixed pitch sheaves shall be provided. B. Speed Adjustments: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be first fitted with variable pitch drive until proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan speed is obtained. Provide all drives necessary to obtain proper fan speed needed to deliver necessary air quantity. 2.07 Vibration of Air Handling Equipment and Fan Units: For air handling equipment and fans driven by motors 5 -hp or greater, field vibration levels will not be acceptable if the maximum vibration velocity or displacement measurement exceeds the following values (when measurements are taken at the bearing supports using a vibration analyzer with the filter set at the operating fan speed). Fan Sneed RPM Maximum Vibration Level 800 or less 5 mils max. Displacement 801 and greater 0.20 in/sec. max. Velocity 2.08 Bearings: All bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hour operating life unless indicated. 2.09 Belt and Coupling Guards: Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of #12 U.S. Standard gauges 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. Standard gauge. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA. 2.10 Painting and Marking: A. Painting: Painting of equipment, pipe, and ducts (insulated or uninsulated is specified under the "Painting" Division of these specifications. Touch-up of shop coat shall be performed under Division furnishing equipment. B. Marking: Refer to Section entitled "Identification of Mechanical Systems". IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 5 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 2.11 Access Doors: Provide as necessary for access to concealed valves, cleanouts, unions, dampers, coils, junction boxes, etc., where no other means of access is shown or specified. Doors shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland -Ryerson, or an acceptable equal, type as follows: Door Location Door Type Drywall Style "DW" Masonry or tile Style "M - Stainless" acoustical tile Style "AT" Plaster Style "K" Fire -rated walls Style "Fire Rated" Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches and, other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be applicable to the access required for normal service. See sections entitled "Ductwork" for access doors related to duct systems. 2.12 Excavation & Backfill: A. Each subcontractor shall do trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required by his work, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property. B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six (6) inches in depth. Completed backfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compaction requirements of Division Two of these Specifications: 1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other locations as shown on Drawings shall be encases by eight (8) inches (minimum) concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division Three requirements. 2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8) inches around piping and twelve (12) inches each side of footings or foundations. C. Remove non -usable excavated material from the site. Deposit any usable surplus material on site where directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. Do not remove usable material from site. D. Provide and maintain bracing, shoring or sheathing as required to safely support sides of excavations. The Contractor doing the excavation and the Contractor using the excavation are responsible for safety in excavations. E. This Contractor shall provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water. F. This Contractor is responsible for repairing and restoring paving streets, curbs, walks and other work in the area where excavations are made. G. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buried lines. H. Coordinate timing of excavations in advance with other trades. I. Excavation shall be open cut from the surface. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 6 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK Hold trench width to a minimum. K. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four (4) feet from the footings except by approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. When parallel trenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance from the footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the vertical distance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less than four (4) feet except by the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. L. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four (4) inches above final grade of the bottom of trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fully supported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Piping must be suspended from above. M. Bell joint holes shall be carefully excavated so that none of the load is supported by the bells or joints. N. Whenever, in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the soil is unsuitable for supporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Soil test reports are bound in the Specifications Book. O. The drawings for this project show the anticipated underground utilities. Locations of utilities which will interfere with proposed construction shall be assumed to be a known factor to each subcontractor unless such locations on drawings are in error. P. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without such being shown on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities be damaged, repair such to Project Architect/Engineer's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. Q. Special care shall be taken with excavation in limited distance from existing trees. Manual excavation shall be required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Electrical and Control Work Coordination: A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power coordination are as follows. (Note: The use of the words, "Provide", "Furnish" and "Install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by this paragraph 3.01, and do not necessarily have the same definitions when used outside of the context of this paragraph 3.01). Any items which do not fall within the scope of this paragraph 3.01 shall be coordinated as individually specified. 1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation. 2. "Install" means to detennine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate intended location of an item to set and connect it in place. 3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install. 4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the power circuit is connected. 5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430-71). Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 7 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor). 6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section 430-81(a).) 7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an, operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc. B. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device. C. Work of Division 15: includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division 15 equipment (for example, such as starters packaged with packaged equipment, etc.). b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which are specified in Division 15. C. All controls specified in Division 15 "HVAC Controls". d. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from any Division 16 panels to power utilizing equipment provided by Division 15 and including the necessary circuit breakers. e. All control connections to equipment provided by Division 15. f. All control circuits, including conduit and boxes. g. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). h. Auxiliary control devices. i. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, humidistats, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto. j. Any and all electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumatic connections thereto. k. Provide all starters for all mechanical equipment. 1. Provide all disconnects for all mechanical equipment. 2. Furnish: All controllers. Controllers shall comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 26. D. Work of Division 26 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes. b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems, electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). C. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 8 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK disconnects which are specified in Division 23 to be provided as part of the equipment itself. 2. Install: All controllers furnished by Division 23. E. Other Requirements: 1. Interface Coordination: Contractor which supplies the power consuming equipment shall coordinate with actual contract document control and sequencing requirements regarding interface of the equipment with the control system specified in Division 15 and shall provide equipment wiring diagrams for final coordination for actual installation. 3.02 Tests: A. General: All systems shall be inspected, tested, given a trial run, and demonstrated to Architect's and Owner's satisfaction that they are complete and ready for operation. B. Plumbing Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with Florida plumbing code and as otherwise specified. C. All Other Piping: Unless required otherwise by code or other divisions of specifications, piping shall be tested at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of normal operating pressure for a continuous 24-hour period without leaking. D. Systems - Air Conditioning: Refer to section describing test and balance of system. E. Observation of Tests: Contractor shall notify Architect in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduled test(s) and demonstration(s) to allow Architect time to schedule his observation of Contractor's test(s) and demonstration(s). 3.03 Instruction: Refer to "Instruction and Maintenance Manuals" Section. 3.04 Acceptance: A. Prior to requesting final inspection: Complete all work required by drawings and specifications. Acceptance will be made by the Architect on the basis of tests and inspection of project. Contractor shall furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, furnish test instruments and equipment as required, make necessary adjustments and assist with final inspection. 3.05 Protection of Work Until Final Acceptance: Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment from damage, the entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment that has been damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Architect. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched -up. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition. END OF SECTION 220000 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 00 - 9 Common Requirements For Mechanical Work SECTION 22 00 01 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems. PART 2 — DOCUMENTATION 2.01 Provide two (2) Instructions and Maintenance manuals, each complete as follows: A. Hardback three ring loose-leaf binders. B. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's subcontractors control subcontractor and related contractor's or material supplier's names, addresses and phone numbers. C. Index of contents. D. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Architect as soon as possible after receipt. E. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems: 1. How to start and stop each piece of equipment. 2. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation. 3. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor. 4. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems. 5. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks. F. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, (but not limited to) the following: 1. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. 2. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. 3. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook-up. G. Any as -built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this Division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems. H. Copies of certificates of inspection. I. Guarantees. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.01 Verbal Instruction: Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instruction shall be given by competent personnel. END OF SECTION 22 00 01 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 00 01 -1 Instructions and Maintenance Manuals SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide all angles, brackets, clamps, anchors, inserts, rods, braces, frames, hangers, nuts and bolts, and other miscellaneous steel and hardware items as may be required for the proper support of equipment and all piping systems. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Contractor shall coordinate: shop drawings; placement; structural framing and overall building construction; and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progress of the work. Refer to other Sections for special requirements relating to specific equipment and systems. 1.03 Manufacturer: Hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Division ITT, F&S Manufacturing Corp.; Fee and Mason Manufacturing Co., or an approved equal. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Use the following (or approved equals thereof) if and as applicable to this project: A. Hangers: 1. Hangers in contact with copper piping: Shall be copper plated or Teflon coated. Grinnell Fig. 97 or 97C. 2. Hangers (other than in contact with copper piping): Shall have manufacturer's standard finish. Pipe 3" and larger: Grinnell Fig. 260. Pipe 2-1/2" and smaller: Grinnell Fig. 104. B. Pipe Roller Stands: Grinnell Fig. 274. C. Pipe Roller Hangers: Grinnell Fig. 171. D. Pipe Alignment Guide: Grinnell Fig. 256. E. Pipe Riser Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 261. F. Insulation Shields: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links. G. Beam Clamps: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links. H. Rod: Sized with safety factor of five (5). Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." All inserts, fasteners, hangers and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 Pipe: Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and to permit proper drainage. All piping shall be run parallel with the lines of building, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. The hanger spacing and placement shall be such that after the covering (insulation and finish) is applied there will be not less than 1/2" clear space between finished covering and other surfaces, including the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to encompass the insulating, finish and metal insulation shield (a metal insulation shield shall be provided for each IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 220529-1 Hangers and Supports: Piping Systems SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: PIPING SYSTEMS hanger and support). Vertical piping shall be supported with pipe riser clamps at every floor penetration, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. END OF SECTION 22 05 29 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 220529-2 Hangers and Supports: Piping Systems SECTION 22 11 13 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scone: Provide potable water systems complete as indicated on the specifications and drawings. Drawings scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner. (No change in Contract price). 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Interior Water Pipe: Cold water supply piping below grade up to a point five feet outside the building line shall be type K hard drawn seamless copper water tube in a vinyl sleeve conforming to ASTM B88-89. Hot and cold water supply piping above grade shall be type L hard drawn seamless copper water tube conforming to ASTM B88. 2.02 Fittings: Wrought copper, pressure type conforming to ASTM B 16.22-1989. 2.03 Solder: Lead free, 95-5 non -corrosive flux. 2.04 Pipe Protective Coating (Interior): Protect hot and cold water piping below floor or in contact with concrete by wrapping with 20 mil thickness vinyl tape equal to Permacel No. 307. 2.05 Dielectric Isolators: A. Unions: For pipe sizes two inches (2") and smaller, EPCO or Rockford -Eclipse insulated unions with joint connection to suit pipe and equipment. B. Flanges: For pipe sizes two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and over; Plico Products flange insulation sets with: phenolic retainer, nitrile rubber seal element, polyethylene sleeves and double washer sets. Spring lock type with set screw. 2.06 Relief Valves: ASME rated; size and setting as recommended by equipment manufacturer and/or indicated on drawings. 2.07 Valves: A. All valves shall have the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed working pressure cast or stamped on the body. Adapters shall be provided for all valves on copper lines. B. All stop valves used on this work, unless otherwise specified or required, shall be of the gate pattern, suitable for 125 pound working pressure. C. All gate valves shall be packed and left perfectly tight at the completion of work. D. Gate Valves: Gate valves two inches (2") and smaller shall be made of the best brass of screwed pattern of the solid wedge type, double seat, non -rising stem, with gland stuffing box and iron wheel, NIBCO T-133, Stockham B-128 or Jenkins 370C. Gate valves two and one-half inches (2-1/2") or larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed, flanges ends and otherwise same type as smaller valves, NIBCO F617-0, Stockham 9-623 or Jenkins 651 C. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 13 - 1 Domestic Water System SECTION 22 11 13 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM E. Globe Valves: Globe valves 2: and smaller shall be the best grade brass, screwed pattern, removable disc suitable for the fluid to be controlled with gland stuffing box and iron wheel, NIBCO T235 -Y, Jenkins 106B or Stockham B -22-T. Globe valves two and one- half inches (2-1/2") and larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed, flanged ends and otherwise same type as smaller valves. NIBCO F178 -B, Jenkins 613C or Stockham 9- 512. F. Check Valves: check valves two inches (2") and smaller shall be made of the best grade brass, screwed pattern, swing check, one disc for hot and cold water; NIBCO T4 -413 - BY, Jenkins 996 or Stockham B-319. Check valves two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and larger shall be iron body. G. Ball valves two inches (2") and smaller shall be all bronze of compact pattern with solder joint connections rated at 400 pounds WOG. Stem extensions shall be furnished for use in insulated lines where insulation exceeds 1/2" Ball valves may be substituted for gate valves in sizes two inches (2") and smaller. NIBCO S-580, Milwaukee BA 100/150 Apollo 70-100/200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Joints and Connections: A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas and watertight. B. Equipment Connections: Final connections to services and connections to equipment shall be made with unions for pipe sizes two inches (2") and under and with companion flanges for pipe two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and larger. Where incompatible piping material comes in contact, except for the use of valves, isolate the two materials using dielectric isolators as specified herein before. C. Piping drops to points of use shall each be valved for individual shut -offs. 3.02 Valves: All valves, stops, pressure regulators and similar items shall be installed in an easily accessible location. Provide access panel (refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work") for all concealed valves. 3.03 Sterilization: Sterilization solution shall be 400 PPM to 1000 PPM chlorine made from a sanitation grade chlorine or sodium hypochlorite. Solution shall remain in system for twenty four (24) hours during which time valves and faucets are to be opened and closed several times. Outlets shall be tested to insure an adequate amount of chlorine is present. At conclusion of sterilization entire system shall be flushed with clean water until chlorine content is at a level approved by the County Health Department. 3.04 Tests: Upon completion of the water supply system it shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure no less than 25 PSI above the working pressure under which it is to be operated and retained for not less than 24 hours. END OF SECTION 22 11 13 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 11 13-2 Domestic Water System SECTION 22 11 16 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Work Included: a. Pipe and pipe fittings. b. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. d. Domestic water piping system. e. Natural gas piping system. 1.02 Related Work: a. Section 02110 — Demolition b. Section 02200 — Excavation C. Section 02200 — Backfilling d. Section 02550 — Trenching e. Section 02610 — Paving f. Section 03310 — Reinforced Concrete g. Section 09900 — Painting h. Section 230553 - Mechanical Identification i. Section 221119 - Pipe, Valves & Fittings: Potable Water k. Section 220529 - Hangers and Supports 1. Section 224001 - Plumbing Fixtures, Trim & Specialties 1.03 References a. ASI/ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 NS300. b. ANSFASME B15.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. C. ANSI/ASME B 16.23 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage fittings - DWV. d. ANSFASME Sec. 9 -Welding and Brazing Qualifications. e. ANSI/ASME B32 - Solder Metal. f. ANSFASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. g. ANSFASTM C700 - Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. h. ANSFASTM CD2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. i. ANSFAWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. j. ANSI/AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and other liquids. k. ANSI/AWWA C110 -Ductile - Iron and Gray - Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and other liquids. 1. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray -Iron pressure Pipe and Fittings. in. ANSI/AWWA C515 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or sand lined molds, for water or other liquids. n. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. o. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. P. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. q. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. r. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. S. ASTM B 8 8 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 16-1 Plumbing Piping SECTION 22 1116 PLUMBING PIPING t. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). U. ASTM C14 - Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe. V. ASTM C425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings. W. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. X. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120. Y. ASTM D2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. Z. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR -PR). aa. ASTM D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings. bb. ASTM D2680 - Acrylonitrile -Butadiene -Styrene (ABS) Composite -Sewer Piping. CC. ASTM D2683 - Socket -Type Polyethylene Fillings for Outside Diameter - Controlled Polyethylene Pipe. dd. ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. ee. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile -Butadiene -Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. ff. ASTM D2751 - Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. gg. ASTM D3033 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. hh. ASTM D3034 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. ii. ASTM F477 - Elastometric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. jj. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. kk. AWWA C601 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and WasteWater. 11. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 Quality Assurance: a. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. b. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code (and applicable state labor regulations). C. Welders Certification: In accordance with (ANSI/ASME Sec. 9) (ANSI/AWS D1.1.) 1.05 Submittals: a. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15000. b. Include manufacturer product data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. 1.06 Delivery, Storage and Handling a. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 220000. b. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 220000. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Sanitary, Sewer, Piping buried beyond 5 feet of buildina: a. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, (extra heavy) (service) weight fittings: cast iron. Joints: b. PVC Pipe: ASTM D3033 or D3034, SDR 35. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM F477, eslastomeric gaskets. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 16-2 Plumbing Piping SECTION 22 11 16 PLUMBING PIPING 2.02 Sanitary Sewer piping, buried within 5 feet of building: a. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 (extra heavy) (service) weight. Fittings: cast iron. Joints: hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. b. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. 2.03 Sanitary sewer pining. above grade: a. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub - and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. b. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. Fittings: PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. 2.04 Water piping, buried beyond 5 feet of building: a. Copper tubing: ASTM B88, Type (k), (1), (m) (hard drawn) (annealed). Fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.29, wrought copper. Joints: (ANSI/ASTM B52, solder, grade 95TA) (AWS A5.8, B cup silver braze). b. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR for not less that 150 psig pressure rating. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D2466, PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. 2.05 Water piping, buried within 5 feet of building_ a. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type (k) (1) (hard drawn) (annealed). Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: (ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA) (AWS A5.8, B cup silver braze). 2.06 Natural_gas piping, buried beyond 5 feet 0500 MM) of buildina. a. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, with ANSI/AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half -lapped 10 mil (0.25 mm) polyethylene tape. Joints: ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded. b. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR for not less than 150 psig pressure rating. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM D2466, PVC. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. C. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. Joints: Fusion welded. 2.07 Naturalams piping buried within 5 feet (1500 MM) of building: a. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, with ANSI/AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half -lapped 10 mil (0.25 mm) polyethylene tape. Joints: ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded. 2.08 Natural gas piping, abovegrade: a. Steel pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. Joints: Screwed for pipe two (2) inches (50 mm) and under; ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded, for pipe over two (2) inches (50 mm). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 11 16-3 Plumbing Piping SECTION 22 11 16 PLUMBING PIPING 2.09 Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: a. Pipe size 2 inches and under: 150 prig (1 034 Kpa) malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. b. Pipe size over 2 inches: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16- inch (1.6 mm) thick performed neoprene bonded to asbestos. C. Grooved and shouldered pipe end couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. d. Dielectric Connections: union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.10 Acceptable Manufacturers - gate valves: a. Screwed, Crane, Model 428, 2" and smaller. b. Solder, Crane, Model 1330, 2" and smaller. C. Flanged, Crane, Model 475, 2 1/2" and larger. d. Underground gate valves (water service) Kennedy, Fig. 571 x W/fig. 123 box and Fig. 122 key. e. Substitutions: under provisions of Section (01600), (01630). 2.11 Gate Valves a. Up to 2 inches: bronze body, (non -rising) (rising) stem and handwheel, inside screw, (single) (double) wedge or disc, (solder) threaded ends. b. Over 2 inches: iron body, bronze trim, (rising) (non -rising) stem and handwheel, OS&Y, (single) (double) wedge, (flanged) (grooved) ends. 2.12 Acceptable Manufacturers - Globe Valves a. Screwed, Crane, Model 7, 2" and smaller. b. Solder, Crane, Model 1320, 2" and smaller. C. Changed, Crane, Model 351, 2" and larger. d. Substitutions: under provisions of Section 01600, 01630. 2.13 Globe Valves a. Up to 2 inches: bronze body, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition discm (solder) (screwed) ends, with backseating capacity. b. Over 2 inches: iron body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, OS&Y, plug - type disc, flanged ends. 2.14 Acceptable Manufacturers - Ball Valves a. Screwed, Airco, Model 207-63XX-300, 2" and smaller. b. Solder, Airco, Model 207-63XX-600, 2" and smaller. C. Soldered, Airco, Model 207-607X-600, 2 1/2" and larger. d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section (01600) (01630). 2.15 Ball Valves a. Up to 2 inches: (bronze) (stainless steel) body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle (and balancing stops) (solder) (threaded) ends (with unions). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 16-4 Plumbing Piping SECTION 22 11 16 PLUMBING PIPING b. Over 2 inches bronze body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle (or great drive handwheel) for sizes 4" inches, flanged. All ball valves shall be approved for medical gas usage. 2.16 Acceptable Manufacturers - Gas Cocks a. Screwed, Crane Model 324, 2" and smaller. b. Flanged, Nordstrom Model 115, 1 1/2" and larger. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section (01600) (01630). 2.17 Gas Cocks a. Up to 2 inches: bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. b. Over 2 inches: cast iron body and plug, non -lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. 2.18 Acceptable Manufacturers - Butterfly Valves a. Screwed, Crane Model 44, 2" and smaller. b. Nordstrom Model Figlew 1734. C. Substitutions: under provisions of Section (01600) (01630). 2.19 Butterfly Valves a. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F, water or lug ends, (10 position lever handle) (infinite position lever handle with memory stop). 2.20 Acceptable Manufacturers - Swine Check Valves a. Screwed, Crane Model 36,2" and smaller. b. Solder, Crane Model 1303, 2" and smaller. C. Flanged, Crane Model 375, 2 1/2" and larger. d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600, 01630. 2.21 Swing Check Valves a. Up to 2 inches: bronze (45) (22) degree swing disc, (solder) (screwed) ends. b. Over 2 inches: iron body, bronze trim, (45) (22) degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.22 Acceptable Manufacturers - Spring Load Check Valves a. Screwed, Jenkins Model Fig. 655A, 2" and smaller. b. Substitutions: under provisions of Section 01600, 01630. 2.23 Springy Loaded Check Valves a. Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends. 2.24 Acceptable Manufacturers - Water Pressure Reducing Valves a. Screwed, Wilkins Model 600 series, 2" and smaller. b. Flanged, Wilkins Model 575 RP, 3" and larger C. Substitutions: under provisions of Section 01600, 01630. 2.25 Water Pressure Reducing Valves a. Up to 2 inches: bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, (threaded) (and single union) (double union) ends. b. Over 2 inches: cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomer diaphragm and seat disc, flanged. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 16-5 Plumbing Piping SECTION 22 1116 PLUMBING PIPING 2.26 Acceptable Manufacturers - Relief Valves a. Screwed, Watts Model Series 174A & 740, 2" and smaller. b. Substitutions: under provisions of Section 01600, 01630. 2.27 Relief Valves a. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation a. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. (Bevel plain end ferrous pipe). b. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 Installation a. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. b. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. d. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. e. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. f. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. g. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. (Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08305). h. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. i. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than approved by local authority having jurisdiction. j. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc primer to welding. k. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finished painting. Refer to Section 09900. 1. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to (1/4) (1/8) inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. in. Excavate in accordance with Sections (02222) and (02225) for work of theSection and as per site work specifications. n. Backfill in accordance with Sections (02223) and (02225) for work of this Section and as per site work specification. o. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. p. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. q. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks size (2) (6") inches and smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized (2-1/2 inches) and larger with a wrench with setscrew. 3.03 Application a. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. b. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment of apparatus connections. C. Install brass make adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. d. Install (gate) (ball) (butterfly) valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 16-6 Plumbing Piping SECTION 22 11 16 PLUMBING PIPING e. Install (globe) (ball) (butterfly) valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. f. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of pumps. 3.04 Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping System a. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. b. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. d. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. e. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. f. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. g. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water of 1.0 mg/L. h. Take samples no sooner that 24 hours after flushing, from (10) (5) (2) percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. 3.05 Service Connections a. Provide new (sanitary) sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover. b. Provide new water service complete with (reduced pressure backflow preventer) water meter with by-pass valves (and sand strainer). (Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge. Caulk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main inside to concrete wall). Provide 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 6 inch above floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. C. Provide new gas service (complete with gas meter and regulators). Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 5 psi. Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. END OF SECTION 22 11 16 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 16-7 Plumbing Piping SECTION 22 11 19 PIPE, VALVES AND FITTINGS: POTABLE WATER PART1-GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide potable water systems complete as indicated on the drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this Section, at no additional cost to the Owner. (No change in Contract price). 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Refer also to Section entitled "Domestic Water System". 2.01 Pipe: Type L hard drawn copper conforming to ASTM B-88 in the building. 2.02 Fittings: Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure type conforming to ANSI B16.22. 2.03 Solder Joints: "Federal Frye" - Aqua -clean, lead free solder and "NoKorode" flux for all domestic water piping. 2.04 Dielectric Isolators: (if applicable) A. Unions: For pipe sizes two inches (2") and smaller; EPCO or Rockford -Eclipse insulated unions with joint connection to suit pipe and equipment. B. Flanges: For pipe sizes two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and over; Plico Products Flange insulation sets with: Phenolic retainer, nitrite rubber seal element, polyethylene sleeves and double washer sets. Spring lock type with set screw. 2.05 Relief Valves: ASME rated, size and setting as indicated on drawings. 2.06 Valves: A. All valves shall have the name or trademark of the manufacturer and the guaranteed working pressure cast or stamp on the body. Adapters shall be provided for all valves on copper lines. B. All stop valves used on this work, unless otherwise specified or required, shall be of the gate pattern, suitable for 125 pound working pressure. C. All gate valves shall be packed and left perfectly tight at the completion of work. D. Gate Valves: Gate valves 2" and smaller shall be made of the best brass of screwed pattern of the solid wedge type, double seat, non -rising stem, with gland stuffing box and iron wheel, NIBCO T-133 Crane No. 437, Stockham Jenkins or Walworth. Gate valve 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed, flanged ends and otherwise same type as smaller valves, NIBCO F-617-0 Crane No. 465-1/2, Jenkins or Walworth. E. Globe Valves: Globe valves 2" and smaller shall be the best grade brass, screwed pattern, removable disc suitable for the fluid to be controlled, with gland stuffing box and iron wheel, NIBCO F -235-Y Crane No. 7 -TF, Jenkins or Walworth. Globe valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed, flanged ends and otherwise same type as smaller valves, NIBCO F --718--B, Crane No. 351, Jenkins or Walworth. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 19-1 Pipe, Valves and Fittings: Potable Water SECTION 22 11 19 PIPE, VALVES AND FITTINGS: POTABLE WATER F. Check Valves: Check valves 2" and smaller shall be made of the best grade brass, screwed pattern, swing check, NIBCO T-413-B.Y., Crane No. 36 & 38, Jenkins or Walworth, for hot water and No. 41 for cold water. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body and brass trimmed, flanged ends, swing check, NIBCO F -918-B Crane No. 373, Jenkins or Walworth, for hot water and Crane No. 373 with No. 6 disc for cold water. G. Cocks: Cocks 1" and smaller shall be 125# square head, iron body with brass plug, Crane No. 324, Jenkins or Walworth. Cocks 1-1/4" through 2" shall be made of semi -steel, screwed pattern, lubricated, Nordstrom No. 114, Homestead or Walworth. Cocks 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged ends and other same type as smaller cock, Nordstrom No. 115, Homestead or Walworth. H. Ball Valves: 2" and smaller shall be all bronze of compact pattern with solder joint connections rated at 400 pounds WOG. Stem extensions shall be furnished for use in insulated lines where insulation exceeds 1/2". Ball valves in sizes 2" and small shall be NIBCO 5-580-7D, Milwaukee BA100/150, Apollo 70-100/200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Joints and Connections: A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Equipment Connections: Final connections to services and connections to equipment shall be made with unions for pipe sizes two inches (2") and under and with companion flanges for pipe two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and larger. Where incompatible -piping material comes in contact, except for the use of valves, isolate the two materials using dielectric isolators as specified herein before. C. Piping drops to points of use shall each be valved for individual shut offs. 3.02 Valves: All valves, stops, pressure regulator and similar items shall be installed in an easily accessible location. Provide access panels (Refer to section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work") for all concealed valves. 3.03 Test: Upon completion of the water supply system it shall be tested a proved tight under water pressure not less than 25 PSI above the working pressure under which it is to be operated. Tests shall be observed by a representative of the Architect before it is removed. 3.04 Sterilization- All potable water piping shall be disinfected with a mixture containing not less than 0.6 pounds of high-test (70% available chlorine) calcium hypochlorite, or 2 pounds of chlorinated lime to each 1000 gallons of water to provide not less than 50 PPM of available chlorine. The mixture shall be injected into the system and retained for not less than 12 hours. The system shall then be drained, flushed with potable water and placed in service. END OF SECTION 22 11 19 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2211 19-2 Pipe, Valves and Fittings: Potable Water SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART1-GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide soil, waste and vent piping systems complete as indicated on specifications and drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe and Fittings: A. Interior above first floor slab shall be schedule 40 polyvinylchloride pipe with PVC solvent welded fittings. B. Interior below floor slab and up to a point five feet (5'-0") beyond the building walls shall be type PVC DWV pipe and fittings (ASTM 2665-88). 2.02 Floor Drains: Floor drains shall be as manufactured by Josam, J.R. Smith, Wade or Zurn. Provide flashing clamp devices where required by floor construction. Refer to schedule on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: Contractor shall promptly install all sewer and drain piping after excavating, chasing, or cutting for same has been done, so as to keep the openings for such piping open as short a time as possible. No piping shall, however, be permanently closed up, furred in or covered before the examination of it by the authorities having jurisdiction. 3.02 Scope: All piping shall be run in the most direct manner. Horizontal pipe shall have a grade of one-quarter inch (1/4") per foot wherever possible and not less, in any case, than one-eighth inch (1/8") per foot. All offsets shall be 45 degrees or less. 3.03 Insulation: Refer to Section entitled "Thermal Insulation". 3.04 Cleanouts: Refer to Section entitled "Plumbing Fixtures Trim and Specialties". 3.05 Vents: Vent branches shall be kept above the fixtures in such a manner as to preclude the use of the vents as waste pipes should the latter become obstructed. All branches shall be so graded as to prevent accumulation of water or scale therein. All vent pipes shall be properly graded without drops or sags and so connected as to drip back to waste pipes by gravity. Wherever practicable, two or more vents shall be connected together and extended as one vent through the roof. 3.06 Escutcheons: Where waste and vents are exposed at fixtures, pipes shall be chrome -plated brass (iron pipe size) and have chrome -plated escutcheons where they pass through floors, walls, or ceilings. 3.07 Flashing: At all points where the vents pass through the roof, the openings shall be flashed with sheet lead flashing weighing not less than four (4) pounds per square foot. The flashing shall be made absolutely watertight at the roofline and shall be extended up, over and down at least two inches (2") into the pipe. Each flange shield shall extend not less than fourteen inches (14") in all directions from the respective vent, underneath the roofing material. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 13 16-1 Sanitary Drainage System SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM 3.08 Tests: After all soil, waste and vent stacks have been installed, the outlets shall be plugged and the piping system filled with water to the highest point of the system, but with no less than 5 ft head of water, and allowed to remain filled for twenty-four (24) hours and proved tight under such conditions. This test may be conducted in segments as required by the sequence of construction. All tests shall be observed by a representative of the Project Architect/Engineer before tests are removed. END OF SECTION 22 13 16 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2213 16-2 Sanitary Drainage System SECTION 22 13 19 PIPING AND FITTINGS: SANITARY, WASTE, VENT AND DRAIN PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide sanitary, waste, vent and drain piping systems complete as indicated on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, sleeves, and similar items; however, these deviations shall be provided as work of this section at no additional cost to Owner (no change in Contract price). 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe: PVC. 2.02 Fittings: Solvent Welded PVC. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 General: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work", paragraph entitled "Drawings". 3.02 Joints and Connections: A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Connections: Provide fixture and equipment connections in compliance with requirements of local codes. 3.03 Flashings: A. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, Showers, Etc.: Provide proper flashings for plumbing specialties installed in floors and roofs. Flashings shall be as per detail shown on architectural drawings. B. Roof Penetrations: Provide flashing for all pipe passing through the roof. Minimum height of vents shall be one foot (F) above finished roof. Refer to architectural drawings for detail. 3.04 Cleanouts: Provide as indicated and as required by local code. Provide access covers as specified for concealed locations. END OF SECTION 22 13 19 IRC Admin Complex Piping and Fittings: North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 13 19-1 Sanitary, Waste, Vent and Drain SECTION 22 33 00 WATER HEATER: ELECTRIC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.02 Equipment Capabilities shall be as indicated on drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General: UL approved vertical electric storage heaters. Capacity as indicated on drawings. A. Energy Conservation: 1. All automatic, electric, storage water heater(s) shall have a stand-by loss not exceeding 4 watts per square foot of tank surface area per hour. All water heaters shall be labeled to indicate compliance with ASHRAE 90.1b. B. Construction: Glass lined tank with five year warranty. Immersion type, heating elements with snap acting thermostats and high limit thermostat. Elements shall be wired for step operation. Shall have glass blanket insulation with baked enamel jacket. All water heaters shall bear ASME stamp. C. Trim: Shall have brass drain, magnesium rod anode and stamped ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. D. Acceptable: A. O. Smith, Lochinvar, PVI, Rheem, or State. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations or as otherwise specified or shown on drawings. END OF SECTION 22 33 00 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 223300-1 Water Heater: Electric SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.02 Description of Work: A. The extent of plumbing is indicated on the drawings and specifications. B. In general, the work consists of, but is not limited to the following: 1. Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 2. A system of sanitary, waste and vent piping. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 4. Furnishing lead flashings for penetrations through the roof or as specified on drawings. 5. Connections of equipment furnished by others. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 Refer to individual technical sections. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 The plumbing materials, fixtures and installation shall comply with all requirements of the latest edition of the 2017 Florida Building Code with local amendments and all applicable state and local codes. END OF SECTION 22 40 00 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 224000-1 Plumbing SECTION 22 40 01 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.02 Energy Conservation Requirements: A. Lavatories: Lavatories which are provided in public areas shall have the following feature: Outlet devices which limit the flow of water to a maximum of 0.5 GPM. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim: A. Provide all brackets, plates, anchors and fastening devices necessary for rigidly mounting fixtures in place. Unless noted otherwise, each wall hung plumbing fixture shall be supported on appropriate type of chair carriers. B. Use chrome -plated brass piping where exposed to view between fixture and finished wall face and jacketed where fixture is designated for handicapped use. Provide tight fitting escutcheons of chrome plated brass wherever piping passes through walls. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored to prevent movement. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Fixtures: American Standard, Crane, Eljer, Elkay, Just, Fiat or Kohler. 2. Toilet Seats: Bemis, Beneke, Church, Olsonite or Centoco. 3. Trim: American Standard, Chicago, Crane, Eljer, Kohler, T&S Brass, Zurn or Symmons. 4. Electric Water Coolers: Elkay, Halsey Taylor or Oasis. D. General: 1. Acid resisting enamel for enameled cast iron and steel fixtures. 2. Cast brass P -trap with cleanout for each lavatory and sink unless otherwise indicated. 3. Renewable seats and disks for supply valves. 4. Stops for fixture hot and cold water supplies. 2.02 Plumbing Specialties: A. Cleanouts: 1. Exterior type: Heavy-duty cast iron body with round, scoriated, non -tilt top. 2. Interior floor type: Cast iron with square, heavy duty, scoriated nickel bronze top. 3. Interior wall type: Cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk plug and square, smooth nickel bronze access cover and frame. 4. Plugs: Heavy cast iron ferrule with screw plug. 5. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade, Zurn or approved equal. Refer to schedule on drawings. B. Traps: 1. Deep seal type on all floor drains. 2. Exposed and/or in cabinets: Chrome plated cast brass with cleanouts. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 224001-1 Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Specialties SECTION 22 40 01 PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND SPECIALTIES C. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Shall be in accord with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI -WH -201. 2. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade or Zum are approved equals. D. Floor Drains: 1. Adjustable height, cast iron body, double drainage flanges, flashing clamp, nickel bronze strainer, no integral trap, inside caulk bottom outlet with adapter for ring. 2. 6" strainer. 3. Polished brass strainer in kitchen, filling and bagging rooms. 4. Automatic trap primer connection except on air compressor drain. 5. Josam, J. R. Smith, Wade or Zurn are approved equals. Refer to schedule on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. Protect chrome -plated items from damage by wrenches and other hazards. B. Install fixtures having flush valves so that supplies to valves for all identical fixtures in each room are at same height for that fixture type. Seat valve in place so that valve discharge centerline is directly above fixture spud centerline; do not connect by bending nipple between valve spud. C. Install cold water on right (facing applicable fixtures). D. Verify, coordinate, adjust, align and secure rough -in piping to provide neat appearances and serviceable operation. Correlate with fixture manufacturer's data and recommendations and with required dimensions. 3.02 Cleanouts: A. Install at or near foot of each soil or waste stack and at each change in direction of building drain greater than 45 degrees. B. Shall be accessible; install flush with finished wall, floor or finished grade. 3.03 Traps: A. Trap each fixture (except those with integral traps) with water sealed trap located as close as possible to fixture and never greater than 24" from fixture. B. Provide all floor drains and hub drain traps and indirect waste traps with automatic primer system for each trap. 3.04 Water Hammer Arresters: Size and locate in accord with PDI Standard PDI -WH -201. 3.05 Final Installation: Final installation of all drains (floor, roof, hub, shower and other similar types) must yield absolutely permanently water tight floor and/or roof system. END OF SECTION 22 40 01 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 22 40 01 -2 Plumbing Fixtures, Trim and Specialties SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Division: Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with requirements of the 2017 Florida Mechanical Code with local amendments and to other pertinent codes made a part of such code by reference and local state codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall be understood to include all work specified in Division 23. 1.02 Drawings: Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed buildings. Exact locations and arrangements of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the approval of the Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural (A -series) drawings and not by scaling drawings. 1.03 Coordination of Work: Coordinate all work, prior to installation, with work of other trades and with architectural and structural features to preclude interference's between the work of different trades and to insure necessary clearances at crossovers and equipment. Work requiring necessarily fixed locations (e.g., piping with required slopes, lighting fixtures, and diffusers in ceilings, etc.) takes precedence over work not requiring such fixed locations and shall establish permissible routing of services associated with the latter. Should work be performed without adequate coordination so that interference's occur between work of different trades, the Contractor shall eliminate such interference's by requiring necessary rework by the trades involved. Such rework shall meet express approval of the Architect and shall be performed at no addition to the contract amount. 1.04 Shop Drawings: Refer to "General Conditions". Submit to Architect for approval, before commencing work, shop drawings for all mechanical materials and equipment to be provided. In addition, submit other drawings or diagrams, dimensioned and in correct scale, requested by Architect to clarify the work intended or to show its relationship to adjacent work or work of other trades. Contractor is responsible for any delays in job progress accruing directly or indirectly from late submission of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following: A. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the data given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specifications and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set -points, chemical compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item. B. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Engineer approve any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Architect's attention, in IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 1 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered. LQ5 Record drawings: A. Maintain one extra set of black -line, white print drawings for use as Record drawings. Records shall be kept daily, using colored pencil. As the work is completed, relevant information shall be transferred to a reproducible set, and copies made shall be given to the Architect. B. As -built information shall be shown to scale, using standard symbols listed in the legend. As a minimum, show the following: 1. Location of stub -outs, dimensioned from permanent building lines. 2. Location and depth of under -slab and in -slab piping. 3. All routing of piping system. 4. Correct all equipment schedules. 5. Corrected numbers as they appear on the schedules. 6. Corrected motor horsepower electrical data. 1.06 Fees and Permit: A. All work done under this Contract shall comply with all State and Local Codes having jurisdiction and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose service may be used. All modifications required by these codes shall be made by this Contractor without additional charge. Where code requirements are less than those shown on the Plans or in the Specifications; the Plans and Specifications shall be followed. Where applicable, N.F.P.A. requirements shall be met. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections, and approvals as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature what -so -ever incidental to these permits, inspections, and approvals must be assumed and paid by this Contractor. C. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Williams -Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 General: A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect. B. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested, and certified by Underwriters or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested, and certified. C. Substitutions: The following paragraphs shall govern should any conflict exist between these "substitution" paragraphs and any other paragraphs of Division 15. 1. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense. 2. Note that the approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted in IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 2 Comfon Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK accordance with the requirements herein before specified, does not assure that the Architect, or any other Owner's representative, attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the ability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of the equipment. Approval of shop drawings does not invalidate the plans and specifications if in conflict, unless a letter requesting such change is submitted by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect. 3. Substitutions of mechanical equipment for that shown on the schedules or designated by model number in the specifications will not be considered if the item is not a regular catalogued item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer. 4. If bidder proposes to substitute materials and/or manufacturer's equipment in lieu of those specified, he shall submit written request to the Architect for approval no later than ten (10) days prior to the receipt of bids. 5. Requests submitted directly to the Owner or to the Architect's consultants and/or verbal requests will not be evaluated. 6. Should the proposed substitution be accepted, it will be incorporated into the Contract Documents by form of addendum. 7. All substitutions proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be considered. Any substitution not accepted and any substitution request proposed later than ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids shall not be used as either the basis for bidding or submittal after award of the contract. D. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows: 1. No overloading. 2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer. 3. Compatible with all systems. E. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows: 1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 2. Installed in accord with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise. F. Ownership of existing equipment and handling thereof, demolition: 1. Comply with the requirements set forth in Section entitled "Special Requirements", for the removal, transportation and delivery of special equipment/material set forth to be delivered on a pre -arranged schedule. 2. Such equipment/material is owned by Project Owner is not to be taken or otherwise disposed of by the Contractor (or Subcontractors), unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. If such unauthorized removal of disposal is done, this Contractor will be back charged a sum representing fair market retail value of such items. 3. Provide demolition of existing mechanical work in remodeled areas. Demolition includes but is not limited to removal of all equipment, controls, piping, ducts, supports, etc. and filling, patching and painting to match existing surfaces. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 3 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 2.02 Sleeves: A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during construction period shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire rated barriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' Laboratories approved method rated at least equal to the barrier being penetrated. Method submitted must show proof of UL label. B. Pipe sleeves 1. Walls and partitions: a. Sleeves 8 inch Diameter and Smaller (above grade): Sleeves shall be 18 gauge steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have 18 gauge steel sleeves. b. Floors (above rade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized pipe or plastic, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4 inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend 1/2 inch above fmished floor. C. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. d. Sealing of sleeves: 1. Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin - proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass. 2 Sealing Material: Where applicable and recommended by manufacturer, other sealing materials may be acceptable as options to above specified methods. Submit for Engineer approval prior to procurement. 2.03 Floor, Wall, and Ceiling Plates or Escutcheons in Exposed Areas: Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or exposed duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be chromium plated brass and sleeves extending above floor shall be chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe. 2.04 Motors: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: A. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three-phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 104 degree F ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall be provided as scheduled and shall be two winding type. B. Single Phase: Squirrel, cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 104 degree F ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 4 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK C. Scheduled Horsepowers: The horsepowers scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepowers are non -overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impeller changes. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no change in contract price. 2.05 Substitutions Involving Electrical Changes: If the Contractor proposes items which have different electrical and/or control characteristics (such as larger amperage requirements, etc.) than those specified and provided for and/or which otherwise change the electrical and/or control system(s), then (even if the Architect approves such items) the Contractor must correlate all sizes, voltages, amperages and wiring for applicable items so that applicable electrical and/or control changes can be made. Contractor is responsible for all related additional costs. Other coordination is as specified elsewhere. 2.06 Belt Drives: Equip each motor driven machine not directly connected with V -belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor. A. Fan Belt Drives: Fixed pitch sheaves shall be provided. B. Speed Adjustments: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be first fitted with variable pitch drive until proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan speed is obtained. Provide all drives necessary to obtain proper fan speed- needed to deliver necessary air quantity. 2.07 Vibration of Air Handling Equipment and Fan Units: For air handling equipment and fans driven by motors 5 -hp or greater, field vibration levels will not be acceptable if the maximum vibration velocity or displacement measurement exceeds the following values (when measurements are taken at the bearing supports using a vibration analyzer with the filter set at the operating fan speed). Fan Speed RPM Maximum Vibration Level 800 or less 5 mils (0.127 mm) max. displacement 801 and greater 0.20 in/sec. (5 mm/s) max. velocity 2.08 Bearings: All bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hour operating life unless indicated. 2.09 Belt and Coupling Guards: Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of #12 U.S. Standard gauges 3/4 inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. Standard gauge. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 5 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 2.10 Painting and Marking: A. Painting: Painting of equipment, pipe, and ducts (insulated or uninsulated is specified under the "Painting" Division of these specifications. Touch-up of shop coat shall be performed under Division furnishing equipment. B. MarkinLY: Refer to Section entitled "Identification of Mechanical Systems". 2.11 Access Doors: Provide as necessary for access to concealed valves, cleanouts, unions, dampers, coils, junction boxes, etc., where no other means of access is shown or specified. Doors shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland -Ryerson, or an acceptable equal, type as follows: Door Location Door Type Drywall Style "DW" Masonry or tile Style "M - Stainless Acoustical tile Style "AT" Plaster Style "K" Fire -rated walls Style "Fire Rated" Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches and, other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be applicable to the access required for normal service. See sections entitled "Ductwork" for access doors related to duct systems. 2.12 Excavation & Backfill: A. Each subcontractor shall do trench and pit excavating and backfilling inside and outside the building, as required by his work, including shoring and bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and property. B. Backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding six (6) inches in depth. Completed backfill shall conform to surrounding ground and finish grade and with compaction requirements of Division Two of these Specifications: 1. Concrete encasement: Piping passing under footings, foundations and other locations as shown on Drawings shall be encases by eight (8) inches (minimum) concrete on all sides. Concrete shall conform to Division Three requirements. 2. Extend concrete encasement eight (8) inches around piping and twelve (12) inches each side of footings or foundations. C. Remove non -usable excavated material from the site. Deposit any usable surplus material on site where directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. Do not remove usable material from site. D. Provide and maintain bracing, shoring or sheathing as required to safely support sides of excavations. The Contractor doing the excavation and the Contractor using the excavation are responsible for safety in excavations. E. This Contractor shall provide and operate pumping equipment to keep excavations free of water. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 6 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK F. This Contractor is responsible for repairing and restoring paving streets, curbs, walks and other work in the area where excavations are made. G. Provide additional excavation and backfill where required to resolve conflicts in buried lines. H. Coordinate timing of excavations in advance with other trades. I. Excavation shall be open cut from the surface. J. Hold trench width to a minimum. K. Do not excavate utility trenches parallel to building footings closer than four (4) feet from the footings except by approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. When parallel trenches require cuts deeper than the building footings, the horizontal distance from the footing shall be equal to, or greater than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the vertical distance below the footing, but in no case shall the horizontal distance be less than four (4) feet except by the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer. L. Mechanical excavation shall be held to four (4) inches above final grade of the bottom of trench. The remainder shall be shaped by manual excavation, so that piping is fully supported on undisturbed soil. Shoring of piping in trench will not be allowed. Piping must be suspended from above. M. Bell joint holes shall be carefully excavated so that none of the load is supported by the bells or joints. N. Whenever, in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the soil is unsuitable for supporting piping and appurtenances, provisions for proper foundations shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Soil test reports are bound in the Specifications Book. O. The drawings for this project show the anticipated underground utilities. Locations of utilities which will interfere with proposed construction shall be assumed to be a known factor to each subcontractor unless such locations on drawings are in error. P. Wherever trenching or excavating, assume utilities may exist in area without such being shown on the drawings. Exercise extreme caution. Should existing facilities be damaged, repair such to Project Architect/Engineer's satisfaction at no additional cost to the Owner. Q. Special care shall be taken with excavation in limited distance from existing trees. Manual excavation shall be required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Electrical and Control Work Coordination: A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power coordination are as follows. (Note: The use of the words, "Provide", "Furnish" and "Install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by this paragraph 3.01, and do not necessarily have the same definitions when used outside of the context of this paragraph 3.01). Any items which do not fall within the scope of this IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 7 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK paragraph 3.01 shall be coordinated as individually specified. 1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation. 2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate intended location of an item to set and connect it in place. 3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install. 4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the power circuit is connected. 5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430-71). Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor). 6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section 430-81(a).) 7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc. B. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device. C. Work of Division 23: includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division 23 equipment (for example, such as starters packaged with packaged equipment, etc.). b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air hearing coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which are specified in Division 23. C. All controls specified in Division 23 "HVAC Controls". d. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from any Division 26 panels to power utilizing equipment provided by Division 23 and including the necessary circuit breakers. e. All control connections to equipment provided by Division 23. f. All control circuits, including conduit and boxes. g. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). h. Auxiliary control devices. i. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, humidistats, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto. j. Any and all electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumatic connections thereto. k. Provide all starters for all mechanical equipment. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 8 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 2. Provide all disconnects for all mechanical equipment. 3. Furnish: All controllers. Controllers shall comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 26. D. Work of Division 16 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes. b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems, electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric hot water heaters, etc.). C. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those disconnects which are specified in Division 23 to be provided as part of the equipment itself. Install: All controllers furnished by Division 23. E. Other Requirements: 1. Interface Coordination: Contractor which supplies the power consuming equipment shall coordinate with actual contract document control and sequencing requirements regarding interface of the equipment with the control system specified in Division 15 and shall provide equipment wiring diagrams for final coordination for actual installation. 3.02 Tests: A. General: All systems shall be inspected, tested, given a trial run, and demonstrated to Architect's and Owner's satisfaction that they are complete and ready for operation. B. Plumbing Soil, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with Florida plumbing code and as otherwise specified. C. All Other Piping: Unless required otherwise by code or other divisions of specifications, piping shall be tested at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of normal operating pressure for a continuous 24-hour period without leaking. D. Systems - Air Conditioning: Refer to section describing test and balance of system. E. Observation of Tests: Contractor shall notify Architect in writing at least two weeks prior to scheduled test(s) and demonstration(s) to allow Architect time to schedule his observation of Contractor's test(s) and demonstration(s). 3.03 Instruction: Refer to "Instruction and Maintenance Manuals" Section. 3.04 Acceptance: A. Prior to requesting final inspection: Complete all work required by drawings and specifications. Acceptance will be made by the Architect on the basis of tests and inspection of project. Contractor shall furnish necessary mechanics to operate system, furnish test instruments and equipment as required, make necessary adjustments and assist with final inspection. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 9 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 00 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK 3.05 Protection of Work Until Final Acceptance: Contractor shall protect all materials and equipment from damage, the entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment that has been damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Architect. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched -up. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition. END OF SECTION 23 00 00 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 00 - 10 Common Requirements for Mechanical Work SECTION 23 00 01 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems. PART 2 - DOCUMENTATION 2.01 Provide two (2) Instructions and Maintenance manuals, each complete as follows: A. Hardback three ring loose-leaf binders. B. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's subcontractors control subcontractor and related contractor's or material supplier's names, addresses and phone numbers. C. Index of contents. D. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized representative. Two additional copies of the signed. acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Architect as soon as possible after receipt. E. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems: 1. How to start and stop each piece of equipment. 2. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation. 3. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor. 4. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems. 5. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks. F. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, (but not limited to) the following: , 1. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. 2. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. 3. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook-up. G. Any as -built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this Division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems. H. Contractor's Site Test and Balance report. I. Copies of certificates of inspection. Guarantees. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 00 01 -1 Instructions and Maintenance Manuals SECTION 23 00 01 INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Verbal Instruction: Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instruction shall be given by competent personnel. END OF SECTION 23 00 01 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 230001-2 Instructions and Maintenance Manuals SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Provide complete identification of the mechanical systems including piping, valves and equipment as noted herein, shall conform to ANSI and OSHA Standards for pipe identification. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers: W. H. Brady Co., 2223 West Camden Road, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, 53201; Seton Name Plate Corporation, 592 Boulevard, New Haven, Connecticut, 06505. 2.02 Markers. Tags and Labels: A. Markers: Must have color coded background, proper color of legend in relation to background color, approved legend letter size, approved length and flow arrow indicator. Any piping (excluding plumbing piping) which is 3/4" through 6" O.D.: Seton "Setmark" Type marker. B. Valve Tags: Each tag shall designate appropriate service and valve number -1 1/2" Brass. C. Labels: Provide either of the following types: 1. Plastic Type: Outdoor grade acrylic plastic to withstand weather, abrasion, grease, acid, chemical and other corrosive conditions; 1/16" minimum thickness. Sized 3/4 X 2-1/2, 1 X 2-1/2, 1 X 3, or 1-1/2 X 4 as necessary to identify item. Seton "Setonite" or equal. 2. Aluminum Type: Engraved, flexible, 0.020" thick aluminum. Sized 3/4 X 2-1/2, 1 X 3, 1-1/2 X 4 or 3/6 as necessary to identify item. Seton No. 06505 or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. Locate marking and banding where practical such that groups of pipe are identified at similar location for ease of visual tracking. For example, mark and band parallel runs of pipe, which are side-by-side at the same general place. B. Small Pipes: less than 3/4 diameter may be identified with tags similar to those specified for valves. C. Adhere or affix all identification items permanently except where removal may be necessary for maintenance or service. 3.02 Markers: Provide on piping exposed in equipment rooms. 3.03 Valve Tags: Valve tags shall be installed on the following items: A. Small piping (other than domestic water) where markers are impractical. B. Small but critical equipment items on which it is impractical to install labels. 3.04 Labels: Provide labels of proper size on mechanical system equipment such as, but not limited to, air handling equipment, fans, control panels, electric duct heaters, terminal units and similar items. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 230553-1 Identification of Mechanical Systems SECTION 23 05 93 TEST AND BALANCE PRELIMINARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Put all work in a state of readiness for "Final Test and Balance". Final Test and Balance shall be provided by an independent test and balance agency which is under direct contract to the HVAC Contractor. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Final Test and Balance work will not be performed until the systems are complete and operable in all respects and all related building systems are complete. This includes all lighting fixture and ceiling installation. All systems shall be operating during the Final Test and Balance procedure. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 Preliminary test and balance work shall include the following: A. Prepare the air side system for balancing in the following manner: 1. All fans, blowers, and air conditioning units shall be mechanically checked and available to operate under design conditions. 2. All volume dampers, fire dampers, and vanes shall be in their neutral positions. 3. All grilles, diffusers, and like items, shall be installed with dampers, vanes and blades in their neutral positions. 4. All controls, whether they are electronic, electric or a combination thereof, shall be mechanically checked and ready to operate under design conditions. 5. All filters shall be installed with proper design static drops for clean filters. 6. All dampers and locking devices shall be marked to accurately indicate the position of their respective dampers. 7. Changes in pulleys or belts required for correct final balance during testing shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Equipment: Test and adjust each equipment item to be in an operable and non -overloading condition. C. Additional Requirements: 1. Complete Installation: The Contractor shall complete the equipment and system installation to the satisfaction of the Architect (who will be the sole judge of its state of readiness) prior to advising, in writing, that Final Test and Balance is ready to begin. The Contractor is hereby advised that the Certificate of Substantial Completion will not be issued prior to the completion of Final Test and Balance work and that he should therefore schedule all other work accordingly allowing no less than 30 days for completion of the Final Test and Balance. 2. Setup, Checkout and Startup: The Contractor shall include the setup, checkout and startup of all equipment as work to be complete prior to the start of Final Test and Balance. 3. Correction of Faults: The Contractor shall promptly and properly correct all faults in workmanship, materials, installation, and equipment of which he is aware prior to requesting that the Final Test and Balance work commence, the Contractor shall promptly correct all faults in workmanship, materials, installation, and equipment as they are called to his attention by the Architect. 4. Schedules: The Contractor shall be responsible for proper scheduling and coordination of all work involved in the system Preliminary Test and Balance. This shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, the timely provision of. mechanics, tools, equipment, correction of faults, equipment manufacturer's representatives, IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2305 93-1 Test and Balance Preliminary SECTION 23 05 93 TEST AND BALANCE PRELIMINARY test modules, and all plant required. Report: Submit a written report describing and certifying in detail all Preliminary Test and balance items which have been performed. Approval of this report by the Architect will precede Final Test and Balance. Measurements shall be taken by methods recommended in the 1989 AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) National Standards. All reports submitted for review shall contain all of the information required in the reports shown in Chapter 27 of the 1989 AABC National Standard. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 230593-2 Test and Balance Preliminary SECTION 23 05 94 TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: HVAC Contractor shall provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to test, balance and certify the performance of the complete heating and air conditioning system, including supply and makeup air systems and all exhaust systems. 1.02 Job Requirements: The Contractor shall provide to the approved test and balance agency a complete set of plans and specifications and an approved copy of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes, as well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the test and balance agency. 1.03 Agency Qualifications: The test and balance agency shall be an approved member of AABC or NEBB that specializes in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. Acceptable: Test and Balance Corp. of Tampa, Phoenix Agency, Southern Independent Test and Balance or other agency approved by Engineer. 1.04 Guarantee: The test and balance agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and acceptable of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect may request a re -check or re -setting of any outlet, supply fan, exhaust fan, or pump. The test and balance agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition to the A.A.M.C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall be forwarded with shop drawing data specified hereinbefore. 1.05 Perform all testing and balancing, adjusting and data recording necessary to establish and confirm capacity, quality and completed status of work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Instruments used for test and balance shall have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months prior to the testing and balancing of this project. Letter of certification listing instrumentation used and last date of calibration shall be furnished to Architect with test report. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 National Standards: Testing and balancing shall be performed in accordance with A.A.B.C. National Standards. 3.02 Lou: Shall clearly indicate the following: A. All inlet and outlet areas. B. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes. C. Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions. D. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at significant locations (e.g., fluid pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.) IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 230594-1 Test and Balance - Final .SECTION 23 05 94 TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL E. All fan speeds. F. All motor ampere ranges. G. Descriptions of each test method used. H. Use Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms. 3.03 Adjust and calibrate all applicable items (e.g., controls, dampers, registers, diffusers, balancing cocks, valves, thermometers, gauges, etc.). 3.04 Set all distribution devices to properly distribute conditioned air. 3.05 Check all safety devices for proper operation. 3.06 Verify adequacy, acceptable quietness and proper continuous operation of at least 24 hours duration of all motors, compressors, pumps, fans, etc. 3.07 Perform spot check tests or complete tests to fully reconfirm prior test results if required by the Architect as dependent upon extent, completeness and accuracy of prior tests and logs. Do in Architect's presence if called for. 3.08 After air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air quantities and if temperature in any area (where such area does not have the particular zone temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees plus or minus of the zone area which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then notify the Architect in writing of such conditions and obtain Architect's approval to rebalance devices to obtain air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone will be as even as possible regardless of calculated design air quantities. After obtaining Architect's written approval to rebalance, perform such necessary rebalancing. 3.09 When the mechanical work is in a state of readiness for test and balance work to proceed, the test and balance contractor shall proceed with his work. If, upon this proceeding, the test and balance contractor determines that there are other items of the work (control items, sheet metal items and/or other similar specialties and proper completion of which affects the ability of the test and balance contractor to properly perform his work) which have not been completed to an extent which will allow him to complete test and balance work, then he shall make a detailed written report of these items and shall send written notification to the Contractor of such incomplete work. The Contractor shall then send a copy of this report to the Architect. The test and balance work shall not proceed until these items are corrected; such correction shall be subject to approval of Architect. 3.10 All mechanical systems shall be balanced to optimum performance capabilities of the equipment and the design. This shall be done in accordance with the standards published by the Associated Air Balance Council unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 Report: Upon completion of all testing and balancing and prior to requesting final inspection and acceptance of the project, submit three (3) complete copies of the Test and Balance Report to the Architect/Engineer for approval. No final inspection will be conducted until the final Test and Balance Report has been accepted by the Engineer. Measurements shall be taken by methods recommended in the AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) National Standards. All reports submitted for review shall contain all of the information required in the reports shown in Chapter IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 230594-2 Test and Balance - Final SECTION 23 05 94 TEST AND BALANCE - FINAL 27 of the AABC National Standards. END OF SECTION 23 05 94 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 230594-3 Test and Balance - Final SECTION 23 07 13 INSULATION, THERMAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide plant, labor, and materials to insulate equipment, piping and miscellaneous items in the piping and duct systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.02 Relation to other work: Refer to section entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work". No insulation adhesives, materials or finishes shall be applied until , the item to be insulated has been completely installed, tested and proved tight. 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to section entitled "Common Requirements For Mechanical Work". 1.04 NFPA 90A: All materials and adhesives shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Insulation Materials, General: Insulation materials shall include products from, but not limited to, the following approved manufacturers; a) Armstrong b) Calsilite C) Childers d) Compac e) Fasson f) Fosters g) Great Lakes h) Johns Manville i) Knauf j) Marathon k) Owens Corning 1) Pittsburgh Corning m) P remier n) Proto o) Rubetex P) Truebro q) Venture r) Vimasco S) Zeston 2.02 Ductwork Insulation Materials: A. Insulation, Fiber Glass Blanket Wrap (Type DI -1): Knauf Fiber Glass Duct Insulation, two and three sixteenths (2-3/16") thick, three quarter (3/4#) pound per cubic foot density; (R=6.0). B. Insulation, Fiber Glass Rigid Board (Type DI -2): Knauf Fiber Glass Duct Board, stiffness of 800EI, with reinforced foil-skrim-kraft facing; one and one half (1-1/2") thick; (R=6.5) C. Insulation, Cellular Glass Block (Type DI -3): Pittsburgh Corning FOAMGLAS Block Insulation, two and one half (2 '/z") thick; (R=8.0). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2307 13-1 Insulation, Thermal SECTION 23 07 13 INSULATION, THERMAL D. Insulation, Ceramic Fiber Blanket (Type DI -4): Great Lakes Fire Stop Blanket. 2.03 Piping Insulation Materials: A. Insulation, Fiber Glass Pipe (Type PC -1): Knauf Fiber Glass Pipe Insulation, white all service jacket with self-sealing laps (asj/ssl). B. Insulation, Cellular Glass Pipe (Type PC -2): Pittsburgh Corning FOAMGLAS Pipe Insulation, white all service jacket with self- sealing laps (asj/ssl). C. Insulation, Flexible Unicellular (Type PC -3): Armstrong AP Armaflex Pipe Insulation. D. Insulation, Flexible Fiber Glass (Type PC -4): Knauf Fiber Glass Wrap Insulation, one and one half (1 '/2") thick, three quarter (3/4#) pound per cubic foot density. E. Insulation, Molded Vinyl (Type PC -5): Truebro Handi Lav -Guard Kits, snap tight fasteners. F. Insulation, Calcium Silicate Pipe Insulation (Type PC -6): Calsilite Calcium Silicate Pipe Insulation. 2.04 Equipment Insulation: A. Insulation, Cellular Glass Block (Type EO -1): Pittsburgh Corning FOAMGLAS Block Insulation. B. Insulation, Fiber Glass Semi-Riizid Board (Type EQ -2): Knauf Fiber Glass Pipe & Tank Insulation, white all service jacket (asj). C. Insulation, Flexible Unicellular Sheets (Type EQ -3): Armstrong Armaflex AP Sheet & Roll Insulation. D. Insulation, Calcium Silicate Block Insulation (Type EQ -4): Calsilite Calcium Silicate Block Insulation. 2.05 Adhesives, Mastics and Sealants: A. Joint Sealants (Type JS -0: Non hardening vapor barrier sealant specifically designed for use with cellular glass on chilled systems operating at 35° or below. B. Flexible Unicellular Insulation Adhesive (Type FU -1): Armstrong # 520 Armaflex Adhesive. C. Flexible Unicellular Finish (Type FU -2): White Armstrong WB Armaflex Finish. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 2307 13-2 Insulation, Thermal SECTION 23 07 13 INSULATION, THERMAL D. Finish Mastic (Type FM -0: White Childers CP 9/10/11 Mastic, water based. E. Finish Mastic (Type FM -2): Black Lion Oil NOKORODE Mastic. F. Vapor Barrier Mastic (Type VB -1): Vimasco # 749 VAPOR-BLOK, water based. 2.06 Miscellaneous Insulation Accessories: A. Glass Fabric (Type GF -1): 10 x 10 or 10 x 20 glass mesh reinforcing fabric. B. Pipe Jacketing (Type JP -0: Aluminum jacketing, factory applied moisture barrier, .016 inches thick, smooth or stucco embossed. C. Pipe Jacketing (Type JP -2): Pittsburgh Corning PITTWRAP Jacketing, CW for chilled piping, SSII for hot piping. D. Screws (Type S-1): Stainless steel hex head type, # 8 x'/s" long. E. Wire (Type W-1): Stainless steel, 18 gauge. F. Vapor Barrier Tape (Type T-1): 3" wide dead soft aluminum foil pressure sensitive, acrylic based, Compac # 110. G. Mechanical Fasteners (Type F-1): Mild steel cup head capacitor discharge or glued stick pins, lengths as required to prevent over compression of insulation (25% maximum allowed). H. Staples (Type ST -1): Outward clinching type, mild steel. I. Fitting Covers (Type FTG -1): Proto 25/50 rated PVC fitting covers, factory supplied fiber glass inserts. J. Bands (Type B-1): Aluminum, 3/" wide x .020 thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION: PIPING 3.01 A. Concealed Heating Hot Water Piping: B. Domestic Hot Water Piping: IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2307 13-3 Insulation, Thermal SECTION 23 07 13 INSULATION, THERMAL C. Exposed Horizontal Waste Piping Receiving A/C Condensate Including The Vertical Portion Up To The Condensate Receptor Drain: 3.02 Interior Condensate Drain (Cold) Piping: Insulate with flexible cellular insulation (PC -3) three quarters of one inch (3/4") thick secured with adhesive (FU -1). 3.03 Refrigerant Suction Piping: Insulate with flexible cellular insulation (PC -3) three quarters of one inch (3/4") thick secured with adhesive (FU -1). Exterior insulation to be finished with two coats of finish (FU -2). 3.04 Handicapped Lavatories: Insulate water supplies and waste piping with molded vinyl covers (PC -5). DUCTWORK General: Internal insulation. See section entitled "Ductwork". This section describes all of the ductwork used on this project and defines whether the ductwork should be insulated internally as work of the section "Ductwork" or externally insulted as work of the section "Insulation, Thermal". Internally lined ductwork does not require any additional external insulation. 3.05 Medium and Low Pressure Ductwork, Interior Concealed: All supply (including ceiling outlets), return and outside air that is not internally insulated shall be externally insulated with fiber glass blanket (13I-1). Overlap internal insulation a minimum six inches (6") beyond any such internal insulation and vapor seal raw edges as specified herein for joints. The insulation is to be wrapped around the ductwork and have its laps secured with staples (ST -1). Where duct width exceeds eighteen inches (18"), the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottoms of the ductwork using mechanical fasteners (F-1) spaced eighteen inches (18") on centers. Insulation shall be applied with all edges tightly butted and all joints and breaks in the vapor barrier sealed tight using tape (T-1) applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. EQUIPMENT GENERAL APPLICATION 3.06 Insulation Fit: Where insulation is applied to piping or equipment, it shall be installed with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Voids shall not be filled with joint sealant but shall be eliminated by refitting or replacing the insulation. 3.07 Control Devises: Provide thermal insulation for all control devises (bulb well extensions, nipples, pipe connections, thermometer extensions, valve stems, etc.) as required to prevent condensation and dripping where these devises might be below the dew point temperature of their environment. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 230713-4 Insulation, Thermal SECTION 23 07 13 INSULATION, THERMAL 3.08 Items Not Requiring Insulation: In general, the following items do not require insulation: Domestic cold water piping; Vertical storm water piping; Ductwork exposed in conditioned areas except when exposed to high humidity (i.e., shop or loading areas next to overhead doors, etc.); Return ductwork located in return air ceilings; Valves, flanges, unions and pumps on domestic hot or heating hot water systems; Exposed piping located under sinks except for ADA compliance; Lined or double walled ductwork. END OF SECTION 23 07 13 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2307 13-5 Insulation, Thermal SECTION 23 09 00 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION — PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Starting and Testing: The Contractor shall start up the system initially, make necessary adjustments, and operate the system for a period of not less than 48 hours after all necessary adjustments have been made. Initial start-up and all items listed hereinafter in this Section pertaining to the condensing units shall be performed and results submitted by the condensing unit manufacturer. During this run, the Owner's representative shall be present. PART 2 - SEQUENCES OF OPERATION 2.01 Rooftop A/C Unit: Contractor shall provide a compatible programmable microelectronic thermostat for each unit mounted where shown on the drawings. The thermostat shall have battery backup, 2 temperature settings per day, 7 programs per week, proper staging ability, program override and automatic changeover. Evaporator fan shall run continuously. When indexed to COOL, thermostat shall cycle compressor condensing unit to maintain temperature setting and when indexed to HEAT, thermostat shall energize electric heating coil in stages as scheduled, to maintain temperature setting. Thermostat to have limit stops to meet requirements of Florida Model Energy Efficiency Code. Motorized dampers shall open when the unit is on and close when the unit is off. PART 3 - MANUFACTURER Honeywell T8000 or approved equal. END OF SECTION 23 09 00 IRC Admin Complex Controls And Instrumentation — North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 230900-1 Programmable Thermostat SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPE, VALVES AND SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide refrigerant piping systems, complete in all respects, between the system components and connected equipment. 1.02 Shop Drawing: Refer to the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". Provide flow diagram shop drawings of each different type of refrigerant piping system used on this project. Indicate all pipe sizes, accessories, filters, etc. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Copper Pipe: Refrigerant system piping shall be refrigerant grade, dehydrated and sealed, seamless, uniformly dead soft temper. 2.02 Fittings: Refrigerant grade, wrought copper, long radius, solder joint type. 2.03 Flux: Non -corrosive, specifically designed for silver brazing. 2.04 Solder: Silver brazing alloy (Sil Fos) Fed. Spec. AA -S-561 d. 2.05 Access Valves: Schrader type designed for use with quick coupler hose fittings and provided with individual cap. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Pipe Sizes: Refrigerant pipe sizes which may be shown on drawings are nominal. Provide sizes not less than sizes indicated and in compliance with size recommended by the manufacturer(s) at the connected equipment. Provide change in sizes if such change is in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and with Architect's approval. Size piping to maintain minimum velocity of 500 - fpm in horizontal lines and 1000 fpm in vertical risers for proper oil return; provide double suction risers and hot gas risers as may be necessary to accomplish this. 3.02 RefrigerantSpecialties: Refrigerant valves, driers, expansion valves, and similar items shall be provided with each system. Where refrigerant access valves are not furnished by manufacturer, they shall be field installed to enable charging and checking the system. 3.03 Solder Joints: Cut tubing square using tubing cutters, with sharp cutting wheels, so as not to crimp the tubing ends. Remove all burrs using a pipe reamer and taking care not to flare the ends of the tube. Thoroughly clean the outside of the pipe and the inside of the fitting using a fine sand cloth. Apply non -corrosive paste flux to the cleaned surfaces immediately and apply silver solder and heat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use care not to damage equipment or refrigerant specialty items when making up joints (protect from excessive heat). 3.04 Scale Prevention: During brazing, keep pipe system full of inert gas to prevent scale formation. 3.05 Mechanical Joints: Where the Contractor uses refrigerant tubing sets, follow the manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly, including the use of special tools, when making up the joints. Where precharged tubing and equipment is provided, do not cut into the system to install access valves. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 232300-1 Refrigerant Pipe, Valves and Specifications SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPE, VALVES AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.06 Hangers and Supports: Refer to any sections of this division entitled "Hangers and Supports", or entitled "Vibration Isolation". Isolate copper tubing from contact with any dissimilar metals. 3.07 Evacuation and Chargins: When other than completely factory charged equipment and piping systems are used, they shall be evacuated and charged as follows: Charge the system with dry nitrogen and refrigerant and leak test all joints including factory piping within the units. Repair all leaks by disassembling and remaking the joint. After all leaks are corrected, evacuate the system to an absolute pressure of 0.2" mercury. System shall hold this vacuum test for two hours with no noticeable rise in pressure. After passing vacuum test, break vacuum twice using refrigerant and re -evacuate for a minimum of two hours each time. Charge the system in the manner and with the type and amount of refrigerant recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted refrigeration practice. 3.08 Protection of Work: Protect all refrigerant piping systems from damage prior to final acceptance and make repairs to damaged systems at once, completely evacuating and charging as specified herein. 3.09 Other Requirements: A. Arrange piping generally as shown and such that service access is facilitated. Keep refrigerant lines as short and direct as possible with a minimum number of joints. Provide sleeves through floors, wall, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation; seal air tight after installation of piping and insulation. B. Provide flexible piping arrangement in hot gas discharge line of compressor. Such arrangement shall consist of a piping loop or similar measure to prevent transmission of objectionable vibration. C. Provide a removable core filter -drier in liquid line. In-line filter -driers are acceptable in individual circuits of less than 10 -ton nominal capacity. Provide a full size valved bypass around this filter -drier. Provide shut-off valves to isolate the filter -drier while flow is through the bypass and also a shut-off valve in the bypass so that filter -drier can be put into use. D. Provide a refrigerant charging connection in the liquid line upstream from the filter -drier. E. Provide a moisture indicator/sight glass in the liquid line downstream from the filter -drier. Install in vertical line if possible and a sufficient distance downstream from any valve such that the resulting disturbance does not appear in the glass. F. Provide a filter -drier with isolating shut-off valves and with valved bypass only if compressor is not equipped with a suction line filter or screen. G. Keep piping free from traps unless otherwise indicated. Install vertical pipe plumb. Pitch horizontal piping only where slope is desirable. H. Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet to all condensers, receivers and evaporators to permit isolation for service. If possible, use angle valves to minimize pressure drop. Use angle valves in all cases at receivers. Use glove valves only when angle valves are impractical. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 232300-2 Refrigerant Pipe, Valves and Specifications SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPE, VALVES AND SPECIFICATIONS I. Provide solenoid valves upright in horizontal lines only unless their design allows installation in vertical pipe. Where compressor(s) do not have pump down control and the compressor(s) associated evaporator coil(s) do not have bottom suction header connections and the evaporator coil(s) are located above the compressor(s), then loop suction line(s) to top level of coil to prevent liquid slugging. K. To prevent erratic operation of thermal expansion valve, provide a suction line trap next to evaporator coil suction outlet with expansion valve bulb located between coil and trap. Provide only in suction lines which are level leaving coil outlet or which rise on leaving coil outlet. Trap not required when evaporator coil outlet suction line drops to compressor or suction header immediately after expansion valve bulb. END OF SECTION 23 23 00 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 232300-3 Refrigerant Pipe, Valves and Specifications SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide complete duct systems as indicated. Systems shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Outside air, exhaust air, and air conditioning supply and return air duct systems as shown on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, and like items; however, these items shall be installed as required for the actual project conditions at no change in contract price. A. Items Included: This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following major items: 1. Low pressure sheet metal ductwork. 2. Acoustical duct liner. 3. Low pressure flexible ducts. 4. Duct system accessories. a. Flexible duct onnections. b. Splitters. C. Low pressure metal turning vanes. d. Extractors. e. Manual volume dampers. f. Low pressure access doors. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate shop drawings ordering, delivery, and placement of all items affecting the duct systems including, but not limited to, the following items: Air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels, air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". Include complete data on: All prefabricated duct and fittings; access doors; flexible connectors; manual volume dampers including operating hardware; extractors; turning vanes; automatic shutters; duct liner including mechanical fasteners and adhesives; and all other items. 1.04 Air Handling Unit and Ductwork Configuration Shop Drawings: A. Air handling unit manufacturer and model or series, which has been used as the design basis for this project, is indicated. If Contractor elects to submit for approval any unit which is made by any other manufacturer which is listed as acceptable, the Contractor shall submit a shop drawing for each air handling unit for which he proposes to use a unit which is different than the design basis. Such shop drawings shall meet the following requirements: 1. Be drawn at the same scale as the unit is shown on the Drawings. Contractor may elect to use a larger scale if he desires (i.e., if drawing of unit is at 1/4" = V-0", 1/2" = F-0" may be used). 2. Clearly show all proposed ductwork configuration changes (sizes, routing, and similar differences) which are different in any respect from the Drawings. Extent of shop drawings shall show all ductwork to and from each unit beginning with and terminating at those points where ductwork is intended to remain unchanged as shown on Drawings. 3. Where proposed changes affect any other work such as structure, housekeeping pads, piping, equipment, electrical work or any other work, shop drawings shall clearly show those proposed changes. 4. Proposed changes shall be at no additional change in contract price. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 2331 13-1 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 5. Where Drawings show units in plan only, shop drawings shall show proposed units in plan and also in elevation. 6. Shop drawings shall also show exact locations of related work (such as bar joists, columns, beams, sound attenuators, and like items) which affect the proposed ductwork routing and unit location and configuration. 7. Each section of each air handling unit shall be clearly identified (i.e., coil section, fan section, filter section, mixing box section, etc.). B. Failure to submit these shop drawings together at the same time with the air handling unit shop drawings will result in total disapproval of the proposed air handling units. Time delays or other reasons will not be considered. C. These shop drawings shall be prepared as work of this section in coordination with the work of section describing the air conditioning unit(s). 1.05 Other Requirements: A. Provide all ductwork and components thereof in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All ductwork dimensions indicated are nominal free clearance internal dimensions, which do not include insulation thickness. 1.06 Definitions: A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc." B. Low Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities less than 2000 fpm and static pressure less than 2.0 inches w.g. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "Low Velocity Ductwork". SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible," First Edition, 1985, shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified; construct duct in accord therewith. C. Pressure and Velocity Classifications: Pressure and velocity classifications, (hereinafter called "PNC") for ducts are defined as follows: SMACNA Static Positive or SMACNA P/VC Pressure Pressure Negative Seal Velocity Designation Class Rating Pressure Class (fpm) 2 Low 2" + or - B 2500 do 1 Low 1" + or - C 2500 do 1/2 Low 1/2" + or - D 2000 do Note: All seams, joints, fastener penetrations and connections to be sealed with hard cast. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2331 13-2 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork: Systems operating at two inches of water static pressure or less, shall, unless specifically pecified otherwise, conform to the following requirements: A. Material: Prime quality forty-eight inch wide resquare tight coat galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-526. B. Reinforcing, Cross Breakina, Seams, Joints: Be in accordance with latest SMACNA construction standard for low-pressure sheet metal duct. 2.02 Ductwork Wrap: Wrap ductwork where indicated. Dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions. 2.03 Glass Fiber Low Pressure Ductwork: None allowed on this project. 2.04 Low Pressure Round and Flat -Oval Ductwork: A. Conduit: Shall be "zinc grip" steel of spiral lock -seam construction. Duct shall be made using galvanized steel as per ASTM A-527 G-90. Gauge shall be as follows: 1. Round Duct: 25" to 36" 22 20 Fitting 22 Size Duct Gauge Gauge Up through 8"diameter 26 gauge 24 gauge 9" through 14" diameter 26 gauge 24 gauge 15" through 26" diameter 24 gauge 22 gauge 27" through 36" diameter 22 gauge 20 gauge 37" through 50" diameter 20 gauge 20 gauge 51" through 60" diameter 18 gauge 18 gauge 61" through 84" diameter 16 gauge 16 gauge 2. Flat Oval: Shall be "zinc grip" steel of spiral lock -seam construction. Gauges shall be as follows: Duct Width Spiral Lock Seam Duct Fitings Up to 24" 24 20 25" to 36" 22 20 37" to 48" 22 18 49" to 50" 20 18 51" to 70" 20 16 71" and UP 18 1 2.05 Low Pressure Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct shall consist of spiral wound Helix Coil with Trilaminate Inner Fabric. Core shall be covered with factory applied one inch, one pound per cubic foot fiberglass insulation of 0.23 thermal conductance sheathed in a seamless exterior Class 1 vapor barrier jacket reinforced aluminum foil metalized jacket. Connections shall be made using quadrant dampered twist -in type fittings with extractor scoops and volume damper. Duct shall be NFPA 90A, Class 1 (UL 181), flame spread less than 25 and smoke developed less than 50. Provide in factory finished lengths not in excess of 64 to make suitable connections with minimum pressure drop. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2331 13-3 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK Acceptable: Flexmaster, Genflex, Clevaflex or equal with "SPIN -IN" fitting with integral damper and air scoop at connection to main duct branch. 2.06 Duct System Accessories: A. General: 1. Provide all necessary duct system accessories to assure proper balance, quiet and draftless distribution and conveyance, and minimization of turbulence, noise and pressure drop for all supply, return, and exhaust and ventilation air quantities indicated. Be recommended by the manufacturer for the application. B. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Provided where air handlers, fans and blowers connect their ductwork. 2. At least 4 inches long. 3. Connected on each side to metal (either metal ductwork, air handling apparatus, or heavy gauge steel sleeves). 4. For use in low-pressure duct systems. 5. Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas Metaledge". C. Splitters: Provide for adjustments of air volume to their respective branches, where indicated. Constructed of at least the same gauge galvanized steel as the cut wherein they are used and in no instance be less than twenty-two (22) US gauge. Use in low-pressure duct systems only. Adequately sized to close off air to applicable branches. Rigidly attached to pivot rod and operating linkage. Installed on raised insulation base when used in internally insulated ductwork. Splitter blades formed in two thickness of metal so that entering edge presents rounded nose to air flow length no less than one and one half times the width of the smaller branch served or twelve inches whichever is larger. Hardware used for the construction, assembly, and operation of splitter dampers shall be as follows: 1. Operators for exposed splitters and those located above "lay -in" or accessible ceilings shall be Ventlock #690 splitter damper assembly. 2. Operators for concealed splitters shall be Ventlock #691 with #680 miter and #677 concealed regulator. D. Low Pressure Metal Turning Vanes: Provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all low velocity supply air ducts whether or not shown in detail; provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all other low velocity ducts where portions of such ducts convey air at greater than 700 fpm average velocity. Adequate rigidity and strength to be complete flutterproof, properly designed; permanently fixed type. Aluminum, or steel with corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. Air foil type in all mitered elbows, mitered bends and mitered tees. Air foil type must be manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Barber -Colman, "Airturns", Tuttle & Bailey "Ductums", or Dura -Dyne "VR" with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes. E. Extractors: 1. Provide at rectangular branch duct take -offs. 2. Use in low-pressure duct systems only. 3. Properly designed to deflect, proportion and direct the indicated air quantities to the branch duct and/or to the registers, grilles or other outlets without causing objectionable noise or pressure drop. 4. Multivaned and adjustable. 5. Aluminum, or steel with corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2331 13-4 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK Provided with devices for adjusting and securing the position of these deflectors; these devices shall allow adjustment of the deflectors from outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating ductwork and/or its vapor barrier. Made by Titus, Metalaire, and Young Regulator. Be similar to Titus Model AG -45 or AG -225 Volume Extractor or Young Regulator "890" or "890A". F. Manual Volume Dampers: (Other than those specified as being integral with each register, diffuser and other air outlet or inlet): 1. Provide where indicated in the complete air distribution system(s) (including ductwork, return air plenums, etc.) to allow complete balancing of the air supply, return, ventilation and exhaust system(s). 2. Opposed blade type. 3. 8" Maximum blade width. 4. Made of galvanized steel, or steel with a sprayed or dipped aluminum rust resistant finish; flutterproof. 5. Provided so that all damper adjustments can be made from outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating ductwork and/or its vapor barrier. 6. Fully adjustable and with locking device. 7. Manufactured by Titus, Metalaire, or other approved manufacturer. 8. Provided at a point in the ductwork which is a sufficient distance upstream from an outlet (or downstream from an inlet) to attenuate objectionable noise due to damper throttling and to preclude adverse affects on the distribution characteristics (throw, drop, patter, etc.) of the air distribution device. 9. Based upon location of the duct in which the damper is to be installed, provide the following types: a. Dampers in ducts which are exposed or located above "lay -in" or "accessible ceilings": Young Regulator Company Model 896. b. Dampers in ducts which are exposed or located above "lay -in" or "accessible ceilings": Young Regulator Company Model 896. G. Low Pressure Duct Access Doors: 1. Provided for: Each manual and motorized damper; fire damper; smoke damper; electric duct heater; and where access is otherwise necessary. 2. Factory prefabricated double wall insulated type of 24 US gauge galvanized steel (of same or thicker gauge than ductwork panel in, which installed whichever is greater). 3. Minimum size shall be as large as is compatible with duct size, but in no case less than the following (provide larger sizes if necessary to permit proper access operating): Maximum Duct Dimensions Access Door Size 11" or less 10" X 12" 12" through 16" 12" X 16" 17" and over 16" X 24" 4. Doors shall be provided with hand operated adjustable tension catches and shall be completely gasketed around their perimeters. Doors shall be Ventlock "Access Doors". Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using Ventlock #360 sealant. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2331 13 -5 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK H. Test Openings: Furnish and install gasketed applied test openings for test equipment (pitot tubes, etc.) on the entering and leaving sides of air handling units and other air handling equipment and heating coils. Test openings shall be Ventlock #699-2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. Construct all ductwork and accessories in accordance with the latest indicated editions of applicable Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association construction standards. B. Streamline all ductwork to the full extent practical and equip with proper and adequate devices to assure proper balance and quiet draftless distribution of indicated air quantities. C. Protect all ductwork and system accessories from damage during construction until Architect's final acceptance of project. D. Prior to ductwork fabrication, verify if all ductwork as dimensioned and generally shown will satisfactorily fit allocated spaces. Take precautions to avoid space interference's with beams, columns, joists, pipes, lights, conduit, other ducts, equipment, etc. Notify Architect if any spatial conflicts exist, and then obtain Architect's approval of necessary routing. Make any such necessary revisions, which are minor at no additional cost. E. Carefully correlate all duct connections to air handling units and fans to provide proper connections, elbows and bends which minimize noise and pressure drop. F. Provide all curved elbows with radius ratios of not less than 1.5, unless otherwise shown or approved by Architect. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes. G. Properly suspend all ductwork so that no objectionable conditions result (such as vibration, sagging, etc.). H. Coordinate any and all dimensions at interfaces of dissimilar type of ductwork and at interfaces of ductwork with equipment so that proper overlaps, interfaces, etc., of insulation and continuity of vapor barriers are maintained. I. If necessary, where ducts interface and have different types of insulation, provide transitions so that internal free -clear dimensions of duct remain unchanged. Install horizontal low pressure ductwork at a level which maximizes length of any vertical rectangular duct connections to rectangular diffuser necks; however, such vertical duct connections are not required to be over 24 inches in length. K. Install all flexible round duct without kinks or similar obstructions so that pressure drop is minimized. Cut and remove excess lengths as necessary. L. Install horizontal rigid ductwork as high as practical above suspended ceilings so that movable light fixtures may be relocated without interference to meet any future partition relocation requirements. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2331 13-6 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 3.02 Special Conditions: The following duct system installation requirements shall be done,to maximize flexibility of relocation of lighting systems, duct systems and fire sprinkler systems in the event of partition relocation and in order to facilitate ease of servicing components of the systems contained within the ceiling plenum. These requirements are: A. Install all horizontal rigid ductwork against the underside of the steel structure. Coordinate ductwork reinforcing such that standing seams angles and similar space -consuming reinforcement does not occur on the top surface of ducts where such ducts pass below steel beams. B. Make minor field adjustments as necessary to the locations of tenninal units as shown on the drawings such that: 1. Each terminal unit is essentially in the center of a ceiling module and is not obstructed from access from below by the main runners or cross tees of the ceiling system. 2. Each terminal unit is not installed over a light fixture or such that a light fixture does not obstruct service access to the unit. 3. Each terminal unit is supported at an elevation such that the bottom of the terminal unit is at least 10 -inches above the bottom of the ceiling. To accomplish this, each terminal unit may be recessed upward into the main structural bay cavity and provided at its outlet with a downwardly -sloped supply air duct which contains two angular offsets (each of which is not greater than 15 angular degrees) to allow the supply duct to drop to the same horizontal plane as the remainder of the low pressure ductwork. 4. No terminal unit is located so that access to it is obstructed by fire sprinkler system piping. 5. No rigid duct is located to obstruct access to an electrical lighting system junction box. 3.03 Field Measurement: Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 3.04 Hangers and Supports: A. General: Comply with latest applicable SMACNA construction standards. Where sprayed fireproofing occurs, install hangers before application of such treatment and withhold installation of ducts until after application. B. Supports: Vertical risers and other duct runs where the method of support specified above is not applicable shall be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to meet field conditions and installed to allow for duct expansion. C. Fasteners: Secure hangers to steel beams or metal deck with beam clamps to drop through connections from metal or concrete deck. Refer to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 3.05 Insulated Duct: Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjustment clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct. 3.06 Partition and Floor Openings: All openings in floor slabs or partitions through which ducts pass shall be filled tightly with mineral or glass wool batting. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 2331 13-7 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 3.07 Smoke Dampers: A. Install smoke dampers where indicated on drawings. Install adjustable linkage stops on linkage so that the open position of damper may be adjusted and set. B. Where smoke dampers and smoke detectors are located together, install smoke damper on downstream side of smoke detector. 3.08 Change In Shane or Dimension: Where duct size or shape is changed to effect a change in area, the following shall apply: A. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in an increase in area over that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation shall not exceed one inch in seven inches. B. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in a decrease in area from that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation may be one inch in four inches, but one inch in seven inches if preferable, space permitting. C. The angle of transformation at connections to heating coils or other equipment shall not exceed thirty degrees from a line parallel to the air flow in the entering side of the equipment, nor fifteen degrees on the leaving side. The angle of approach may be increased to suit limited space conditions when the transformation is provided with vanes approved by the Architect. D. At contractor's option, connection from low pressure rectangular ductwork to air distribution devices via flexible ductwork may be made from bottom of rectangular ductwork in lieu of side connection providing contractor makes appropriate size transitions (if necessary) to maintain same free clear internal area at connection and also allows dimensional clearance for spin -in fitting with integral damper. E. At contractor's option, he may eliminate a low pressure duct transition and hold the upstream duct size to the next downstream transition and make the necessary size transition at that point. 3.09 Changes in Direction: Changes in direction shall be basically as indicated on the drawings and the following shall apply: A. Supply ducts turns of ninety degrees in low-pressure duct shall be made with mitered elbows fitted with closely spaced turning vanes designed for maintaining a constant velocity through the elbow. B. Return and exhaust duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made mitered elbows, as specified herein before, for supply ducts, unless radius elbows are indicated, in which case they shall be vaned and constructed with a throat radius three-quarters the duct width and a full radius heel. C. Tees in low-pressure duct shall conform to the design requirements specified herein before for elbows. D. Branch take -offs in low-pressure duct shall be made with extractors, splitter dampers, or 45 take -off with volume dampers, as indicated on drawings. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2331 13-8 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 31 13 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK 3.10 Other Requirements: A. If ductwork materials are installed which do not meet these specifications, Contractor shall remove such ductwork materials and replace them with the specified materials. Any delay in job progress will be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Properly install all control related devices, which are part of the duct system. See Section(s) describing HVAC control systems. 3.11 Exterior Ductwork: A. All ductwork, which is exterior to the building, shall be supported with appropriate steel support system, which is firmly secured to supporting base. Make any and all ductwork penetration points and any and all ductwork support penetration points permanently watertight by use of properly designed flashings and other necessary appurtenances. B. All exterior ductwork shall be completely permanently weatherproof including connections at air conditioning units, wall penetration points and all other points. 3.12 Definitions and Locations: A. Definitions of Type Designations: The following type designations are "letter abbreviations" of the duct types. The abbreviations are intended to make any drawings notes or other references more concise. 1. Type LPW: Low pressure, wrapped. 2. Type LPSA: Low pressure, rectangular, sound attenuating thermally lined. 3. Type LP: Low pressure, rectangular, no insulation. 4. Type LPFDI: Low-pressure flexible round duct with factory insulation. 5. Type LPW -1: Low pressure, wrapped not connected to a unit. B. Location of Duct Type: The following descriptions cover the locations of each duct type. 1. Type LPSA: Where indicated. 2. Type LPFDI: All flexible supply air ductwork from any type of low-pressure ductwork to connection with applicable air distribution devices. 3. Type LPW: Rectangular return and supply air ductwork to and from air conditioning units. 4. Type LPW -1: Rectangular ductwork not connected to an air handling unit, but which conveys air from a conditioned space or from a plenum above a conditioned space to another conditioned space or to another plenum (e.g., return air transfer ducts). 5. Type LP: Rectangular exhaust air ductwork. END OF SECTION 23 31 13 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2331 13-9 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ductwork SECTION 23 3120 ROOF CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide a roof curb for each rooftop unit, and power roof ventilator and roof air intake. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate roof openings, curb dimensions and electrical connections including stub up through roof deck with fans actually furnished. 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.04 Manufacturer: Curbs shall be matched to, and be a companion item for the equipment provided. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Factory prefabricated. 2.02 Minimum height of 14 inches (unless otherwise indicated). 2.03 Completely insulated internally with 2 inch minimum thickness fiberglass insulation complying with NFPA 90A. 2.04 Approved by Architect prior to provision of roof openings. 2.05 Heavy gauge steel with welded joints and hot dip galvanized after fabrication, or heavy gauge aluminum with welded joints. 2.06 Foam rubber gasket on top of curb. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Coordination of Roof Curb Placement and Equipment Mounting: Mount equipment, curb and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Correlate size(s) of roof opening(s) and roof curb(s) with actual equipment to be mounted thereon. Properly flash and seal curb opening. END OF SECTION 23 3120 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 233120-1 Roof Curbs SECTION 23 34 21 FANS, POWER ROOF VENTILATOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide all power roof ventilators of size, capacity, and electrical characteristics indicated on the drawings or as otherwise indicated. 1.02 Shop Drawings: Refer to the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.03 Manufacturer: Greenheck Fan and Ventilator Corp.; Loren Cook Company; or approved equal. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Fan Hood, Housing and Base: Weatherproof and constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Motor and drive shall be supported by a structural frame independent of hood, housing and curb base. 2.02 Fan Wheel: Backward curved, non -overloading, aluminum, air foil blade type. 2.03 Drive Assemblv: Direct or belt drive type as indicated. Conform with Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 2.04 Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted disconnect switches wired to the motor. 2.05 Bird Screen: Provide 1/2" mesh aluminum bird screens on all fans. 2.06 Starter: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Roof Curb Placement and Fan Mounting: Fan location shall be essentially as shown on the drawings; however, actual placement of roof curb shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation. Mount fan and back draft damper in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 23 34 21 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 23 34 21 -1 Fan, Power Roof Ventilator SECTION 23 37 13 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide all air distribution devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein for a complete and operable system. 1.02 Relation to Other Work: Coordinate with work of the ceiling, drywall, and plastering trades as required to insure an orderly progression of work and a first class finished system with respect to placement, alignment, finish, general fit, and absence of conflict with lighting systems and fire protection systems. L03 Design Conditions: A. Acoustical: Noise produced at each diffuser, register, grille, or other air distribution device shall not exceed a noise criteria level of NC 25 based on sound pressure levels in db re 0.0002 microbars unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate air distribution devices, sound attenuation measures, and equipment actually provided to insure that this design constraint is not exceeded by the system installed. B. Pressure drop across any air distribution device shall not exceed 0.10 in w.g. static pressure unless otherwise indicated. C. Guarantee: Air distribution equipment shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to operate without excessive noise and with velocities in the five foot occupancy zone, when handling air with temperature differentials as high as 25 degrees, not to exceed 30 fpm at 2 degree difference, 50 fpm at 1-1/2 degree difference, or 75 fpm at a 1 degree difference when operating with an average 75 degree room temperature and measured no closer than 6 inches from a wall surface. 1.04 Shop Drawings: Refer to Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work". 1.05 Manufacturer: Titus, Metalaire, Price or approved equal. Manufacturers style and series numbers indicated are examples of products to be provided. 1.06 Manufacturers must be members of the Air Distribution Council unless otherwise indicated. 1.07 All aluminum is to be extruded unless otherwise indicated. 1.08 Appearance: Each air distribution device which has a portion thereof (frame, core, etc.) exposed to view in the finished area shall have a factory applied finish which matches and is compatible with the color of the surrounding surface on which the device is installed. Colors must be approved by Architect prior to device fabrication. 1.09 All louvers, dampers, and/or shutters shall be rated by their manufacturer in accordance with AMCA Standard in effect. 1.10 Integral Components: All dampers, blank -off baffles and other companion devices which form an integral part of air distribution devices shall be factory made items produced by the manufacturer of air distribution device. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2337 13 - 1 Air Distribution Equipment SECTION 23 37 13 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Ceiling Mounted Conditioned Air Supply Diffusers, Return Air, Exhaust Air and Outside Air Registers. A. Designated on drawings by the manner of indicated system function for the device. B. Sponge Rubber Gaskets. C. Aluminum or steel, as specified. D. Companion adjustable volume dampers. 2.02 Ceiling Mounted Transfer Grilles: A. Designated on drawings by the manner of the indicated system function for the device. B. Aluminum or steel as specified. C. Sponge rubber gaskets. 2.03 Mounting Screws: Where grilles, diffusers, or registers are specified which require mounting screws visible from the face of the device, these screws shall be furnished with the air distribution equipment or register in which they are to be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General: A. Install neatly where indicated in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accord with SMACNA recommendations and as otherwise indicated. B. Properly test, balance and adjust to produce quiet, draftless operating to best degree possible. C. Do not install blank -offs under continuous linear diffuser distribution plenums. Distribution plenums shall cover only active portion of the diffuser. 3.02 Rectangular Diffusers: Where diffusers are in lay -in type, they shall be supported by the inverted T -bar suspension system, but all ducts connected thereto shall be supported independently of the ceiling as specified under Section entitled "Ductwork". Surface mounted diffusers shall be supported by the duct runouts or drops where sheet metal ducts are indicated and by separate hangers where flex runouts are indicated. All rectangular ceiling diffusers shall be installed with their lines parallel and perpendicular to the building line and properly aligned with ceiling. 3.03 Sidewall Grilles and Registers: Mount securely to the duct system flanges using finish screws and in accordance with accepted good practice. 3.04 Ceiling Mounted Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles: Mount as specified herein before for surface mounted ceiling diffusers except use finished screws provided and secure to duct and finished ceiling (or finished ceiling for nonducted returns) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where required to provide adequate support for nonducted registers or grilles, prove appropriate mounting frame for incorporation into the ceiling system. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2337 13-2 Air Distribution Equipment SECTION 23 37 13 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT END OF SECTION 23 37 13 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2337 13-3 Air Distribution Equipment SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: DIRECT EXPANSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope: Provide roof top mounted, packaged, air conditioning units where indicated on the drawings. Unit capacities and operating conditions shall be as scheduled on the drawings and as specified herein. Unit shall be designed for roof top mounting on a companion roof curb, essentially where shown on drawings. 1.02 . Relation to Other Work: Contractor shall coordinate shop drawings; equipment ordering, delivery and placement; utility connection; and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progress of the work. Refer to the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." 1.03 Shop Drawings: Refer to the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." Include complete data on curbs; duct opening requirements, equipment weights, power and control wiring (both factory and field); operating and safety controls; capacities and rating conditions; and equipment sound power levels in each octave band. The air conditioning unit manufacturer and model or series, which has been used as the design basis for this project is indicated in the paragraph, entitled "Manufacturer." If the contractor elects to submit for approval units which are made by any other manufacturer which is listed as acceptable, the Contractor shall submit a shop drawing for each unit which he proposes to use which is different from the design basis. Such shop drawings shall meet the following requirements: A. Be drawn at the same scale as the unit is shown on the drawings. Contractor may elect to use a larger scale if he desires (i.e., if drawing of unit is at 1/4" = V- 011, 1/2" = 1'-0" may be used). B. Clearly shows all proposed ductwork configuration changes (sizes, routing, and similar differences) which are different in any respect from the Drawings. Extent of shop drawings shall show all ductwork to and from the unit beginning with and terminating at those points where ductwork is intended to remain unchanged as shown on the Drawings. C. Where proposed changes affect any other work such as structure, piping, equipment, electrical work, control work, or any other work, shop drawings shall clearly show those proposed changes. D. Proposed changes shall be at no additional change in contract price. E. Shop drawings shall show proposed units in plan and elevation and shall be installed in such a manner as to maintain adequate clearances for maintenance and performance. F. Shop drawings shall show exact locations of related work (such as columns, beams, and like items) which affect the proposed ductwork routing and unit location and configuration. G. Each section of each air conditioning unit shall be clearly identified (i.e., coil section, fan section, filter section, mixing box section, etc.). H. Failure to submit these shop drawings together at the same time with the air conditioning unit shop drawings will result in total disapproval of the proposed air conditioning units. Time delays or other reasons will not be considered. IRC Admin Complex Packaged Roof Top North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2374 13 - 1 Air Conditioning Units: Direct Expansion SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: DIRECT EXPANSION 1.04 Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Refer to the Section entitled "Instructions and Maintenance Manuals." 1.05 Warranty: Contractor shall include in his price, the cost of one year's warranty on entire system plus an additional four years warranty on refrigerant system and all components thereof. The first year's warranty shall comply with the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." The additional four year warranty shall include parts, refrigerant, and oil, exclusive of labor. 1.06 Manufacturer: Trane, Lennox, Carrier or an approved equal. Products shall be submitted for approval and information shall be provided verifying they meet requirements of this specification and are submitted in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Shop Drawings" and with Section 15000. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Frame: Unit shall be completely factory assembled with all components mounted on a one piece unitized frame. Unit base shall have 14 gauge formed load bearing members and formed recess with factory installed flexible base to roof curb sealing gasketing. Frame shall incorporate lifting lugs for purpose of rigging and setting the unit in place. 2.02 Casing: The unit casing shall be not less than 20 gauge zinc coated steel, phosphatized, epoxy primed, and finished with enamel. Architect shall select color and finish. Casing roof shall use one piece construction curved for natural drainage with all seams filled with sealant except those seams over the condenser section. Access panels and doors shall have neoprene gaskets and provide access to control panels, compressors, filters, outside and return air dampers, evaporator and condenser fans, evaporator and condenser coils, refrigeration system accessories, and service valves. Outside air intake shall be located and operated in such a manner that all moisture droplets are trapped and drained to outside of unit. 2.03 Refrigerant Coils: A. Evaporator: Coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes with aluminum heat transfer fins mechanically bonded thereto and be tested at not less than 300 psig and proved tight. Coil shall be specifically circuited to provide stable operation with refrigerant flow from 50% to 100% of full load and maximum 550 fpm coil face velocity. Entire coil shall be active during part load operation. B. Condenser: Coils shall be constructed of seamless copper with aluminum heat transfer fins mechanically bonded thereto and be tested at not less than 400 psig. 2.04 Compressors: Compressors shall be hermetic type or as per schedule on plans. 2.05 Refrigerant Circuit Accessories: The following refrigerant accessories shall be included for each compressor refrigerant circuit: suction and discharge back seating valves; liquid line solenoid valves; thermostatic expansion valves; filter dryers; high and low pressure gauge ports; and sight glass and moisture indicator. 2.06 Fans: A. Evaporator Fans: Double width, double inlet forward curved or backwardly inclined or air foil blade type dynamically balanced at the factory. Fan shaft shall be mounted on two greased lubricated ball bearings designed for 200,000 hours average life. Grease IRC Admin Complex Packaged Roof Top North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 237413-2 Air Conditioning Units: Direct Expansion SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: DIRECT EXPANSION lines shall be extended to allow greasing of bearings and inspection of fan belts from same location. Fan drive shall conform to the requirements of the Section entitled "Common Requirements for Mechanical Work." Fan motor and fan assembly shall be mounted in a common base to allow consistent belt tension. B. Condenser Fans: Shall be propeller type, direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced at the factory and protected by metal guards on the discharge side. 2.07 Insulation: All casing panels and all interior surfaces of exterior casing members in contact with air stream shall be insulated with not less than one (1) inch thick expanded foam or glass fiber insulation. All unit insulation and adhesives shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings. 2.08 Filters: A. General: Filters shall pass applicable air quantities at velocities and pressure drops which are within manufacturer's recommended operating ranges, and as specified. Filter rack shall be flat or V bank as necessary to comply with this requirement. B. Filter Manufacturers: Farr or other approved manufacturer. C. Unit Filter Section: Shall' be of adequate size to accept specified filters. Unit filter section shall be factory made. Filter section shall be designed for easy service access. D. Replaceable Throwaway Filters: 2 Inch thick. Dacron or fibrous glass multi ply fiber with 3 graduated density plies. Equal to Farr 30/30. Galvanized steel, aluminum, or fiberboard frame suitable for mounting in applicable filter box. Minimum efficiency; 25% NBS atmospheric dust spot efficiency. 2.09 Roof Curb: Shall support entire unit. Curb designed shall comply with National Roofing Contractors Association requirements. 2.10 Utility Connection and Openings: Utility connection openings shall be provided within the roof curb enclosure. Unit shall have a single point electrical power connection through a non-fused factory mounted disconnect switch. 2.11 Convenience Outlet: A 115 volt convenience outlet shall be provided within the electrical control compartment of the unit. Coordinate with Division 26. 2.12 Piping: All necessary interior piping shall be factory fabricated and insulated. Condensate drain piping shall be routed to suitable exterior location. Refer to the plans for routing of condensate piping exterior to unit. 2.13 Controls: Units shall be furnished and installed complete with all system operating and safety controls specified herein and as otherwise required for a complete and operable system. Controls shall be of the electric and/or electronic type with all necessary items to allow proper interfacing with all other controls external to the unit. A. Refrigerant Controls: Refrigerant controls shall include short cycle protection; high pressure cutout; low pressure cutout; and oil pressure failure protection switch (on serviceable hermetic). B. Electrical Protection Controls: IRC Admin Complex Packaged Roof Top North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 2374 13-3 Air Conditioning Units: Direct Expansion SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: DIRECT EXPANSION 1. Compressor Circuit Breakers: Shall be manual reset type, current sensitive, and temperature compensated to shut off compressor if current draw is excessive. 2. Indoor Fan Motor Circuit Breakers: Shall be manual reset type to protect against motor overload. 3. Outdoor Fan Motor Protection: Automatic reset type opens power circuit if motor temperature becomes excessive. 4. Variable Volume Controls (if used): Shall be factory installed and wired in unit and include: C. Discharge dampers or inlet vanes, static pressure duct sensors, static pressure regulator, tubing, and damper or inlet vane actuator. D. Solid states controls (microprocessor): Shall: 1. Provide precise control of capacity staging. 2. Contain an adjustable set point for discharge air temperature. 3. Contain a control memory function which in effect "remembers" the previous fifteen (15) minutes of operation. 4. Contain the ability to program a reset of discharge air temperature in accordance with temperature readings transmitted from the conditioned space. This reset function shall be adjustable in both amount of reset and point at which reset is initiated on a reprogrammed schedule. E. Remove Control Box: Shall contain seven day time clock with ten hour spring carryover, five hour bypass timer, and status lights for Fan On, Cooling Stage 1, Cooling Stage 2, Heating, Dirty Filter, and Compressor Failure. F. Compressor Startup Control: Control shall not allow compressor to short cycle due to a safety device power interruption. Control also starts condenser fan fifteen (15) seconds before compressor to minimize solar heat buildup and reduce start-up load. 2.14 Unit Sequence of Operation: Refer to Section entitled "HVAC Controls". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Placement and Mounting: Unit location shall be essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual placement shall be verified by using field measurements and data relating to the equipment approved for actual installation on this project. 3.02 Duct Connections: Supply and return ducts shall be connected to their respective unit duct collars using flexible connectors. These connectors shall be installed properly so that they are not in tension and are aligned with their respective ducts. 3.03 Manufacturer's Field Supervision: Include in his price the services of an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer who shall personally supervise the following: check out of all field wiring; unit start up; and unit test and balance including control calibration. 3.04 Steel Support Framing: Shall be as follows: A. Similar to that shown on drawings. B. Completely painted with primer and two coats of approved rust resistant paint. C. Submitted as a complete shop drawing with the proposed unit. IRC Admin Complex Packaged Roof Top North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2374 13-4 Air Conditioning Units: Direct Expansion SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS: DIRECT EXPANSION END OF SECTION 23 74 13 IRC Admin Complex Packaged Roof Top North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 237413-5 Air Conditioning Units: Direct Expansion SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Work shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning electrical installation in accordance with requirements of the 2017 Florida Building Code with local amendments and to other pertinent codes made a part of such code by reference and local state codes, and contract drawings and specifications. B. Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. Carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of Work. Organize and lay out Work so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. Install all Work parallel or perpendicular to building lines unless otherwise noted. C. The intent of the Drawings is to establish the types of systems and functions; not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. Install the Work complete, including minor details necessary to perform the function indicated. Review pertinent Drawings and adjust the Work to conditions shown. Where discrepancies occur between Drawings, Specifications, and actual field conditions, immediately notify the Owner's Project Manager for Owner's interpretations. D. Coordinate the actual locations of electrical outlets and equipment with building features and equipment as indicated on architectural, structural, mechanical, and plumbing Drawings. Review any proposed changes in electrical wiring devices or equipment location with the Owner's Project Manager. Owner may direct relocation of outlets before installation, up to five (5) feet from the position indicated, without additional cost. Remove and relocate outlets placed in an unsuitable location when requested by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. E. All dimensional information related to new structures shall be taken from the appropriate Drawings. All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actual measurements made by the Contractor on the Site. F. Existing Structures: The building floor slabs, structure, and outer walls are generally existing to remain. The only existing penetrations are openings where indicated on the Drawings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260100-1 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the Contract Documents. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed: Concealed areas are those areas that cannot be seen by building occupants. B. Exposed: Exposed areas are all areas that are exposed to view by building occupants, including areas below counter tops, inside cabinets and closets, inside all equipment rooms, and areas outside the building exterior envelope, exposed to the outdoors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Work, materials and equipment shall comply with the latest rules and regulations specified in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). B. Discrepancies: The Drawings and Specifications are intended to comply with listed codes, ordinances, regulations and standards. Where discrepancies occur, immediately notify the Owner's Project Manager in writing and ask for an interpretation. Should installed materials or workmanship fail to comply, the Contractor is responsible for correcting the improper installation at no additional cost to the Owner. Additionally, where sizes, capacities, or other such features are required in excess of minimum code or standards requirements, provide those specified or shown. C. Contractor Qualifications: An acceptable Contractor for the Work under this Division must have personnel with experience, training and skill to provide a practical working system. The Contractor shall furnish acceptable evidence of having installed not less than three systems of size and type comparable to this Project. All personnel installing equipment under this Division shall possess valid Indian River County and State of Florida licenses for their skill level. Refer also to any Owner's Special Conditions. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide coordination Drawings with submittals as required by Division 01. B. Record Documents: In addition to hard copy format, all material submitted as final record products, including approved Shop Drawings and submittals, shall be submitted to the Owner in its original electronic file format on compact disc or DVD. Material may be scanned into electronic file format where necessary. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All equipment and materials shall be delivered to the Project Site clean and sealed for protection. B. Moisture: During construction, protect switchgear, transformers, motors, control equipment, and other items from insulation moisture absorption and metallic component corrosion by appropriate use of strip heaters, lamps or other suitable means. Apply protection immediately upon receiving the products and maintain continually. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260100-2 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS C. Damage: Take such precautions as are necessary to protect apparatus and materials from damage. Failure to protect materials is sufficient cause for rejection of the apparatus or material in question. D. Finish: Protect factory finish from damage during construction operations until acceptance of the Project. Restore any finishes that become stained or damaged to Owner's satisfaction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Equipment and control systems should match, integrate, communicate or cooperate with Owner's existing systems, such as power monitoring systems, building automation, fire alarm, motor control centers, switchgears, breakers, transformers, and lighting dimming systems. C. Conditions: Provide new products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment. Provide the manufacturer's latest standard design for the type of product specified. Products shall be U.S. made. Owner reserves the right to approve or disapprove foreign -made products. D. NEC and UL: Products shall conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code. Where Underwriters' Laboratories have set standards, listed products and issued labels, products used shall be listed and labeled by UL. E. Space Limitations: Equipment selected shall conform to the building features and shall be coordinated with all components. Do not provide equipment that will not meet arrangement and space limitations. Contractor shall submit room layouts with submitted items shown drawn to scale. Submittals will be rejected without floor plan Drawings showing submitted items. F. Factory Finish: Equipment shall be delivered with a hard surface, factory -applied finish so that no additional field painting is required except for touch-up. G. Common Source: Equipment specified in Sections 26 24 16, 26 28 17, 26 43 13 shall be provided by the same manufacturer. H. Series Ratings: Overcurrent devices shall have fully rated interrupting capacity. Series rating of devices is unacceptable. 2.02 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE MARKING A. Designations: Externally mark all equipment, devices, feeders, branch circuits and similar items with nameplates with the same designations as indicated on the Contract Documents. B. Nameplates shall be black laminated rigid phenolic with white core. Nameplate minimum size shall be 1 inch high by 3 inches long with 3/16 inch high engraved white letters. Supply blank nameplates for spare units and spaces. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260100-3 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 26 01 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS C. Nameplate Fasteners: Fasten nameplates to the front of equipment only by means of stainless steel self -tapping screws. Stick -ons or adhesives are not acceptable unless the NEMA enclosure rating is compromised, then only epoxy adhesive shall be used to attach nameplates. D. Nameplate Information: The general naming convention shall consist of the following segments: 1. System voltage: H (277/408V) or L (120/208V); 2. Individual equipment identification: A, B, C, etc. E. In general, provide the following information for the types of electrical equipment as listed: 1. Switchgears, Switchboards, Distribution Panels and Motor Control Centers: On mains, identify the piece of equipment, the source, and voltage characteristics (i.e., 480/277V 3PH 4W). For each branch circuit protective device, identify the load served. 2. Transformers, Individual Starters, Contactors, Disconnect Switches, Transfer Switches and Similar Equipment: Identify the device designation, voltage characteristics source and load served. 3. Panelboards: Identify panelboard designation, voltage characteristics, and source designation. F. Panelboards: Prepare a neatly typed circuit directory behind clear heat -resistant plastic in a metal frame tack welded to the inside of the door for each panelboard. Identify circuits by equipment served and by building room numbers where room numbers exist. Indicate spares and spaces with light, erasable pencil marking. Adhesive mounted directory pocket is not acceptable. Removing and attaching panel schedules from the Drawings is not acceptable. G. Panelboards, Pull, Junction and Outlet Boxes: 1. With '/z inch high permanent lettering, identify conduits connected to panelboards, pull, junction and outlet boxes with the complete circuit number of the conductors contained therein. Neutral conductors shall be identified by wire marker tags in the panelboards, pull, junction and outlet boxes. Where multiple circuits are contained in a box, identify the circuit conductors with permanent tags which indicate circuit designation. 2. Fire alarm circuits (only) shall be marked with half red covers and circuit designation marked on the face. H. Power receptacles, wall switches and dedicated outlets. Identify circuits as per Specification Section 26 27 26. I. Dedicated outlets: Dedicated is understood to be specific equipment listed by equipment number in the panel schedules or identified on the Drawings. Dedicated also includes computer outlets. J. Remote Ballasts: For remote ballasts not within five (5) feet of their associated lighting fixture, provide appropriate permanent lettering on both the ballasts and the light fixture to identify which are mated to the other. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260100-4 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. Unless otherwise noted, remove all electrical materials and equipment from areas indicated for demolition on architects or electrical drawings. Removal of equipment shall not interfere with existing operations. B. Remove conduit and wire back to panelboards or to nearest junction box that is not being removed and needs to remain in service. Wire shall be removed back to point of origin. Turn off circuit breakers or switches serving abandoned circuits and tag breaker or switch and label in panel schedule as "Spare". C. Materials and equipment to be removed, except items specifically noted to be relocated or delivered to the Owner, become property of the Contractor and shall be immediately removed from the Project Site. If the Owner identifies other items during construction, those items become Owner property and will be turned over to the Owner. D. Electrical services and controls to items being removed shall be disconnected and removed from the Project Site. E. All fluorescent lighting fixtures being removed from the Project Site that will not be turned over to the Owner shall have any PCB -containing ballasts removed from the fixtures for environmental disposal. Ballasts shall remain intact with wire leads at least twelve (12) inches long. F. Contractor shall ensure that light switches within the Work area remain operational. Where temporary 120 volt light strings are installed, a switch shall be provided for the light strings near the Project entry door. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Cooperation with Other Trades: Cooperate with trades of adjacent, related or affected materials or operations, and with trades performing continuations of this Work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of Work and to coordinate, in proper and correct sequence, the Work of such trades. D. Workmanship: Work shall be performed by competent workers skilled in their trade. This installation must be complete. E. Housekeeping Pads: Unless otherwise noted. Install 3 1/2 inch thick concrete foundation pads for indoor floor -mounted equipment, except where direct floor mounting is required. Pour pads on roughened floor slabs, sized so that outer edges extend a minimum of 3 inches beyond equipment. Trowel pads smooth and chamfer edges to a 1 inch bevel. Secure equipment to pads as recommended by the manufacturer. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260100-5 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 26 01 00, BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS F. Setting of Equipment: Equipment must be leveled and set plumb. Sheet metal enclosures mounted against a wall must be separated from the wall not less than 1/4 inch by means of corrosion -resistant spacers or by 3 inches of air for freestanding units. Use corrosion resistant bolts, nuts and washers to anchor equipment. Provide Drawings and layout Work showing exact size and location of sleeves, openings or inserts for electrical equipment in slabs, walls, partitions and chases in sufficient time to be coordinated with Work under other divisions. G. Sealing of Equipment: Seal openings into equipment to prevent entrance of animals, birds and insects. H. Motors: Electrical Work includes the electrical connection of all motors, except those that are wired as a part of equipment. I. Concealed Work: Conceal all electrical Work in walls, floors, chases, under floors, underground, and above ceilings except: 1. Where shown or specified to be exposed. Exposed is open to view. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function. 3. Where size of materials and equipment preclude concealment. Provide final electrical connections to equipment furnished under other divisions and by the Owner. Furnish detailed Shop Drawings of equipment indicating the exact number and location of rough -in points. Such final Shop Drawings may indicate adjustments in total number and exact location of rough -in points, and in equipment dimensions. Making adjustments to field conditions is considered a part of the Work required. 1. Roughing -in: When roughing -in electrical branch circuits to various items of equipment, terminate at proper points as indicated on detailed equipment Shop Drawings or as directed by Owner. Do not rely on Drawings accompanying these Specifications for rough -in locations, only for general routing of circuiting. 2. Final Connections: Appliances & equipment will include service fittings such as switches, duplex receptacles, lighting fixtures, etc., on the equipment. Provide branch circuit connections to meet service fitting requirements. K. Sealing and firestopping where raceways penetrate smoke, fire, and sound rated walls. 3.03 TESTING A. Test Conditions: 1. Place circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and separately, as may be necessary to determine satisfactory operation. Perform specified tests in the presence of the Owner's representative(s). Furnish all instruments, wiring, equipment and personnel required for conducting tests. Demonstrate that the equipment operates in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Special tests on certain items are specified hereinafter. 2. All instruments required for conducting the tests shall be NIST (National Institute for Standard and Technology) certified or traceable, and calibrated at the time of testing. B. Test Dates: Schedule final acceptance sufficiently in advance of the Contract date to permit completion of any necessary adjustment or alterations within the number of days allotted for completion of the Contract. Provide written notification to Owner at least fourteen (14) calendar days in advance of Functional Performance Test dates. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260100-6 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 26 0100 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS C. Retests: If retesting is required due to initial failure, conduct retests of such time duration as may be necessary to assure proper functioning of adjusted or altered parts or items of equipment. Any resultant delay as a result of such necessary retests does not relieve the Contractor of Contractor's responsibility under this Contract. D. Circuit Verification: All 120 -volt single-phase circuits shall be verified to match the Drawings and panel schedules by "ringing out" each circuit in the presence of the Owner's representative(s). END OF SECTION 26 0100 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260100-7 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 26 05 19 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements for 600 -volt cable, wire and connectors. It consists of but is not limited to power distribution circuitry, control system circuitry, lighting circuitry, appliance, equipment and motor -branch circuitry and outdoor power and lighting circuitry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. NEMA WC 3: Rubber -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 2. NEMA WC 5: Thermoplastic -Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 3. Where application of National Electrical Code, appears to be in conflict with the requirements of this section, the Owner shall be asked for an interpretation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's data on cable and wire connectors. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory -wrapped waterproof flexible barrier material for covering wire and cable wood reels, where applicable; and weather resistant fiberboard containers for factory - packaging of cable, wire and connectors, to protect against physical damage in transit. Damaged cable, wire or connectors shall be removed from the Project Site. B. In their factory -furnished coverings, store cable, wire and connectors in a clean, dry indoor space which provides protection against the weather. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2605 19-1 Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt SECTION 26 05 19 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT B. Provide factory -fabricated wire of the size, rating, material and type as indicated for each service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as required to comply with installation requirements and with NEC standards. The minimum size wire to be used for power or lighting circuits shall be #12 copper stranded with insulation as noted below. Minimum size for control circuits shall be #14 copper stranded. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Interstate Wire Company. B. American Insulated. C. Okonite. D. Southwire. E. Encore Wire. 2.03 BUILDING WIRE A. NEMA WC 70 — Nonshielded 0-2kV Cables B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger than 10 AWG: 98 percent conductivity copper, stranded conductor, 600 -volt insulation, THHN/THWN. Use XHHW insulation for all isolated power circuits. C. Feeders and Branch Circuits 10 AWG and smaller: 98 percent conductivity copper conductor, 600 -volt insulation, THHN/THWN solid conductor. Use XHHW insulation for all isolated power circuits. D. Control Circuits: 98 percent conductivity copper, stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THHN, THWN. E. Color Coding: 1. Branch Circuit and Feeders: 280Y/120 Volts 480Y/277 Volts 120/240 Volts Phase A Black Yellow Black Phase B Red Brown Red Phase C Blue Orange ---- Neutral White with tracer Gray with tracer White with tracer Ground Green Green Green 2. The above colors shall be used unless requirements of code require different colors. When connecting to existing circuits, existing color coding shall be utilized. The neutral tracer color shall match the phase conductor color that it is associated with. Lighting circuits with shared grounding conductor are not required to have tracer colors on the wire. Secondary conductors from isolation transformers shall be: Conductor 1 -orange and conductor 2 -brown. 3. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be identified by colored plastic tape that marches the circuit phase color at all visible points when colored insulation is unavailable. Colored tape shall be located and of such a quantity to readily indicate the conductor phase. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 2605 19-2 Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt SECTION 26 05 19 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT F. Type AC and MC Cable assemblies shall be permitted only with proper cable management via cable trays and with Owner's prior written approval. 2.04 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: 98 percent conductivity copper conductor, 600 -volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a PVC jacket. B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: 98 percent conductivity copper conductor; 300 -volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which cable, wire and connectors are to be installed and notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. General wiring methods: 1. Install electrical cable, wire and connectors as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC, and as required to ensure that products serve the intended functions. 2. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface. 3. Cables shall be selected on the basis of their purpose and UL listing. Generally, use Types THWN, XHHW and THNN in building interiors and other dry locations. Outdoors and in underground in raceways, use Type THWN or THHN. Conductors subject to abrasion, such as in lighting poles, shall be Type THWN or THHN. 4. No conductor smaller than No. 12 wire shall be used for branch circuit wiring. In the case of "homeruns" over 75 feet in length, no conductor smaller than a No. 10 wire shall be used. The tap conductor from the J -box in the ceiling to the receptacle may be No. 12. Each 120 -volt phase conductor shall have a neutral conductor of the same size. a. 480. Volt Branch Circuits: The voltage drop in the case of 277/480 volt circuits shall not exceed 1.0 percent at maximum load and 70.0 percent power factor. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2605 19-3 Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt SECTION 26 05 19 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT b. 120/208 Volt Branch Circuits: The voltage drop in the case of 120/208 volt circuits shall not exceed 2.0 percent at maximum load and 70.0 percent power factor. 5. Remote control wires shall be no smaller than No.12 AWG stranded copper conductors and shielded with drain. Control wires shall be run in separate conduits. Departures from the sizes so determined shall be made only in those cases in which the National Electrical Code requires the use of larger conductors. The sizes as determined from these tables shall be regarded as the acceptable minimum under all other circumstances. In no case, however, shall there be a voltage drop greater than that specified in any feeder or branch circuit. This voltage drop shall be based on the full load, 70 percent power factor, the total impedance drop with 60 -hertz alternating current and with the reactance drop in the respective metal conduits duly considered. The Contractor may, if Contractor deems it necessary or advisable, use larger sized conductors than those shown. Under no circumstances, however, shall the Contractor use any conductors sized in a manner which does not conform to the above-mentioned tables without having first secured the written approval of the Owner's duly authorized representative. D. Wiring Installation Raceways: 1. Wire and cable shall be pulled into clean dry conduit. 2. Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway. 3. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, when necessary; compound must not deteriorate conductor and insulation. No pulling compound shall be used when pulling isolated power circuits utilizing XHHW insulation. 4. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. Wires with damaged insulation shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 5. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway. 6. No more than three phase conductors shall be installed in same conduit. Line conductors shall not share the same conduit with load conductors. E. Wiring Connections and Terminations: 1. Splicing cable or wire is not allowed unless it is explicitly designed by the Engineer, or for equipment connection per equipment manufacturer's recommendation. Where splices are to be implemented, approval of the Owner must be obtained before installation is made. Provide electrical boxes where splices are made. 2. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. 3. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. F. Field Quality Control: 1. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. 2. Perform continuity test on all conductors. Verify proper phasing connections and phase rotation, where applicable. 3. Conductors in vertical conduits or raceways shall be supported in the manner set forth in the appropriate section of the latest revision of the National Electrical Code. Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuits other than series wiring of fixtures. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2605 19-4 Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt SECTION 26 05 19 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS, 600 VOLT 4. Conductors may be run parallel on sizes 1/0 to 500 kcmil inclusive provided all parallel conductors are the same size manufacturer, length and type of insulation. Except as otherwise shown on Drawings, no more than three (3) conductors may be run in parallel, and they shall be so arranged and terminated as to ensure equal division of the total current between all conductors involved. Where parallel connection is contemplated, approval of the Owner must be obtained before installation is made. 3.03 TESTING A. Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall snake voltage, insulation and load tests, necessary to demonstrate to the Owner the satisfactory installation and proper performance of all feeder circuits. B. Test feeder conductors to determine the conductors are clear of faults, high resistance connections and megger test same at 600 volts DC. Test results below 30 megaohms shall be cause for rejection of the wiring installation. Replace and retest all such rejected conductors. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2605 19-5 Cable, Wire and Connectors, 600 Volt SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding counterpoise loop. Electrical systems that are grounded shall be connected to earth in a manner that will limit the voltage imposed by lightning, line surges, or unintentional contact with higher -voltage lines and that will stabilize the voltage to earth during normal operations. Provide a completely grounded system in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC. B. Metal water piping system(s) installed in or attached to a building or structure shall be bonded to the service equipment enclosure, the grounded conductor at the service. Where installed in or attached to a building or structure, a metal piping system(s), including gas piping, that is likely to become energized shall be bonded to the service equipment enclosure, the grounded conductor at the service. The bonding jumper(s) shall be sized in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC. C. Ground each separately -derived system neutral to separate ground buses that are installed in nearest electrical rooms. Transformers, UPS systems, power conditioners, inverters, or other power supplies that are separately derived systems. Standby or emergency generators are separately derived systems if the neutral is bonded to the generator frame and if there is no direct connection of the generator neutral conductor to the service neutral conductor. D. Concrete reinforcing bars shall be permitted for grounding. Connect the structural metal frame to the reinforcing bars of concrete -encased electrode. Concrete -encased electrodes of existing buildings or structures shall not be required to be part of the grounding electrode system where the steel reinforcing bars or rods are not accessible for use without disturbing the concrete. E. Provide communications system -grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). Bond together the communications system grounding. F. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, metal cable trays, auxiliary gutters, meter fittings, boxes, cable armor, cable sheath, ground bus in electrical rooms, metal frame of the building or structure, ground ring, lightning down lead conductor, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and metallic plumbing systems. G. The, major components of the Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding infrastructure are as follows: 1. The Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). 2. The Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260526-1 Grounding SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING 3. The Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB). 4. The Telecommunications Bonding Conductor (TBC). 5. Grounding Equalizer (GE). 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All design, materials, installation and testing pertaining to grounding and bonding system shall comply with the latest edition of applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ANSI/IEEE Standard 142 - Recommended Practices for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 3. IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System. 4. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment (IEEE Emerald Book). 5. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 6. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. 7. LPI (Lightning Protection Institute) 175- Standard of Practice for the Design - Installation - Inspection of Lightning Protection Systems. 8. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components. 9. UL 96A - Standard for Safety Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. 10. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), Latest Edition. 11. ANSI J -STD -607-A — Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. 12. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 13. UL 497 - Protectors for Paired -Conductor Communications Circuits. 14. UL 497A - Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits. 15. UL 497B - Protectors for Data Communications and Fire -Alarm Circuits. 16. UL 1449 - Standard for Safety Surge Protective Devices. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Grounding system components shall be as required to comply with the design and construction of the system indicated. Components shall be as indicated in manufacturer's submittal data. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260526-2 Grounding SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING B. Ground Conductors: 1. Materials: a. Provide 600 -volt insulated conductors having a green -colored insulation for grounding electrode and equipment grounding conductors. Use stranded conductors. b. Conduit grounding conductors shall be insulated copper conductor, green in color to size #6 AWG. Insulated conductors larger than #6 AWG shall be same as phase conductors but identified with green tape at each accessible opening or location in raceway. C. Provide bare conductors for bonding jumpers. d. Cable tray grounding conductors shall be a minimum of 1/0 bare copper conductors. C. Connections: 1. Materials: a. Unless otherwise noted, for below -grade connections provide exothermic welded type. b. For above -grade connections provide mechanical bolted -type connections utilizing high conductive copper alloy or bronze lugs or clamps. C. Where required, provide plated connectors that will not cause electrolytic action between the conductor and the connector. D. Grounding clips shall be O -Z Gedney, Steel City (Thomas & Betts) Type G. E. Grounding Electrodes: 1. Grounding electrodes shall not be smaller than 3/ -inch diameter, with minimum length ten (10) feet. 2. Grounding electrodes shall be copper -clad steel for corrosion protection. F. Grounding Busbar: 1. Where a field -provided ground bus or ground bar is required, use round -edge copper bar with 98 percent International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS) conductivity. 2. Size the bus for not less than 25 percent of the cross-sectional areas of the related feeder. A minimum size of '/-inch thick by 2 -inch depth by 6 -inch length (minimum) is required. a. The ground bar shall be a predrilled copper busbar provided with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors to be used. b. The ground bar shall be tin-plated for reduced contact resistance. C. The ground bar shall be insulated from its support. A minimum of 2 inches separation is required. Mount the grounding busbars on insulated standoffs to ensure isolation from ground potential or stray potentials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installations shall be.in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260526-3 Grounding SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING C. Install ground system as indicated, in accordance with the applicable requirements of the NEC. Coordinate installation of grounding and lightning protection system components with structural and civil Drawings and placement of building structure. D. Install grounding conductors continuous, without splice or connection, between equipment and grounding electrodes. E. Size: When grounding and bonding conductors are not sized on Drawings, size the grounding conductors in accordance with NEC. Size bonding jumper so that minimum cross-sectional area is greater than or equal to that of the equivalent grounding conductor as determined from NEC. F. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. G. Exothermic welding shall be utilized for ground connections where they are concealed, or inaccessible. H. Strap grounding clamps shall not be used. A connection requiring bolting shall be made up with Monel metal bolts, washers and nuts. Connections shall be made only after surfaces have been cleaned, or ground to expose virgin metal. I. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use effectively grounded metal frame of the building. J. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company's metering equipment in accordance with Utility Company's requirements. K. Conduit and raceway systems shall not be considered a ground path. Provide an internal insulated grounding conductor in all conduits and raceways. Size grounding conductors in accordance with the NEC. Where grounding conductor sizes are shown in excess of code requirements, provide conductor sizes as indicated. L. In feeder and branch circuits, provide a separate, green, insulated equipment -grounding conductor with the circuit conductors. Terminate each end of the grounding conductor on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. M. Ground each outlet by the use of an approved grounding clip attached to the junction box in such a position to be readily inspected on removal of the cover plate, or by the use of an approved grounding yoke type receptacle. N. Install an insulated grounding conductor internally to all flexible metal conduits. All flexible metal conduit containing power circuits shall utilize grounding bushings. The grounding bushing shall contain a bonding jumper and shall be terminated at the equipment ground bus. The grounding conductor shall terminate at the equipment ground bus. Install external ground wire on liquid tight flexible metal conduit. Provide suitable grounding bushing at each end of liquid tight flexible metal conduit at transformers. External ground wire shall be in addition to grounding conductors installed internal to raceway system. O. Where accessible, conductor connections shall be made by means of solder -less connectors such as serrated bolted clamps or split bolt and nut type connectors. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260526-4 Grounding SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING P. Measure ground resistance from neutral connection at service entrance to ground reference point using suitable grounding testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 5 OHMS. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. System Neutral: Where a system neutral is used, bond the system neutral to the grounding electrode system in accordance with NEC. Ground the system neutral only at the point of service and isolate it from ground at all other points in the system. B. Separately Derived Systems: Ground neutrals of separately derived systems such as generators, transformers, etc., in accordance with NEC. C. The neutral of each transformer shall be bonded to system ground at one point only. This point shall be ahead of the first secondary protective device. D. Size: Size the system grounding electrode conductors to comply with NEC. E. Connect grounding electrode conductor pigtails at each grounding electrode to building structural steel, as indicated. F. Connect main grounding electrode conductor pigtails to power system neutral, as indicated on Drawings. G. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUND A. Raceway Systems and Equipment Enclosures: 1. Ground cabinets, junction boxes, outlet boxes, motors, controllers, raceways, fittings, switchgear, transformer enclosures, other electrical equipment and metallic enclosures. Ground equipment and enclosures to the continuous - grounded metallic raceway system in addition to any other specific grounding shown. 2. Provide bonding jumpers and ground wire throughout to ensure electrical continuity of the grounding system, 3. Provide grounding -type insulated bushings for metal conduits 1-1/2 inches and larger terminating in equipment enclosures containing a ground bus and connect the bushing to the ground bus. 4. Provide a green insulated equipment -grounding conductor for each feeder and branch circuit. B. Taps and Connections: Make grounding (earth) conductor approximately 2 inches longer than the ungrounded (phase) conductors at both ends. 3.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING INFRASTRUCTURE A. Isolated (Single Point) Ground: 1. Purpose: a. An isolated single point grounding system is employed for installations utilizing sensitive electronic, data processing or communications equipment. b. This single ground bus is not connected in electrical loops, but in a radial configuration between the various electronic equipment locations. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 260526-5 Grounding SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING C. The single ground bus is then connected to the building electrical service equipment ground. This grounding arrangement thus provides only a single path to ground for any circulating ground currents, which will minimize electromagnetic interference with sensitive electronic equipment. 2. Equipment Requiring Isolated Grounding: Equipment typically grounded to the isolated single point grounding system includes communications and coaxial cable shields, telephone termination block earth grounds, radio transmitter chassis grounds, and electronic equipment signal grounds which are isolated from the equipment chassis. 3. Grounding Conductors: a. Conductors from individual equipment and cable shields shall be a minimum No. 6 AWG, type THW stranded copper with green insulation. The conductor from each local isolated ground bus to the master isolated ground bus shall be a minimum of No. 2/0 AWG, type THW stranded copper with green insulation. The conductor from the master isolated ground bus to the facility ground rod array shall be a minimum of No. 2/0 AWG, type THW stranded copper with green insulation. Grounding cable with aluminum conductors is not acceptable. b. Conductors shall be routed to provide the minimum possible number of cable bends. The radius of any cable bend shall be not less than 8 inches, and the included angle of any bend shall be a minimum of 90 degrees. 4. Grounding Connectors: a. Connections from individual equipment and cable shields shall use crimp - type connectors of copper or tinned copper construction. Individual equipment connections to local isolated ground buses shall use copper alloy or bronze machine bolts and lock washers. b. No. 2/0 cable connections from local isolated ground buses to the mater ground bus shall utilize an exothermic weld or brazing process. No. 2/0 cable connections from the master ground bus to the facility ground rod array shall utilize an exothermic weld or brazing process. C. Paint -piercing grounding washers shall be used. d. Connectors utilizing aluminum or steel alloys are not acceptable. 5. Connections to Isolated Grounding Systems: Use insulated equipment grounding conductor and connect only to service grounding electrode. Where isolated grounding system is associated with a separately derived system, bond isolated grounding conductor to system neutral at source of separately derived system in accordance with NEC. B. General: 1. All bonding conductors and connectors shall be listed for the purpose intended and approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 2. All bonding conductors shall be green -insulated copper conductor. The minimum bonding conductor size shall be a No. 6 AWG. Leave a minimum of 10 feet slack conductor at termination board. 3. Route ground conductors to provide the shortest, most direct path from point to point. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 260526-6 Grounding SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING 4. Bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 3 feet in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit with a conductor sized as a No. 6 AWG, minimum (this makes the conduit a parallel path with the cable). 5. A continuous ground path shall be provided in all telecommunications raceways. Grounded cable trays shall be considered continuous ground path. 6. At each Telecommunications Room (TR) all equipment and raceways shall be bonded to the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB). 7. Any grounding or bonding conductor that is run through a metallic conduit shall be bonded to the conduit. 8. Gas pipes shall not be used as a grounding electrode. C. Telecommunications Room (TR) Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB): 1. The TGB is the grounding connection point for telecommunications systems and equipment in the location served by that TR or Equipment Room (ER). Each TR and ER shall contain a TGB and for this project will have one located in the server room. Multiple TGBs may be installed within the same TR or ER to aid in minimizing bonding conductor lengths and terminating space. In all cases, multiple TGBs within the same ER shall be bonded together with a conductor the same size as the TBB. 2. The TGB shall have minimum dimensions of'/ -inch thick x 2 -inch wide and 10 - inch in length with 7 attachment points (one row). The length may need to be adjusted longer to meet the application requirements with consideration of future growth. The busbar shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment. 3. The TGB shall be a predrilled copper bulbar provided with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors to be used. The hole pattern for attaching grounding lugs shall meet the requirements of ANSI -J -STD — 607-A and shall accept 4 two -hole grounding lugs with 5/8" hole centers and 3 two -hole lugs with 1" hole centers. The bulbar shall include wall -mount stand-off brackets, assembly screws and insulators creating a 4" standoff from the wall. 4. All metallic raceways for telecommunications cabling located within TR shall be bonded to the TGB. However, for metallic raceways containing grounding conductors where the raceway is bonded to the ground conductor, no additional bonding to the TGB is required. 5. In buildings where the backbone telecommunications cabling incorporates a shield or metallic member, this shield or metallic member shall be bonded to the TGB where the cables are terminated or where pairs are broken out. 6. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within or external to the TR; each TGB shall be bonded to the vertical steel metal frame. When practicable because of shorter distances and other considerations, and where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, TGBs may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. 7. There shall be a Telecommunications Bonding Conductor from the TGB to the Main Grounding Electrode Conductor. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260526-7 Grounding SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING Bonding conductor sizing. The following table applies to Telecommunications Bonding Conductor (TBC). Bonding Conductor Length (ft.) Bonding Conductor Size (AWG) Less than 13 6 14-20 4 21-26 3 27-33 2 34-41 1 42-52 1/0 53-66 2/0 Greater than 66 3/0 D. Testing Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure 1. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. 2. Measure ground resistance from longest grounding path to TGB in TR or ER. Resistance shall not exceed 0.1 ohms. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260526-8 Grounding SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements for raceways, conduits and boxes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc -Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 4. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. 5. ANSFUL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit. 6. ANSFUL 5 - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings. 7. ANSFUL 360 - Liquid -tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 8. ANSFUL 467 - Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 9. ANSFUL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing. 10. ANSFUL 870 - Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. 11. ANSFUL 884 - Underfloor Raceways and Fittings. 12. NEMA VE I - Metallic Cable Tray Systems. 13. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 14. UL - Rigid Metal Conduit. 15. ANSFUL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's product data for raceways, conduits, outlet boxes, and wireways. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2605 33 -1 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings of the complete metal surface raceway system. 2. Shop Drawings shall include sizes and lengths of raceways as verified with laboratory furniture Shop Drawings, inside corners, outside corners, end caps, raceway cover spacing, grounding, branch circuiting and wiring including locations of service entrances, receptacle types and manufacturers, receptacle spacing, and receptacle labeling with proper voltage, phase, circuit and panelboard designations as indicated on the Drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 WIREWAYS AND TERMINAL BOXES A. Wireways and terminal boxes shall be of steel construction, oil -tight with knockouts. B. Size shall be minimum 4 x 4 inches or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Cover shall be hinged. D. Fittings shall be so constructed to continue the" lay in" feature throughout the entire installation. E. Provide all sheet metal parts with a rust -inhibiting phosphatizing primer coating and finished in gray enamel. All hardware shall be cadmium plated to prevent corrosion. F. Inside Terminal Boxes: Provide 25 -ampere, 300 -volt industrial rated terminal blocks with marking strip. Mark strip with black ink identifying circuit connection. Provide nameplate on exterior of each terminal box indicating panelboard served. 2.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing: Allied Tube & Conduit or equal. 2. Fittings: Appleton Electric, Midwest Electric Products or O-Z/Gedney. 3. Expansion Fittings: O-Z/Gedney Type DX, Crouse -Hinds Type XC, or equal by Midwest Electric Products or Appleton Electric. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: Anaconda Sealtite, Type UA. B. Application: 1. Conduit and fittings for all electrical systems on this Project shall include the following: a. Service entrance. b. Electrical power and lighting feeders. C. Electrical power and lighting circuits. d. Building automation systems (BAS). e. Fire alarm and signaling systems. f. CCTV rough -in system. g. Telecommunications rough -in system (minimum 6 -inch bending radius for telecommunications conduits). IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-2 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES h. Security systems. i. Other electrical systems, as identified on the Drawings. C. For each electrical wireway system indicated, provide a complete assembly of conduit, tubing or duct with fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, connectors, nipples, couplings, locknuts, bushings, expansion fittings, and other components and accessories as needed to form a complete system of the type indicated. D. Conduit fittings shall be designed and approved for the specific use intended. Conduit fittings, including flexible, shall have insulated throats or bushings. Rigid conduits shall have insulated bushings, unless grounding bushings are required by NEC Article 250-28. Grounding bushings shall have insulated throats. E. Rigid metal conduit shall be hot -dipped galvanized. Fittings shall be threaded type. F. Electrical metallic tubing shall be galvanized. Fittings shall be all steel set screw deep socket UL marked and approved for the application. Compression fittings uses shall be in, not limited to, wet damp and environmental areas type. G. Flexible metal conduit and fittings shall be zinc -coated steel. H. Liquid -tight flexible conduit and fittings shall consist of single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked, double -wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside, forming smooth internal wiring channel with liquid -tight covering of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). I. Crimp type fittings are not acceptable. J. Raceways such as electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) and liquid -tight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) are not acceptable for use on any Project. 2.04 WALL AND CEILING OUTLET BOXES A. Manufacturers: Appleton Electric, RACO-Hubbell, Thomas & Betts - Steel City, Cooper Crouse -Hinds. B. Galvanized steel interior outlet wiring boxes of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. Minimum switchbox depth shall be 2 inches. Outlet boxes for electrical power shall be 2-1/8 inches deep. Outlet boxes for communication (voice and data) shall be minimum 3-1/2 inches deep. 1. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes. 2. Accessories shall be compatible with outlet boxes being used and shall meet requirements of individual situations. C. Corrosion -resistant cast -metal weatherproof exterior outlet wiring boxes of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal faceplate with spring -hinged waterproof cap and corrosion -proof fasteners. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-3 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES D. Outlet boxes in poured concrete shall be plenum type without holes and with reset knockouts. Where extension rings are used to offset conduit between wall reinforcing steel, joint between extension ring and box shall be sealed to prevent concrete from entering box during pour. 2.05 FLOOR BOXES A. Manufacturers: RACO-Hubbell, Wiremold, FSR. B. Boxes shall be NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable, minimum 1-1/2 inch depth for electrical power only; 4-1/2 inch minimum depth for communication. C. Boxes shall conform to regulatory requirements for concrete -tight floor boxes. D. Service fittings shall be as specified on Drawings. E. Poke-thru box fittings shall maintain a minimum two-hour fire rating. 2.06 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Boxes shall be galvanized sheet metal with screw -on cover and welded seams, stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. B. Boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension shall be panelboard code gauge galvanized steel with hinged cover. C. Boxes shall be sized In accordance with NEC. 2.07 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS A. Manufacturers: The Wiremold Company 3000 or 4000 Single -Channel System. Systems of other manufacturers may be considered equal if they meet all performance standards as specified herein. Wiremold 4000 shall be used for communication applications. B. Raceway base and cover sections shall be UL Listed, manufactured of cold rolled steel, and finished in gray enamel. 1. Raceway shall be a two-piece design with a metal base and a snap -on metal cover. C. Furnish with all entrance fittings, elbows, end caps, covers, and device brackets and plates as indicated on the Drawings for a complete system. 1. Fittings shall be finished in enamel to match the raceway. 2. Fittings shall be supplied with a base where applicable to eliminate mitering. D. Provide couplings, elbows, connectors, boxes, extension rings and outlet covers specifically designed for use with surface raceway system. E. Provide factory fittings for vertical raceway riser connection to horizontal raceway runs. Such directional change fittings must accommodate required radius flex for Category 6a communication cable under both load and no load conditions. F. All internal exposed surfaces within the raceway, including joints and covers shall be free of nicks, cuts, sharp edges, and other imperfections. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-4 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES G. Grommets shall be used to accommodate building automation system cabling to critical equipment or as noted on Drawings. H. Multi -Outlet Assembly Devices: 1. Provide commercial grade, duplex receptacles mounted 12 inches on center unless noted otherwise. Unless otherwise noted, alternate circuits between receptacles. 2. Receptacles serving emergency circuits shall be red in color. 3. Isolated ground receptacles shall be orange in color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Concrete metal hit anchor and fastener is an unacceptable fastening system for concrete, brick and block. D. Where raceways penetrate fire -rated floors, sleeve and seal opening around raceway with UL listed firestop equal to fire rating of floor. Conduit sleeves shall be two (2) trade sizes larger for proper sealing. E. Support all conduits and J -boxes above ceilings from the building structure. All J -boxes being installed above suspended ceilings must have a minimum of 12 -inch clearance from the top of the ceiling grid except where approved by the Owner in writing prior to installation. F. All openings through walls, roof, etc., shall be sleeved. G. No raceways, metallic or non-metallic, flexible or rigid, shall be installed in any floor slab elevated above slab on grade. The only exception may be for the lighting grid in the parking deck areas of a parking garage. H. Bushings and throats shall be installed for fittings, raceways, boxes or other enclosures prior to installing cables and wiring systems. I. Provide raceway support in intervals not exceeding the maximum spacing per NEC. 3.02 INSTALLATION - CONDUIT A. Install raceway and conduit system from point of origin in outlets shown, complete with offsets, pull boxes, junction boxes and fittings. B. Installation of all new conduits must be minimum 12 inches from ceiling grid except where approved by Owner. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-5 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES C. No raceway shall be run horizontally inside of walls or partitions. Exceptions: building perimeter walls under windows, clerestory panel walls, and where structural conditions do not allow vertical access to tops of walls. The contractor shall obtain written approval from the Owner for exceptions prior to installation. D. Install rigid wall hot -dipped galvanized steel conduit. Minimum size shall be Y4 -inch unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Minimum size for communication shall be 1 -inch. The following exceptions are permitted: 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): In sizes Y4 -inch up to and including 4 inches, may be used inside dry locations where not subject to mechanical damage. EMT shall be used in air-conditioned spaces, such as accessible ceilings, and dry wall partitions. EMT shall not be used outside, in concrete, underground, in underfloor spaces, in masonry walls and in locations likely to be damp. EMT shall not be used for circuits with system voltage over 480 volts. 2. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit: a. Install liquid -tight flexible metal conduit for connections to rotating, vibrating, moving or movable equipment, including dry -type transformers. Install internal ground wire on flexible conduit with grounding bushings. b. Maximum length shall be four (4) feet, minimum two (2) feet; minimum size shall be 1/2 -inch. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: a. Where required, install standard flexible steel metal conduit (not liquid - tight) with internal ground wire, in spaces above ceilings. b. Install flexible conduit connection such that vibrations are not transmitted to adjoining conduit or building structure. Maximum length shall be four (4) feet, minimum two (2) feet; minimum size shall be 1/2 -inch. C. Communication flexible conduit size in walls shall be minimum 1 -inch. d. Flexible conduit for lay -in fixtures may be 3/8 -inch factory whip assemblies (6 feet maximum). e. Flexible conduit for receptacles in office applications can be used in the walls as long as the flexible conduit length does not exceed 12 feet and the flexible conduit run is not horizontal. Where fished in existing walls, the length shall not exceed 12 feet. 4. PVC Conduit: a. Utilize PVC conduit for underground outdoor installations, minimum size 1 -inch. All PVC conduit runs shall have PVC coated rigid steel stub outs from the ground, including the last 90 degree bend. b. All underground PVC conduit shall be installed in concrete with 12 -inch x 12 -inch x 3 -inch concrete markers at every 100 feet and at every turn in direction. C. All underground conduits shall be installed with "DANGER — BURIED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT" yellow flagging tape 6 -inches above conduit. Continuous above conduit. IRC Admin Complex - North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-6 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES E. Multiple Conduit Installation: 1. Install two (2) or more conduits parallel to or at 90 degrees to the structure. Support on metal framing constructed trapeze hangers supported on minimum 3/8 - inch diameter all -thread rod attached to the structure with coupling nuts and expansion bolts or beam clamps. Conduit straps or other devices specifically designed for the purpose shall be used to secure conduits to the metal framing. Conduits shall only be installed on the top surface of the metal framing. Wire ties and hanger wires are not permitted. Hanger rods shall not extend more then 1 -inch past trapeze hanger. 2. Where parallel conduits are strapped, fastened or anchored, the devices used shall be of the same type and installed on the same plane whether vertical or horizontal. 3. Conduit hangers from drop rod (like Caddy B 18 Series) are acceptable only upon prior written approval from the Owner. F. Single Conduit Installation: 1. Install single conduits parallel to or at 90 degrees to the structure and suspended from the structure on all thread rods (1/4 -inch minimum) or clamped and/or clipped to the structure with manufactured clamps/clips. When single conduits are suspended from all thread rods, conduit clamps with bolts and nuts shall be used. Through partition wall penetration shall not be construed as a means of conduit support. Wire ties and hanger wires are not permitted. No powder actuated, compressed air, propane or similar powered "shot" anchor systems shall be installed under any circumstance. Wire ties and hanger wires are not permitted. Single conduits may be secured as follows: a. Wood screws on wood. b. Toggle bolts on hollow masonry. C. Bolts and expansion anchors in concrete or brick. d. Machine screws, threaded rods and clamps on steel. e. Conduit clips on steel joists. f. Plastic anchors are not allowed. g. Conduit hangers from drop rod (like Caddy B18 Series) are acceptable only upon prior written approval from the Owner. G. Fittings shall be approved for grounding purposes or shall be jumpered with a copper grounding conductor of appropriate ampacity. Leave termination of such jumpers exposed. Conduit and wireway systems shall not serve as branch circuit grounding conductors. H. Install expansion fittings in metal conduit as follows: 1. Conduit Crossing Building Expansion Joints: a. EMT all sizes. b. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) all sizes. 2. Conduits entering environmental rooms and other locations subject to thermal expansion and as required by NEC. 3. Provide conduit expansion fitting with an integral bonding braid, as in Crouse - Hinds Type XC. 4. Expansion fittings are not required where offsets, expansion loops, or flexible conduit are placed in conduit runs. I. Install conduit concealed in walls, partitions and above ceilings. Install exposed in overhead conduit (at structure) of mechanical rooms and in other similar rooms where ceilings are not provided. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-7 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. K. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. L. Install pull wires in empty conduits. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-1b tensile strength. Jetline 232 or equal by Greenlee. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. M. Cap ends of spare conduits and extend into space above accessible ceiling a minimum of 18 inches. Label conduit as spare. N. Do not daisy chain conduit installations in or on walls, provide a single conduit wall drop per device. 3.03 INSTALLATION - WIREWAYS AND TERMINAL BOXES A. Bolt wireways and terminal boxes to steel channels fastened to the wall or in self- supporting structure. Install level. B. Gasket each joint in oil -tight wireway. C. Mount rain -tight wireway in horizontal position only. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BOXES A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for wire pulling, equipment connection, and code compliance. Electrical box locations shown on Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of outlets prior to rough in. Locate and install boxes to allow access and clearances per NEC. B. J -boxes shall be provided for branch circuits in excess of 100 feet. C. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal strap for supporting outlet boxes. Accessories shall be compatible with outlet boxes being used and shall meet requirements of individual situations. D. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6 -inch separation. Provide minimum 24 -inch horizontal separation in acoustic -rated walls. E. Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being mounted, or solidly imbed boxes in concrete or masonry. Boxes shall not be permitted to move laterally. Boxes shall be secured between two studs. Boxes connected to one stud are not permitted. F. Provide knockout plugs for unused openings. G. Use multiple -gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. H. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-8 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES I. Outlet boxes in plaster partitions shall be "shallow -type" set flush in wall so there is at least 5/8 -inch plaster covering back of box. Switch boxes shall not be used as junction boxes. K. Typical outlet box centerline heights shall be as listed in the following table. Coordinate outlet heights with Architectural Drawings, millwork details, casework details and equipment installation. Where discrepancies occur, ask for an interpretation from the Architect/Engineer and Owner. Function Receptacles Telecommunications Offices 18 -inches 18 -inches Corridors 18 -inches 48 -inches Exam Rooms 48 or 18 -inches 48 or 18 -inches Millwork Coordinate with millwork Coordinate with millwork Casework Coordinate with millwork Coordinate with millwork Headwalls Refer to Architectural Drawings Refer to Architectural Drawings Mechanical/Electrical Equipment Rooms 48 -inches 48 -inches Laboratories Coordinate with casework Coordinate with casework L. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaires, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. M. Outlet boxes supporting fixtures shall be securely anchored in place in an approved manner. Support outlet boxes and fixtures in acoustic ceiling areas from building structures with separate supports, not from acoustic ceiling or ceiling tile wire. Lighting fixture outlets shall be coordinated with mechanical and architectural equipment and elements to eliminate conflicts and to provide a workable neat installation. N. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. O. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. Combination box/conduit hangers from drop rod (like Caddy B18 Series) are acceptable only upon prior written approval from the Owner. P. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. Set floor boxes level, and adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material. 3.05 INSTALLATION - SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS A. All raceway systems shall be installed complete, including insulating bushings and inserts where required by manufacturer's installation sheets. All unused raceway openings shall be closed. B. Install raceways above ceilings, exposed, on walls and casework parallel to or at right angles to structure and casework. Securely support raceway at intervals not exceeding 10 feet or in an accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 260533-9 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, CONDUITS, AND BOXES C. The number of conductors installed in any raceway shall not be greater than the number for which the raceway is approved. D. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components to provide a continuous grounding path by means of separate insulated code -size grounding conductors. 1. Each equipment grounding conductor in a conduit homerun entering the raceway shall be connected to the ground tenninals of the receptacles. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260533-10 Raceways, Conduits, and Boxes SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section outlines the requirements for the lighting equipment control devices. 1.02 1.03 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1. Provide shop drawings with product data including wiring diagrams, electrical ratings, construction details and materials. 2. Occupancy sensor layout drawings. REFERENCES 1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. WD 7: Occupancy Motion Sensors Standard b. National Electrical Code (NEC) C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) d. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2013: Comply with requirements for interior and exterior lighting control. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Section 26 5100: Interior Lighting PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS a. The lighting control system shall consist of low voltage relay control panels with 64 programmable switch inputs and shall offer up to 32 control relays. b. Each low voltage lighting control panel shall be microprocessor controlled. Programming shall be accomplished through either the RS -232 port or through the network connection employing the Keeper Enterprise software or with an integral 4 x 16 — 64 -character self -prompting LCD display and programming keypad. C. Programmable intelligence shall include Time -Of -Day control, 32 holiday dates, warn occupants of an impending off, timed inputs, preset control, auto daylight savings, astronomical clock w/offsets, and local control, digital switches and network overrides. 1) TOD 64 Time-Of-Day/holiday schedules for 365 -day programming 2) Holidays 32 holiday dates 3) Warn Off Flash lights and provide an extra 1 second to 99 minutes of illumination 4) Preset Pre-programmed switch patterns 5) Timed Inputs Switch input timers 1-999 minutes 6) Timed Overrides Timed override 1-999 minutes, resumes to normal schedule 7) Local Control From keypad & LCD display or local switch 8) Astronomical ClockLongitude and latitude input with sunset -sunrise offsets to customize outdoor lighting 9) Auto Daylight Savings Adjust. Automatically adjusts the clock at the appropriate dates, selectable 10) Priorities Establishes a hierarchy for inputs and network control commands IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260923-1 Lighting Control Devices SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 11) Masking Provides permission orientation to switch inputs and network commands thereby ensuring building lighting control integrity. 12) Soft -Linking Group linking for rapid programming 13) Global Linking each panel shall provide 64 addressable groups for network linking of control commands d. Relays may be designated as either normally open or normally closed from the software. Relay status shall not only disclose commanded relay status but next scheduled state to occur. e. Each control panel shall provide a Warn Off (flash the lights) to inform the occupants of an impending Off command. The Warn Off command shall provide an adjustable time duration of 1 second to 99 extra minutes. The occupants may exit the premises with adequate lighting or cancel the Warn Off by overriding the lighting zone. This option occurs with all Off commands except local overrides. f. The controller shall permit lighting to be overridden On for afterhours use or cleaning. The controller shall provide optional switch timer assignments or timed overrides. The override choices for various relays shall provide special event occurrences and the controller shall return to the programmed state after the override event. Also, the controller shall provide priority and masking choices to customize the functions of switch inputs, thereby enabling switches to function differently at different times of the day to meet special facility operational requirements. These overrides shall be digital, or hard -wired inputs. g. Programming the controller shall be through the RS -232 port or through the network connection. Communication to the panel can be accomplished via, RS- 232, modem, or TCP/IP. Programming the controller shall also be accomplished through the integral keypad and LCD display. Descriptive information shall assist the user to employ the system with a programming manual. Lighting control systems that utilize removable programming keypads shall not be acceptable. h. Priorities and/or Masking shall be assigned to inputs, telephone override, and global commands to insure building integrity. Priorities enable or disable the inputs based on user actuation of overrides. Masks shall permit: On only, Off only and On & Off control for intelligent after hours utilization of the controlled facility based on Time -Of -Day scheduling in the controller. i. The lighting control system shall log all control events. The controller shall monitor all relay actuations, switch inputs and user intervention. Log reports shall be available for any duration of time the operator chooses through the Keeper Enterprise Software. Runtimes for each relay shall be available from the Keeper Enterprise Software. 2. HARDWARE FEATURES a. Diagnostic Aids 1) Each control panel shall incorporate diagnostic aids for confirmation of proper operation, or in case of failure these aids shall guide the individual in rapid troubleshooting of the system. The control panels shall employ both a backlit LCD and LED's to indicate: a) POWER (LED) b) SYSTEM OK (LED) C) ON/OFF STATUS of EACH RELAY (LED & LCD) d) SYSTEM CLOCK AND DATE (LCD) e) PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION (LCD) 2) Control systems that do not provide visual self-help diagnostics shall not be acceptable. a) Status Indication of Relays IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260923-2 Lighting Control Devices SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES b) The system shall provide visible status indication of all relays through the window of each control panel. The visual indication shall disclose On/Off status and relay number. Systems that do not provide relay status while the enclosure door is closed shall not be acceptable. b. Operator Interface 1) The control panel programming interface resides in firmware in the control panel. The programming interface shall consist of a circuit board mounted keypad and 4 line x 16 character LCD display. The integral keypad shall provide access to the main programming features. The keypad shall permit the user to manually command any or all relays individually. It shall also allow the user to link switch inputs and time schedules to relay outputs. Each panel shall control its own loads from internal memory. A control system that relies on a central control computer/processor or external time clocks shall not be permitted. Systems that utilize blocking diode technology for relay assignments shall not be acceptable. C. Overrides 1) The controller shall provide timers for each override. Each override timer shall be capable of 0-999 minutes. Software shall enable or disable overrides based on Priorities, Masks or Time of Day scheduling. 1. Digital Switch a) The lighting controller shall support digitally addressable LED annunciated switches. The maximum total number of digital switches that may exist on the lighting control network is 16,320. Each Subnet shall support 64 buttons. The digital switch network requires CAT 5 cable between switches. The digital switches shall control any relay group combination in the panel. Data communications status feedback for system checkout and troubleshooting (transmit and receive —> LED'S) shall be visible on both the controller and interface. b) The digital switch configuration system shall permit custom labeling for multiple button switch locations. The digital switch configuration shall be Decora® form and function. 2) Dry Contact Inputs a) The control system shall permit 32 dry contacts inputs for override purposes. Momentary 3 wire or 2 wire (toggle) inputs shall be supported. Maintained contacts shall be supported as 2 wire (SPST) inputs. Inputs shall be dry contacts (24 VDC @ 12 ma. internally supplied to the inputs). The 24 VDC power supply is provided with an auto-resettable fuse. Should an inappropriate electrical connection be made the design will protect the board and switches until the fault is removed. Any switch input shall be software linked to any number of relays for override control. The control panel shall have dry contact inputs on the logic board. Control systems that utilize separate accessories to allow for dry contact switches shall not be acceptable. Control systems that do not supply both digital switches and analog switches from the same controller shall not be permitted. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260923-3 Lighting Control Devices SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 3) Photocell Control a) The controller shall accept dry contact ambient light sensors. The controller shall provide power for the sensor thereby eliminating any external power supply. Sensors shall provide for outdoor and indoor applications and issue a command to the controller once the threshold is reached. The sensor shall provide user adjustable dead band control. d. Remote Overrides 1) The controller shall accept remote commands issued from other inputs. The controller shall provide this feature without the need to add extra equipment to the controller. Remote overrides can be issued from the Telephone Interface Module (TIM), Photocells, Motion Sensors, Digital or Dry Contact Switches. Lighting systems that need to add extra equipment to receive remote overrides are not acceptable. 3. Service Override & Priority Override a. The control panel shall provide a three -position master -service override for the control unit. The service override shall not be accessible from the exterior. Systems that provide a service override on the exterior of the controller shall not be acceptable. b. The master service override provides a single three -position switch with the option of All Off, Auto, and All On, respectively. This master switch shall operate all of the relays in the controller. This switch shall override and supersede all commands from the logic board when the switch is in the All On or All Off position. The master switch shall function to override all the relays should the logic board programming differ from the space function. C. The system shall remember the last command to the individual relays. Upon returning the master override switch to the Auto position, the relays shall return to the most recent command state. This will occur even if the last command happened during the master override condition. 4. Relays a. The Lighting Control Panel shall come standard with electrically held 20amp 120/277VAC relays. Relays must be specified Normally Open or Normally Closed. The relays shall be rated for 10 million mechanical operations. 5. Modular Design a. The control system shall employ all modular connectors to avoid repeat wiring in case of component failure. The system CPU board shall be on quick release hinge pins that shall permit an entire change out of the processor and input board in less than 1 minute. b. All connections for the switch inputs shall incorporate modular connectors. The relay board shall be modular and designed for rapid field replacement or upgrading. Systems that do not employ modular connectors shall not be acceptable. 6. Memory Back-up a. The system shall utilize a memory back-up device that is system integrated and shall be non -serviceable. The data in RAM shall be protected against power interruptions lasting as long as 7 days. The power interrupt protection circuit shall be entirely maintenance -free. 7. Multi -tapped Transformer a. The control panel shall incorporate the use of a multi -tapped transformer. The panel shall not require specification of voltage for each control location. The voltages of 120 & 277 VAC shall be available with each control panel. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260923-4 Lighting Control Devices SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 8. Lockable Enclosure a. Each control panel shall be enclosed in a lockable NEMA class 1 enclosure. The enclosure shall be manufactured out of 1/16" steel and shall provide pre -punched knockouts for efficient installation. 9. The low voltage controller shall exist in two sizes of relay enclosures. The enclosure maximum sizes shall be either 16 or 32 relays per cabinet. The 16 size will employ two relays cards and the 32 will utilize 4 relay cards. Relays shall be provided in groups of eight relays per card. B. EXECUTION 1. Equipment Installation and Documentation a. Installation 1) The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing contractor. The contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits, and override wiring. 2. Documentation a. The contractor shall provide accurate "as -built" drawings to the owner for correct programming and proper maintenance of the control system. The "as-builts" shall indicate the load controlled by each relay and the relay panel number. 3. Operation and Service Manuals a. The factory shall supply all operation and service manuals. 4. SYSTEM DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE a. Delivery 1) The contractor is responsible for complete installation of the entire system according to strict factory standards and requirements. The following items shall constitute factory standards and requirements: b. All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard procedures. C. An operational user program shall exist in the control system. The program shall execute and perform all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements. d. Demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage. e. Contractor shall provide a minimum of two training hours on the operation and use of the control system. Additional support services shall be negotiated between the contractor and the building owner or manager. 2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. The sensors shall be digital and have automatic adjustment of both the sensitivity and the time delay to suit the space into which they are installed. The sensors shall operate at 24VDC. They shall carry 5 -year warranty. Approved manufacturers for occupancy sensors shall be Watt Stopper, Leviton, Hubbell Building Automation, Acuity Sensor Switch, and Cooper Greengate Crestron, and are subject to the individual approved model list below. B. Ultrasonic occupancy sensors shall operate on ultrasonic (operating at >30kHz at ±0.005%) technologies. They can protrude maximum of 1.5 inches below ceiling. The sensors shall be digital and have automatic adjustment of both the sensitivity and the time delay to suit the space into which they are installed. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260923-5 Lighting Control Devices SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES C. Passive Infrared occupancy sensors shall operate on passive infrared technologies. They can protrude maximum of 1.5 inches below ceiling. The sensors shall be digital and have automatic adjustment of both the sensitivity and the time delay to suit the space into which they are installed. D. Dual technology occupancy sensors shall operate on both passive infrared and ultrasonic (operating at >30kHz at ±0.005%) or microphonic technologies. They can protrude maximum of 1.5 inches below ceiling. The sensors shall be digital and have automatic adjustment of both the sensitivity and the time delay to suit the space into which they are installed. E. Provide SPDT auxiliary HVAC dry contacts on all sensors. All sensors grouped together as one zone (as shown connected on the drawings) shall have a unified status output on the auxiliary contacts. This shall be accomplished either by: 1. providing all individual sensors with an isolated SPDT relay and paralleling the relay contacts of all sensors in the zone with specified occupancy sensor connecting cable, or 2. providing one or more control packs with an isolated SPDT relay for the zone F. Coordinate complete catalog numbers with options, colors, and accessories as required by the drawings and/or specifications to provide a complete, compliant, and working system. G. Occupancy sensor manufacturer or manufacturer representative shall confirm layout of all sensors and submit final coordinated layout drawings with manufacturer title block in submittal phase. 1. Sensor layouts shown on Architectural/Engineering drawings are for reference and are based on common practices with a majority of manufacturers' products. These bid drawings shall be used as a basis for design. It is the responsibility manufacturer or manufacturer representative to apply its particular products for a complete, operative, coordinated system. 2. No extra costs will be accepted to provide proper occupancy sensor coverage with the distributed architectural/engineering floor plans. 3. The certifying entity must indefinitely guarantee the sensor layout and application of models for the original construction shown on these drawings. Adjust models within the framework of the specification to meet all project requirements, including: a. Rapid detection of occupants entering the particular building space. b. Consistent detection of occupants that are in or passing through the particular building space, so as to eliminate "false -off' conditions. C. Consistent expiration of the selected time-out period once occupants have vacated the particular building space, so as to minimize energy waste and eliminate "false -on" conditions. 4. Secure project drawings from Architect -Engineer showing floor plan, reflected ceiling plan, lighting, mechanical diffusers, furnishings, or any other relevant and permanent features as required for complete sensor coordination. All costs for obtaining the CAD format drawings shall be included in Contractor's bid; refer to Section 01001, "Electronic Media Request Form" for costs and procedures. 5. The installing contractor shall be responsible for implementing the sensor design as shown on the manufacturer's layout drawings and reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. Any field installation issues or changes shall be coordinated with the manufacturer and Architect/Engineer. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260923-6 Lighting Control Devices SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES The Architect/Engineer or Owner reserves the right to reject the submittals or occupancy sensor installation at any time if the manufacturer, manufacturer's representative, or installing contractor fails to demonstrate proficiency or compliance with the intent of the project specifications. Required action by the Electrical Contractor may include selection of an alternate manufacturer, replacement of product/devices, or reinstallation of product/devices. G. Power Packs 1. The power pack shall contain a 20A 120/277VAC dual -voltage power supply and relay (coordinate voltage with load). The relay shall be rated for a full 20A for fluorescent ballast and incandescent loads. 2. The power pack shall employ minimum arc ("zero -crossing") 'switching technology to minimize the effect of transient switching current on the relay contacts. 3. The power pack shall have an SPDT auxiliary HVAC relay to provide occupied status to lighting control systems and/or BMS/ATC system, if the relay is provided in the pack in lieu of in each sensor unit. 4. The power pack shall be UL listed for installation inside ballast compartment and shall be able to be installed inside or outside of a standard junction box. H. Slave Relay Packs 1. The slave relay pack shall contain a 20A 120/277VAC relay (coordinate voltage with load). The relay shall be rated for a full 20A for fluorescent loads. 120V relays shall be rated for a minimum of 13A of incandescent load. 2. The slave relay shall be UL listed for installation inside ballast compartment and shall be able to be installed inside or outside of a standard junction box. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Lighting controls shall be installed in accordance with requirements, NEC and local codes. B. Provide adjustments and commissioning of occupancy sensor systems to ensure proper operation. For all occupancy sensors requiring non -automatic adjustment at startup, a factory qualified technician or representative of the manufacturer shall provide adjustments and commissioning. C. All commissioning shall be completed prior to the building's occupancy by the Owner. The contractor will be back charged the cost of time, materials, and energy incurred either by the Owner or the Architect/Engineer as a result of untimely commissioning services. D. For low -voltage control relays, electrical contractor is responsible for running line voltage wiring from each relay to the lighting circuits. Temperature Controls Contractor is to provide relays, run low voltage cabling, and make BMS terminations and programming. END OF SECTION 26 09 23 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 260923-7 Lighting Control Devices SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements for all panelboards including electronic grade panelboards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. NEMA AB 1 — Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit -Breaker Enclosures. 2. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 3. NEMA PB 1.1 — General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 4. Federal Specification W -P -115C — Panel, Power Distribution. 5. W -C-37513— Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service. 6. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code. 7. NFPA 75 — Protection of Information Technology Equipment. 8. NFPA 780 — Installation of Lightning Protection Systems. 9. Underwriters Laboratories UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non - Environmental Considerations. 10. UL 67 — Panelboards. 11. UL 489 - Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches and Circuit - Breaker Enclosures. 12. UL 943 - Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters. 13. UL 1283 — Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 14. UL 1449 - Surge Protective Devices. 15. The specified Electronic Grade Panelboards (EGP) shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with the following standards, in additional to requirements listed above: SCHEDULE 1 - a. American National Standards Institute and The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ANSI/IEEE C62.41 - Guide for Surge Voltages in Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits. SCHEDULE 2 - b. ANSI/IEEE C62.45 - Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits. SCHEDULE 3 - c. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 - Field Grounding and Shielding Application. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262416-1 Panelboards SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 16. The EGP shall be UL 1449 listed as a Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor, and UL 67 listed as a Panelboard. Surge protective device shall be both UL 67 listed and UL 1449 listed. The panel mounted suppression/filter system shall be UL 1449 listed as a Transient Voltage Surge Suppression System. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's product data for panelboards and circuit breakers. B. Record Documents: 1. Submit dimensioned Drawings showing size, circuit breaker and equipment arrangement and ratings, including but not limited to, voltage, single or three phase, main bus ampacity, circuit breaker short circuit ampere rating. 2. Equipment arrangement must include panelboard schedules. Panelboard schedules must be identical to the schedules in the project documents unless there is a technical reason for a deviation. Reasons for any deviation shall be included in the Submittal. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panelboards in factory -fabricated water-resistant wrapping. B. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and finish. C. Store in a clean, dry space and protected from the weather. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards: 1. General Electric Company. 2. Square D Company. 3. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. 4. Siemens. 2.03 PANELBOARD CONSTRUCTION A. Provide deadfront circuit breaker type panelboards as scheduled. B. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1 unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents. C. Provide cabinet front with full -height hinged door. Cabinet front shall be cleaned and finished with ANSI 49 or ANSI 61 gray enamel over a rust -inhibiting phosphatized coating. One door over the interior and an additional hinged dead front cover over interior and wireway (door -in -door). Full -height front cover hinged to box with concealed trim clamps. Provide flush door locks. D. Panelboard boxes (cans) shall be galvanized steel with all cut edges galvanized. Boxes shall not have pre -punched knockouts. All conduit knockouts shall be made in the field. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262416-2 Panelboards SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS E. Bus shall be tin-plated copper and braced for the maximum available fault current. Minimum bus ampacity shall be 100 amperes. F. Circuit breaker phase connector straps that connect the main bus to individual circuit breakers shall be tin-plated copper. G. Provide a 1 inch x'/ inch tin-plated copper ground bus in all panelboards. The ground bus shall be drilled to accept lugs for all grounding conductors. Mount ground bus on brackets to allow easy installation of bolts, nuts and lockwashers used to attach ground lugs. H. Provide a tin-plated copper neutral bus with the same ampacity rating as the phase bus. Neutral bus shall be isolated from the ground bus. I. All lugs for phase, neutral and ground buses shall be copper or tin-plated copper. J. Provide compression connectors where conductors terminate directly to bus. (MLO panels). K. Panelboard electrical ratings and configurations are indicated in the Contract Documents. L. Circuit directory shall be typewritten and mounted behind clear, heat -resistant plastic in a metal frame, tack welded on the inside of each panel door. List the minimum circuit breaker ampere interrupting capacity on the circuit directory. List minimum panel required interrupting capacity. 2.04 SWITCHING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Provide molded case circuit breakers of manufacturer's standard industrial construction, with integral inverse time delay thermal and instantaneous trip. Provide bolt -on circuit breakers for 208Y/120V, 120/240V panels and 480Y/277V panels. B. Circuit breakers shall be 125 VDC/240 AC rated for nominal 208Y/120V panels and 480Y/277V rated for nominal 480Y/277V panels. Minimum interrupting ratings shall be 10,000 amperes for 120/208V circuits and 14,000 amperes for 277/480V circuits, unless higher rating noted on the Contract Documents. C. Breakers 225 ampere through 400 ampere shall have continuously adjustable magnetic pick-ups of approximately five to ten times trip rating. D. Multi -pole breakers shall be two or three pole as specified. Handle ties are not permitted. E. Circuit breaker interrupting rating shall be greater than the available short circuit current listed for the panelboard in which the circuit breaker is installed. F. Panels shall be fully rated. All overcurrent devices shall be capable of interrupting the available fault current. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262416-3 Panelboards SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Anchor enclosures firmly to metal framing (Unistrut). Metal framing shall be structurally secured to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secured.. D. At the completion of the electrical system, check each phase of all panels under full load and arrange so that all phases shall carry the same load as near as possible. E. Stub 5 (five) empty % inch conduits to an accessible location above the ceiling out of each recessed panelboard. F. Install panelboards such that the center of the circuit breaker in the highest position will not be more than 6-1/2 feet above the floor. G. Temporary Doors: 1. Protect panelboard cabinets by a temporary door until the panelboard is energized. 2. Temporary doors shall be % inch thick plywood or equivalent rigid material. 3. Temporary doors shall be installed when the cabinet is installed and shall remain closed at all times except when work is being performed inside the panelboard. H. Permanent Doors and Trim: 1. Install permanent doors and trim immediately before panelboards are energized. 2. Maintain permanent doors and trim in factory condition after installation. 3. Doors shall remain closed at all times except when the panelboard is de -energized and work is taking place within the panelboard. I. Cabinets: 1. Maintain cabinet interiors "white glove" clean at all times. 2. Cabinet exteriors shall be maintained free of mud, spray -on insulation, paint spray and all substances not placed on the exterior surface by the panelboard manufacturer. J. Nameplates: 1. Label each panelboard with a black laminated rigid phenolic nameplate with white core, minimum 3/16 inch high engraved letters. 2. Identify panelboard name, voltage, amperage rating with main lugs only or main circuit breaker, and location of main feed. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262416-4 Panelboards SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS K. Panel cabinets shall not be used as raceways or pull boxes for adjacent equipment. Panel cabinets shall not contain wire splices. Panel wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner with wire conforming to the contours of the cabinet. Wire bundles shall be wire tied and installed in a manner to protect wire insulation from cover screws and other sharp edges. All phase conductors shall be labeled with a circuit number, readily visible to the panelboard front without removing the dead front cover. All neutral conductors shall be labeled with the circuit number, which they are associated with, within three inches of their termination point. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262416-5 Panelboards SECTION 26 25 13 LOW VOLTAGE BUSWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the furnishing and installation of low voltage feeder, plug-in, sprinkler -proof busways, fittings and associated auxiliary devices at the voltage and current ratings per design drawings primarily for indoor use. B. Existing low voltage busways are either to be extended and/or additional plug-in units are to be installed. The new material shall match existing type, capacity and manufacturer, and the installation method shall match existing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ANSI C37.20 - Switchgear Assemblies including Metal -Enclosed Bus. 2. ANSUUL 857 — Busways and Associated Fittings. 3. NEMA BU 1 — Busways. 4. NEMA AB 1 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall be a firm with at least ten (10) years of successful manufacturing experience on products similar to that required for this Project. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product data. 2. Dimensioned drawings of product. B. Installation, Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Installation procedures. 2. Torque specifications for joint and lug -in connections. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2625 13 - 1 Low Voltage Busways SECTION 26 25 13 LOW VOLTAGE BUSWAYS 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver equipment in factory -fabricated, water-resistant wrapping. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle equipment carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure, and finish. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Products without totally enclosed housing and/or use twist -lock connection for branch feeders are unacceptable. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D. B. General Electric. C. Cutler Hammer. D. Siemens. 2.03 HOUSING A. Housing shall be constructed of code gauge steel, and it shall be totally enclosed non- ventilated for protection against physical damage and dust accumulation. Provision of mounting rails shall be provided for attaching hangers at any point. Paint housings with two coats of enamel over rust -inhibiting primer. Protect hardware with corrosion -resistant plating. 2.04 BUS BARS A. Bars. Fabricate bars of 98 percent IACS conductivity copper. Silver plate contact surfaces. B. Joints. Provide captive hardware for bus bar joints. Single bolt construction is acceptable using high-strength steel bolts and Belleville washes to maintain proper pressure over a large contact surface area. Joints shall be designed such that access is required to only one side of the busway for tightening joint bolts. It shall be possible to remove any joint and busway section without disturbing adjacent busway lengths. C. Insulation. Insulate the bus bars along their entire length except at j oints and plug-in points. Provide insulation that is 221° F (Class A) minimum. D. Voltage Drop. Line -to -line voltage drop on feeder bus shall be less than 3.50 volts per 100 linear feet at rated current, with 0.9 pf and concentrated loading. Line -to -line voltage drop on plug-in bus shall be less than 2.75 volts per 100 linear feet at rated current, with 0.9 pf and distributed loading. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2625 13-2 Low Voltage Busways SECTION 26 25 13 LOW VOLTAGE BUSWAYS E. Minimum Short Circuit Rating. The bus bar shall be braced to withstand a short current of maximum rms (root mean square) symmetrical rating indicated by design drawings. 2.05 PLUG-IN UNITS A. Provide busway plug-in units of the types and ratings indicated. B. Construction. 1. Use only interchangeable plug-in units on busways. Units must be capable of withstanding short circuit current equal to the busway bracing at the point of contact with the busway without dislodging, welding or in any manner damaging the contact surfaces. 2. The switching mechanism of plug-in unit shall be totally enclosed by a housing that is fabricated of code gauge steel. The operating handle shall be designed for padlocking in the OFF position. Apply a finish to the housing consisting of two coats of enamel over a rust -inhibiting prime coat. 3. Plug-in unit shall make positive ground connection with the ground bus before the jaws make contact with the phase bars. Plug-in units shall be mechanically interlocked with the busway housing to prevent installation or removal of plug-in unit while the switch is in the ON position. 4. Covers of plug units shall have interlocks to prevent the cover from being opened when the switch is in the ON position. 5. Silver plate current carrying parts 2.06 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Compatibility. Provide fittings including elbows, cable, tap boxes, and tee which are the manufacturer's standard products designed specifically to be compatible with the busway provided. B. Expansion Fitting. Provide expansion fittings where busways cross building expansion joints and where runs exceed 200 feet in length. C. Provide splice plates, clamp -type hangers, and hardware for proper support of the busway throughout its length. Spring -support type hangers are unacceptable. 2.07 MARKING AND LISTING A. . The busways shall be marked in accordance with NEC 368. B. UL 857 - Busways and Associated Fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify dimensions at job site to ensure coordination of each busway with obstructions and approved routing. Submit fully dimensioned shop drawings indicating proposed routings, fittings and obtain formal approval from the Owner prior to start of fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2625 13-3 Low Voltage Busways SECTION 26 25 13 LOW VOLTAGE BUSWAYS B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Support the busways in accordance with NEC 368. Do not install supports so that joint is placed in tension, compression or torsion. D. Non -flexible metallic raceway shall be used for branch feeders fed from busways. Install and support raceway to meet the requirement of Section 26 05 33. E. Provide wall floor flanges and seal around openings to maintain desired fire -ratings. F. Provide a minimum 4 -inch -high concrete curb around all floor penetrations within a distance specified by NEC 368. G. Busway plug-in units shall be installed such that the center of the grip of the operating handle, when in its highest position, is not more than 6 ft. 7 in. above the floor or working platform. Where busway plug-in units are installed at an elevation that is higher than what is specified above, permanent working platforin or hook stick whichever is approved by the Owner, shall be provided. END OF SECTION 26 25 13 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2625 13-4 Low Voltage Busways SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements for wiring devices (wall switches, receptacles, device plate covers, wall dimmers). 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General -Purpose Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 2 - Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps. 3. NEMA WD 5 - Specific -Purpose Wiring Devices. 4. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 5. ANSUUL 20 - General Use Snap Switches. 6. ANSI/UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 7. ANSI/UL 943- Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's product data for all wiring devices and floor boxes. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide factory fabricated wiring devices in the type and electrical rating for the service indicated. Where type and grade are not indicated provide proper selection to correspond with branch circuit wiring and overcurrent protection. C. Attachment of wires to devices shall be by screw pressure under the head of binding screws. Arrangements depending on spring pressure or tension are not acceptable. All binding screws shall be brass or bronze. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262726-1 Wiring Devices SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall Dimmers: 1. Lutron. 2. Greengate 3. Leviton. 4. Other manufacturers as specifically approved in writing by Owner. B. Lighting Occupancy Sensors: 1. Wattstopper. 2. Greengate 3. Lutron 4. Other manufacturers as specifically approved in writing by Owner. 2.03 WALL SWITCHES A. Type: Quiet type, back and side wired switches as specified herein. B. Rating: 20 amperes, 120/277 volts. C. Listing: UL 20 D. Manufacturers: Provide devices in the color as specified herein. Type Pass & Seymour Arrow Hart Leviton S 20AC 1 1991 1221-2 S2 20AC2 1992 1222-2 S3 20AC3 1993 1223-2 S4 20AC4 1994 1224-2 *Provide color designation for designated use. 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Type: Hospital Grade, where identified on Drawings. Back and side wired receptacles, as specified herein. B. Rating: Scheduled on Drawings. C. Listing: UL 498. D. Provide devices in the color as specified herein. NEMA Confi rgu ation Pass & Seymour Arrow Hart Leviton 5-20R (Duplex) CR -20 AHCR20W CR20 5-20R (Single) TR5351 TRI 877B 5361 5-20R (Tamper Resistant) TR -20_ TRCR20B TBR20 GFCI 2097TR TRSGF20 GFWT2 *Provide color designation for designated use. E. All receptacles within six (6) feet of a water source such as sinks shall be a GFCl receptacle. Feed through to non-GFCI receptacles is not permitted. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262726-2 Wiring Devices SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 2.05 DEVICE PLATES A. Finished Office Areas: Nylon in color as selected by Architect. B. Exposed Boxes in Dry Interior Spaces: 1. Manufacture plates of heavy cadmium -plated sheet steel. 2. Edges of plates must be flush with edges of boxes. C. Other Areas: 1. Use weatherproof device plates. 2. Provide cast plates with gasketed spring door covers for protection of device. D. For outlets and switches, provide labeled nameplates listing power source and circuit number. Example: P10 for panel "P" circuit "10". Label to be tape type black letters on white for normal power and red on white for all generator/emergency circuits. E. Covers for outlets outdoors shall meet the requirements of latest NEC. 2.06 DEVICE COLOR A. All switches shall be white except as follows: Red switches shall be used on all equipment and circuits connected to emergency power. B. Normal power receptacles shall be white, and receptacles connected to the emergency electrical circuits shall be red. C. Isolated ground receptacles shall be orange. 2.07 WALL DIMMERS A. Wall dimmers shall be linear slide type equal to Lutron Nova Series. B. Dimmers shall be 600 watts minimum, incandescent, larger size as required to accommodate greater connected loads. 2.08 LIGHT OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Lighting occupancy sensors shall be installed as a functioning system per the Contract Documents and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Proper commissioning shall be completed prior to Substantial Completion. 2.09 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS A. Telecommunication outlets, boxes, sleeves and conduit are part of this Contract. B. Provide outlet boxes and 1 -inch conduit with connector and bushing to accessible location above the ceiling. C. Provide a pull string in each conduit and tie off pull string above ceiling. D. For floor outlets, provide 1 -inch conduit to accessible location above the ceiling on the floor served by the outlet. Cabling and devices by MDACC. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262726-3 Wiring Devices SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Contractor must examine the areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed and notify the Owner's Project Manager in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. B. Inspect devices for physical damage. C. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Wall switch and receptacle ground wiring shall terminate at the wiring device with an insulated tin-plated copper spade compression terminal. Select a spade terminal compatible with the wiring devices supplied so that device screw terminals can be torqued to the wiring device manufacturer's recommendations. D. Wall receptacles shall be installed with the ground pinhole in the up position, unless instructed otherwise by the Owner. E. The approximate location of switches and receptacles are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings, however, may not give complete and accurate information in regard to locations of such items. Determine exact locations by reference to the architectural Drawings and by actual measurements during construction of the building before rough -in, subject to the approval of the Owner's Project Manager. F. Install wall switches 48 inches above finished floor, OFF position down. G. Install wall dimmers 48 inches above floor; derate ganged dimmers as instructed by manufacturer; do not use common neutral. H. Where wainscot is near the 48 -inch level, install device in the wall below the top edge of the wainscot and as near the 48 -inch level as possible to provide the most pleasing appearance. Do not partially install devices in the wainscot and partially in the wall. I. Where shown the strike side of doors, install switches and dimmers not less than 2 inches and not more than 12 inches from door trim, but in all cases as close to the 2 -inch setback as possible. J. Verify all doors swings before rough -in and locate switches and dimmers on strike side of door wherever possible. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262726-4 Wiring Devices SECTION 26 27 26 'WIRING DEVICES K. Position the center of convenience, telephone, computer and TV outlets 18 inches above floor or 8 inches above countertops unless otherwise noted. Coordinate with equipment and architectural Drawings. Install outlets vertically on walls and horizontally above countertops. L. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 262726-5 Wiring Devices SECTION 26 28 17 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Shop Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements for disconnect switches, fusible and nonfusible. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. Federal Spec. W -S-865 - Switch, Box (Enclosed), Surface Mounted. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data. B. Submit dimensioned Shop Drawings and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver switches individually wrapped in factory -fabricated water-resistant type containers. B. Handle switches carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and finish. C. Store switches in a clean, dry space protected from weather. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. General Electric Company. B. Square D Company. C. Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2628 17 - 1 Motor and Circuit Disconnects SECTION 26 28 17 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS D. Siemens. 2.03 FABRICATED SWITCHES A. Depending upon the service indicated, use 250 or 600 volt switches, single throw, fusible, or nonfusible, horsepower rated, heavy duty, designed for locking in "ON" or "OFF" position, in code -gage steel cabinets. B. Use switches which have number of poles required, dependent upon phase serving equipment. C. Switches shall be NEMA 1 Underwriters' approved for duty shown. In wet locations, use NEMA 3R. Where exposed to weather in exterior applications, use NEMA Krylon, corrosion resistant type. NEMA 3R and NEMA Krylon switches shall have weatherproof threaded hubs for all conduit entries into switch. D. Use fuse clips that are rejecting type to accept Class RK or L fuses. E. Identify switches, as to equipment served, with engraved laminated phenolic name plates. Refer to Section 26 0100 for nameplate information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Install safety or disconnect switches for all electrical equipment, in accordance with the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association "Standard of Installation." D. For all equipment with motors larger than 1/8 horsepower, provide motor rated disconnect switches within sight of the motor. E. Disconnect switches for such equipment shall be mounted independent of the unit to allow for maintenance access. END OF SECTION 26 28 17 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2628 17-2 Motor and Circuit Disconnects SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for surge protective devices (SPDs) for the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation, switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching. B. The individual units shall be Listed and Labeled to UL Standard 1449 (Fourth Edition). Type 2 units shall be complimentary Listed under UL Standard 1283. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section 26 24 13: Switchboards B. Section 26 24 16: Panelboards 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. UL 1449 (Fourth Edition) 2. UL 1283 3. NEMA LS 1 4. ANSUIEEE C62.41 5. ANSI/IEEE C62.45 6. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions shall be submitted for engineer's review. B. Provide actual let through voltage test data for both the ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 Category C (high) and Category B waveforms, tested in accordance with ANSUIEEE C62.45. Independent test results (not in-house tests) are preferred. C. Provide spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL -STD -220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying the devices noise attenuation exceeds 50 dB at 100 kHz. D. If a retrofit (surface) mounted unit is required, submit electrical/mechanical drawings showing unit dimensions, weights, installation details, and wiring configuration. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unit operating voltage: refer to drawings for voltage, phase(s) and unit configuration. B. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) shall be greater than 115% of the nominal system operating voltage. C. Protection Modes shall encompass all ten (10), modes (line -neutral, line -ground, neutral - .ground) in wye or high -leg delta configurations, and all six (6) modes in delta or single- phase configurations. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-1 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS Q E. F. G on The maximum UL 1449 VPR for the device must not exceed the followine: Modes 208Y/120V 480Y/277V 120/240V 10 240/120V 30 HLD 30 30 1,100V L -N (external type) L -N, L -G, N -G 700V 1,200V 700V 700V (IOOOV H -N) L -L 1,200V 2,000V 1,200V 1,200V (1,500V H- L) Let Through Voltage based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C (high) waveforms 20kV, IOkA combination wave) shall be less than: Modes 208Y/120V 480Y/277V L -N (internal type) 650V 1,100V L -N (external type) 1,100V 1,700V Let Through Voltage based on ANSUIEEE C62.41.2 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category B waveforms (6kV, 500A, IOOkHz rin�-,wave) shall be less than: Modes 208Y/120V 480Y/277V L -N (internal type) 450V 850V L -N (external type) 650V 1,OOOV Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 20,000 ANSUIEEE C62.41.2 Category C (high) transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 5%. UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current Rating (In): 20 kA I. Surge Current Capacity based on an 8x20 microsecond waveform shall not be less than: 1. Building or Service Entrance Panelboards/Switchboards — 240 kA per phase, 120 kA/mode 2. Branch or Distribution Panelboards, 400 amps or greater — 160 kA per phase, 80 kA per mode 3. Branch Panelboards, less than 400 amps — 120 kA per phase, 60 kA per mode 2.02 PRODUCT DESIGN A. SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance OCPD shall be Type 1 SPDs. SPDs installed on the load side of the service entrance OCPD shall be either Type 1 or Type 2 SPDs. Coordinate location with equipment specifications and power systems drawings. B. The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating SPD modules which do not provide a balanced impedance path to each MOV shall not be acceptable C. Units shall have modular design with field -replaceable modules, one module per phase, minimum. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-2 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS D. Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be at least 50 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL -STD - 220A insertion loss test method. The unit shall be complimentary listed to UL 1283. E. No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors and compression fittings. F. Each unit shall be equipped with overcurrent fusing. All protection modes (including Neutral to Ground) shall be internally fused at the component level with the fuses allowing the suppressor's maximum rated transient current to pass through the suppressor without fuse operation. If the I2t characteristic is exceeded, the fusing shall be capable of opening and clear both high and low impedance fault conditions. The fusing shall be capable of interrupting up to 200 kA symmetrical fault current with 480 VAC applied. Conductor level fuses or circuit breakers internal or external of the SPD will not be acceptable. This engineer requires submittal documentation of the proper fuse coordination of actual fault tests from a nationally recognized testing laboratory for product pre -approval (before bids). G. Each unit shall provide the following three levels of monitoring: 1. Continuous monitoring of fusing system. 2. Internal infrared sensor system for monitoring all MOVs (including neutral to ground). The system must be capable of identifying open circuit failures not monitored by conventional fusing systems. 3. Thermal detection circuit shall monitor for overheating in all modes due to thermal runaway. H. The manufacturer shall provide a full ten (10) year warranty from the date of shipment against any SPD component failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or local electrical codes. I. The unit must be equipped with an audible alarm and transient event counter. J. The SPD device must include contacts (N.O. and N.C.) for remote annunciation of unit status. The remote alarm shall change state if any of the three monitoring systems detect a fault condition. K. Each suppression unit shall incorporate an integral test feature which verifies the operational integrity of the unit's monitoring system. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Schneider Electric, Eaton Electrical, Advanced Protection Technologies, Emerson Network Power / Liebert, Leviton, or General Electric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Install one primary suppressor within the switchboard at each utility service entrance to the facility, according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. The suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the service entrance. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-3 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS C. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be kept short (12 inches maximum), straight (no sharp bends), and twisted together to reduce impedance. D. The suppressor's ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground. 3.02 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION PANELS A. Install panelboards as required and according to manufacturer's recommendations. The SPD shall be integrated into panelboards designated as "surge -protected". The panelboard door shall close and latch fully. Any work required to meet this requirement shall be exclusively the responsibility of the manufacturer of the panel/SPD assembly. B. SPD devices shall be mounted directly to the panel's main phase buses. C. Neutral and ground shall not be bonded together at secondary panelboard locations. 3.03 RETROFIT APPLICATIONS . A. Devices shall be mounted external of the switchboard or panelboard. B. Maximum conductor lead length between breaker and suppressor shall not exceed 14 inches. The suppressing device shall be directly nippled to side or bottom of the switchboard/panelboard. C. Provide a 30 -amp breaker to feed the SPD. Confirm rating with manufacturer's installation recommendation. 3.04 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 3.05 SUMMARY A. These Specifications describe the requirements for an electrical transient surge suppression filter system integrating both transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) and electrical high frequency noise filtering for "High Exposure", "Medium Exposure", and "Low Exposure" locations as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991. B. The unit shall be designed for parallel connection to the facility's wiring system. The suppression filter system shall be designed and manufactured in the USA by a qualified manufacturer of suppression filter system equipment. The qualified manufacturer shall have been engaged in the commercial design and manufacture of such products for a minimum of five (5) years. 3.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-4 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ANSUIEEE C62.41-1991 and C62.45-1992. 2. ANSUIEEE C62.1 and C62.11. 3. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA LS1-1992). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70 [NEC], 75, and 78). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and 1283). 7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 489 and UL 198). D. The unit shall be UL 1449 Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter. 3.07 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide data showing UL1449 product listing. Submit certified documentation of applicable Location Category Testing in full compliance with NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraphs 2.2. 10 and 3.10. B. Record Documents: 1. Provide Drawings that show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. 2. Provide certified documentation of the unit's Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity based on ANSUIEEE C62.41-1991 Standards. 3. Provide certified documentation of the unit's Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity Testing based on ANSUIEEE C62.45-1987 Standards. 4. The unit shall include a Diagnostic Signature Card listing factory -established benchmark suppression voltage values for all modes of protection. The suppression voltage values shall be established during final production line testing utilizing the DTS-2 Diagnostic Test Set. This Diagnostic Signature Card shall provide space for subsequent field-testing allowing comparison of the initial factory benchmark testing with subsequent field-testing suppression voltage values. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide an equipment manual that details the installation, operation and maintenance instructions for the specified unit. 2. Provide a list of customer -replaceable spare parts. All spare parts shall be quickly and easily field -replaceable. 3.08 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a ten (10) year limited warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions. B. Warranty shall commence after the Owner has accepted the testing results and taken possession of the equipment. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-5 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS PART4-PRODUCTS 4.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 4.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Current Technology. High Exposure TVSS - Model SEL250, Medium Exposure TVSS — Model TG150, Low Exposure TVSS — Model Transguard TG80. B. Liebert. C. Leviton 4.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Storage Temperature: Storage temperature range: -40 degrees to +185 degrees F. B. Operating Temperature: Operating temperature range: -40 degrees to +140 degrees F. C. Relative Humidity: Reliable operation with 5 percent to 99 percent non -condensing relative humidity. D. Operating Altitude: Capable operation up to 13,000 feet above sea level. E. Audible Noise: The unit shall not generate any audible noise. F. Magnetic Fields: No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated. Unit shall be capable of use in computer rooms without danger to data storage systems or devices. 4.04 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unit Operating Voltage shall be as shown on Drawings. B. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) shall be greater than 115 percent of nominal voltage. C. Operating Frequency: Operating frequency range shall be 47 to 63 Hz. D. Protection Modes: All protected modes are defined per NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraph 2.2.7. Following IEEE Standard 1100-1992, Section 9.11.2 recommendations, units shall provide protection in all modes. WYE configured system shall provide Line -to -Neutral, Line -to -Ground, Line -to -Line and Neutral -to -Ground protection. DELTA configured systems shall provide Line -to -Line protection. Line -to -Line and Line -to -Ground protection shall be provided for all corner grounded DELTA systems. E. Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity: The rated single pulse surge current capacity, in amps, for each mode of protection of the unit shall be no less than as follows and in accordance with UL 1449: 1. High Exposure TVSS Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity: L -N L -G N -G L -L 250,000 A 250,000 A 250,000 A 250,000 A IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-6 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 2. Medium Exposure TVSS Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity: L -N L -G N -G L -L 150,000 A 150,000 A 150,000 A 150,000 A 3. Low Exposure TVSS Rated Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity: L -N L -G N -G L -L 80,000 A 80,000 A 80,000 A 80,000 A F. Tested Single Pulse Surge Current Capacity: In compliance with NEMA LS 1-1992, paragraphs 2.2.7, 2.2.9 and 3.4.8. 1. The test shall include an ANSUIEEE C62.41-1991 Category C1 surge defined as a 1.2 X 50 µ sec, 6000V open circuit voltage waveform and an 8 X 20 µ sec, 3000A short circuit current wavefonn to benchmark the unit's suppression voltage, followed by a single pulse surge of maximum rated surge current (for units rated over 200,000A per mode, components or sub -assemblies are tested) magnitude with an approximated 8 X 20 µ sec waveform. 2. To complete the test, another Category C 1 surge shall be applied to verify the unit's survival. Survival is achieved if the suppression voltage measured from the two category C 1 surges does not vary by more than 10 percent. G. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: Per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992, all suppression filter systems shall be repetitive surge current capacity tested in every mode utilizing a 1.2 x 50 µ sec, 20 KV open circuit voltage, 8 x 20 µ sec, 10 KA short circuit current Category C3 bi-wave at one minute intervals without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10 percent deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current. 1. High Exposure TVSS Repetitive Surge Current Capacity -Number of Impulses: Medium Exposure TVSS Repetitive Surge Current Capacity -Number of Impulses: L -L L -N L -G N -G >5,500 >5,500 >5,500 >5,500 Low Exposure TVSS Repetitive Surge Current Capacity -Number of Impulses: L -L I L -N L -L I L -N I L -G I N -G >3,500 >12,000 1 >12,000 1 >12,000 1 >12,000 Medium Exposure TVSS Repetitive Surge Current Capacity -Number of Impulses: L -L L -N L -G N -G >5,500 >5,500 >5,500 >5,500 Low Exposure TVSS Repetitive Surge Current Capacity -Number of Impulses: L -L I L -N L_ -G N -G >3,500 1 >3,500 >3,500 >3,500 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-7 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS H. NEMA LSI -1992 Clamping (Let -Through) Voltage Data. Maximum clamping (Let Through) voltages for units with an integral fused disconnect are as follows: 1. High Exposure TVSS With Fused Disconnect: System Voltage Mode B3 Ringwave 133/C1 C3 120/240 L -N 350 425 750 120/208 L -G 425 475 800 N -G 325 450 725 L -L 475 825 1225 277480 L -N 575 875 1200 L -G 850 875 1200 N -G 675 875 1200 FL -L 1 725 1 1700 2175 2. Medium Exposure TVSS With Fused Disconnect: System Voltage Mode B3 Ringwave 133/C1 C3 120/240 L -N 350 425 725 120/208 L -G 425 425 725 N -G 375 425 700 L -L 450 825 1150 277480 L -N 550 850 1150 L -G 875 850 1150 N -G 700 850 1150 FL -L 725 1650 2100 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-8 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 3. Low Exposure TVSS With Fused Disconnect: System Voltage Mode B3 Ringwave B3/C1 C3 120/240 L -N 300 400 550 120/208 L -G 400 400 600 N -G 325 475 800 L -L 425 725 900 277480 L -N 500 875 1050 L -G 825 825 1025 N -G 650 875 1200 L -L 700 1625 1825 I. UL1449 Ratings: All suppression filter system products are UL1449 rated and listed. High Frequency Extended Range Power Filter: EMI -RFI noise rejection or attenuation values are in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS -1-1992, paragraphs 2.2.11 and 3.11. High Exposure TVSS Attenuation Frequency Insertion Loss (dB) 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz 100 MHz 41 31 36 53 Medium Exposure TVSS Attenuation Frequency Insertion Loss (dB) 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz 100 MHz 44 33 36 53 Low Exposure TVSS Attenuation Frequency Insertion Loss (dB) 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz 100 MHz 50 37 38 53 Note: Standardized insertion loss data obtained utilizing MIL-STD-E220A 50 ohm insertion loss methodology. K. The Suppression Filter System shall function in conjunction with other suppression filter devices of the same manufacturer via coordinated filters within the facility -wide suppression filter system that provide minimum noise attenuation as follows: 1. High, Medium, and Low Exposure TVSS: Attenuation Fre uency Insertion Loss (dB) 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz 100 MHz 83 68 67 84 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-9 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS a. Note: Standardized insertion loss data obtained utilizing MIL-STD-E220A 50 ohm insertion loss methodology, based on a minimum of 100 ft. of #4 AWG conductor between the two devices. L. Overcurrent Protection: The unit shall be installed with coordinated UL 489 or UL 198 listed or recognized overcurrent protection devices. Suppression filter systems that utilize fusing as overcurrent protection shall incorporate non -encapsulated, field -replaceable fuses. 4.05 HIGH PERFORMANCE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM A. Units shall include an engineered solid-state high performance suppression system utilizing a predetermined number of selenium cells and arrays of non-linear voltage dependent metal oxide varistors with similar operating characteristics. B. The suppression system components shall optimally share surge currents in a seamless, low -stress manner assuring maximum performance and proven reliability. The suppression system shall not utilize gas tubes, spark gaps, silicon avalanche diodes or other components which might short or crowbar the line, thus leading to interruption of normal power flow to or system upset of connected loads. The suppression system shall not incorporate non -field replaceable encapsulated fusing or any other components that may degrade performance or long-term reliability of the suppression system. Suppression system shall reduce transient levels and provide protection for sensitive electronics susceptible to catastrophic or long-term damage. Clamp voltages are specified herein. C. The unit shall include a high frequency extended range power filter and shall be UL 1283 listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter. The filter shall reduce fast rise -time, high frequency, error -producing transients and electrical line noise to harmless levels, thus eliminating disturbances, which may lead to electronic system upset. The filter shall provide minimum noise attenuation values as specified herein. D. All internal wiring associated with the suppression filter system and subject to surge currents shall utilize low -impedance copper bus bar. For internal wiring, minimum wire size is shown in table below. All internal connections associated with the suppression filter system and subject to surge currents shall be made with compression or mechanical solderless-type lugs and shall be bolted to the bus bars in order to reduce overall system impedance. No plug-in component modules, quick -disconnect terminals, non -field replaceable fusing or printed circuit boards shall be used in surge current -carrying paths. 1. High and Medium Exposure TVSS Minimum Wire Size: a. #2 AWG Copper. 2. Low Exposure TVSS Minimum Wire Size: a. #8 AWG Copper. 4.06 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. The unit shall include mechanical or compression lugs for each phase, neutral and ground, if applicable. Recommended wire size ranee is as follows: Phase Neutral Ground High Exposure TVSS: #2-1/0 AWG Copper #2-1/0 AWG Copper #2-1/0 AWG Copper Low and Medium Exposure TVSS: #842 AWG Copper 1 #842 AWG Copper #842 AWG Copper IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13- 10 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 4.07 UNIT STATUS INDICATORS A. The unit shall include long -life, solid state, externally visible status indicators that monitor the on-line status of each phase of the unit. 4.08 INTEGRAL TEST POINT A. The unit shall incorporate an integral test point allowing easy off-line diagnostic testing verifying the operational integrity of the unit's suppression filter system. B. Field-testing shall permit proactive testing to ensure performance and long -tern reliability. C. Testing shall include injection of an impulse into the off-line suppression filter system to verify the suppression performance values established at final factory testing and recorded on the Diagnostic Signature Card. D. Indicator lights monitoring fuse condition or power available which inform the user of failure after the fact do not meet the intent of this Specification. 4.09 ENCLOSURE A. Standard unit shall be supplied in a NEMA 4 metallic enclosure. 4.10 FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH A. Units shall include an integral fused and safety interlocked disconnect switch with an externally mounted manual operator. 1. The switch shall disconnect all ungrounded circuit conductors from the distribution system to enable testing and maintenance without interruption of power to the facility's distribution system. 2. The switch shall be rated for 600 Vac. 3. Each current -carrying ungrounded circuit conductor connected to the facility's distribution system shall be individually fused with 200,000 AIC rated class J fuses in order to provide maximum fault current protection. B. Units shall include a battery -powered audible alarm that detects and provides notification of any single or multiple phase failure of the suppression filter system. The unit shall also include a status indicator for each phase that extinguishes to indicate a failure mode and an LED that flashes to indicate any alarm condition. 1. The alarm shall have a silence switch and a test switch for ensuring positive function and shall have an alarm disable LED that illuminates when the alarm is disabled. 2. The monitoring unit shall have an easily replaceable, commonly available battery for backup to ensure audible alarm function in the event of a total power failure. 3. The unit shall have a battery backup monitor light, which shall illuminate when the battery requires replacement. 4. To monitor on-line status, the monitoring package shall also include two sets of form C dry contacts (normally open or normally closed) to facilitate connection to a building management system. 5. The contacts shall be normally open or normally closed and shall change state upon the failure of the suppression system or power loss in any combination of all three phases. 6. The unit for WYE distribution systems with a neutral shall include two (2) solid- state eight (8) digit liquid crystal displays that discriminate between and exhibit both common mode (L -G) and normal mode (L -N) disturbances. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13 - 11 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 7. The unit for DELTA distribution systems shall include one (1) solid state eight (8) digit liquid crystal display that exhibits normal mode (L -L) disturbances. 8. The Display Event Counters shall utilize self-contained lithium batteries with a nominal life of ten (10) years. 9. Reset function shall be secure and remotely located. 4.11 DIAGNOSTIC TEST SET A. The Diagnostic Test Set shall be self-contained and portable and shall provide complete assurance of suppression capability without stressing the suppression system or posing detriment to continued operation. B. Testing shall be achieved by injecting a high voltage low current transient to test the function of each mode of the suppression filter system. C. Use of a low current transient shall ensure there is no damage or degradation to the suppression filter system. PART 5 - EXECUTION 5.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Connect unit to electrical system with 100 amp, 3 -pole circuit breaker. 5.02 TESTING A. Each unit shall be factory tested at the applicable MCOV to assure proper field operation. B. Each unit shall be thoroughly factory tested before shipment. Testing of each unit shall include but shall not be limited to UL manufacturing and production -line tests, quality assurance checks, MCOV and clamping voltage verification tests. C. Upon completion of installation, a factory -certified local service technician shall provide testing services. The following tests shall be performed: 1. Voltage measurements from Line -to -Ground, Line -to -Neutral, Line -to -Line and Neutral -to -Ground (no neutral in DELTA configurations) at the time of the testing procedure. 2. Impulse injection to verify the system suppression voltage tolerances for all suppression paths. Impulse testing shall be completed while the unit is off-line to isolate the unit from the distribution system. D. Test results should be recorded and compared to factory benchmark test parameters supplied with each individual unit. A copy of the Start-up test results and the factory benchmark testing results shall be supplied to the Engineer and the Owner for confirmation of proper suppression filter system junction. In addition, the integrity of the neutral -ground bond should be verified through testing and visual inspection. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-12 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 5.03 APPLICATION A. The following matrix indicates types of transient voltage surge exposures based on the power distribution system. For actual TVSS installation locations, refer to the Drawings. High Exposure Medium Exposure Low Exposure b U v� �? X � a � Q X w M X Cz �a 3 w o .y ,n W N c� j Q U 0 U � LT] b U v� �? X X X Q X X X bon 3 3 a N Y U U Q U 0 U � N c� • y, i.w O i..i G� s..�' X X X X X X X X END OF SECTION 26 43 13 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 2643 13-13 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies requirements for indoor and outdoor lighting fixtures, exit signs, lamps and ballasts. 1.03 FIXTURE SCHEDULE: A. No substitutions will be accepted after bids are received. The lighting equipment specified herein has been carefully chosen for its ability to meet the luminous performance requirements of this project. Substitutions likely will be unable to meet all of the same criteria as specified equipment. B. When only one manufacturer is listed within the description of the luminaire, the design engineering or architectural aesthetics will not allow substitution of other manufacturer. C. When two or more manufacturers and/or the words "or equivalent" appear within the fixture description, the Contractor may elect to submit to Engineer a substitute fixture for review. All submittals must be made within 10 (ten) days prior to the bid date to provide ample time for review and to issue an addendum incorporating the acceptable substitution(s). D. Substitution submittals shall consist of a physical description, dimensioned drawing and complete photometric and electric data of the proposed lamp and luminaire. Working samples of lamp and luminaire substitutions may also be supplied for visual check of finish and operating characteristics per architect/engineer's request. Photometric reports must list the actual candela values for the luminaire's distribution in at least three planes. Candela curves, footcandle and lumen tables and iso -footcandle contours are not acceptable. Contractor will be responsible for all costs (engineering time, manufacturer's costs, distributor costs, etc.) incurred to replace equipment not approved if the distributor, manufacturers rep., or subcontractor makes substitutions. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 2. NEMA WD - General -Purpose Wiring Devices. 3. ANSI C 81: Electric Lamp Bases and Holders 4. ANSI D 82: Lamp Ballasts IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 265100-1 Lighting Fixtures SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES 5. IESNA LM -79: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid -State Lighting Products 6. IESNA LM -80: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources 7. IESNA TM -21: Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources 8. UL 57: Electric Lighting Fixtures 9. UL 496: Edison -Base Lampholders 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit a 3 -ring binder with manufacturer's data on lighting fixtures in booklet form, with a separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by luminaire "type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp product data shall accompany fixture submittals. B. Record Documents: 1. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability for each fixture, assembled by luminaire type in alphabetical order. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. All interior lighting units shall be fully warranted against defective workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from date of on-site energization (substantial completion date). 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect lighting fixtures and work against dirt, water or mechanical damage before, during, and after installation. Damage prior to final acceptance shall satisfactorily be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner. B. Deliver lighting fixtures individually wrapped in factory -fabricated fiberboard type containers. Parabolic louvers shall be shipped in thermally sealed polyethylene wrapper. C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent breakage, denting and scoring the fixture finish. Do not install damaged lighting fixtures. D. Store product in a clean, dry space protected from weather. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Lighting fixtures and accessories shall comply with the design and functional requirements of the Project. Design characteristics shall be as noted in manufacturer's submittal data. C. Provide lighting fixtures of the size, type and rating as scheduled on drawings, complete with, but not limited to, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, and wiring. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 265100-2 Lighting Fixtures SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES D. Fixture catalog numbers only indicate type and style. Provide each fixture complete with proper fixture trim, levelers, mounting brackets, flanges, plaster rings, glassware, stepdown transformers and accessories for complete installation as required for type of ceiling, room finish schedules and voltages available. E. All plastic diffusers used in lighting fixtures shall be manufactured of 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic and shall carry State Fire Marshal approval affidavit. F. Provide approved enclosures where recessed in fire rated ceilings. G. Provide gaskets as required to prevent light spill between frames and ceilings. H. Provide "damp" or "wet" labels on all fixtures installed outdoors or in moist areas. Provide continuity of ground on all fixtures used as raceways and mounted end to end. 2.02 LAMPS A. Provide lamps in all fixtures and lamp outlets of proper type voltage, color temperature, and wattage required for fixtures as indicated in Fixture Schedule or as indicated on Drawings. B. All fluorescent lamps shall be General Electric, Sylvania, or Philips. C. All HID lamps shall be General Electric, Sylvania, Venture, EYE, or Philips. D. All incandescent and quartz lamps shall be General Electric, Sylvania, Ushio, or Philips. E. Provide a typewritten label for each fixture with lamp ordering code number for future maintenance. Locate the label so that it cannot be seen from normal viewing angles. F. Contractor shall provide 5% replacement lamps of all lamp types to the Owner upon completion of the job. 2.03 LED FIXTURES A. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be provided as indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedule within a tolerance of+/- 80.33°F B. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be a minimum of 80 for interior fixture types. Based on IESNA LM -79 testing. C. All LED fixtures shall have rated lumen maintenance of at least 50,000 hours to 70% lumen maintenance. Tested per IESNA LM -80 and projected per IESNA TM -21. D. The LED fixtures at specified operating voltage shall have a power factor not less than 0.90. The Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) shall be:5 20%. E. All LED fixtures, including the driver component, shall be provided with a 5 -year warranty, minimum. F. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule for other requirements. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 265100-3 Lighting Fixtures SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Emergency lighting systems shall be as indicated on Drawings, complete with all equipment, including fixtures, lamps, batteries, conduit, boxes and wiring. B. This equipment is to provide instantaneous emergency lighting in the event of a power failure: 1. By means of direct bypass or transfer to the emergency power system where indicated on the drawings. 2. By means of batteries with solid-state controls where indicated on the drawings. 2.05 EXIT LIGHTING A. Exit light system shall be as indicated on Drawings. B. Equipment shall be complete with L.E.D. lamps, 4 watts maximum. C. Where indicated as such, provide integral battery pack, and charge for illumination under power failure conditions. D. Exit signs with integral emergency battery packs shall have integral self-diagnostic circuitry and bi-color status indicator (multiple flash rates). E. Equipment shall meet OSHA, NFPA, and NEC illumination standards. F. Equipment shall carry the "Energy Star" approval rating as defined by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and U.S. Department of Energy. 3 2.06 ENVIRONMENTAL ROOMS AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Enclosures shall be complete with gaskets to form weatherproof seal and UL approved for wet locations. B. Provide low temperature ballasts with reliable starting to 0 degrees F. C. In -ground or buried fixture and ballast systems are not approved for use. D. Exterior fixtures shall match Owner's existing style and types, particularly bollard, pole - top, parking garage, soffit, roadway, perimeter area lights and landscaping types. Exterior fixtures shall be compatible with Texas Medical Center (TMC) standards as applicable. 2.07 EMERGENCY EXIT SIGNS A. Provide exit signs with red LED illumination. B. Exit signs shall have covers that are composed of a black face and body, smooth red diffusion material, with 6 inch -high red letters on black background, directional arrows as indicated. Individual LED's shall not be visible through the diffusion material. C. Fixtures shall have minimum five (5) year warranty. D. Fixtures shall be UL924 and Energy Star compliant. E. Exit signs shall be rated for dual voltage; 120/277. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 265100-4 Lighting Fixtures SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Examine architectural and other pertinent details and confirm with general and ceiling and wall construction and finish being installed. B. Lighting fixture catalog numbers and mounting indicated on the electrical Drawings are for general bidding information only. C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine what suspension or mounting method is required and provide fixtures complete with all trim, flanges, brackets, levelers, etc. required for mounting at the location indicated. 3.02 BASIC INSTALLATION METHODS AND MATERIALS A. General: 1. Install outlets, surface mounted, recessed or semi -recessed fixtures to maintain the alignment, spacings, layout, and general arrangement indicated on the Drawings; obtain approval of Engineer for all changes in layout required to avoid interferences with other trades. B. Coordination: 1. Work incorporating with ceiling trades in locating and framing recessed fixtures in acoustical tile pattern or grid system to conform to layout. 2. Inform affected trades of the location and framing details necessary for the installation of flush fixtures and delivery of all framing rings of these fixtures that become a part of the ceiling construction. 3. Before equipment is ordered, electrical contractor to review luminaire and ceiling mechanical compatibility in each area and verify luminaire ordering code numbers with the ceiling system shown on the drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for all fixture quantities, lengths, and clearances required and shall inform the Architect of the job conditions at variance with the fixture(s) specified or detailed which affect installation or location. 4. The contractor shall be responsible for contacting Engineer regarding the proper interpretation of all information indicated on the lighting layout, fixture schedule, fixture cuts, details and specifications. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Contractor are to review and coordinate lighting locations in relationship to mechanical systems to minimize conflicts prior to installation. Electrical Contractor is to submit a written memo with minutes of these meetings to both the Architect and Engineer. C. Installation: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings. 2. Install fixtures in a workmanlike manner. Install outlets, surface -mounted, recessed or semi -recessed fixtures to maintain the alignment, spacings, layout and general arrangement shown on the Plans; obtain approval of Architect/Engineer for any changes in layout required to avoid interferences with other trades. Surface fixtures shall be securely mounted and shall not rotate on single box connections. Additional fastening shall be installed by the Contractor, if necessary, to secure fixture. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 265100.-5 Lighting Fixtures SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES 3. Deliver lamps to the project in the original cartons and install in the fixtures just prior to the completion of the project. At the option of the Contractor, the permanent fixtures, installed as part of the contract, may be lamped and used for construction lighting, however, all burned out incandescent lamps shall be replaced prior to occupancy and all fluorescent, H.I.D. or quartz lamps, failing within three months after occupancy, shall be replaced by the Electrical Contractor. 4. Aim adjustable lighting fixtures as directed by the Architect/ Engineer and, if necessary, adjust at night time. 5. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light tight manner. D. Mounting and Supports: 1. Fixtures shall be securely mounted to elements of the building structure or to suspended ceiling systems such that said fixture will be square, plumb, and rigid; will not fall or sag; and will not cause the suspended ceiling system to sag. 2. Furnish and install all additional means necessary to support lighting fixtures that would put excessive stress on the ceiling system. 3. Provide support from the structural system above where H.I.D. fixtures are recessed in suspended ceilings. 4. Surface mounted or suspended fixtures shall be rigidly supported from the structural system above. 5. Where lighting fixtures are indicated for installation in continuous rows, insure that the installation results in a uniform and continuous straight row without vertical or horizontal variation, with lighting fixtures installed end to end. (Maximum of 6" at end of runs.) 6. Installation of such supports for indirect lineal lighting systems shall be coordinated with on-site ceiling installation contractor. 7. Additional structural support above the ceiling shall be provided to transfer vertical loads to building structure above. Provide additional structure above fixture suspension points if building structure is not immediately above, to comply with fleet angle requirements. Support shall consist of at least one of the following: a. minimum 1/4" dia. threaded rod b. suspended ceiling support wire, ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre -stretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, not less than 12 gauge (one within 5 degrees of vertical, or two at maximum 45 -degree fleet angle) C. aircraft cable suspension system approved by Engineer 8. Support tie wires used for fixture support shall be identified with a suitable and durable means (tag, paint, etc.) per NEC requirements. E. Emergency systems raceway and hook-up 1. Circuit wiring for the emergency systems shall be installed in separate raceway and kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment. F. Testing 1. After completion of the exit light and emergency light system, the Electrical trades shall test the various systems and submit written reports of findings. 2. Testing shall be as follows: Turn off the normal power to the areas covered by emergency lighting equipment and test emergency lighting and exit lights for 1- 1/2 hours. Check intensity, aiming and recharging after use. 3. Replace all burned out incandescent and dimmed lamps. IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Corners 265100-6 Lighting Fixtures SECTION 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES 3.03 CLEANING A. At project completion, before final approval: 1. Clean the interior of all fixtures, all lens and lamps. 2. For surface, pendant hung, and/or chain hung fixtures, clean exterior of fixture(s). END OF SECTION 26 51 00 IRC Admin Complex North County Offices at Sebastian Comers 265100-7 Lighting Fixtures